diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:48:03 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-15 04:48:03 -0700 |
| commit | 4b7cccd0fda6521d26202488ced9d0741c39fde4 (patch) | |
| tree | c03e05c26c4e770f17ad6efb3e0d8592b4886e44 | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16048-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 440461 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16048-h/16048-h.htm | 9015 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16048-h/images/image001.jpg | bin | 0 -> 68320 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16048-h/images/image002.jpg | bin | 0 -> 46851 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16048-h/images/image003.jpg | bin | 0 -> 60235 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16048-h/images/image004.jpg | bin | 0 -> 46488 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16048-h/images/image005.jpg | bin | 0 -> 69069 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16048-h/images/image1.png | bin | 0 -> 26898 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16048.txt | 6661 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16048.zip | bin | 0 -> 114791 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
13 files changed, 15692 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/16048-h.zip b/16048-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..56c5379 --- /dev/null +++ b/16048-h.zip diff --git a/16048-h/16048-h.htm b/16048-h/16048-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c55929c --- /dev/null +++ b/16048-h/16048-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,9015 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> + +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> + <head> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" /> + <title> + The Project Gutenberg eBook of Troop One Of The Labrador, by Dillon Wallace. + </title> + <style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[ XML blockout */ +<!-- + p { margin-top: .75em; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .75em; + } + h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; + } + hr { width: 65%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + clear: both; + } + + body{margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; + } + + .blockquot{margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 10%;} + .pagenum {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: smaller; text-align: right;} /* page numbers */ + + .center {text-align: center;} + .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + + .caption {font-weight: bold;} + + .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;} + + ul.TOC { list-style-type: none; + position: relative; + width: 85%; } + + ul.LOI { list-style-type: none; + position: relative; + width: 85%; } + + span.ralign { position: absolute; right: 0; top: auto;} + // --> + /* XML end ]]>*/ + </style> + </head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Troop One of the Labrador, by Dillon Wallace + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Troop One of the Labrador + +Author: Dillon Wallace + +Release Date: June 13, 2005 [EBook #16048] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TROOP ONE OF THE LABRADOR *** + + + + +Produced by Wallace McLean, Diane Monico, and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net. + + + + + + +</pre> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + +<p class="figcenter" style="width: 373px;"> +<img src="images/image1.png" width="373" height="600" alt="TROOP ONE OF THE LABRADOR" title="TROOP ONE OF THE LABRADOR" /> +</p> + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + +<p><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1"></a></p> +<h1>TROOP ONE OF THE LABRADOR</h1> + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + + +<h2><i>The Talbot Baines Series</i></h2><p><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2"></a></p> + +<p class="center">With fine attractive new wrappers</p> + +<p class="center"> +<span class="smcap">The Fifth Form At St. Dominic's.</span> By Talbot Baines Reed<br /> +<span class="smcap">The Adventures Of A Three-guinea Watch.</span> By Talbot Baines Reed<br /> +<span class="smcap">The Cock-house At Fellsgarth.</span> By Talbot Baines Reed<br /> +<span class="smcap">A Dog With A Bad Name.</span> By Talbot Baines Reed<br /> +<span class="smcap">The Master Of The Shell.</span> By Talbot Baines Reed<br /> +<span class="smcap">The School Ghost, And Boycotted.</span> By Talbot Baines Reed<br /> +<span class="smcap">The Silver Shoe.</span> By Major Charles Gilson<br /> +<span class="smcap">The Treasure Of Tregudda.</span> By Argyll Saxby<br /> +<span class="smcap">The Two Captains Of Tuxford.</span> By Frank Elias<br /> +<span class="smcap">The Riders From The Sea.</span> By G. Godfray Sellick<br /> +<span class="smcap">A Son Of The Dogger.</span> By Walter Wood<br /> +<span class="smcap">A Fifth Form Mystery.</span> By Harold Avery<br /> +<span class="smcap">A Scout Of The '45.</span> By E. Charles Vivian<br /> +<span class="smcap">From Slum To Quarter-deck.</span> By Gordon Stables<br /> +<span class="smcap">Comrades Under Canvas.</span> By F.P. Gibbon</p> + +<p class="center">(<i>For Complete List see Catalogue</i>)</p> + +<p class="center"><small>OF All BOOKSELLERS</small></p> + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + + +<p><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3"></a></p> +<p class="figcenter" style="width: 752px;"> +<img src="images/image001.jpg" width="752" height="500" alt="IT WAS DR. JOE BEYOND A DOUBT!" title="IT WAS DR. JOE BEYOND A DOUBT!" /> +<span class="caption">IT WAS DR. JOE BEYOND A DOUBT!</span></p> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + +<p><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4"></a></p> +<h1>TROOP ONE OF THE +LABRADOR<br /><br /><br /><br /></h1> + +<h3>BY</h3> + +<h2>DILLON WALLACE</h2> + +<p class="center">AUTHOR OF "GRIT-A-PLENTY," "THE RAGGED<br /> +INLET GUARDS," ETC., ETC.<br /><br /><br /><br /><br /><br /></p> + + +<p class="center">THE "BOY'S OWN PAPER" OFFICE</p> + +<p class="center"><small><span class="smcap">4 Bouverie Street And 65 St. Paul's Churchyard, E.c.4</span></small><br /><br /><br /></p> + +<p class="center"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5"></a><small>MADE IN GREAT BRITAIN<br /> +<i>Printed by</i><br /> +UNWIN BROTHERS, LIMITED<br /> +LONDON AND WOKING</small> +</p> + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + +<p><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6"></a></p> + +<h2>CONTENTS</h2> + +<ul class="TOC"> +<li><span class="ralign">Page</span><br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_I"><b>I. DOCTOR JOE, SCOUTMASTER</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_9">9</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_II"><b>II. PLANS</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_37">37</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_III"><b>III. "'TIS THE GHOST OF LONG JOHN"</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_51">51</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_IV"><b>IV. SHOT FROM BEHIND</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_63">63</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_V"><b>V. LEM HORN'S SILVER FOX</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_71">71</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_VI"><b>VI. THE TRACKS IN THE SAND</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_94">94</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_VII"><b>VII. THE MYSTERY OF THE BOAT</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_109">109</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII"><b>VIII. TRAILING THE HALF-BREED</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_120">120</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_IX"><b>IX. ELI SURPRISES INDIAN JAKE</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_126">126</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_X"><b>X. THE END OF ELI'S HUNT</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_135">135</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XI"><b>XI. THE LETTER IN THE CAIRN</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_147">147</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XII"><b>XII. THE HIDDEN CACHE</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_165">165</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII"><b>XIII. SURPRISED AND CAPTURED</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_179">179</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV"><b>XIV. THE TWO DESPERADOS</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_192">192</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XV"><b>XV. MISSING!</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_198">198</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XVI"><b>XVI. BOUND AND HELPLESS</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_206">206</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XVII"><b>XVII. LOST IN A BLIZZARD</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_220">220</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII"><b>XVIII. A PLACE TO "BIDE"</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_232">232</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XIX"><b>XIX. SEARCHING THE WHITE WILDERNESS</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_240">240</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XX"><b>XX. "WOLVES!" YELLED ANDY</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_251">251</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XXI"><b>XXI. THE ALARM IN THE NIGHT</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_259">259</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#CHAPTER_XXII"><b>XXII. THE IMMUTABLE LAW OF GOD</b></a><span class="ralign"><a href="#Page_268">268</a></span> +<br /><br /></li> +</ul> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7"></a></p> +<h2>ILLUSTRATIONS</h2> + +<ul class="LOI"> + +<li><a href="#Page_3">IT WAS DR. JOE BEYOND A DOUBT!</a><span class="ralign"><i>Frontispiece</i></span><br /><br /></li> + +<li><span class="ralign">Facing Page</span><br /></li> +<li><a href="#Page_70a">STRETCHED UPON THE FLOOR LAY LEM HORN</a><span class="ralign">70</span><br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#Page_104a">ON THE RIGHT SEETHED THE DEVIL'S TEA KETTLE</a><span class="ralign">104</span><br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#Page_132a">"YOU STAND WHERE YOU IS AND DROP YOUR GUN!"</a><span class="ralign">132</span><br /><br /></li> + +<li><a href="#Page_260a">IT WAS A FIGHT TO THE DEATH</a><span class="ralign">260</span><br /><br /></li> +</ul> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<h1><a name="Troop_One_of_the_Labrador" id="Troop_One_of_the_Labrador"></a>Troop One of the Labrador</h1> +<p><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9"></a><br /><br /><br /></p> + + + + +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I"></a>CHAPTER I</h3> + +<h2>DOCTOR JOE, SCOUTMASTER</h2> + + +<p>"Doctor Joe! Doctor Joe's comin'! +He just turned the p'int!"</p> + +<p>Jamie Angus burst into the cabin at The +Jug breathlessly shouting this joyful news, +and then rushed out again with David and +Andy at his heels.</p> + +<p>"Oh, Doctor Joe! It can't be Doctor Joe, +now! Can it, Pop? It must be some one +else Jamie sees! It can't be Doctor Joe, +<i>what</i>ever!" exclaimed Margaret in a great +flutter of excitement.</p> + +<p>"Jamie's keen at seein'! He'd know anybody +as far as he can see un!" assured Thomas, +no less excited at the news than was Margaret. +"But 'tis strange that he's comin' back so +soon!"</p> + +<p><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10"></a>Of course Margaret, who was laying the +table for supper, must needs follow the boys; +and Thomas, who was leaning over the wash +basin removing the grime of the day's toil, +snatched the towel from its peg behind the +door and, drying his hands as he ran, sacrificing +dignity to haste, followed Margaret, who had +joined the three boys at the end of the jetty +which served as a boat landing.</p> + +<p>A skiff had just entered the narrow channel +which connected The Jug, as the bight where +the Anguses lived was called, with the wider +waters of Eskimo Bay. There could be no +doubt, even at that distance, that the tall +man standing aft and manipulating the long +sculling oar, was Doctor Joe. As the little +group gathered on the jetty he took off his +hat and waved it high above his head. It +was Doctor Joe beyond a doubt! The boys +waved their caps and shouted at the top of +their lusty young lungs, Margaret, undoing +her apron, waved it and added her voice to +the chorus, and Thomas, quite carried away +by the excitement, waved the towel and in a +great bellowing voice shouted a louder welcome +than any of them.</p> + +<p>There was no happier or better contented +<a name="Page_11" id="Page_11"></a>family on all The Labrador than the family +of Thomas Angus, though they had their trials +and ups and downs and worries like any other +family in or out of Labrador.</p> + +<p>"Everybody must expect a bit o' trouble +and worry now and again," Thomas would +say when things did not go as they should. +"If we never had un, and livin' were always +fine and clear, we'd forget to be thankful for +our blessin's. We has t' have a share o' trouble +in our lives, and here and there a hard knock +whatever, t' know how fine the good things +are and rightly enjoy un when they come. +And in the end troubles never turn out as +bad as we're expectin', by half. First and +last there's a wonderful sight more good times +than bad uns for all of us."</p> + +<p>Thomas had reason to be proud and thankful. +Jamie could see as well as ever he could, and +it was all because of Doctor Joe and his wonderful +operation on Jamie's eyes when it seemed +certain the lad was to become blind. Through +the skill of Doctor Joe, Jamie's eyes were +every whit as keen as David's and Andy's, +and there were no keener eyes in the Bay +than theirs.</p> + +<p>David was now nearly seventeen and Andy +<a name="Page_12" id="Page_12"></a>was fifteen—brawny, broad-shouldered lads who +had already faced more hardships and had +more adventures to their credit than fall to +many a man in a whole lifetime. In that +brave land adventures are to be found at every +turn. They bob up unexpectedly, and the +man or boy who meets them successfully must +know the ways of the wilderness and must +be self-reliant and resourceful, must have grit +a-plenty and a stout heart.</p> + +<p>Margaret kept house for the little family, a +responsibility that had been thrust upon her, +and which she cheerfully accepted, when her +mother was laid to rest and she was a wee lass +of twelve. Now she was eighteen and as +tidy and cheerful a little housekeeper as could +be found on the coast, and pretty too, in manner +as well as in feature. "'Tis the manner that +counts," said Thomas, and he declared that +there was no prettier lass to be found on the +whole Labrador.</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe, whose real name was Joseph +Carver, was their nearest neighbour at Break +Cove, ten miles down Eskimo Bay. He had +come to the coast nine years before, a mysterious +stranger, nervous and broken in health. +Thomas gave him shelter at The Jug, helped +<a name="Page_13" id="Page_13"></a>him build his cabin at Break Cove and taught +him the ways of the land and how to set his +traps. Doctor Joe became a trapper like his +neighbours, and in time, with wholesome living +in the out-of-doors, regained his health and +came to love his adopted country and its rugged +life.</p> + +<p>No one knew then that Joseph Carver was +indeed a doctor, but he was so handy with +bandages and medicines that the folk of the +Bay recognized his skill and soon fell, by +common consent, to calling him "Doctor Joe."</p> + +<p>It was a year before our story begins that +Jamie had first complained of a mist in his eyes. +With passing weeks the mist thickened, and +one day Doctor Joe examined the eyes and +announced that only a delicate and serious +operation could save the lad's sight. This +demanded that Jamie be taken to a hospital +in New York where a specialist might operate. +It was an expensive undertaking. Neither +Thomas nor Doctor Joe had the necessary +money, but Thomas hoped to realize enough +from his winter's trapping in the interior and +Doctor Joe was to add the proceeds of his own +winter's work to the fund. Then Thomas +broke his leg. Doctor Joe must needs remain +<a name="Page_14" id="Page_14"></a>at The Jug to care for him, and there seemed +no hope for Jamie but a life of darkness.</p> + +<p>But David was confident that he could take +his father's place on the trails, and with some +persuasion, for the need was desperate, Thomas +consented that David and Andy should spend +the winter in the great interior wilderness with +no other companion than Indian Jake, a half-breed.</p> + +<p>That was an experience needing the stoutest +heart. Through long dreary months they faced +the sub-arctic cold and fearful blizzards that +swept the wilderness, following silent trails +over wide white wastes or through the depths +of dark forests, and falling upon many a wild +adventure that tried their mettle a hundred +times. It was a man's job, but they both made +good, and that is something to be proud of—to +make good at the job you tackle.</p> + +<p>Jamie had pluck too, but pluck alone could +not save his eyes. The mist thickened more +rapidly than Doctor Joe had expected it would, +and there came a time when Jamie could scarcely +see at all. Then it was that Doctor Joe +announced one day before the return of David +and Andy from the trails, that the operation +could be no longer delayed if Jamie's eyesight +<a name="Page_15" id="Page_15"></a>was to be saved, and that to attempt to +delay it until the ice cleared from the coast +and the mail boat came to bear him away to +New York would be fatal.</p> + +<p>After making this announcement, Doctor +Joe revealed the fact that he had once been +a great eye surgeon. With Thomas's consent +he offered to perform the operation on Jamie's +eyes. Thomas had unbounded faith in his +friend. Doctor Joe operated and Jamie's sight +was saved.</p> + +<p>In curing Jamie, Doctor Joe discovered that +he himself was cured, and that he was again +in possession of all his former skill. It was +quite natural, therefore, that he should wish +to resume the practice of surgery. He was +an indifferent trapper, and the living that +he made following the trails amounted to a +bare existence. He decided, therefore, that +it was his duty to himself to return to the +work for which, during long years of study, +he had been trained.</p> + +<p>Six weeks before Doctor Joe had sailed away +on the mail boat from Fort Pelican, bound +for New York, that far distant, mysterious, +wonderful city of which he had told so many +marvellous tales. Thomas had grave doubts +<a name="Page_16" id="Page_16"></a>that they would ever see him again, though +he had said that he would some day return +to visit his friends at The Jug and to see his +own little deserted cabin at Break Cove, where +he had spent so many lonely but profitable +years, for it was here that he had rebuilt his +broken health. He had good reason to love +the place, and he was quite sure he had no +better or truer friends in all the world than +Thomas Angus and his family.</p> + +<p>"Thomas," said he at parting, "if I had +the means to support myself I would stay +here on The Labrador and be doctor to the +people that need me, for there are folk enough +that need a doctor's help up and down the +coast. But I'm a poor man, and if I stopped +here I'd have to make my living as a trapper, +and you know how poor a trapper I've been +all these years. Back in New York I can +do much good, and there I can live as I was +reared to live. But I'll not forget you, Thomas, +and some day I'll come to see you."</p> + +<p>"I'm not doubtin' 'tis best you go and the +Lord's will," said Thomas. "But we'll be +missin' you sore, Doctor Joe. I scarce knows +how we'll get on without you. 'Twill seem +strange—almost like you were dead, I'm fearin'."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17"></a>"Thomas," and Doctor Joe's voice trembled +with emotion, "there's no one in the wide +world nearer my affections than you and the +boys and Margaret. It hurts me to go, but +it's best I should. I might scratch along +here for a few years, but I was not born to +the work and the time would come when I'd +be a burden on some one, and it would make +me unhappy. I know that I'll wish often +enough to be back here with you at The Jug."</p> + +<p>"You'd never be a burden, <i>what</i>ever!" +Thomas declared, quite shocked at the suggestion. +"I feels beholden to you, Doctor Joe. +There's nary a thing I could ever do to make up +to you for savin' Jamie's eyes. You made un +as good as new. He'd ha' been stone blind +now if 'tweren't for you—and the mercy o' +God."</p> + +<p>"The mercy of God," Doctor Joe repeated +reverently.</p> + +<p>And here at the end of six weeks was Doctor +Joe back again. What wonder that Thomas +Angus and his family were quite beside themselves +with joy, shouting themselves hoarse +down there on the jetty.</p> + +<p>And presently, when the skiff drew alongside, +and Doctor Joe stepped out upon the jetty, +<a name="Page_18" id="Page_18"></a>he was quite overwhelmed with the welcome +he received.</p> + +<p>"Well, Thomas," he said as they walked up +to the cabin with Jamie clinging to one of his +hands and Andy to the other, "here I am +back again, as you see. I couldn't stay away +from you dear, good people. I may as well +confess, I was homesick for you before I +reached New York, and I'm back to stay. +I found my fortune had been made while I +was here, and now I can do as I please."</p> + +<p>"Oh, that's fine now!" exclaimed Margaret. +"'Tis fine if you're to stay!"</p> + +<p>"We were missin' you sore," said Thomas. +"'Tis like the Lord's blessin' to have you back +at The Jug!"</p> + +<p>"And there's good old Roaring Brook!" +Doctor Joe stopped for a moment with half +closed eyes, to listen to the rush of water over +the rocks, where Roaring Brook tumbled down +into The Jug. "It's the sweetest music I've +heard since I left here! And the smell of the +spruce trees! And such a scene! Thomas, +my friend, it's a rugged land where we live, +but it's God's own land, just as He made it, +beautiful, and undefiled by man!"</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe turned about and stretched his +<a name="Page_19" id="Page_19"></a>right arm toward the south. Before them lay +the shimmering placid waters of The Jug, +reaching away to join the wider, greater waters +of Eskimo Bay. In the distance, beyond the +Bay, the snow-capped peaks of the Mealy +Mountains stood in silent majesty, now reflecting +the last brilliant rays of the setting sun. As +they tarried, watching them, the light faded +and shafts of orange and red rose out of the +west. The waters became a throbbing expanse +of colour, and the woods on the Point, +at the entrance to The Jug, sank into purple.</p> + +<p>"'Tis a bit of the light of heaven that the +Lord lets out of evenin's for us to see," said +Jamie, and perhaps Jamie was right.</p> + +<p>"You must be rare hungry, now," observed +Thomas, as they entered the cabin. "Margaret +were just puttin' supper on when Jamie +sights you turnin' the P'int. 'Twill be ready +in a jiffy."</p> + +<p>"What have you got for us, Margaret?" +asked Doctor Joe. "I believe I am hungry +for the good things you cook."</p> + +<p>"Fried trout, sir," said Margaret.</p> + +<p>"Fried trout!" Doctor Joe rolled his eyes +in mock ecstasy. "It couldn't have been +better!"</p> + +<p><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20"></a>"You always says that, whatever," laughed +Margaret. "If 'twere just bread and tea I'm +thinkin' you'd like un fine."</p> + +<p>"But trout!" exclaimed Doctor Joe. "Why, +fresh trout are worth five dollars a pound +where I've been—and couldn't be had for +that!"</p> + +<p>"Well, now!" said Margaret in astonishment. +"And we has un so plentiful!"</p> + +<p>David lighted a lamp and Thomas renewed +the fire, which crackled cheerily in the big +box stove, while everybody talked excitedly +and Margaret set on the table a big dish of +smoking fried trout, a heaping plate of bread, +and poured the tea.</p> + +<p>"Set in! Set in, Doctor Joe!" Thomas +invited.</p> + +<p>And when they drew up to the table, with +Thomas at one end and Margaret at the other, +and Doctor Joe and Jamie at Thomas's right, +and David and Andy at his left, Thomas +devoutly gave thanks for the return of their +friend and asked a blessing upon the bounty +provided.</p> + +<p>"Help yourself, now, and don't be afraid +of un," Thomas admonished, passing the dish +of trout to Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21"></a>"A real banquet," Doctor Joe declared, +as he helped himself liberally. "I've eaten +in some fine places since I've been away, but +I've had no such feast as this! And there's +no one in the whole world can fry trout like +Margaret!"</p> + +<p>"You always says that, sir," and Margaret's +face glowed with pleasure at the compliment.</p> + +<p>"'Tis true!" declared Doctor Joe. "'Tis +true!"</p> + +<p>"I'm wonderin' now about the trout," +remarked David.</p> + +<p>"What are you wondering?" asked Doctor +Joe.</p> + +<p>"How folks get along with no trout to eat +off where you've been, sir."</p> + +<p>"There are men who go far out from the +city and fish in the streams for trout, just +for the sport of catching them," explained +Doctor Joe. "They will tramp all day along +brooks, and feel lucky if they catch a dozen +little fellows so small we'd not look at them +here. But it is only the few who do it for +sport that ever get any at all, and there are +hundreds of people there who never even +saw a trout, they catch so very few of +them."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22"></a>"'Twould seem like a waste o' time," remarked +Thomas, "if they catches so few. +I'd never walk all day for a dozen trout unless +I was wonderful hard up for grub. If I +were wantin' fish so bad I'd set a net for whitefish +or salmon, or if there were cod grounds +about I'd gig for cod, though salmon or cod +or whitefish would never be takin' the place +o' good fresh trout with me."</p> + +<p>"It's not altogether for the trout the sportsmen +tramp the streams all day," laughed Doctor +Joe. "They prize the trout they get as a +great delicacy, to be sure, but it's the joy of +getting out into the open that pays them for +the effort. I've done it myself. They get +plenty of sea fish, they buy them at the +shops."</p> + +<p>"I never were thinkin' o' that," said Thomas. +"I'm thinkin', now, that's where all the +salmon we salts down and sells to the Post +goes."</p> + +<p>The boys were vastly interested, and asked +many questions, which Doctor Joe answered +with infinite patience, concerning the various +kinds of fish people bought in the shops, and +how the fish were caught and shipped to the +shops to be sold fresh.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23"></a>"And you'll stay now? You'll not be +leavin' The Labrador again?" asked Thomas, +after supper.</p> + +<p>"Aye," said Doctor Joe, "I've elected to +be a Labradorman." Then, turning to the +boys, he suggested:</p> + +<p>"Lads, there are a lot of things in that skiff +of mine. I wish you'd bring them in. Will +you do it while your father and I visit?"</p> + +<p>The boys were not only glad but eager to +do it, for there were doubtless many surprises +for themselves in the skiff, and with one accord +the three hurried out.</p> + +<p>"Years ago, Thomas," said Doctor Joe, +when the boys were gone, "in my +days in New York, I invested a little money +in a mining property. Shortly after I made +the investment it was said the ore had run out, +and I believed my money was lost. When I +returned to New York this summer I found +that more ore had been found later, and the +mine had earned me a lot of money. I invested +what was due to me in such a way that it will +bring me an income each year sufficient to provide +me with all I shall ever need."</p> + +<p>"Oh, but that's fine now!" said Thomas.</p> + +<p>"Thomas," Doctor Joe continued "I should +<a name="Page_24" id="Page_24"></a>not have been able to enjoy this had it not +been for your kindness to me years ago, when +I came first to The Labrador a man of broken +health. If you had not offered me your friendship +then I should have died an invalid in +poverty.</p> + +<p>"I've thought of this a thousand times. I +believe God sent me here. I only knew then +that I came because I sought a secluded spot +on the earth where I could find relief from +turmoil. Now, I believe He guided me to +The Labrador and to The Jug to you. He had +something for me to do in the world, and this +was His way of saving me.</p> + +<p>"When Jamie needed me I was here, and +because you had befriended me I was prepared +with God's help and with my skill and training +to restore Jamie's eyesight. There are others +on the coast who need a doctor's skill just as +Jamie needed it, and they have no one to help +them. I have decided that I shall be doctor +to the people. If I can help the folk, as I +am sure I can, I'll be happy in the knowledge +that I'm making some little return for the great +deal that you have done for me."</p> + +<p>"I were never doin' much for you, Doctor +Joe—just what one man would always do for +<a name="Page_25" id="Page_25"></a>another," Thomas protested. "But 'twill be +a blessin' to the folk of The Labrador to have +you doctor un! We all need doctors often +enough when there's none to be had, and +folks die for the need of un."</p> + +<p>"Yes, folks die here for the need of a doctor," +Doctor Joe agreed, "and I hope I may be the +means of saving lives and giving relief."</p> + +<p>The three boys broke in upon them with their +arms full of packages.</p> + +<p>"There's a lot more!" exclaimed Jamie +depositing his load upon the floor.</p> + +<p>"Perhaps we had better help them, +Thomas," suggested Doctor Joe, rising.</p> + +<p>"Oh, no, sir," Jamie protested. "Let us +bring un up!"</p> + +<p>And so said David and Andy also. They +quickly had the contents of the skiff transferred +to the cabin, and the exciting process of opening +the packages began.</p> + +<p>The first to be opened was for Margaret, +and it contained many pretty and useful +things, including two neat, substantial warm +dresses, finer than any Margaret had ever +before possessed or seen. Her eyes sparkled +as she held them up for inspection, and she +exclaimed over and over again:</p> + +<p><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26"></a>"Oh, how wonderful pretty they is!"</p> + +<p>For the boys there were innumerable gifts +dear to boys' hearts, including a compass and +a watch for each. For Thomas there was +a fine pair of field-glasses, a compass and a +very fine watch indeed, and he was as pleased +and happy as the others.</p> + +<p>"The glasses'll be a wonderful help t' me +in huntin'," he declared. "When I climbs +hills for a look around I can see deer that I'd +sure to be missin' with no glasses. I'm not +doubtin' the compass'll come in handy now +and again in thick weather."</p> + +<p>Then there was a big box of goodies. There +were such candies as they had never dreamed +of—oranges and big red-cheeked apples. Even +Thomas had never before in his life tasted an +orange or an apple, and they all declared that +they had never imagined that anything could +be so good. It was quite astonishing to learn +that in the great world from which Doctor +Joe had come there were people who ate oranges +and apples every day of their lives if they +wished them.</p> + +<p>"'Tis strange the way the Lord fixes things," +observed Thomas. "Here now we never saw +the like of oranges and apples before in all +<a name="Page_27" id="Page_27"></a>our lives, but we has plenty of trout, and +there are folks out there that has no trout +but they all has oranges and apples. We has +so many trout we forgets how fine they is, +and what a blessin' 'tis we has un. And I'm +thinkin' 'tis the same with them folks about +the oranges and apples."</p> + +<p>"Yes," agreed Doctor Joe, "it's only when +things are taken away from us that we really +appreciate them. Jamie, no doubt, appreciates +his eyes much more than he would have done +had the mist never clouded them."</p> + +<p>"Aye, 'tis so," said Thomas.</p> + +<p>"I dare say," Doctor Joe suggested, "that +you've never eaten potatoes or onions?"</p> + +<p>"No," said Thomas, "I've heard of un, +but I never eats un. I never had any to eat."</p> + +<p>"Well," announced Doctor Joe, "I've had +several sacks of potatoes and a sack of onions +and two barrels of apples shipped to Fort +Pelican with a quantity of other goods. We'll +have to go with the big boat for them."</p> + +<p>The boys and Margaret were quite beside +themselves with the wonder of it all, and +Thomas was little less excited.</p> + +<p>"We'll go for un to-morrow or the next day +whatever," said Thomas.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28"></a>There was one box still unopened, and the +three boys were eyeing it expectantly, when +Doctor Joe exclaimed:</p> + +<p>"Here we've left till the last the most important +thing of all. Get an axe, David, and +we'll knock the cover off this box."</p> + +<p>David had the axe in a jiffy, and when +Doctor Joe removed the cover the box was +found to be filled with books.</p> + +<p>"O-h-h!" breathed the boys in unison.</p> + +<p>"'Tis fine! Oh, I've been wishin' and +wishin' for books t' look at and read!" exclaimed +Margaret.</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe had taught them all to read and +write in the years he had been with them, +an accomplishment that not every boy and +girl on The Labrador possessed, for there were +no schools there.</p> + +<p>"There are some books to study and some +to read. There are story books and books about +birds and flowers and animals. And here is +something that I know will please the boys," +said Doctor Joe, drawing from the box six +paper-bound volumes. "There's an interesting +story attached to these books that I must tell +you before you look at them, and then we'll +go through them together.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29"></a>"One day I was walking in a park in New +York.</p> + +<p>"Suddenly I heard a crashing noise, and I +hurried in the direction in which I heard the +noise, and turning a corner saw a motor-car +lying on its side. Some boys wearing khaki-coloured +uniforms, very much like soldiers' +uniforms, had already reached the wreck, and +before I came up with them had rescued two +injured men. I never saw more efficient or +prompt service than those boys were giving +the poor men, who were both badly hurt. +They had the men stretched out upon the grass. +One had a severed artery in his arm, where +the arm had been cut upon the broken glass +wind shield. The man's blood was pouring +in great spurts through the wound, but the +boys were already adjusting the tourniquet, +for which they used a handkerchief, and in +a minute they had the bleeding stopped, as +well as I could have done it. I've no doubt +they saved the man's life, for without prompt +help he'd have bled to death in a short time.</p> + +<p>"The other man was cut and bruised, and +the boys were making him as comfortable as +possible until an ambulance came to take him +to a hospital. There was really nothing I +<a name="Page_30" id="Page_30"></a>could do that the boys had not already done +promptly and remarkably well.</p> + +<p>"The instant they had discovered the +accident two boys had run away to summon +an ambulance and to notify the police, and +in a little while an ambulance with a surgeon +and two policemen came and took the men +away.</p> + +<p>"The boys were only about Andy's age, and +I wondered at their training and efficiency. +When the ambulance had gone with the injured +men I walked a little way with the boys, and +learned that they belonged to a wonderful +organization called 'Boy Scouts.' I had heard +of Boy Scouts, but I supposed it was one of +the ordinary clubs where boys got together +just for play.</p> + +<p>"I was so much interested that I looked up +the head office of the Boy Scouts, and asked +questions about them. Then I bought these +copies of the <i>Boy Scout's Handbook</i>. They +tell about the things the scouts do, and how a +boy may become a scout. I knew you chaps +would be so interested you would each want +a book, so I bought a half-dozen copies. The +extra books we can give to other boys up the +Bay."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31"></a>"Could we be scouts?" asked Andy breathlessly.</p> + +<p>"Yes, to be sure!" Doctor Joe smiled.</p> + +<p>"'Twould be rare fun, now!" exclaimed +David.</p> + +<p>"All of us scouts, just like the boys in New +York?" Jamie asked, his face aglow.</p> + +<p>"Yes," answered Doctor Joe. "I knew you +chaps would like to be scouts. We'll organize +a troop, and we'll call it Troop One of The +Labrador. There are Boy Scouts of America, +and Boy Scouts of England, and Boy Scouts +of nearly every country in the world except +The Labrador. We'll be the Boy Scouts of +The Labrador, and become a part of the great +army of scouts. It'll be something to be +proud of."</p> + +<p>"How'll we do it?" asked David.</p> + +<p>"I'll be leader, or scoutmaster as they call +the leader," explained Doctor Joe. "These +books explain all about the things we're +to do.</p> + +<p>"Before you become tenderfoot scouts you'll +have to learn some things," Doctor Joe continued, +after looking through one of the handbooks, +until he found the proper page. "You +can tie all the knots already. You do that +<a name="Page_32" id="Page_32"></a>every day. But there are plenty of boys, +and men too, where I came from that can't +even tie the ordinary square knot.</p> + +<p>"You'll have to learn the oath and law. +You live pretty close to the requirements of +the law now, but it'll be necessary to learn +it, and I'll explain then what each law means. +You'll have to learn what the scout badge +stands for and how it's made up, and other +things."</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe carefully marked the necessary +pages and references.</p> + +<p>"Now about the flag," said Doctor Joe. +"You'll have to learn about the formation of +the flag and what it stands for. This book +is for the Boy Scouts of America, and the flag +it refers to is the United States flag. I'm +an American, but you chaps are living in +British territory and you're British subjects, +so you'll have to learn about the British flag +or Union Jack, as it's called, for that's your +flag.</p> + +<p>"The Union Jack is the national flag of the +whole British Empire. The English flag was +originally a red cross on a white field. This +is called the flag of St. George. Three hundred +years ago King James the First added to it +<a name="Page_33" id="Page_33"></a>the banner of Scotland, which was a blue flag +with a white cross, called St. Andrew's Cross, +lying upon the blue from corner to corner—that +is diagonally."</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe opened his travelling bag and +drew forth two small flags, one the Stars +and Stripes and the other the British Union +Jack.</p> + +<p>"I nearly forgot about these," said he, +spreading the flags upon the table. "This is +the flag of my country," and he caressed the +United States flag affectionately. "I love it +as you should love your flag. The Union +Jack is the emblem of the great British Empire, +of which you are a part. It is one of the greatest +and best countries in the world to live in. +To be a British subject is something to be +proud of indeed."</p> + +<p>"Aye," broke in Thomas, "'tis that, now."</p> + +<p>"Yes," continued Doctor Joe, "I want you +to be as proud of it as I am that I'm a citizen +of the United States, and I'm so proud of it +I wouldn't change for any other country in +the world. When I reached St. John's and +saw the American flag flying over the office +of the United States Consulate, my eyes filled +with tears. I hadn't seen that old flag for +<a name="Page_34" id="Page_34"></a>years, and I stood in the street for an hour +doing nothing but look at it and think of all +it represents. It makes my blood tingle just +to touch it. You chaps must feel the same +toward the British flag, for that's your flag.</p> + +<p>"Now let me show you how the flag is made +up," and Doctor Joe proceeded to trace St. +George's Cross and St. Andrew's Cross, explaining +them again as he did so. "In the year +1801 another banner was added. This was the +Banner of St. Patrick of Ireland. St. Patrick's +Cross was a red diagonal cross on a white field, +and here you see it."</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe traced it on the flag.</p> + +<p>"There," he went on, "you have the British +flag complete. No one knows exactly why +it is called the 'Jack,' but it may have been +because in the old days, the English knights, +when they went out to fight their battles, wore +a jacket over their armour with the St. George's +Cross upon it, so it would be known to what +nation they belonged. This jacket was sometimes +called a 'jack' for short.</p> + +<p>"The Union Jack did not become a complete +flag as we have it to-day until the year 1801, +when St. Patrick's Cross was added to it. +The Stars and Stripes, the flag of my country, +<a name="Page_35" id="Page_35"></a>was first made in 1776, and on June 14, 1777, +it was adopted by the United States Congress +as the national emblem, so you see it is even +older than the British flag. The flags of all +nations in the world have changed since 1777 +excepting only the United States flag, and +every American is proud of the fact that his +flag is older than the flag of any other Christian +nation in the world."</p> + +<p>The boys, and Thomas and Margaret also, +were fascinated with Doctor Joe's brief story +of the flags. They were quite excited with +the thought that they were to be a part of the +great army of Boy Scouts, and to do the same +things that other boys in far-away lands were +doing, and the other boys that they had never +seen seemed suddenly very much nearer to +them and more like themselves than they had +ever seemed before.</p> + +<p>The three buried their noses in the handbook, +now and again asking Doctor Joe +questions. They were so excited and so interested, +indeed, that they could scarcely lay +the books aside when Thomas announced that +it was time to "turn in," and Andy declared +he could hardly wait for morning when they +could be at them again.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36"></a>And so it came about that Troop <span class="smcap">I</span>, Boy +Scouts of The Labrador, was organized, and +in the nature of things the troop was destined +to meet many adventures and unusual experiences.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II"></a>CHAPTER II</h3> + +<h2>PLANS</h2> + + +<p>The cabin at The Jug had three rooms. +There was a square living-room, entered +through an enclosed porch on its western +grade. At the end of the living-room opposite +the entrance were two doors, one leading to +Margaret's room, the other to the room occupied +by the boys. Thomas himself slept in a bunk, +resembling a ship's bunk, built against the +north wall.</p> + +<p>The furnishings of the living-room consisted +of a home-made table, a big box stove, three +home-made chairs and some chests, which +served the double purpose of storage places +for clothing and seats. A cupboard was built +against the wall at the left of the entrance, +and between two windows on the south side +of the room, which looked out upon The Jug, +was a shelf upon which Thomas kept his Bible +<a name="Page_38" id="Page_38"></a>and Margaret her sewing basket—a little +basket which she had woven herself from +native grasses. Behind the stove was a bench, +upon which stood a bucket of water and the +family wash basin, and over the basin hung a +towel for general family use.</p> + +<p>Pasted upon the walls were pictures from +old newspapers and magazines. There were +no other decorations but these and snowy +muslin curtains at the windows, but the floor, +table, chairs—all the woodwork, indeed—were +scoured to immaculate whiteness with sand +and soap, and everything was spotlessly clean +and tidy. Despite the austere simplicity of +the room and its furnishings, it possessed an +indescribable atmosphere of cosy comfort.</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe's bed was spread upon the floor. +It was still candle-light when he was awakened +by Thomas building a fire in the stove, for in +this land of stern living there is no lolling in +bed of mornings.</p> + +<p>"Good-morning, Thomas," said Doctor Joe, +with a yawn and a stretch as he sat up.</p> + +<p>"Marnin'," said Thomas.</p> + +<p>"How's the morning, Thomas, fair for our +trip to Fort Pelican?"</p> + +<p>"Aye, 'tis a fine marnin'," announced +<a name="Page_39" id="Page_39"></a>Thomas, "but I were thinkin' 'twould be +better to wait over till to-morrow for the trip. +After your long voyage 'twould be a bit trying +for you to turn back to-day to Fort Pelican +without restin' up, and I'm not doubtin' a +day whatever'll do no harm to the potaters +and things."</p> + +<p>"I believe you're right, Thomas," and +Doctor Joe spoke with evident relief. "I +thought you'd be getting ready for the trapping +and would like to get the Fort Pelican trip +out of the way. We'll put the trip off till +to-morrow."</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe dressed hurriedly, and went out +to enjoy the cool, crisp morning. Everything +was white with hoarfrost. The air was +charged with the perfume of balsam and spruce +and other sweet odours of the forest. Doctor +Joe took long, deep, delicious breaths as he +looked about him at the familiar scene.</p> + +<p>The last stars were fading in the growing +light. A low mist hung over The Jug, and +beyond the haze lay the dark, heaving waters +of Eskimo Bay. In the distance beyond the +Bay the high peaks of the Mealy Mountains +rose out of the gloom, white with snow and +looming above the dark forest at their base in +<a name="Page_40" id="Page_40"></a>cold and silent majesty. Behind the cabin +stretched the vast, mysterious, unbounded +wilderness which held, hidden in its unmeasured +depths, rivers and lakes and mountains that +no man, save the wandering Indian, had ever +looked upon—great solitudes whose silence had +remained unbroken through the ages.</p> + +<p>"If some of those Boy Scouts could only +see this!" exclaimed Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p>"'Twere fashioned by the Almighty for +comfortable livin'," said Thomas, who had +called Margaret and the boys and come out +unobserved by Doctor Joe. "There's no better +shelter on the coast, and no better place for +seals and salmon, with neighbours handy when +we wants to see un, and plenty o' room to +stretch. 'Tis the finest <i>I</i> ever saw, whatever."</p> + +<p>"Yes, 'tis all of that," agreed Doctor Joe. +"But I wasn't thinking now of The Jug +alone. I was thinking of the majestic grandeur +of the whole scene. I was enjoying the +freedom from the noise and scramble, the +dirt and smoke and smudge of the city, with +its piles upon piles of ugly buildings, and +never a breath of such pure air as this to be +breathed. I was thinking of these fine young +chaps, the Boy Scouts I saw there, who are +<a name="Page_41" id="Page_41"></a>trying to study God's big out-of-doors and +must content themselves with stingy little +parks. It's the love of Nature that takes them +to the parks, and compared with this they +have a poor substitute. This is the world as +God made it, with all its primordial beauty. +We're fortunate that circumstances placed us +here, Thomas, and we should be for ever +thankful."</p> + +<p>"I'm wonderin' now," observed Thomas, +as he and Doctor Joe paced up and down the +gravelly beach, "why folks ever lives in such +places as you tells about. There's plenty o' +room down here on The Labrador, and plenty +o' other places, I'm not doubtin', where they'd +be free from the crowds and dirt, and have +plenty o' room to stretch, and live fine like we +lives."</p> + +<p>"We're a thousand miles from a railway," +said Doctor Joe. "Most of the people in the +cities wouldn't live a thousand paces from a +railway if they could help themselves. They +take a car and ride if they've only half a mile +to go. They ride so much they've almost +forgotten how to walk. They like crowds. +They'd be lonesome if they were away from +them."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42"></a>"'Tis strange, wonderful strange, how some +folks lives," remarked Thomas, quite astonished +that any could prefer the city to his own big, +free Labrador. "When folks has enough to +keep un busy they never gets lonesome, and +bein' idle is like wastin' a part of life. A man +could never be lonesome where there's plenty o' +water and woods about. I always finds jobs +a-plenty to turn my hand to, and I has no +time to feel lonesome. And I never could live +where I didn't have room enough to stretch, +<i>what</i>ever."</p> + +<p>"That's it!" Doctor Joe spoke decisively. +"Room enough to stretch mind as well as +body. Why, Thomas, I've often heard men +say that they had to 'kill time', and didn't +know what to do with themselves for hours +together!"</p> + +<p>"'Tis wicked and against the Lord's will," +and Thomas shook his head. "The Lord +never wants folks to be idle or kill time. He +fixes it so there's a-plenty of useful things +for everybody to do all the time, and they +wants to do un."</p> + +<p>"'Tis the measure of a man's worth," +remarked Doctor Joe. "The worth-while man +never has an hour to kill. The day hasn't +<a name="Page_43" id="Page_43"></a>hours enough for him. It's the other kind +that kill time—the sort that are not, and +never will be, of much account in the +world."</p> + +<p>They walked a little in silence, each busy +with his own thoughts, when Thomas remarked:</p> + +<p>"The Lord has been wonderful good to me, +Doctor Joe, givin' me three as fine lads and as +fine a lass as He ever gave a man. Then He +saves the little lad's eyes, when they were +goin' blind, by sendin' you to cure un. And +when I were breakin' my leg and couldn't work +He sends along Indian Jake to go to the trails +to hunt with David and Andy, and they makes +a fine hunt and keeps us out o' debt. And +this summer we has as fine a catch of salmon +as ever we has, and we're through with un a +fortnight ahead of ever before, with all the +barrels filled and the gear stowed, and the +salt salmon traded in at the Post, and plenty +o' flour and pork and molasses and tea t' +see us through the winter, <i>what</i>ever."</p> + +<p>"Last year at this time things looked pretty +blue for us," said Doctor Joe, "but everything +worked out well in the end, Thomas."</p> + +<p>"Aye," agreed Thomas, "wonderful well. +<a name="Page_44" id="Page_44"></a>I'm thinkin' that if we does our best t' help +ourselves when troubles come the Lord is +like t' step in and give us a hand. He wants +us to do the best we can t' help ourselves +and when He sees we're doin' it He lifts the +troubles."</p> + +<p>"That's true," agreed Doctor Joe, "and if +a man takes advantage of every opportunity +that comes to him, and don't waste his time, +he's pretty sure to succeed."</p> + +<p>"Aye, that he is," said Thomas. "Now I +were thinkin' that the lads worked so wonderful +hard at the salmon th' summer, I'd let un go +with you to Fort Pelican t' manage the boat, +and I'll be staying home to make ready for +the trail. There's a-plenty to be done yet to +make ready without hurry, and a trip to Fort +Pelican will be a rare treat for the lads. But +I'll go if you wants. I were just askin' if +'twould be suitin' you if I stays home and lets +they go?"</p> + +<p>"Why, of course! That's great! Simply +great!" exclaimed Doctor Joe. "The boys +will make a fine crew! Will Jamie go too?"</p> + +<p>"Aye, Jamie's been workin' like a man, and +he'll be keen for the trip," said Thomas. "And +last night I were thinkin' after I goes to bed +<a name="Page_45" id="Page_45"></a>how fine 'tis that you're to be doctor to the +coast. Indian Jake's to be my trappin' +pardner th' winter, and the lads'll 'bide home. +You'll be needin' dogs and komatik (sledge) +to take you about. There'll be little enough +for the dogs to do, and you'll be welcome to +un. The lads can do the drivin' for you and +whatever you wants un to do. Use un all +you needs. I wants to do my share to help +you do the doctorin'."</p> + +<p>"Thank you! Thank you, Thomas!" +Doctor Joe accepted gratefully. "This will +make it possible for me to see a good many +people that I otherwise would not be able to +see, and make it easier for me also."</p> + +<p>"Aye," said Thomas, "I were thinkin' that +too, and the lads will be glad enough to lend +you a hand when you needs un."</p> + +<p>It was broad daylight. While Thomas and +Doctor Joe talked on the beach, the boys +had been busily engaged in carrying the +day's supply of water from Roaring Brook to +a water barrel in the porch. Now Jamie +appeared to announce breakfast. While they +ate the boys were able to talk of little else +than the scout books, and the fact they were +to do as boys did in other parts of the world. +<a name="Page_46" id="Page_46"></a>And they were delighted beyond measure +when they learned that they were to make +the voyage to Fort Pelican with Doctor Joe. +It was an event of vast importance.</p> + +<p>"There'll be plenty o' time in the boat to +study the scout book things," Andy suggested. +"Maybe now we could learn to be scouts +before we gets back home."</p> + +<p>"I've no doubt you can pass all the tenderfoot +tests while we're away," said Doctor +Joe. "And since you're to take me about +with dogs and komatik this winter when I go +to visit sick people, there'll be no end of +chances to show what good scouts you are."</p> + +<p>"To take you about?" asked Andy +excitedly.</p> + +<p>Then Thomas must needs explain that they +must do their share in looking after the sick +folk, and that David and Andy were to be +Doctor Joe's dog drivers when winter came.</p> + +<p>"'Twill be fine to manage the dogs for you, +sir!" exclaimed David, turning to Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p>"Wonderful fine!" echoed Andy.</p> + +<p>"And will you be goin' outside the Bay?" +asked David.</p> + +<p>"Aye, outside the Bay and in it, wherever +there's need to go," said Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47"></a>"'Twill be tryin' and hard work sometimes," +suggested Thomas, "travellin' when the +weather's nasty, but I'm not doubtin' the +lads'll be able t' manage un."</p> + +<p>"We'll manage un!" David declared with +pride in the confidence placed in him and +Andy.</p> + +<p>To drive dogs on these sub-arctic trails in +fair weather and foul calls for courage and +grit, and the lads felt justly proud of the +responsibility that had been laid upon them. +There would be many a shift to make on the +ice, they knew. There would be blinding +blizzards and withering arctic winds to face, +and no end of hard work. But these lads of +The Labrador loved to stand upon their feet +like men and face and conquer the elements +like hardy men of courage. This is the way +of boys the world over—eager for the time +when they may assume the responsibility of +manhood. Such a time comes earlier to the +lads of The Labrador than with us. In that +stern land there is no idling and there are no +holidays, and every one, the lad as well as +his father, must always do his part, which is +his best.</p> + +<p>Fort Pelican, the nearest port at which the +<a name="Page_48" id="Page_48"></a>mail boat called, was seventy miles eastward +from The Jug. With the uncertainty of wind +and tide the boat journey to Fort Pelican +usually consumed three days, and with equal +time required for return, the voyage could +seldom be accomplished in less than six days. +Lem Horn and his family lived at Horn's +Bight, thirty miles from The Jug, and fifteen +miles beyond, at Caribou Arm, was Jerry +Snook's cabin. Save an Eskimo settlement +of half a dozen huts near Fort Pelican and the +families of Lem Horn and Jerry Snook, the +country lying between The Jug and Fort +Pelican was uninhabited. It was unlikely +that evening would find the travellers in the +vicinity of either Horn's or Snook's cabins, +and therefore it was to be a camping trip, +which was quite to the liking of the boys.</p> + +<p>The boys washed the old fishing boat and +packed the equipment and provisions for the +voyage. Margaret baked three big loaves of +white bread, and as a special treat a loaf of +plum bread. The remaining provisions consisted +of tea, a bottle of molasses for sweetening, +flour, baking-powder, fat salt pork, lard, +margarine, salt and pepper. The equipment +included a frying-pan, a basin for mixing +<a name="Page_49" id="Page_49"></a>dough, a tin kettle for tea, a larger kettle to +be used in cooking, one large cooking spoon, +four teaspoons and some tin plates. Each of +the boys as well as Doctor Joe was provided +with a sheath knife carried on the belt. The +sheath knife serves the professional hunter as +a cooking knife, as well as for eating and +general purposes.</p> + +<p>For camping use there was a cotton wedge +tent, a small sheet-iron tent stove, three camp +axes, some candles and matches, a file for +sharpening the axes and a sleeping-bag for +each. Men in that land do not travel without +arms, and it was decided that David should +take a carbine and Andy and Doctor Joe +each a double-barrel shotgun, for there might +be an opportunity to shoot a fat goose or +duck.</p> + +<p>Thomas's big boat had two light masts +rigged with leg-o'-mutton sails. Just forward +of the foremast David and Andy placed some +flat stones, and covering them with two or +three inches of gravel set the tent stove upon +the gravel. Here they could cook their meals +at midday, and the gravel would protect the +bottom of the boat from heat. A sufficient +quantity of fire-wood was taken aboard, and +<a name="Page_50" id="Page_50"></a>the provisions and other equipment stowed +under a short deck forward where the things +would be protected from storm and all would +be in readiness for an early start in the +morning.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III"></a>CHAPTER III</h3> + +<h2>"'TIS THE GHOST OF LONG JOHN"</h2> + + +<p>The morning was clear and crisp. Breakfast +was eaten by candle-light, and before +sunrise Doctor Joe and the boys, with the +tide to help them, worked the big boat down +through The Jug and past the Point into +Eskimo Bay. In the shelter of The Jug, +which lay in the lee of the hills, the sails +flapped idly and it was necessary to bring +the long oars into service. But beyond the +sheltered harbour a light north-west breeze +caught and filled the sails, the oars were +stowed, the rudder shipped, and with David +at the tiller Doctor Joe lighted his pipe and +settled himself for a quiet smoke while Andy +and Jamie turned their attention to their +scout handbooks.</p> + +<p>It was an inspiring morning. The sky was +cloudless. The air was charged with scent of +<a name="Page_52" id="Page_52"></a>spruce and balsam fir, wafted down by the +breeze from the forest, lying in dark and solemn +silence and spreading away from the near-by +shore until it melted into the blue haze of +rolling hills far to the northward. The huge +black back of a grampus rose a hundred feet +from the boat and with a noise like the loud +exhaust of steam sank again beneath the +surface of the Bay. Now and again a seal +raised its head and looked curiously at the +travellers and then hastily dived. Gulls and +terns soared and circled overhead, occasionally +dipping to the water to capture a choice morsel +of food. A flock of wild geese, honking in +flight, turned into a bight and alighted where +a brook coursed down through a marsh to join +the sea.</p> + +<p>"There's some geese," remarked David, +breaking the silence. "They're comin' up +south now. We'll have a hunt when we gets +home. They always feeds in that mesh when +they're bidin' about the Bay."</p> + +<p>Presently Andy exclaimed:</p> + +<p>"I can tie un all! I can tie every knot in +the book!"</p> + +<p>"I can tie un too!" said Jamie.</p> + +<p>"Yes! Yes! There are the scout tests!" +<a name="Page_53" id="Page_53"></a>broke in Doctor Joe. "Suppose we all tie +the knots and pass the tests."</p> + +<p>Andy and Jamie tied them easily enough, +and then Doctor Joe tied them himself to keep +pace with the boys, and Andy relieved David +at the tiller that he might try his hand at +them; David not only tied all the knots +illustrated in the handbook, but for good +measure added a bowline on a bight, a double +carrick bend, a marlin hitch and a halliard hitch.</p> + +<p>"That's wonderful easy to do," David +declared as he laid the rope down. "'Tis +strange they calls that a test, 'tis so easy done."</p> + +<p>"Easy for us," admitted Doctor Joe, "but +for boys who have never had much to do with +boats or ropes it's a hard test, and an important +one. You chaps knew how to tie them, so +in doing it you haven't learned anything new. +Let us make up our minds as scouts to learn +something new every day—something we never +knew before, no matter how small or unimportant +it may seem. Think what a lot we'll +know next year that we do not know now; +everything we learn, too, is sure to be of use +to us sometime in our lives.</p> + +<p>"As we go along we'll find there is a great +deal to learn in this handbook, and all of it is +<a name="Page_54" id="Page_54"></a>worth knowing. We don't look far ahead. +Suppose we begin with the scout law. With +your good memories you'll learn it before we +go ashore to-night. I want you to learn the +twelve points of the law in order as they appear +in the book, so that you can repeat them and +tell me in your own words what each point +means."</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe turned to the scout law and +explained each point in detail. When he told +them that "A Scout is kind" meant that +they must not only be kind to people, but +that they must protect and not kill harmless +birds and animals, David protested:</p> + +<p>"If we promises <i>that</i>, sir, 'twould stop us +huntin' seals and deer and pa'tridges and +plenty o' things."</p> + +<p>"Oh, no!" explained Doctor Joe. "It +does not mean that. It means that you must +kill nothing <i>needlessly</i>. Here in Labrador we +must kill seals and deer and partridges and +other game for food and for their skins. That +is the way we make our living. In the same +way they have to kill cows and sheep and +goats and pigs for food in the country I came +from and to get skins for boots and gloves. +In the same way we are permitted to kill game +<a name="Page_55" id="Page_55"></a>when necessary. But we're not to kill anything +that's harmless unless we need it for some +purpose. The Indians and other people about +here shoot at loons for sport. I've seen them +chase the loons in canoes and keep shooting +at them every time they came up after a dive, +until the loons were too tired to dive quickly +enough to get out of the way of the shot, +and then the poor things were killed. The +flesh isn't fit to eat and they're always thrown +away. That is cruel."</p> + +<p>"I never thought of un that way. I've +killed loons too," David confessed, "but I'll +never shoot at a loon again. 'Tis the same +with gulls and other things we never uses +when we kills, and just shoot at for fun."</p> + +<p>"That's the idea," said Doctor Joe enthusiastically. +"Now what do you think about +killing hen partridges in summer?"</p> + +<p>"We can kill pa'tridges, can't we?" asked +David. "We always eats un, and you said +we could kill un."</p> + +<p>"But we've got to use our heads about it," +Doctor Joe explained. "I'm talking now +about <i>hen</i> partridges in <i>summer</i>. They always +have broods of little partridges then. If you +kill the mother all the little ones die, for they're +<a name="Page_56" id="Page_56"></a>too small to take care of themselves. Do you +think that's right?"</p> + +<p>"I never thought of un before," said David. +"'Tis wicked to kill un! I'll never kill a hen +pa'tridge in summer again! Not me!"</p> + +<p>"We'll have to be tellin' everybody in the +Bay about that!" declared Andy. "Nobody +has ever thought about the poor little uns +starvin' and dyin'!"</p> + +<p>"That'll be doing good scout work," Doctor +Joe commended. "That's one way you'll be +useful as scouts here in Labrador. Not only +will you be showing kindness to the mother +and little partridges, but if the mother is +permitted to live and raise her brood, all the +little birds will be full grown by winter, and +it will make that many more partridges that +can be used for food when food is needed."</p> + +<p>When presently Jamie announced that it +was "'most noon" and he was "fair starvin'," +and the others suddenly discovered that they +were hungry too, a fire was lighted in the stove +and a cosy lunch of fried pork and bread, and +hot tea sweetened with molasses, was eaten +with an appetite and relish such as only those +can enjoy who live in the open. Then, with +growing interest the lads returned to their +<a name="Page_57" id="Page_57"></a>scout books, and camping time came almost +before they were aware.</p> + +<p>The sun was drooping low in the west when +David, indicating a low, wooded point, said:</p> + +<p>"That's Flat P'int. There's good water +there and 'tis a fine camping place."</p> + +<p>"Then we'll camp there," Doctor Joe agreed.</p> + +<p>"Look! Look!" exclaimed Andy, as the +boat approached the shore. "There's a +porcupine!"</p> + +<p>Following the direction in which Andy +pointed, a fat porcupine was discovered high +up in a spruce tree feeding upon the tender +branches and bark.</p> + +<p>"Shall we have un for supper?" Andy +asked excitedly.</p> + +<p>"Aye," said David, "let's have un for +supper. Fresh meat'll go fine."</p> + +<p>A shot from the rifle, when they had landed, +brought the unfortunate porcupine tumbling +to the ground, and Andy proceeded at once to +skin and dress his game for supper.</p> + +<p>"I'll be cook and Andy cookee," Doctor +Joe announced. "We'll get wood for the fire, +David, and you and Jamie pitch the tent and +get it ready."</p> + +<p>Flat Point was well wooded, and the floor of +<a name="Page_58" id="Page_58"></a>the forest thickly carpeted with grey caribou +moss. David selected a level spot between +two trees on a little rise near the shore. The +ridge rope was quickly stretched between +the trees and the tent securely pegged down. +Then David and Jamie broke a quantity of +low-hanging spruce boughs, which they snapped +from the trees with a dexterous upward bend +of the wrist. When a liberal pile of these had +been accumulated at the entrance of the tent, +David proceeded to lay the bed.</p> + +<p>The rear of the tent was to be the head. +Here he laid a row of the boughs, three deep, +with the convex side uppermost, then he began +"shingling" the boughs in rows toward the +foot. This was done by placing the butt end +of the bough firmly against the ground with +half the bough, the convex side uppermost, +overlapping the bough above it, as shingles +are lapped on a roof. Thus continuing until +the floor of the tent was covered he had a +soft, fragrant springy bed, quite as soft and +comfortable as a mattress, and upon this he +and Jamie spread the sleeping-bags.</p> + +<p>In the meantime Doctor Joe and Andy had +collected an ample supply of dry wood for the +evening, and when, presently, David and Jamie +<a name="Page_59" id="Page_59"></a>joined them, a cheerful fire was blazing and +already an appetizing odour was rising from +the stew kettle.</p> + +<p>When the stew and some tender dumplings +were done Doctor Joe lifted the kettle from +the fire, and while he filled each plate with a +liberal portion, and Andy poured tea, David +put fresh wood upon the fire, for the evening +had grown cold and frosty with the setting +sun. The blazing fire was cheerful indeed as +they settled themselves upon the seat of boughs +and proceeded to enjoy their supper.</p> + +<p>"Um-m-m!" exclaimed Andy. "You knows +how to cook wonderful fine, Doctor!"</p> + +<p>"'Tis <i>wonderful</i> fine stew!" seconded David.</p> + +<p>"Not half bad," admitted Doctor Joe, "but +Andy had as much to do with it as I, and +the porcupine had a good deal to do with it. +It was young and fat, and it's tender."</p> + +<p>There is no pleasanter hour for the camper +or voyageur than the evening hour by a +blazing camp fire. There is no sweeter odour +than that of the damp forest mingled with the +smell of burning wood. Beyond the narrow +circle of light a black wall rises, and behind +the wall lies the wilderness with its unfathomed +mysteries. Out in the darkness wild creatures +<a name="Page_60" id="Page_60"></a>move, silent, stealthy and unseen, behind a +veil that human eyes cannot penetrate. But +we know they are there going about the strange +business of their life, and our imagination is +awakened and our sensibilities quickened.</p> + +<p>The camp fire is a shrine of comradeship +and friendship. Here it was that the primordial +ancestors of every living man and woman +and child gathered at night with their families, +in those far-off dark ages before history was +written. The fire was their home. Here they +found rest and comfort and protection from +the savage wild beasts that roamed the forests. +It was a place of veneration. The primitive +instinct, perchance inherited from those far-off +ancestors of ours, slumbering in our souls, +is sometimes awakened, and then we are called +to the woods and the wild places that God +made beautiful for us, and at night we gather +around our camp fire as our ancient ancestors +gathered around theirs, and we love it just as +they loved it.</p> + +<p>And so it was with the little camp fire on +Flat Point and with Doctor Joe and the boys. +With darkness the uncanny light of the Aurora +Borealis flashed up in the north, its long, +weird fingers of changing colours moving +<a name="Page_61" id="Page_61"></a>restlessly across the heavens. The forest and +the wide, dark waters of Eskimo Bay sank +behind a black wall.</p> + +<p>There was absolute silence, save for the +ripple of waves upon the shore, each busy +with his own thoughts, until presently Jamie +asked:</p> + +<p>"Did you ever see a ghost, Doctor?"</p> + +<p>"A ghost? No, lad, and I fancy no one +else ever saw one except in imagination. +What made you think of ghosts?"</p> + +<p>"'Tis so—still—and dark out there," said +Jamie, pointing toward the darkness beyond +the fire-glow. "And—I were thinkin' I heard +something."</p> + +<p>"But there <i>is</i> ghosts, sir, plenty of un," +broke in Andy. "Pop's seen ghosts and so +has Zeke Hodge and Uncle Billy and plenty of +folks. They says the ghost of Long John, the +old Injun that used to be at the Post and was +drowned, goes paddlin' and paddlin' about in +a canoe o' nights."</p> + +<p>"Yes," said David, "I'm thinkin' I saw +Long John's ghost myself one evenin'. I +weren't certain of un, but it must have been +he."</p> + +<p>"Nonsense!" Doctor Joe had no patience +<a name="Page_62" id="Page_62"></a>with the belief popular among Labradormen +that ghosts of men who have been drowned +or killed return to haunt the scene of their +death. "There's no such thing as a ghost."</p> + +<p>"What's that now?" Jamie held up his +hand for silence, and spoke in a subdued voice.</p> + +<p>Out of the darkness came the rhythmic +dipping of a paddle. They all heard it now. +Doctor Joe arose, and closely followed by the +boys, stepped down beyond the fire glow. In +dim outline they could see the silhouette of a +canoe containing the lone figure of a man +paddling with the short, quick stroke of the +Indian.</p> + +<p>"'Tis the ghost of Long John!" breathed +Jamie. "'Tis sure he!"</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV"></a>CHAPTER IV</h3> + +<h2>SHOT FROM BEHIND</h2> + + +<p>The canoe was coming directly toward +them. In a moment it touched the shore, +and as its occupant stepped lightly out the +boys with one accord exclaimed:</p> + +<p>"Injun Jake! 'Tis Injun Jake!"</p> + +<p>And so it proved. The greeting he received +was hearty enough to leave no doubt in his +mind that he was a welcome visitor. Perhaps +it was the heartier because of the relief the +boys experienced in the discovery that the +lone canoeman was not, after all, the wraith of +Long John, but was their friend Indian Jake +in flesh and blood.</p> + +<p>When his packs had been removed, Indian +Jake lifted his canoe from the water, turned it +upon its side and followed the boys to the fire, +where Doctor Joe awaited him.</p> + +<p>"Just in time!" welcomed Doctor Joe, as +he shook Indian Jake's hand. "We've +<a name="Page_64" id="Page_64"></a>finished eating, but there's plenty of stew in +the kettle. Andy, pour Jake some tea."</p> + +<p>Indian Jake, grunting his thanks, silently +picked up David's empty plate and heaped it +with stew and dumpling from the kettle without +the ceremony of waiting to be served.</p> + +<p>He was a tall, lithe, muscular half-breed, +with small, restless, hawk-like eyes and a +beaked nose that was not unlike the beak of +a hawk. He had the copper-hued skin and +straight black hair of the Indian, but otherwise +his features might have been those of a +white man. Indian Jake had been the trapping +companion of David and Andy the previous +winter, and, as previously stated, was this year +to be Thomas Angus's trapping partner on the +fur trails.</p> + +<p>The boys were vastly fond of Indian Jake, +and Thomas and Doctor Joe shared their +confidence, but the Bay folk generally looked +upon him with distrust and suspicion. Several +years before, he had come to the Bay a +penniless stranger. He soon earned the +reputation of being one of the best trappers in +the region. Then, suddenly, he disappeared +owing the Hudson's Bay Company a considerable +sum for equipment and provisions sold +<a name="Page_65" id="Page_65"></a>him on credit. It was well known that in the +winter preceding his disappearance Indian +Jake had had a most successful hunting season +and was in possession of ample means to pay +his debts. His failure to apply his means to +this purpose was looked upon as highly dishonest—akin, +indeed, to theft.</p> + +<p>Two years later he reappeared, again +penniless. The Company refused him further +credit, and he had no means of purchasing +the supplies necessary for his support during +the trapping season in the interior. It was +at this time that Thomas Angus broke his +leg, and it became necessary for David and +Andy to take his place on the trails. They +were too young to endure the long months of +isolation without an older and more experienced +companion. There was none but Indian Jake +to go with them, and he was engaged to hunt +on shares a trail adjacent to theirs.</p> + +<p>With his share of the furs captured by the +end of the trapping season, Indian Jake discharged +his old debt with the Company. +This was not sufficient, however, to re-establish +confidence in him. There was a lurking +suspicion among them, fostered by Uncle Ben +Rudder of Tuggle Bight, the wiseacre and +<a name="Page_66" id="Page_66"></a>oracle of the Bay, that Indian Jake's payment +of the debt was not prompted by honesty but +by some ulterior motive.</p> + +<p>Indian Jake emptied his plate. He refilled +it with the last of the stew and again emptied +it, in the interim swallowing several cups of +hot tea.</p> + +<p>"Good stew," he remarked in appreciation +and praise when his meal was finished. "When +were you gettin' back?"</p> + +<p>"I reached The Jug day before yesterday," +said Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p>"Huh!" Indian Jake grunted approval, as +he puffed industriously at his pipe. "Where +you goin' now? To see Lem Horn?"</p> + +<p>"No," Doctor Joe answered, "we're going +to Fort Pelican to get some things I brought +in on the mail boat."</p> + +<p>"I been goose huntin'," Indian Jake +explained. "Not much goose yet. Too early. +Got four. Goin' to The Jug now to give +Thomas a hand. Want to start for Seal Lake +soon. Don't want to be late."</p> + +<p>"Pop's thinkin' to start in a fortnight," +said David.</p> + +<p>"Good!" acknowledged Indian Jake. "Maybe +we start sooner. Start when we're ready. +<a name="Page_67" id="Page_67"></a>I want to go quick. Have plenty time get +there before freeze-up."</p> + +<p>Indian Jake had apparently finished talking. +Doctor Joe and the boys made several attempts +to continue the conversation, but only receiving +responsive grunts, turned to a discussion of +the flag and other scout problems, while Indian +Jake was absorbed in his own thoughts. +Presently he rose and proceeded to unroll his +bed.</p> + +<p>"Plenty of room in the tent," Doctor Joe +invited. "Better come in with us, Jake."</p> + +<p>"Goin' early. Sleep here," he declined, as +he spread a caribou skin upon the ground to +protect himself from the damp earth. Then +he produced a Hudson's Bay Company blanket, +once white but now of uncertain shade, and +rolling himself in the blanket, with his feet +toward the fire, was soon snoring peacefully.</p> + +<p>"We won't trouble to douse the fire," +Doctor Joe suggested presently. "He wants +to sleep by it, and he'll look after it. Let's +turn in."</p> + +<p>And with the front of the tent open that +they might enjoy the air and profit by the +firelight, they were soon snug in their sleeping-bags +and as sound asleep as Indian Jake.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68"></a>"High-o!"</p> + +<p>The three boys sat up. It was broad daylight, +and Doctor Joe, on his hands and knees, +was looking out of the tent.</p> + +<p>"Our visitor has gone, and there's little +wonder, for we've been sleeping like bears and +it's broad daylight. Hurry, lads, or the sun'll +be well up before we get away."</p> + +<p>The boys sprang up and were soon dressed. +The fire had burned low, indicating that +Indian Jake had been gone for a considerable +time. A fat goose was hanging from the limb +of a tree. Fastened to it was a piece of birch +bark, and scribbled upon the birch bark with +a piece of charcoal from the fire, these words:</p> + +<p>"cerprize fur the lads bekos they likes Goos."</p> + +<p>Another surprise awaited them. When they +lifted the lid of the large cooking kettle they +found it nearly full of boiled goose.</p> + +<p>"That's the way o' Indian Jake!" Andy +exclaimed. "He's always plannin' fine surprises +for folks."</p> + +<p>"It's surely a fine surprise," said Doctor +Joe. "Breakfast all ready but the tea, and +a goose for to-night."</p> + +<p>Every one hurried, but the sun was well +up when they put out the fire and hoisted +<a name="Page_69" id="Page_69"></a>sail. There was little wind, however, and the +light breeze soon dropped to a dead calm. +Doctor Joe unshipped the rudder and began +sculling, while the boys laboured at the long +oars. At length the tide began running in, +and progress was so slow that it was decided +to go ashore and await a turn of the tide or +a breeze.</p> + +<p>"Lem Horn lives just back o' that island," +said David, indicating a small wooded island. +"We might stop and bide there till a breeze +comes, and see un."</p> + +<p>In accordance with the suggestion Doctor +Joe turned the boat inside the island, and +there, on the mainland in the edge of a little +clearing and not a hundred yards distant, +stood Lem Horn's cabin. It was a secluded +and peculiarly lonely spot, hidden by the +island from the few boats that plied the Bay. +Here lived Lem Horn and his wife and two +sons, Eli, a young man of twenty-one years, +and Mark, nineteen years of age.</p> + +<p>"There's no smoke," observed Jamie.</p> + +<p>"Maybe they're all down to Fort Pelican +getting their winter outfit," suggested David.</p> + +<p>"There seems to be no one about but the +dogs," said Doctor Joe, as he stepped ashore +<a name="Page_70" id="Page_70"></a>with the painter and made it fast, while Lem's +big sledge dogs, lolling in the sun, watched +them curiously.</p> + +<p>Visitors do not knock in Labrador. The +cabins are always open to travellers whether +or not the host is at home. Andy was in +advance, and opening the door he stopped on +the threshold with an exclamation of horror.</p> + +<p>Stretched upon the floor lay Lem Horn, his +face and hair smeared with blood, and on the +floor near him was a small pool of blood. A +chair was overturned, and Lem's legs were +tangled in a fish-net.</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe leaned over the prostrate figure.</p> + +<p>"Shot," said he, "and from behind!"</p> + +<p>"Does you mean somebody shot he?" +asked David, quite horrified.</p> + +<p>"Yes, and it must have happened yesterday," +said Doctor Joe.</p> + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + +<p><a name="Page_70a" id="Page_70a"></a></p> +<p class="figcenter" style="width: 445px;"> +<img src="images/image002.jpg" width="445" height="600" alt="STRETCHED UPON THE FLOOR LAY LEM HORN" title="STRETCHED UPON THE FLOOR LAY LEM HORN" /> +<span class="caption">STRETCHED UPON THE FLOOR LAY LEM HORN</span> +</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V"></a>CHAPTER V</h3> + +<h2>LEM HORN'S SILVER FOX</h2> + + +<p>"He's alive, and this doesn't look like +a bad wound," said Doctor Joe after a +brief examination. "David, put a fire in the +stove and heat some water! Andy, find some +clean cloths! Jamie, bring up my medicine +kit from the boat!"</p> + +<p>The boys hurried to carry out the directions, +while Doctor Joe made a more careful examination +and discovered a second wound in Lem's +back, just below the right shoulder.</p> + +<p>"Both shots from the back," he mused. +"This wound explains his condition. The one +in the head only scraped the skull, and couldn't +have more than stunned him for a short time. +The other has caused a good deal of bleeding +and may be serious."</p> + +<p>With David's help Doctor Joe carried Lem +to his bunk and removed his outer clothing.</p> + +<p>The water in the kettle on the stove was now +<a name="Page_72" id="Page_72"></a>warm enough for Doctor Joe's purpose. He +poured some of it into a dish, and after dissolving +in it some antiseptic tablets, cleansed +and temporarily dressed the wounds.</p> + +<p>Restoratives were now applied. Lem +responded promptly. His breathing became +perceptible, and at length he opened his eyes +and stared at Doctor Joe. There was no +recognition in the stare and in a moment the +eyes closed. Presently they again opened, and +this time Lem's lips moved.</p> + +<p>"Where's Jane?" he asked feebly.</p> + +<p>"Your wife seems to be away and the boys, +too," said Doctor Joe. "We found you +alone."</p> + +<p>"Gone to Fort Pelican," Lem murmured +after a moment's thought. He stared at +Doctor Joe for several minutes, now with the +look of one trying to recall something, and at +length asked:</p> + +<p>"What's—been—happenin' to me?"</p> + +<p>"You've been shot," said Doctor Joe. "We +found you on the floor. Some one has shot +you."</p> + +<p>"The silver! The silver fox skin!" Lem +displayed excitement. "Be it on the table? +I had un there!"</p> + +<p><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73"></a>"There was no fur on the table when we +came," said Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p>Lem made a feeble attempt to rise, but +Doctor Joe pressed him gently back upon the +pillow, saying as he did so:</p> + +<p>"You must lie quiet, Lem. Don't try to +move. You're not strong enough."</p> + +<p>Lem, like a weary child, closed his eyes in +compliance. Several minutes elapsed before he +opened them again, and then he looked steadfastly +at Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p>"Do you know who I am?" Doctor Joe +asked.</p> + +<p>"Yes," answered Lem in a feeble voice; +"you're Doctor Joe. I knows you. I'm—glad +you—came—Doctor Joe."</p> + +<p>"Lem, you've been shot, but we'll pull you +through. It isn't so bad, but you've lost +some blood, and that's left you weak for a +little while. Don't talk now. Rest, and you'll +soon be on your feet again."</p> + +<p>While Lem lay with closed eyes, Doctor Joe +turned to consideration of the crime. If it +were true that a silver fox skin had been taken, +robbery was undoubtedly the motive for the +shooting. But who could have known of the +existence of the skin? And who could have +<a name="Page_74" id="Page_74"></a>come to this out-of-the-way place unobserved +by the old trapper and shot him without +warning?</p> + +<p>Instinctively Indian Jake rose before his +eyes. The half-breed's unsavoury reputation +forced itself forward. And there was the +circumstance of Indian Jake's visit to Flat +Point camp the previous evening, his hurried +departure in the morning, and his evident +desire to hurry into the interior wilderness +where he would be swallowed up for several +months, and from which there would be +innumerable opportunities to escape. Suddenly +Doctor Joe was startled by Lem's voice, quite +strong and natural now:</p> + +<p>"I'm thinkin' 'twere that thief Injun Jake +that shoots me."</p> + +<p>"What makes you think so?" asked Doctor +Joe.</p> + +<p>"He were huntin' geese just below here, and +he comes in and sits for a bit. I had a silver +fox skin I were holdin' for a better price than +they offers at Fort Pelican. 'Twere worth five +hundred dollars whatever, and they only offers +three hundred. I were busy mendin' my +fishin' gear before I stows un away when Injun +Jake comes. We talks about fur and I brings +<a name="Page_75" id="Page_75"></a>the silver out t' show he. Then I lays un on +the table and keeps on mendin' the gear after +he goes, thinkin' to put the fur up after I gets +through mendin'."</p> + +<p>"What time did Indian Jake come?" asked +Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p>"A bit after noon. Handy to one o'clock +'twere, for I were just boilin' the kettle. He +eats a snack with me."</p> + +<p>"How long did he stay? What time did +he go?"</p> + +<p>"I'm not knowin' just the time. I were a +bit late boilin' the kettle. I boiled un around +one o'clock. We sets down to the table about +ten after and 'twere handy to half-past when +we clears the table. Then Injun Jake has a +smoke, and I shows he the silver, and I'm +thinkin' 'twere a bit after two when he goes. +He said he were goin' to stop on Flat P'int +last night and get to Tom Angus's to-night +whatever."</p> + +<p>"A little after two o'clock when he left?"</p> + +<p>"Maybe 'twere half-past. He had a down +wind to paddle agin', and he were sayin' +'twould be slow travellin', and 'twould take +three or four hours whatever to make Flat +P'int."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76"></a>"And then what happened?"</p> + +<p>"I were settin' mendin' the gear thinkin' to +finish un and stow un away, and I keeps at +un till just sundown. I were just gettin' up +to put the kettle on for supper. That's all I +remembers, exceptin' I wakes up two or three +times and tries to move, but when I tries +there's a wonderful hurt in my shoulder, and +my head feels like she's bustin', and everything +goes black in front of my eyes. If the fur's +gone, Injun Jake took un."</p> + +<p>"It's strange," said Doctor Joe, "very +strange. There's a bullet in your shoulder. +After you rest a while we'll probe for it +and see if we can get it out. Don't talk +any more. Just lie quietly and sleep if you +can."</p> + +<p>The boys were out-of-doors. Doctor Joe was +glad they had not heard Lem's accusation +against Indian Jake. The half-breed had been +good to them, and they held vast faith in his +integrity. There was some hope that Lem's +suspicions were not well founded; nevertheless +Doctor Joe was forced to admit to himself that +circumstances pointed to Indian Jake as the +culprit. It was highly improbable that any +one else should have been in the vicinity without<a name="Page_77" id="Page_77"></a> +Lem's knowledge. It was quite possible +that Lem's statement of the hour when he +was shot was incorrect, for his mind could +hardly yet be clear enough to be certain, without +doubt, of details.</p> + +<p>Lem quickly dropped into a refreshing +sleep, and Doctor Joe left him for a little +while to join the boys out-of-doors. He found +them behind the house picking the goose +Indian Jake had left in the tree at the Flat +Point camp.</p> + +<p>"How's Lem, sir? Is he hurt bad?" +David asked as Doctor Joe seated himself +upon a stump.</p> + +<p>"He's sleeping now. After he rests a little +we'll see how badly he's hurt," said Doctor +Joe. "I fancy you chaps are thinking about +dinner. Hungry already, I'll be bound!"</p> + +<p>"Aye," grinned David, "wonderful hungry. +'Tis most noon, sir."</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe consulted his watch.</p> + +<p>"I declare it is. It must have been nearly +eleven o'clock when we reached here. I didn't +realize it was so late."</p> + +<p>"'Twere ten minutes to eleven, sir," said +Andy. "I were lookin' to see how long it +takes us to come from Flat P'int."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78"></a>"What time did we leave Flat Point?" +asked Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p>"'Twere twenty minutes before seven, sir." +Andy drew his new watch proudly from his +pocket to refer to it again, as he did upon +every possible occasion.</p> + +<p>"No," corrected David, "'twere only twenty-five +minutes before eleven when we leaves Flat +P'int, and fifteen minutes before eleven when +we gets here. I looks to see."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps your watches aren't set alike," +suggested Doctor Joe. "Suppose we compare +them."</p> + +<p>The comparison disclosed a difference, as +Doctor Joe predicted, of five minutes. Then +each must needs set his watch with Doctor +Joe's, which was a little slower than Andy's +and a little faster than David's.</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe made some mental calculations. +Both David and Andy had observed their +watches, and there could be no doubt of +the length of time it had required them to +come from Flat Point to Lem's cabin. They +had consumed four hours, but their progress +had been exceedingly slow. Indian Jake had +doubtless travelled much faster in his light +canoe, but, at best, with the wind against +<a name="Page_79" id="Page_79"></a>him, he could hardly have paddled from Lem's +cabin to Flat Point in less than two hours. +He had arrived one hour after sunset. If +Lem were correct as to the time when the +shooting took place, Indian Jake could not be +guilty.</p> + +<p>But still there was, with but one hour or +possibly a little more in excess of the time +between sunset and Indian Jake's arrival +at camp, an uncertain alibi for Indian Jake. +Lem may have been shot much earlier in the +afternoon than he supposed. When Lem grew +stronger it would be necessary to question him +closely that the hour might be fixed with +certainty. Whoever had shot and robbed Lem +must have known of the existence of the silver +fox skin, and been familiar with the surroundings. +The shots had doubtless been fired +through a broken pane in a window directly +behind the chair in which Lem was sitting at +the time.</p> + +<p>"Why not cook dinner out here over an +open fire?" Doctor Joe presently suggested. +"You chaps are pretty noisy, and if you come +into the house to cook it on the stove, I'm +afraid you'll wake Lem up, and I want him +to sleep."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80"></a>"We'll cook un out here, sir," David +agreed.</p> + +<p>"'Tis more fun to cook here," Jamie +suggested.</p> + +<p>"Very well. When it's ready you may +bring it in and we'll eat on the table. Lem +will probably be awake by that time and he'll +want something too. Stew the goose so that +there'll be broth, and we'll give some of it to +Lem to drink. You'll have to go to Fort +Pelican without me. I'll have to stay here +and take care of Lem. If the wind comes up, +and I think it will, you may get a start after +dinner," and Doctor Joe returned to the cabin +to watch over his patient.</p> + +<p>The goose was plucked. David split a stick +of wood, and with his jack-knife whittled +shavings for the fire. The knife had a keen +edge, for David was a born woodsman and +every woodsman keeps his tools always in +good condition, and the shavings he cut were +long and thin. He did not cut each shaving +separately, but stopped his knife just short +of the end of the stick, and when several +shavings were cut, with a twist of the blade +he broke them from the main stick in a bunch. +Thus they were held together by the butt to +<a name="Page_81" id="Page_81"></a>which they were attached. He whittled four +or five of these bunches of shavings, and then +cut some fine splints with his axe.</p> + +<p>David was now ready to light his fire. He +placed two sticks of wood upon the ground, +end to end, in the form of a right angle, with +the opening between the sticks in the direction +from which the wind came. Taking the butt +of one of the bunches of shavings in his left +hand, he scratched a match with his right +hand and lighted the thin end of the shavings. +When they were blazing freely he carefully +placed the thick end upon the two sticks where +they came together, on the inside of the angle, +with the burning end resting upon the ground. +Thus the thick end of the shavings was elevated. +Fire always climbs upward, and in an instant +the whole bunch of shavings was ablaze. Upon +this he placed the other shavings, the thin +ends on the fire, the butts resting upon the +two sticks at the angle. With the splints +which he had previously prepared arranged +upon this they quickly ignited, and upon +them larger sticks were laid, and in less than +five minutes an excellent cooking fire was +ready for the pot.</p> + +<p>Before disjointing the goose, David held it +<a name="Page_82" id="Page_82"></a>over the blaze until it was thoroughly singed +and the surface of the skin clear. Then he +proceeded to draw and cut the goose into +pieces of suitable size for stewing, placed them +in the kettle, and covered them with water +from Lem's spring.</p> + +<p>In the meantime Andy cut a stiff green pole +about five feet in length. The thick end he +sharpened, and near the other end cut a small +notch. Using the thick, sharpened end like a +crowbar, he drove it firmly into the ground +with the small end directly above the fire. +Placing a stone between the ground and sloping +pole, that the pole might not sag too low with +the weight of the kettle, he slipped the handle +of the kettle into the notch at the small end of +the pole, where it hung suspended over the blaze.</p> + +<p>Preparing a similar pole, and placing it in +like manner, Andy filled the tea-kettle and put +it over the fire to heat for tea.</p> + +<p>"I'm thinkin'," suggested David as he +dropped four or five thick slices of pork into +the kettle of goose, "'twould be fine to have +hot bread with the goose."</p> + +<p>"Oh, make un! Make un!" exclaimed Jamie.</p> + +<p>"Aye," seconded Andy, "hot bread would +go fine with the goose."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83"></a>Andy fetched the flour up from the boat +and David dipped about a quart of it into the +mixing pan. To this he added four heaping +teaspoonfuls of baking-powder and two level +teaspoonfuls of salt. After stirring the baking-powder +and salt well into the flour, he added +to it a heaping cooking-spoonful of lard—a +quantity equal to two heaping tablespoonfuls. +This he rubbed into the flour with the back +of the large cooking spoon until it was thoroughly +mixed. He now added water while he mixed +it with the flour, a little at a time, until the +dough was of the consistency of stiff biscuit +dough.</p> + +<p>The bread was now ready to bake. There +was no oven, and the frying-pan must needs +serve instead. The interior of the frying-pan +he sprinkled liberally with flour that the dough +might not stick to it. Then cutting a piece +of dough from the mass he pulled it into a +cake just large enough to fit into the frying-pan +and about half an inch in thickness, and +laid the cake carefully in the pan.</p> + +<p>With a stick he raked from the fire some hot +coals. With the coals directly behind the +pan, and with the bread in the pan facing the +fire, and exposed to the direct heat, he placed +<a name="Page_84" id="Page_84"></a>it at an angle of forty-five degrees, supporting +it in that position with a sharpened stick, +one end forced into the earth and the tip of +the handle resting upon the other end. The +bread thus derived heat at the bottom from +the coals and at the top from the main +fire.</p> + +<p>"She's risin' fine!" Jamie presently announced.</p> + +<p>"She'll rise fast enough," David declared +confidently. "There's no fear of that."</p> + +<p>There was no fear indeed. In ten minutes +the loaf had increased to three times its original +thickness and the side nearer the ground took +on a delicate brown, for the greater heat of a +fire is always reflected toward the ground. +David removed the pan from its support, and +without lifting the loaf from the pan, moved +it round until the brown side was opposite +the handle. Then he returned the pan to its +former position. Now the browned half was +on the upper or handle side, while the unbrowned +half was on the side near the ground, and in +a few minutes the whole loaf was deliciously +browned.</p> + +<p>While the bread was baking David drove a +stick into the ground at one side and a little +<a name="Page_85" id="Page_85"></a>farther from the fire than the pan. When the +loaf had browned on top to his satisfaction +he removed it from the pan and leaned it against +the stick with the bottom exposed to the fire, +and proceeded to bake a second loaf.</p> + +<p>"Let me have the dough that's left," Jamie +begged.</p> + +<p>"Aye, take un if you likes," David consented. +"There'll be too little for another loaf, +whatever."</p> + +<p>Jamie secured a dry stick three or four feet +long and about two inches in diameter. This +he scraped clean of bark, and pulling the dough +into a rope as thick as his finger wound it in +a spiral upon the centre of the stick. Then he +flattened the dough until it was not above a +quarter of an inch in thickness.</p> + +<p>On the opposite side of the fire from David, +that he might not interfere with David's cooking, +he arranged two stones near enough together +for an end of the stick to rest on each. Here he +placed it with the dough in the centre exposed +to the heat. As the dough on the side of the +stick near the fire browned he turned the +stick a little to expose a new surface, until his +twist was brown on all sides.</p> + +<p>"Have some of un," Jamie invited. "We'll +<a name="Page_86" id="Page_86"></a>eat un to stave off the hunger before dinner. +I'm fair starved."</p> + +<p>David and Andy were not slow to accept, +and Jamie's crisp hot twist was quickly +devoured.</p> + +<p>The kettle of stewing goose was sending +forth a most delicious appetizing odour. David +lifted the lid to season it, and stir it with the +cooking spoon. Jamie and Andy sniffed.</p> + +<p>"U-m-m!" from Jamie.</p> + +<p>"Oh, she smells fine!" Andy breathed.</p> + +<p>"Seems like I can't wait for un!" Jamie +declared.</p> + +<p>"She's done!" David at length announced.</p> + +<p>"Make the tea, Andy."</p> + +<p>Using a stick as a lifter David removed the +kettle of goose from the fire, while Andy put +tea in the other kettle, which was boiling, +removing it also from the fire.</p> + +<p>"You bring the bread along, Jamie, and you +the tea, Andy," David directed, turning into +the cabin with the kettle of goose.</p> + +<p>Lem had just awakened from a most refreshing +sleep, and when he smelled the goose +he declared:</p> + +<p>"I'm hungrier'n a whale."</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe laid claim also to no small +<a name="Page_87" id="Page_87"></a>appetite, an appetite, indeed, quite superior +to that described by Lem.</p> + +<p>"A whale!" he sniffed. "Why, I'm as +hungry as seven whales! Seven, now! Big +whales, too! No small whales about <i>my</i> +appetite!"</p> + +<p>The three boys laughed heartily, and David +warned:</p> + +<p>"We'll all have to be lookin' out or there +won't be a bite o' goose left for anybody if +Doctor Joe gets at un first!"</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe arranged a plate for Lem, upon +which he placed a choice piece of breast and +a section of one of David's loaves, which proved, +when broken, to be light and short and delicious. +Then he poured Lem a cup of rich broth from +the kettle, and while Lem ate waited upon +him before himself joining the boys at the +table.</p> + +<p>"How are you feeling, Lem?" asked Doctor +Joe when everyone had finished and the boys +were washing dishes.</p> + +<p>"My head's a bit soggy and I'm a bit weak, +and there's a wonderful pain in my right +shoulder when I moves un," said Lem. "If +'tweren't for my head and the weakness and +the pain I'd feel as well as ever I did, and I'd +<a name="Page_88" id="Page_88"></a>be achin' to get after that thief Indian +Jake. As 'tis I'll bide my time till I feels +nimbler."</p> + +<p>"Do you think you could let me fuss around +that shoulder a little while?" Doctor Joe +asked. "Does it hurt too badly for you to +bear it?"</p> + +<p>"Oh, I can stand un," said Lem. "Fuss +around un all you wants to, Doctor Joe. You +knows how to mend un and patch un up, and +I wants un mended."</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe called Andy to his assistance with +another basin of warm water, in which, as +previously, he dissolved antiseptic tablets, explaining +to the boys the reason, and adding:</p> + +<p>"If a wound is kept clean Nature will heal +it. Nothing you can apply to a wound will +assist in the healing. All that is necessary +is to keep it clean and keep it properly bandaged +to protect it from infection."</p> + +<p>"Wouldn't a bit of wet t'baccer draw the +soreness out?" Lem suggested.</p> + +<p>"No! No! No!" protested Doctor Joe, +properly horrified. "Never put tobacco or +anything else on a wound. If you do you will +run the risk of infection which might result +in blood poisoning, which might kill you."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89"></a>"I puts t'baccer on cuts sometimes and she +always helps un," insisted Lem.</p> + +<p>"It's simply through the mercy of God, +then, and your good clean blood, that it hasn't +killed you," declared Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p>From his kit Doctor Joe brought forth bandages +and gauze and some strange-looking +instruments, and turned his attention to the +shoulder. Lem gritted his teeth and, though +Doctor Joe knew he was suffering, never uttered +a whimper or complaint.</p> + +<p>An examination disclosed the fact that the +bullet had coursed to the right, and Doctor +Joe located it just under the skin directly +forward of the arm pit. Though it was +necessarily a painful wound, he was relieved to +find that no vital organ had been injured, +and he was able to assure Lem that he would +soon be around again and be as well as +ever.</p> + +<p>When the bullet was extracted Doctor Joe +examined it critically, washed it and placed +it carefully in his pocket. It proved to be a +thirty-eight calibre, black powder rifle bullet. +Doctor Joe had no doubt of that. He had +made a study of firearms and had the eye of +an expert.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90"></a>"It's half-past two, boys. A westerly breeze +is springing up, and I think you'd better go +on to Fort Pelican," Doctor Joe suggested. +"I'll give you a note to the factor instructing +him to deliver all the things to you. You'll +be able to make a good run before camping +time. Stop in here on your way back."</p> + +<p>The boys made ready and said good-bye, +spread the sails, and were soon running before +a good breeze. Doctor Joe watched them +disappear round the island, and returning to +Lem's bedside asked:</p> + +<p>"Lem, do you know what kind of a rifle +Indian Jake carried?"</p> + +<p>"I'm not knowin' rightly," said Lem. +"'Twere either a forty-four or a thirty-eight. +'Twere he did the shootin'. Nobody else has +been comin' about here the whole summer. +I'm not doubtin' he's got my silver fox, and +I'm goin' to get un back <i>whatever</i>. He'd never +stop at shootin' to rob, but he'll have to be +quicker'n I be at shootin', to keep the fur!"</p> + +<p>"When are you expecting Mrs. Horn and +the boys back?" asked Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p>"This evenin' or to-morrow whatever," said +Lem. "They've been away these five days +gettin' the winter outfit at Fort Pelican."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91"></a>If Indian Jake were guilty, it was highly +probable that he would take prompt steps to +flee the country. He could not dispose of the +silver fox skin in the Bay, for all the local +traders had already seen and appraised it, +and they would undoubtedly recognize it if +it were offered them. Indian Jake would +probably plunge into the interior, spend the +winter hunting, and in the spring make his way +to the St. Lawrence, where he would be safe +from detection.</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe made these calculations while +he sat by the bedside, and his patient dozed. +He was sorry now that he had not sent the +boys back to The Jug with a letter to Thomas +explaining what had occurred. All the evidence +pointed to Indian Jake's guilt, and there could +be little doubt of it if it should prove that the +half-breed carried a thirty-eight fifty-five rifle. +Thomas would know, and he would take prompt +action to prevent Indian Jake's escape with +the silver fox skin. Should it prove, however, +that Indian Jake's rifle was of different calibre, +he should be freed from suspicion.</p> + +<p>It was dusk that evening when the boat +bearing Eli and Mark and Mrs. Horn rounded +the island. Doctor Joe met them. They had +<a name="Page_92" id="Page_92"></a>seen the boys and had received from them +a detailed account of what had happened, and +Mrs. Horn was greatly excited. Her first +thought was for Lem, and she was vastly +relieved when she saw him, as he declared he +did not feel "so bad," and Doctor Joe assured +her he would soon be around again and as +well as ever.</p> + +<p>Then there fell upon the family a full realization +of their loss. The silver fox skin that +had been stolen was their whole fortune. The +proceeds of its sale was to have been their +bulwark against need. It was to have given +them a degree of independence, and above +all else the little hoard that its sale would +have brought them was to have lightened +Lem's burden of labour during his declining +years.</p> + +<p>Eli Horn was a big, broad-shouldered, swarthy +young man of few words. For an hour after +he heard his father's detailed story of Indian +Jake's visit to the cabin, he sat in sullen silence +by the stove. Suddenly he arose, lifted his +rifle from the pegs upon which it rested against +the wall, dropped some ammunition into his +cartridge bag, and swinging it over his shoulder +strode toward the door.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93"></a>"Where you goin', Eli?" asked Lem from +his bunk.</p> + +<p>"To hunt Indian Jake," said Eli as he closed +the door behind him and passed out into the +night.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI"></a>CHAPTER VI</h3> + +<h2>THE TRACKS IN THE SAND</h2> + + +<p>A smart south-west breeze had sprung up. +White caps were dotting the Bay, and +with all sails set the boat bowled along at a +good speed.</p> + +<p>David held the tiller, while Andy and Jamie +busied themselves with their handbooks. They +were an hour out of Horn's Bight when David +sighted the Horn boat beating up against the +wind. Drawing within hailing distance he told +them of the accident.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Horn, greatly excited, asked many +questions. David assured her that her +husband's injuries were not serious, nevertheless +she was quite certain Lem lay at death's +door.</p> + +<p>"'Tis the first time I leaves home in most +a year," she lamented. "I were feelin' inside +me 'twere wrong to go and leave Lem alone. +<a name="Page_95" id="Page_95"></a>And now he's gone and been shot and liker'n +not most killed."</p> + +<p>"'Tis too bad to make Mrs. Horn worry so. +I'm wonderfully sorry," David sympathized, +as the boats passed beyond speaking distance. +"She'll worry now till they gets home, and +the way Lem ate goose I'm thinkin' he ain't +hurt bad enough to worry much about he."</p> + +<p>"They'll get there to-night whatever," said +Andy. "'Tis the way of Mrs. Horn to worry, +even when we tells she Lem's doin' fine."</p> + +<p>"I'm wonderin' and wonderin' who 'twere +shot Lem," said David. "Whoever 'twere +had un in his heart to do murder."</p> + +<p>"Whoever 'twere looked in through the +window and saw Lem with the fine silver fox +on the table and sets out to get the fox," +reasoned Andy. "The shootin' were done +through the window where there's a pane of +glass broke out."</p> + +<p>"I sees where there's a pane of glass out," +said David. "'Twas not fresh broke though."</p> + +<p>"No, 'twere an old break," Andy agreed. +"I goes to look at un, and I sees fresh tracks +under the window where the man stands +when he shoots."</p> + +<p>"Tracks!" exclaimed David. "I never +<a name="Page_96" id="Page_96"></a>thought to look for tracks now! I weren't +thinkin' of that! You thinks of more things +than I ever does, Andy."</p> + +<p>"I weren't thinkin' of tracks either," said +Andy, disclaiming credit for their discovery. +"Whilst you bakes the bread I just goes to +look where the window is broke, and when +I'm there I sees the strange-lookin' tracks."</p> + +<p>"Strange, now! How was they strange?" +asked Jamie excitedly, scenting a deepening +mystery.</p> + +<p>"They was made with boots with <i>nails</i> in the +bottom of un," explained Andy. "They was +nails all over the bottom of them boots, and +they was big boots, them was. They made +big tracks—wonderful big tracks."</p> + +<p>"'Tis strange, now! Did you trace un, +Andy? Did you see what way the tracks +goes?" asked David.</p> + +<p>"'Twere only under the window where the +ground were soft and bare of moss that the +tracks showed the nails. I tracks un down +though to where they comes in a boat and the +boat goes again," Andy explained. "The tracks +were a day old, and down by the water the +tide's been in and washed un away. Whoever +'twere makes un were beyond findin' whatever. +<a name="Page_97" id="Page_97"></a>They were goin' away, I'm thinkin', right after +they shoots Lem and takes his silver."</p> + +<p>"Did you tell Doctor Joe about the tracks?" +asked David.</p> + +<p>"No, I weren't thinkin' to tell he when we +goes in to eat, and he weren't wantin' us in +before that fearin' we'd wake Lem. The tracks +weren't of much account whatever. The folk +that shot Lem were leavin' in a boat and we +couldn't track the boat to find out who 'twere."</p> + +<p>A drizzling rain began to fall before they +made camp that night. It was too wet and +dreary under the dripping trees for an open +camp fire. The stove was therefore brought +into service and set up in the tent, and there +they cooked and ate their supper by candle-light.</p> + +<p>On a cold and stormy night there is no article +in the camp equipment more useful than a +little sheet-iron stove. With its magic touch +it transforms a wet and dismal tent into the +snuggest and cosiest and most comfortable +retreat in the whole world. Outside the wind +was now dashing the rain in angry gusts against +the canvas, and moaning drearily through +the tree tops. Within the fire crackled cheerily. +The tent was dry and snug and warm. The +<a name="Page_98" id="Page_98"></a>bed of fragrant balsam and spruce boughs, +the smell of the fire and the soft candle-light +combined to give it an indescribable atmosphere +of luxury.</p> + +<p>In the morning the weather had not improved. +The wind had risen during the night, and was +driving the rain in sheets over the Bay. David +went outside to make a survey, and when he +returned he reported:</p> + +<p>"'Twill be a nasty day abroad."</p> + +<p>"Let's bide here till the rain stops," suggested +Jamie.</p> + +<p>"The wind's fair, and if she keeps up and +don't turn too strong we'll make Fort Pelican +by evenin' whatever, if we goes," David +objected.</p> + +<p>"'Twon't be so bad, once we're out and gets +used to un," said Andy.</p> + +<p>"No, 'twon't be so bad," urged David. "The +wind may shift and fall calm, when the rain's +over, and if we bides here we'll lose time in +gettin' to Fort Pelican. I'm for goin' and +makin' the best of un."</p> + +<p>"I won't mind un," agreed Jamie, stoutly.</p> + +<p>"I got grit to travel in the rain, and we wants +to make a fast cruise of un."</p> + +<p>It was "nasty" indeed when after breakfast +<a name="Page_99" id="Page_99"></a>they broke camp and set sail. In a little while +they were wet to the skin, and it was miserably +cold; but they were used enough to the beat +of wind and rain in their faces, and all declared +that it was not "so bad" after all. To these +hardy lads of The Labrador rain and cold was +no great hardship. It was all in a day's work, +and scudding along before a good breeze, +and looking forward to a good dinner in the +kitchen at Fort Pelican, and to a snug bed +at night, they quite forgot the cold and rain.</p> + +<p>During the morning the wind shifted to the +westward, and before noon it drew around +to the north-west. With the shift of wind the +rain ceased, and the clouds broke. Then Andy +lighted a fire in the stove, boiled the kettle +and fried a pan of salt pork. Hot tea, with +bread dipped in the warm pork grease, warmed +them and put them in high spirits.</p> + +<p>"'Tis fine we didn't bide in camp," remarked +David as he swallowed a third cup of tea. +"With this fine breeze we'll make Fort Pelican +to-night, whatever."</p> + +<p>"I'm fine and warm now," declared Jamie, +"but 'twas a bit hard to face the rain when +we starts this marnin'."</p> + +<p>"'Tis always the thinkin' about un that +<a name="Page_100" id="Page_100"></a>makes things hard to do," observed David.</p> + +<p>"Things we has to do seems wonderful hard +before we gets at un, but mostly they're easy +enough after we tackles un. The thinkin' +beforehand's the hardest part of any hard +job."</p> + +<p>The sun broke out between black clouds +scudding across the sky. The wind was +gradually increasing in force. By mid-afternoon +half a gale was blowing, a heavy sea; +was running, and the old boat, heeling to the +gale, was in a smother of white water.</p> + +<p>"We're makin' fine time!" shouted David, +shaking the spray from his hair.</p> + +<p>"We'll sure make Fort Pelican this evenin' +early," Andy shouted back.</p> + +<p>"We'll not make un!" Jamie protested. +"The wind's gettin' too strong! We'll have +to go ashore and make camp!"</p> + +<p>"The boat'll stand un," laughed David. +"She's a sturdy craft in a breeze."</p> + +<p>"I'm afeared," said Jamie.</p> + +<p>"'A scout is brave,'" quoted Andy.</p> + +<p>"'Tisn't meant for a scout to be foolish," +Jamie insisted. "I'm afeared of bein' foolish."</p> + +<p>"You was braggin' of havin' grit," Andy +taunted.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101"></a>"I has grit and a stout heart," Jamie proudly +asserted, "but there's no such need of haste +as to tempt a gale. 'Tis time to lie to and +camp."</p> + +<p>David's answer was lost in the smother of +a great roller that chased them, and breaking +astern nearly swept him from the tiller. When +the lads caught their breath there was a foot +of sea in the bottom of the boat.</p> + +<p>"Bail her out!" bellowed David, shaking +the water from his eyes.</p> + +<p>"Jamie's right! 'Tis blowin' too high for +comfort!" shouted Andy, as he and Jamie, +each with a kettle, bailed. "We'd better not +risk goin' on! Find a lee to make a landin', +Davy."</p> + +<p>"'Tis against reason not to take shelter!" +piped Jamie.</p> + +<p>"Fort Pelican's only ten miles away!" +David shouted back in protest. "We'll soon +make un in this fine breeze!"</p> + +<p>The boat was riding on her beam ends. +White horses breaking over her bow sent +showers of foam her whole length. A sudden +squall that nearly capsized her roused David +suddenly to their danger.</p> + +<p>"Reef the mains'l!" he shouted.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102"></a>"Make for the lee of Comfort Island!" +sputtered Andy through the spray, as he and +Jamie sprang for the mainsail to reef it.</p> + +<p>"Make for un!" echoed Jamie. "'Tis +against reason to keep goin'."</p> + +<p>The wind shrieked through the rigging. Another +great roller all but swamped them. +The sudden fury of the wind, the ever higher-piling +seas, and the rollers that had so nearly +overwhelmed the boat brought to David a +full sense of their peril. He had been foolhardy +and headstrong in his determination to continue +to Fort Pelican. He realized this now even +more fully than Andy and Jamie.</p> + +<p>David was a good seaman and fearless, with +a full measure of faith in his skill. Now that +his eyes were open to the peril in which he had +placed them, he knew that all the skill he +possessed and perhaps more would be required +to take them safely into shelter.</p> + +<p>Comfort Island with its offer of snug harbour +lay a half mile to leeward. David brought +the boat before the wind, and headed directly +for the island.</p> + +<p>Great breakers, pounding the high, rockbound +shores of Comfort Island, and booming +like cannon, threw their spray a hundred feet +<a name="Page_103" id="Page_103"></a>in the air, enveloping the island in a cloud of +mist.</p> + +<p>Stretching away from the island for a mile +to the westward was a rocky shoal known as +the Devil's Arm. At high tide, in calm +weather, it might be crossed, but now it was +a great white barrier of roaring breakers rising +in mighty geysers above the sea.</p> + +<p>To the eastward of the island was a mass of +black reefs known as the Devil's Tea Kettle. +The Devil's Tea Kettle was always an evil +place. Now it was a great boiling cauldron +whose waters rose and fell in a seething white +mass.</p> + +<p>It was quite out of the question to round the +Devil's Arm and beat back against the wind +to the lee of the island. There was a narrow +passage between the Devil's Tea Kettle and +the island. If they could make this passage it +would be a simple matter to fall in behind +the island to shelter and safety.</p> + +<p>All of these things David saw at a glance. +It was a desperate undertaking, but it was +the only chance, and he held straight for the +passage. If he could keep the boat to her +course, he would make it. If a sudden squall +of wind overtook them the leeway would +<a name="Page_104" id="Page_104"></a>throw them upon the island breakers and +they would be swallowed up in an instant +and pounded to pieces upon the rocks.</p> + +<p>Over and over again David breathed the +prayer: "Lord, take us through safe! Lord, +take us through safe!" His face was set, +but his nerves were iron. Andy and Jamie, +tense with the peril and excitement of the +adventure, crouched in the bottom of the boat. +As they drew near the island, Jamie shouted +encouragingly:</p> + +<p>"Keep your grit, and a stout heart like a +man, Davy!" but the roar of breakers drowned +his voice, and David did not hear.</p> + +<p>"Is you afraid, Jamie?" Andy yelled in +Jamie's ear.</p> + +<p>"Aye," answered Jamie, "but I has plenty +of grit."</p> + +<p>He who knows danger and meets it manfully +though he fears it, is brave, and Jamie and all +of them were brave.</p> + +<p>The boat was in the passage at last. David, +every nerve tense, held her down to it. On the +right seethed the Devil's Tea Kettle, sending +forth a continuous deafening roar. On the +left was Comfort Island with a boom! boom! +of thundering breakers smashing against its +high, sullen bulwarks of black rocks. The +boat was so near that spray from the breakers +fell over it in a shower.</p> + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><a name="Page_104a" id="Page_104a"></a></p> +<p class="figcenter" style="width: 726px;"> +<img src="images/image003.jpg" width="726" height="500" alt="ON THE RIGHT SEETHED THE DEVIL'S TEA KETTLE" title="ON THE RIGHT SEETHED THE DEVIL'S TEA KETTLE" /> +<span class="caption">ON THE RIGHT SEETHED THE DEVIL'S TEA KETTLE</span> +</p> +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + +<p><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105"></a>It was over in a moment. The Devil's +Tea Kettle, with all its loud threats, was +behind them. The boat shot down along +the shore, David swung to port, and they +were safe in the quiet waters to the lee of +the island.</p> + +<p>"Thank the Lord!" said David reverently, +as he brought the little craft to and the sail +flapped idly.</p> + +<p>"'Twere a close shave," breathed Jamie.</p> + +<p>"A wonderful close shave," echoed Andy.</p> + +<p>"You had grit," said Jamie. "You has +plenty o' grit, Davy—and a stout heart, like +a man. 'Twere wonderful how you cracked +her through! There's nary a man on the +coast could have done better'n that!"</p> + +<p>"'Twere easy enough," David boasted with +a laugh as he wiped the spray from his face, +and unshipping the rudder proceeded to scull +the boat into a natural berth between the +rocks.</p> + +<p>Hardly a breath of the gale raging outside +reached them in their snug little harbour. +The boat was made fast with the painter to +<a name="Page_106" id="Page_106"></a>a ledge, and the boys climed to the high rocky +shore.</p> + +<p>An excellent camping place was discovered +a hundred yards back in a grove of stunted +spruce trees that had rooted themselves in +the scant soil that covered the rocks, and held +fast, despite the Arctic blasts that swept +across the Bay to rake the island during the +long winters. Here the tent was pitched, and +everything carried up from the boat and stowed +within to dry. Fifteen minutes later the +tent stove was crackling cheerily and sending +forth comfort to the drenched young mariners. +"There'll be no hurry in the marnin'," +said David when they had eaten supper and +lighted a candle. "We'll stay up to-night +till we gets the outfit all dried, and if we're +late about un we'll sleep a bit later in the +marnin', to make up. We'll make Fort Pelican +in an hour, or two hours <i>what</i>ever, if we has a +civil breeze in the marnin'."</p> + +<p>"We'll not be gettin' away from Fort +Pelican to-morrow, will we?" asked Andy.</p> + +<p>"We'll take the day for visitin' the folk +and hearin' the news, and start back the +marnin' after," suggested David.</p> + +<p>It was near midnight when they crawled +<a name="Page_107" id="Page_107"></a>into their beds to drop into a ten-knot sleep, +and they slept so soundly than none of them +awoke until they were aroused by the sun +shining upon the tent the next morning.</p> + +<p>Breakfast was prepared and eaten leisurely. +There was no hurry. The wind had fallen +to a moderate stiff breeze, and Fort Pelican, +through the narrows connecting Eskimo Bay +with the sea outside, was almost in sight.</p> + +<p>When the dishes were washed Andy and +Jamie took down the tent, while David +shouldered a pack and preceded them to the +place where they had moored the boat the +previous evening. A few minutes later he came +running back, and in breathless excitement +startled them with the announcement:</p> + +<p>"The boat's gone!"</p> + +<p>"Gone where?" asked Andy incredulously.</p> + +<p>"Gone! I'm not knowin' <i>where</i>!" exclaimed +David.</p> + +<p>"Has she been took?" asked Jamie, excitedly.</p> + +<p>"Took!" said David. "The painter were +untied and she were took! There's tracks about +of big boots with nails in un!"</p> + +<p>Andy and Jamie ran down with David. +No trace of the boat was to be found.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108"></a>In the earth above the shore were plainly +to be seen the tracks of two men wearing hobnailed +boots.</p> + +<p>"They's fresh tracks," declared David.</p> + +<p>"Made this marnin'," Andy agreed. "They's +the same kind of tracks as the ones I see +under Lem's window. Whoever 'twere made +these tracks shot Lem and took his silver."</p> + +<p>"And now we're left here on the island with +no way of gettin' off," said David.</p> + +<p>"What'll we be doin'? How'll we ever +get away?" asked Jamie in consternation.</p> + +<p>But that was a question none of them could +answer.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII"></a>CHAPTER VII</h3> + +<h2>THE MYSTERY OF THE BOAT</h2> + + +<p>The boys looked at each other in consternation. +They were marooned on a +desolate, rocky, sparsely wooded island. +Boats passed only at rare intervals, and a fortnight, +or even a month, might elapse before +an opportunity for rescue offered. Their provisions +would scarcely last a week, and the +island was destitute of game.</p> + +<p>"Whoever 'twere took the boat," Andy +suggested presently, "were on the island when +we comes."</p> + +<p>"Aye," David agreed, "and makin' for +Fort Pelican. They been up as far as Lem's +and they's gettin' away with Lem's silver +to sell un."</p> + +<p>"'Tis strange boots they wears," said Jamie. +"Strange boots them is with nails in un."</p> + +<p>"'Twere no man of The Labrador made them +tracks," David declared.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110"></a>"I never sees boots with nails in un," said +Andy, "except the boots the lumber folks +wears over at the new camp at Grampus +River."</p> + +<p>"Aye," agreed David, "they wears un. +When we goes over with Pop last month when +the big steamer comes I sees un. Plenty of +un wears boots with nails in."</p> + +<p>"That's who 'twere took our boat!" said +Andy. "'Twere men from the Grampus River +lumber camp."</p> + +<p>"Let's track un and see where they were +camped," suggested David.</p> + +<p>The trail was easily followed. Here and +there a footprint appeared where soil had +drifted in among the rocks above the shore. +The trail led them three hundred yards to +the eastward, and then down into a sheltered +hollow just above the water's edge, where a +small boat was drawn up upon the shore.</p> + +<p>"Here's a boat!" exclaimed Jamie, who had +run ahead.</p> + +<p>"A boat!" shouted David. "They left +un and took our boat."</p> + +<p>"And good reason!" said Jamie, who had +reached the skiff. "The bottom's half knocked +out of un."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111"></a>It was evident that the boat had been driven +upon the rocks in making a landing, and a +jagged hole a foot square appeared in the +bottom, rendering it in that condition quite +useless. Near by a tent had been pitched, +and there was no doubt that the men who had +abandoned the boat had been in camp for a +day at least in the sheltered hollow.</p> + +<p>The boys turned the boat over and examined +the break.</p> + +<p>"'Tis a bad place to mend," observed David.</p> + +<p>"But we can mend un," declared Andy. +"We can mend un by noon whatever, and get +to Fort Pelican this evenin'."</p> + +<p>"I'm doubtin'," David shook his head. +"'Twill take a day to mend un whatever, and +she'll be none too safe. 'Twill be hard to make +un water-tight."</p> + +<p>"We can mend un," Andy insisted.</p> + +<p>A close examination of the tracks disclosed +the fact that there had undoubtedly been two +men in the party. They had reached the +island before the rain of two days before. +This was disclosed by the fact that some of +the tracks were partly washed away by the +rain, and the earth was caked where the wind +and sun had dried it afterwards.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112"></a>Natives of the coast, as was the case with +David and Jamie and Andy, wore home-made +sealskin boots in summer and buckskin +moccasins in winter. The sealskin boots had +moccasin feet with one thickness of skin, and +were soft and pliable. None of them ever +wore soled boots that would admit of hobnails. +It was plain to the boys, therefore, that the +men who made the tracks were not natives +of the country.</p> + +<p>Early in the summer a lumber company +had begun the erection of a camp at Grampus +River, which lay twenty miles to the southward +from The Jug, and on the opposite side +of Eskimo Bay. A steamship had brought in +men and supplies, and all summer men had +been building camps and preparing for lumbering +operations during the coming winter.</p> + +<p>It was the first steamer to enter the Bay, +and its advent had been an occasion of much +curiosity on the part of the people. Many +of them made excursions to Grampus River +to see the strangers at work. Thomas had +made such an excursion with David and Andy. +Strange, rough, blasphemous men they seemed +to the God-fearing folk of the country. These +were the men wearing hobnailed boots of which +<a name="Page_113" id="Page_113"></a>David spoke, and there was small doubt in +the mind of the boys that the men who had +camped on the island and had stolen the +boat were from the Grampus River lumber +camp.</p> + +<p>It proved a tedious undertaking to repair +and make seaworthy the damaged boat. The +trees on the island were, for the most part, +small gnarled spruce, twisted and stunted by +the northern blasts which swept the Bay. +After some search, however, they discovered +a white spruce tree suitable for their purpose, +with a trunk ten inches in diameter. David +felled it and cut from its butt a two-foot length. +This he proceeded to split into as thin slabs +as possible. Then with their jack-knives the +boys began the tedious task of whittling the +surfaces of the slabs into smooth boards, first +trimming them down to an inch and a half +in thickness with the axes.</p> + +<p>"How'll we make un fast when we gets un +done?" asked Jamie. "We has no nails."</p> + +<p>"I'm thinkin' of that," said David. "I'm +not knowin' yet, but we'll find some way."</p> + +<p>"I've got a way," Andy announced. "I +been thinkin' and thinkin' and I found a way +to make un fast."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114"></a>"How'll you make un fast now without +nails?" David asked expectantly.</p> + +<p>"We'll tie un with spruce roots, like the +Injuns puts their canoes together," explained +Andy. "We'll cut holes in each end of un +in the right place to tie un fast to the braces +of the boat. We'll have to make holes in the +bottom of the boat each side of the braces +for the roots to come through so we can make +un fast. That'll hold un. Then when we've +made un fast we'll caulk un up with spruce +gum."</p> + +<p>"Why can't we cut strips of sealskin off +our sleepin' bags for strings to tie un with?" +suggested David. "'Twould be easier than +makin' spruce root strings, and quicker too, +and the sealskin would be strong and hold +un tight."</p> + +<p>"Yes, and soon's the sealskin gets wet +she'll stretch," Andy objected. "Then the +boards would loosen up and let the water in."</p> + +<p>"I never thought of the sealskin stretchin', but +she sure would. You're fine at thinkin' things +out, Andy!" said David admiringly. "The +spruce roots won't stretch though. 'Tis a +fine way to fix un now, and she'll work. There's +no doubtin' she'll work."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115"></a>"'Twill take all day," Andy calculated, +adding with pride, "but once we gets un on +they'll hold. I'll get the roots now and put un +to soak."</p> + +<p>Andy dug around the white spruce tree and +in a little while gathered a sufficient quantity +of long string-like roots. He scraped them +and then split them carefully with his knife. +When they were split he filled the big kettle +with water from a spring, placed the roots +in it and put them over the fire to boil.</p> + +<p>They all worked as hard as they could on +the boards, and when dinner time came David +announced that the boards were smooth enough +for their purpose.</p> + +<p>"Now all we'll have to do," said he as he +sliced pork for dinner, "is to make the holes +in un and fasten un on."</p> + +<p>"What were that now?" Jamie interrupted +as a hoarse blast broke upon the air.</p> + +<p>"'Tis the steamer whistle!" David dropped +the knife with which he was slicing pork, and +with Jamie and Andy at his heels ran to the +top of the highest rock on the island, where +a wide view of the Bay lay before them.</p> + +<p>A mile away the lumber company's big +steamer was feeling its way cautiously toward +<a name="Page_116" id="Page_116"></a>the west, bound inward to the Grampus River +camps. The boys waved their caps and shouted +at the top of their lungs, but no one on the +steamer appeared to see them. It was not +until the great strange vessel had become a +mere speck in the distance that they turned +back to the preparation of dinner.</p> + +<p>"They didn't see us," said David in disappointment.</p> + +<p>"We're not wantin' to go to Grampus River, +whatever," Andy cheered. "We're goin' to +Fort Pelican when we has the boat fixed up, +and she's 'most done."</p> + +<p>After dinner they settled to the task. Two +of the narrow boards which they had prepared +were required to cover the break, which occurred +between two braces. The edges of the boards +where they were to join were whittled straight, +that the joint might be made as tight as +possible. Then David held them in place +while Andy marked the position for the holes +through which the spruce root thongs were to +pass.</p> + +<p>Four holes were to be cut in each end of both +boards, and holes to match in the bottom of +the boat, and in an hour they were neatly +reamed out. When Andy removed his thongs +<a name="Page_117" id="Page_117"></a>from the water they were quite soft and pliable, +and proved to be strong and tough.</p> + +<p>Andy lashed the boards into place, threading +the thongs through the holes and drawing +them round the brace several times at each +place where provision had been made for them. +Thus a dozen thicknesses of fibre bound the +boards to the brace at each set of holes.</p> + +<p>It was now necessary to collect the spruce +gum and prepare it. Gum was plentiful +enough, and in half an hour they had collected +enough to half fill the frying-pan. To this +was added a little lard, and the gum and +grease melted over the fire and thoroughly +mixed.</p> + +<p>"What you puttin' the grease in for?" +asked Jamie curiously.</p> + +<p>"So when we pours un in the cracks and she +hardens she won't be brittle and crack," David +explained.</p> + +<p>The hot mixture was now poured into the +joints between the boards and at all points +where the new boards came into contact with +the boat, and into the holes where the lashings +occurred. In a few minutes it hardened, and +the boys surveyed their work with pride and +satisfaction.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118"></a>"Now we'll try un," said David, "and see +if she leaks."</p> + +<p>"She'll never leak where she's mended," +asserted Andy.</p> + +<p>They slipped the boat into the water and +Andy's prediction proved true. Not a drop +of water oozed through the joints, and the boat +was as snug and tight and seaworthy as any +boat that ever floated.</p> + +<p>"'Tis too late to start to-night," said David, +"but we'll be away at crack o' dawn in the +marnin', whatever. 'Tis fine they left the sail +and oars."</p> + +<p>And at crack of dawn in the morning the +boys were away. The day was misty and disagreeable, +but David and Andy knew the way +as well as you and I know our city streets. +They rounded the Devil's Arm, a friendly tide +helped them through the narrows, and in mid-forenoon +the low white buildings of Fort +Pelican appeared in misty outline through the +fog. A few minutes later they swung alongside +the Fort Pelican jetty, and there, to their +amazement, firmly tied to the jetty, lay their +own big boat.</p> + +<p>No one about the Post could explain whence +the boat had come or how it reached the jetty. +<a name="Page_119" id="Page_119"></a>The Post servants stated that they had not +noticed it until after the departure of the lumber +steamer. They had recognized it as Thomas +Angus's boat, for in that country men know +each other's boats as our country folk know +their neighbours' horses.</p> + +<p>The lumber ship had arrived on the morning +of the gale, and had anchored in the harbour +awaiting the arrival of one of the company's +officers on the mail boat. The mail boat had +arrived the previous morning, and both the +mail boat and lumber ship had steamed away +shortly after the mail boat's arrival. Many +lumbermen had been ashore. If any of them +had come in the boat they had mingled among +the others and had departed either on the +lumber ship, which had gone up the Bay to +Grampus River, or on the mail boat to Newfoundland.</p> + +<p>"I'm thinkin'," said David, "whoever 'twere +took Lem's silver fox and our boat went to +Newfoundland to sell the fur."</p> + +<p>"There's no doubtin' <i>that</i>," agreed Andy.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII</h3> + +<h2>TRAILING THE HALF-BREED</h2> + + +<p>Eli Horn paused in the enclosed porch +to shoulder his provision pack, left there +upon his arrival home earlier in the evening. +He was passing from the porch when Doctor +Joe opened the door.</p> + +<p>"Eli," said Doctor Joe, closing the door +behind him, "may I have a word with you?"</p> + +<p>"Aye, sir," and Eli stopped.</p> + +<p>"I just wished to speak a word of warning," +said Doctor Joe quietly. "Be cautious, Eli, +and do nothing you'll regret. Don't be too +hasty. We suspect Indian Jake, but none +of us knows certainly that he shot your father +or took the silver fox skin."</p> + +<p>"There's no doubtin' he took un! Pop +says he took un, and he knows. I'm goin' +to get the silver if I has to kill Injun Jake."</p> + +<p>Eli spoke in even, quiet tones, but with the +<a name="Page_121" id="Page_121"></a>dogged determination of the man trained to +pit his powers of endurance against Nature +and the wilderness. He gave no suggestion of +boastfulness, but rather of the man who has +an ordinary duty to perform, and is bent upon +doing it to the best of his ability.</p> + +<p>"Don't you think you had better wait and +start in the morning? It's a nasty night to +be out," Doctor Joe suggested. "'Twill be +hard to make your way to-night with the wind +against you as well as the dark. If you wait +until morning it will give us time to talk things +over."</p> + +<p>"I'll not stop till I gets the silver," Eli +stubbornly declared, "and I'll get un or kill +Injun Jake."</p> + +<p>"See here, Eli," Doctor Joe laid his hand +on Eli's arm, "your father says he was not +shot until sundown. Indian Jake was at our +camp at Flat Point within the hour after sundown. +He never could have paddled that +distance against a down wind in an hour. +The boys and I were four hours coming over +here from Flat Point Camp, and I know Indian +Jake could not have covered the distance in +anything like an hour."</p> + +<p>"'Twere some trick of his! He shot un and +<a name="Page_122" id="Page_122"></a>he took the silver!" Eli insisted. "Good-bye, +sir. I've got to be goin' or he'll slip away +from me."</p> + +<p>"Be careful, Eli," Doctor Joe pleaded. +"Don't shoot unless you're forced to do so +to protect yourself."</p> + +<p>"'Twill be Injun Jake'll have to be careful," +returned Eli as he strode away in the darkness, +and Doctor Joe knew that Eli had it in his +heart to do murder.</p> + +<p>The night was pitchy black and a drizzling +rain was falling, but Eli had often travelled +on as dark nights, and he was determined. +He chose a light skiff rigged with a leg-o'-mutton +sail. The wind was against him and +with the sail reefed and the mast unstepped +and stowed in the bottom of the boat, he slipped +a pair of oars into the locks and with strong, +even strokes pulled away, hugging the shore, +that he might take advantage of the lee of +the land.</p> + +<p>Presently the drizzle became a downpour, +but Eli, indifferent to wind and weather, rowed +tirelessly on. There was a dangerous turn +to be made around Flat Point. Here for a +time he lost the friendly shelter of the land, +and continuous and tremendous effort was +<a name="Page_123" id="Page_123"></a>called for in the rough seas; but, guided by +the roar of the breakers on the shore, he compassed +it and presently fell again under the +protection of the land.</p> + +<p>With all his effort Eli had not progressed +a quarter of the distance toward The Jug +when dawn broke. With the first light he made +a safe landing, cut a stick of standing dead +timber, chopped off the butt, and splitting it +that he might get at the dry core, whittled +some shavings and lighted a fire. His provision +bag was well filled. No Labradorman +travels otherwise. A kettle of hot tea sweetened +with molasses, a pan of fried fat pork and some +hard bread (hardtack) satisfied his hunger.</p> + +<p>The wind was rising and the rain was flying +in blinding sheets, but the shore still protected +him, and the moment his simple breakfast +was eaten Eli again set forward. Presently, +however, another long point projected out +into the Bay to force him into the open. He +turned about in his boat and for several minutes +studied the white-capped seas beyond the point.</p> + +<p>"I'll try un," he muttered, and settled again +to his oars.</p> + +<p>But try as he would Eli could not force his +light craft against the wind, and at length he +<a name="Page_124" id="Page_124"></a>reluctantly dropped back again under the lee +of the land and went ashore.</p> + +<p>"There'll be no goin' on to-day," he admitted. +"I'll have to make camp whatever."</p> + +<p>Under the shelter of the thick spruce forest +where he was fended from the gale and drive +of the rain, he cut a score of poles. One of +them, thicker and stiffer than the others, he +lashed between two trees at a height of perhaps +four feet. At intervals of three or four inches +he rested the remaining poles against the one +lashed to the trees, arranging them at an angle +of fifty-five degrees and aligning the butts of +the poles evenly upon the ground. These +he covered with a mass of boughs and marsh +grass as a thatching. The roof thatched to +his satisfaction, he broke a quantity of boughs +and with some care prepared a bed under the +lean-to.</p> + +<p>His shelter and bed completed, he cut and +piled a quantity of dry logs at one end of the +lean-to. Then he felled two green trees and +cut the trunks into four-foot lengths. Two +of these he placed directly in front of the +shelter and two feet apart, at right angles to +the shelter. Across the ends of the logs farthest +from his bed he piled three of the green sticks +<a name="Page_125" id="Page_125"></a>to serve as a backlog, and in front of these +lighted his fire. When it was blazing freely +he piled upon it, and in front of the green +backlogs, several of the logs of dry wood.</p> + +<p>Despite the rain, the fire burned freely, and +presently the interior of Eli's lean-to was warm +and comfortable. He now removed his rain-soaked +jacket and moleskin trousers and suspended +them from the ridge-pole, where they +would receive the benefit of the heat and +gradually dry.</p> + +<p>Stripped to his underclothing, Eli crouched +before the fire beneath the front of the shelter. +At intervals he turned his back and sides and +chest toward the heat and in the course of an +hour succeeded in drying his underclothing to +his satisfaction. His moleskin trousers were +still damp, but he donned them, and renewing +the fire he stretched himself luxuriously for +a long and much needed rest.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX"></a>CHAPTER IX</h3> + +<h2>ELI SURPRISES INDIAN JAKE</h2> + + +<p>When Eli awoke late in the afternoon the +rain had ceased, but the wind was blowing +a living gale. There was a roar and boom and +thunder of breakers down on the point and +echoing far away along the coast. The wind +shrieked and moaned through the forest.</p> + +<p>Under his shelter beneath the thick spruce +trees, however, Eli was well enough protected. +He renewed the fire, which had burned to +embers, and prepared dinner. The storm that +prevented him from travelling would also hold +Indian Jake a prisoner. This thought yielded +him a degree of satisfaction.</p> + +<p>He took no advantage of the leisure to +reconsider and weigh the circumstantial evidence +against Indian Jake. He had accepted it as +conclusive proof of the half-breed's guilt and +he had already convicted him of the crime. +Once Eli had arrived at a conclusion his mind +<a name="Page_127" id="Page_127"></a>was closed to any line of reasoning that might +tend to controvert that conclusion. He prided +himself upon this characteristic as strength of +will, while in reality it was a weakness. But +Eli was like many another man who has enjoyed +greater opportunities in the world than +ever fell to Eli's lot.</p> + +<p>Once Eli had set himself upon a trail he never +turned his back upon the object he sought or +weakened in his determination to attain it. +His object now was to overtake Indian Jake +and have the matter out with the half-breed +once and for all. Well directed, this trait of +unyielding determination is an excellent one. +It is the foundation of success in life if the +object sought is a worthy one. But in this +instance Eli's objective was not alone the +recovery of the silver fox skin, though this was +the chief incentive. Coupled with it was a +desire for vengeance, prompted by hate, and +vengeance is the child of the weakest and +meanest of human passions.</p> + +<p>When Eli had eaten he shouldered his rifle +and strolled back into the forest. Presently +he flushed a covey of spruce grouse, which +rose from the ground and settled in a tree. +Flinging his rifle to his shoulder, he fired and +<a name="Page_128" id="Page_128"></a>a grouse tumbled to the ground. He fired +again, and another fell. The living birds, +with a great noise of wings, now abandoned the +tree and Eli picked up the two victims. He +had clipped their heads off neatly. This he +observed with satisfaction. His rifle shot true +and his aim was steady. What chance could +Indian Jake have against such skill as that?</p> + +<p>Eli plucked the birds immediately, while +they were warm, for delay would set the feathers, +and his game being sufficient for his present +needs, he returned to his bivouac on the point.</p> + +<p>It was mid-afternoon the following day before +the wind and rain had so far subsided as to +permit Eli to turn the point and proceed upon +his journey. Even then, with all his effort, +the progress he made against the north-west +breeze was so slow that it was not until the +following forenoon that he reached The Jug. +Thomas saw him coming and was on the jetty +to welcome him.</p> + +<p>"How be you, Eli?" Thomas greeted. "I'm +wonderful glad to see you. Come right up and +have a cup o' tea."</p> + +<p>"How be you, Thomas? Is Injun Jake +here?"</p> + +<p>"He were here," said Thomas, "but he +<a name="Page_129" id="Page_129"></a>only stops one day to help me get the outfit +ready and then he goes on in his canoe to hunt +bear up the Nascaupee River whilst he waits +there for me to go to the Seal Lake trails. +You want to see he?"</p> + +<p>"Aye, and I'm goin' to see whatever!"</p> + +<p>While Eli had a snack to eat and a cup of +tea with Thomas and Margaret he told Thomas +of Indian Jake's call upon his father, of the +shooting and of the robbery which followed.</p> + +<p>"Injun Jake turns back after leavin' and +shoots Pop and takes the silver," he concluded, +"and I'm goin' to get the silver whatever, +even if I has to shoot Injun Jake to get un!"</p> + +<p>"Is you sure, now, 'twere Injun Jake does +un?" asked Thomas, unwilling to believe his +friend and partner capable of such treachery. +By disposition Thomas was naturally cautious +of passing judgment or of accusing anyone of +misdeed without conclusive proof.</p> + +<p>"There's no doubtin' that!" insisted Eli. +"There was nobody else to do un. 'Twere +Injun Jake."</p> + +<p>A shift of wind to the southward assisted +Eli on his way. Early that evening he reached +the Hudson's Bay Company's post, twenty +miles west of The Jug. Here he stopped for +<a name="Page_130" id="Page_130"></a>supper and learned from Zeke Hodge, the +Post servant, that Indian Jake had passed up +Grand Lake in his canoe two days before. +Zeke expressed doubt as to Eli's finding the +half-breed at the Nascaupee River. He stated +it as his opinion that if Indian Jake were guilty +of the crime, as he had no doubt, he was planning +an escape and had in all probability immediately +plunged into the interior, in which case he +was already hopelessly beyond pursuit and +had fled the Bay country for good and all. +Like Eli, Zeke convicted the half-breed at once.</p> + +<p>The Eskimo Bay Post of the Hudson's Bay +Company is the last inhabited dwelling as the +traveller enters the wilderness; he might go +on and on for a thousand miles to Hudson +Bay and in the whole vast expanse of distance +no other human habitation will he find. His +camps will be pitched in the depths of forests +or on desolate, naked barrens; and always, +in forests or on barrens, he will hear the rush +and roar of mighty rivers or the lapping waves +of wide, far-reaching lakes. The timber wolf +will startle him from sleep in the dead of night +with its long, weird howl, rising and falling +in dismal cadence, or the silence will be broken +perchance by the wild, uncanny laugh of the +<a name="Page_131" id="Page_131"></a>loon falling upon the darkness as a token of +ill omen, but in all the vast land he will hear +no human voice and he will find no human +companionship.</p> + +<p>Indian Jake had told Thomas that he would +camp above the mouth of the Nascaupee River, +a dozen miles beyond the point where the river +enters Grand Lake. It was a journey of sixty +miles or more from the Post.</p> + +<p>Eli set out at once. Five miles up a short +wide river brought him to Grand Lake, which +here reached away before him to meet the +horizon in the west, and at the foot of the lake +he camped to await day, for the lake and the +country before him were unfamiliar.</p> + +<p>Early in the afternoon of the third day +after leaving the Post, Eli's boat turned into +the wide mouth of the Nascaupee River, and +keeping a sharp look-out, he rowed silently up +the river. It was an hour before sundown +when his eye caught the white of canvas among +the trees a little way from the river.</p> + +<p>With much caution Eli drew his boat among +the willows that lined the bank and made it +fast. Slinging his cartridge bag over his +shoulder, and with his rifle resting in the hollow +of his arm, ready for instant action, he crept +<a name="Page_132" id="Page_132"></a>forward toward Indian Jake's camp. Taking +advantage of the cover of brush, he moved +with extreme caution until he had the tent and +surroundings under observation.</p> + +<p>There was no movement about the camp and +the fire was dead. It was plain Indian Jake +had not returned for the evening. Eli crouched +and waited, as a cat crouches and waits patiently +for its prey.</p> + +<p>Presently there was the sound of a breaking +twig and a moment later Indian Jake, with +his rifle on his arm, appeared out of the forest.</p> + +<p>Eli, his rifle levelled at Indian Jake, rose +to his feet with the command:</p> + +<p>"You stand where you is; drop your gun!"</p> + +<p>"Why, how do, Eli? What's up?" Indian +Jake greeted. "What's bringin' you to the +Nascaupee?"</p> + +<p>"You!" Eli's face was hard with hate. +"'Tis you brings me here, you thief! I wants +the silver you takes when you shoots father, +and 'tis well for you Doctor Joe comes and +saves he from dyin' or I'd been droppin' a +bullet in your heart with nary a warnin'!"</p> + +<p>"What you meanin' by that?"</p> + +<p>"Be you givin' up the silver?"</p> + +<p>"No!"</p> + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><a name="Page_132a" id="Page_132a"></a></p> +<p class="figcenter" style="width: 726px;"> +<img src="images/image004.jpg" width="726" height="500" alt=""YOU STAND WHERE YOU IS AND DROP YOUR GUN"" title=""YOU STAND WHERE YOU IS AND DROP YOUR GUN"" /> +<span class="caption">"YOU STAND WHERE YOU IS AND DROP YOUR GUN"</span> +</p> +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + +<p><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133"></a>"I say again, give me that silver fox you +stole from father!"</p> + +<p>Indian Jake's small hawk eyes were narrowing. +He made no answer, but slipped his right hand +forward toward the trigger of his rifle, though +the barrel of the rifle still rested in the hollow +of his left arm.</p> + +<p>"Drop un!" Eli commanded, observing the +movement. "Drop that gun on the ground!"</p> + +<p>Indian Jake stood like a statue, eyeing Eli, +but he made no movement.</p> + +<p>"I said drop un!" Eli's voice was cold +and hard as steel. He was in deadly earnest. +"If you tries to raise un or don't drop un +before I count ten I'll put a bullet in your +heart!"</p> + +<p>Indian Jake might have been of chiselled +stone. He did not move a muscle or wink +an eye-lash but his small eyes were centred +on every motion Eli made. He still held his +rifle, the barrel resting in the hollow of his left +arm, his right hand clutching the stock behind +the hammer, his finger an inch from the trigger.</p> + +<p>For an instant there was a death-like silence. +Then Eli began to count:</p> + +<p>"One—two—three—four—"</p> + +<p>The words fell like strokes of a hammer upon +<a name="Page_134" id="Page_134"></a>an anvil. Eli intended to shoot. He was a +man of his word. He made no threat that he +was not prepared to execute, and Indian Jake +knew that Eli would shoot on the count of ten.</p> + +<p>"Five—six—seven—eight—"</p> + +<p>Still Indian Jake made no move save that +the little hawk eyes had narrowed to slits. +He did not drop his gun. From all the indications, +he did not hear Eli's count.</p> + +<p>"Nine—ten!"</p> + +<p>True to his threat, Eli's rifle rang out with +the last word of his count.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X"></a>CHAPTER X</h3> + +<h2>THE END OF ELI'S HUNT</h2> + + +<p>Indian Jake, quick as a cat, had thrown +himself upon the ground with Eli's last +count. Like the loon that dives at the flash +of the hunter's gun, he was a fraction of a second +quicker than Eli. Now, lying prone, his rifle +at his shoulder, he had Eli covered, and the +chamber of Eli's rifle was empty.</p> + +<p>"Drop that gun!" he commanded.</p> + +<p>Eli, believing in the first instant that Indian +Jake had fallen as the result of the shot, was +taken wholly by surprise. He stood dazed +and dumb with the smoking rifle in his hand. +He did not at once realize that the half-breed +had him covered. His brain did not work +as rapidly as Indian Jake's. His immediate +sensation as he heard Indian Jake's voice was +one of thankfulness that, after all, there was +no stain of murder on his soul. Even yet he +had no doubt Indian Jake was wounded. He +<a name="Page_136" id="Page_136"></a>had taken deadly aim, and he could not understand +how any escape could have been possible.</p> + +<p>"Drop that gun!" Indian Jake repeated. +"I won't count. I'll shoot."</p> + +<p>Eli's brain at last grasped the situation. +Indian Jake was grinning broadly, and it +seemed to Eli the most malicious grin he had +ever beheld. He did not question Indian Jake's +determination to shoot. It was too evident +that the half-breed, grinning like a demon, +was in a desperate mood. Eli dropped his +rifle as though it were red hot and burned his +hands.</p> + +<p>"Step out here!" Indian Jake, rising to +his feet, indicated an open space near the tent.</p> + +<p>Eli did as he was told.</p> + +<p>"Shake the ca'tridges out of your bag on +the ground!"</p> + +<p>Eli turned his cartridge bag over, and the +cartridges which it contained rattled to the +ground.</p> + +<p>"Turn your pockets out!"</p> + +<p>A turning of the pockets disclosed no further +ammunition.</p> + +<p>Indian Jake took Eli's rifle from the ground, +emptied the magazine, and placed the rifle +in the tent.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137"></a>"Where's your boat?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Just down here."</p> + +<p>"You go ahead. Show me."</p> + +<p>Eli guided Indian Jake to the boat, and while +he remained on the bank under threat of the +rifle, the half-breed went through his belongings +in the boat in a further search for ammunition. +Satisfied that there was none, he replaced the +things as he had found them, and was grinning +amiably when he rejoined Eli upon the bank.</p> + +<p>"Come 'long up to camp," he invited, quite +as though Eli were a most welcome guest.</p> + +<p>"Give me that silver fox!" Eli's anger +had mastered his surprise.</p> + +<p>"I won't give un to you, but don't be mad, +Eli," Indian Jake grinned in vast enjoyment.</p> + +<p>"You stole un!" Eli burst out. "And +you were thinkin' to do murder!"</p> + +<p>"Did I now?"</p> + +<p>"You did!"</p> + +<p>Indian Jake did not deign to deny or confess. +Eli, at his command, returned to camp. Indian +Jake handed him the tea-kettle.</p> + +<p>"Fill un at the river," he directed.</p> + +<p>While Eli obeyed silently and sullenly, +Indian Jake lighted a fire, and when Eli returned +put the kettle on. Then he brought +<a name="Page_138" id="Page_138"></a>forth his frying-pan, filled it with sliced venison, +and as he placed it over the fire, remarked:</p> + +<p>"Knocked a buck down this mornin'."</p> + +<p>Eli said nothing. The odour of frying venison +was pleasant. Eli was hungry, and when the +venison was fried and tea made, he swallowed +his pride and silently accepted Indian Jake's +invitation to eat.</p> + +<p>When they had finished, Indian Jake cut a +large joint of venison, and presented it to +Eli with his empty rifle, remarking as he +did so:</p> + +<p>"The deer's meat's a surprise. I like to +surprise folks. Taste good goin' home. I'll +keep the ca'tridges. You might hurt somebody +if you had un. You'll get quite a piece +down before you camp to-night."</p> + +<p>"Were you takin' that silver?" asked Eli, +changing his accusation to a question.</p> + +<p>"Maybe I were and maybe I weren't," +Indian Jake grinned. "'Twouldn't do me any +good to tell you if I had un, and if I told you +I didn't have un you wouldn't believe me. +Maybe I've got un. You better be goin'. I'd +ask you to stay, Eli, and I'd like to have +you, but you don't like me and you'd better +go on."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139"></a>"I don't want the deer's meat," said Eli in +sullen resentment.</p> + +<p>"You ain't got any ca'tridges, and you +can't shoot any fresh meat," insisted Indian +Jake, adding with a grin: "She'll go good. +Take un along, I got plenty. It's just a little +surprise present for you bein' so kind as not +to shoot me."</p> + +<p>Eli, doubtless deciding that he had better +take what he could get, though a bit of venison +was small compensation for a silver fox, accepted +the meat. Indian Jake accompanied him to +the boat, and as he dropped down the river +he could see Indian Jake still on the bank +watching him until he turned a bend.</p> + +<p>Without cartridges for his rifle, Eli felt +himself as helpless as a wolf without teeth or +a cat without claws. He was subdued and +humbled. He had had Indian Jake completely +in his power, and through delay in +taking prompt advantage of his position, had +permitted the half-breed to capture and disarm +him.</p> + +<p>The thought increased his anger toward +Indian Jake. He had no doubt the man had +the silver fox in his possession. If there had +been any doubt in the first instance that Indian +<a name="Page_140" id="Page_140"></a>Jake was guilty, and Eli had never admitted +that there was doubt, he was now entirely +satisfied of the half-breed's guilt. Indian Jake, +indeed, had quite boldly stated that he "might" +have it, and Eli accepted this as an admission +that he <i>did</i> have it.</p> + +<p>"There'll be no use getting more ca'tridges +and goin' back," Eli mused. "He's had a +warnin' and he'll not bide in that camp another +day. He'll flee the country."</p> + +<p>Then Eli's thoughts turned to his old father +and mother.</p> + +<p>"The silver's gone, and it leaves Pop and +Mother in a bad way," he mused. "They've +been fondlin' that skin half the winter. Pop's +had un out a hundred times to see how fine +and black 'twere, and shook un out to see how +thick and deep the fur is. And they been +countin' and countin' on the things they'd +be gettin' and needs, and can't get now she's +gone. And they been countin' on the money +they'd have to lay by for their feeble days +when they needs un. They'll never get over +mournin' the loss of un. 'Twere worth a +fortune, and Pop'll never cotch another. He +were hopin' and hopin' every year as long as +I remembers to cotch a silver, and none ever +<a name="Page_141" id="Page_141"></a>comes to his traps till this un comes. And now +she's gone!"</p> + +<p>Perhaps had the silver fox skin been Eli's +own, and perhaps had his father and mother +not built so many hopes and laid so many +plans upon the little fortune it was to have +brought them, Eli would never have ventured +to the verge of murder to recover it. Even +now, with all his regrets, he thanked God +from the bottom of his heart that he had not +killed Indian Jake and stained his hands with +blood.</p> + +<p>"'Twere the mercy of God sent the bullet +abroad," said he reverently. "Indian Jake's a +thief and he deserves to be killed, but if I'd killed +he I'd never rested an easy hour again while +I lives. But I might o' clipped his trigger +hand, whatever," he thought with regret. "I +can clip off the head of a pa'tridge every time, +and I might have clipped his hand, and got +the skin and took he back for Doctor Joe +to fix up."</p> + +<p>Three days later Eli pulled his boat wearily +into The Jug. The boys had returned, and +with Thomas they met him on the jetty.</p> + +<p>"Did you find Injun Jake?" Thomas asked +anxiously.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142"></a>"Aye," said Eli, "he were there."</p> + +<p>Eli volunteered no further details for a +moment. Then he added:</p> + +<p>"I didn't kill he, thank the Lord, but he's +got the silver. He said he had un, and he took +my ca'tridges away from me."</p> + +<p>"Said he had un? Now, that's strange—wonderful +strange. Come in, Eli, supper's +ready," Thomas invited, manifestly relieved +that Eli had not succeeded in accomplishing +his rash purpose. "You'll bide the night +with us, and while you eats tell us about un, +and the lads'll tell what were happenin' to +they."</p> + +<p>Margaret was setting the table. She greeted +Eli cordially, and arranged a plate for him +while he washed at the basin behind the stove.</p> + +<p>"Come," invited Thomas, "set in. We've +got a wonderful treat."</p> + +<p>"What be that, now?" asked Eli as Margaret +placed a dish of steaming, mealy boiled potatoes +upon the table.</p> + +<p>"Potaters," Thomas announced grandly. +"Doctor Joe brings un on the mail boat from +where he's been, and onions too. Margaret, +peel some onions and set un on for Eli. They's +fine just as they is without cookin'."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143"></a>The onions came, and when thanks had been +offered Eli tasted his first potato.</p> + +<p>"They is fine, now! Wonderful fine eatin'," +he declared.</p> + +<p>"Try an onion, now. They's fine, too," +Thomas urged.</p> + +<p>Eli took an onion.</p> + +<p>"She has a strange smell," he observed before +biting into it.</p> + +<p>Eli took a liberal mouthful of the onion. +He began to chew it. A strained look spread +over his face. Tears filled his eyes. But Eli +was brave, and he never flinched.</p> + +<p>"'Tis fine, I like un wonderful fine," Eli +volunteered presently, adding, "if she didn't +burn so bad."</p> + +<p>"Take just a bit at a time," advised Thomas, +laughing heartily, "and eat un with bread +or potaters and you won't notice the burn +of un."</p> + +<p>Presently Eli told of his experiences with +Indian Jake, and Andy told of the tracks he +had seen under the window, and all of the +boys told of what had happened on the island, +the theft of the boat, the tracks of the nailed +boots and the discovery of the boat at Fort +Pelican.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144"></a>Then Eli made an announcement that again +laid the burden of suspicion more strongly +than ever upon Indian Jake.</p> + +<p>"I were workin' at the lumber camps a week +this summer helpin' they out," said Eli. +"Whilst I were there Indian Jake comes and +trades a pair of skin boots with one of the lumber +men for a pair of their boots, the kind with +nails in un. He the same as says he has the +fur, and 'twere he took un."</p> + +<p>"Injun Jake wears skin boots when he come +to our camp on Flat P'int," said David.</p> + +<p>"Aye, 'tis likely," admitted Eli. "He'd be +wearin' skin boots in the canoe, whatever. +The nailed boots would be hard on the canoe. +He uses the nailed boots trampin' about, but +he'd change un when he travels in his canoe."</p> + +<p>The whole question was canvassed pro and +con, and due consideration given to the length +of time that Indian Jake must have consumed +in passing from Horn's Bight to Flat Point. +This was alone sufficient in the mind of Thomas +and the boys to lift all suspicion from Indian +Jake, but Eli still held stubbornly to the +opposite view.</p> + +<p>Two days later, and on the eve of Thomas's +departure for the trails, Doctor Joe returned. +<a name="Page_145" id="Page_145"></a>Lem had so far recovered that a further stay +at Horn's Bight was unnecessary.</p> + +<p>Thomas and Doctor Joe quietly discussed +the shooting incident. Lem, it appeared, had +later decided that he may have been shot +much earlier in the afternoon than sundown. +What had occurred had fallen into the hazy +uncertainty of a dream.</p> + +<p>"What kind of a rifle does Indian Jake use?" +asked Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p>"A thirty-eight fifty-five," said Thomas.</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe drew from his pocket the bullet +extracted from Lem's wound. Thomas examined +it critically.</p> + +<p>"There's no doubtin' 'tis a thirty-eight fifty-five," +he admitted. "'Tis true Injun Jake +gets a pair of nailed boots like the lumber +folk wears. But Injun Jake'll tell me whether +'twere he shot Lem. Injun Jake'll be fair +about un with me whatever. 'Tis hard for +me to believe he did un. If he did, he'll be +gone from the Nascaupee when I gets there. +If he didn't, I'll find he waitin'!"</p> + +<p>"Let us hope he'll be there, and let us hope +he's innocent," said Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p>Some day and in some way every sin is +punished and every criminal is discovered. It +<a name="Page_146" id="Page_146"></a>is an immutable law of God that he who does +wrong must atone for the wrong. We do +not always know how the punishment is brought +about, but the guilty one knows. And so +with the shooting and robbery of Lem Horn. +Many months were to pass before the mystery +was to be solved, and then the revelation +was to come in a startling manner in the course +of an adventure amid the deep snows of winter.</p> + +<p>Thomas sailed away the following morning. +They watched his boat pass down through +The Jug and out into the Bay, and then the +silence of the wilderness closed upon him, +and no word came as to whether or no Indian +Jake met him at the Nascaupee River camp.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI"></a>CHAPTER XI</h3> + +<h2>THE LETTER IN THE CAIRN</h2> + + +<p>In Labrador September is the pleasantest +month of the year. It is a period of +calm when fogs and mists and cold dreary +rains, so frequent during July and the early +half of August, are past, and Nature holds her +breath before launching upon the world the +bitter blasts and blizzards and awful cold of +a sub-arctic winter. There are days and days +together when the azure of the sky remains +unmarred by clouds, and the sun shines uninterruptedly. +The air, brilliantly transparent, +carries a twang of frost. Evening is bathed +in an effulgence of colour. The sky flames +in startling reds and yellows blending into +opals and turquoise, with the shadowy hills +lying in a purple haze in the west.</p> + +<p>Then comes night and the aurora. Wavering +fingers of light steal up from the northern +horizon. Higher and higher they climb until +<a name="Page_148" id="Page_148"></a>they have reached and crossed the zenith. +From the north they spread to the east and +to the west until the whole sky is aflame with +shimmering fire of marvellous changing colours +varying from darkest purple to dazzling white.</p> + +<p>The dark green of the spruce and balsam +forests is splotched with golden yellow where +the magic touch of the frost king has laid his +fingers and worked a miracle upon groves of +tamaracks. The leaves of the aspen and white +birch have fallen, and the flowers have faded.</p> + +<p>Spruce grouse chickens, full grown now, rise +in coveys with much noise of wing, and perch +in trees looking down unafraid upon any who +intrude upon their forest home. Ptarmigans, +still in their coat of mottled brown and white, +gather in flocks upon the naked hills to feed, +where upland cranberries cover the ground in +red masses; or on the edge of marshes where +bake apple berries have changed from brilliant +red to delicate salmon pink and offer a sweet +and wholesome feast.</p> + +<p>The honk and quack of wild geese and ducks, +southward bound in great flocks, disturbs the +silence of every inlet and cove and bight, where +the wild fowl pause for a time to rest and feed +upon the grasses.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149"></a>After Thomas's departure Doctor Joe and +the boys tidied and snugged things up for the +winter, and many a fine hunt they had, mornings +and evenings, in the edge of a near-by marsh +through which a brook coursed to join the sea. +Hunting geese and ducks was indeed a duty, +for they must needs depend upon the hunt +for no small share of their living. It was a +duty they enjoyed, however. Skill and a +steady hand and a quick eye are necessary +to success, and they never failed to return +with a full bag.</p> + +<p>The weather was now cold enough to keep +the birds sweet and fresh, and before September +closed a full two score of fine fat geese were +hanging in the enclosed lean-to shed with a +promise of many good dinners in the future.</p> + +<p>Between the hunting and the work about +home there was no time to be dawdled vainly +away. When there was nothing more pressing +the wood-pile always stood suggestively near +the door inviting attention, and it was necessary +to saw and split a vast deal of wood to keep +the big box stove supplied, for it had a great +maw and would develop a marvellous appetite +when the weather grew cold.</p> + +<p>No extended travelling was possible for +<a name="Page_150" id="Page_150"></a>Doctor Joe on his errands of mercy until the +sea should freeze and dogs and sledge could +be called into service. But during the fine +September weather he and the boys made +two short trips up the Bay, where there was +ailing in some of the families.</p> + +<p>In the course of these excursions they took +occasion to visit Let-in-Cove, which lay just +outside Grampus River, where the new lumber +camps were situated, and also Snug Cove and +Tuggle Bight, a little farther on. At Let-in-Cove +Peter and Lige Sparks, at Snug Cove +Obadiah Button and Micah Dunk, and at +Tuggle Bight Seth Muggs were enlisted in the +scout troop, and a handbook left at each +place. These, indeed, with the three Anguses, +were the only boys of scout age within a radius +of fifty miles of The Jug.</p> + +<p>There was great excitement among the lads, +and Doctor Joe proudly declared that there +would be no finer or more efficient troop of +scouts in all the world than his little troop of +eight when they had become familiar with +their duties.</p> + +<p>A new field and a broader vision of life was +to open to these Labrador lads, whose life +was of necessity circumscribed. They had never +<a name="Page_151" id="Page_151"></a>been given the opportunity to play as boys play +in more favoured lands. They had never known +the joys of football or cricket or the hundred +other fine, health-giving games that are a part +of the life of every English or Canadian boy. +They had never seen a circus or a moving picture +and they had never been in a schoolroom in +their lives.</p> + +<p>This opportunity to play and study as other +boys play and study in other lands was the +thing, perhaps, they longed for above all else. +Doctor Joe had inspired them with ambition. +They hungered to learn and here was the +Handbook with many things in it to study, +and through Doctor Joe and the book they +were to learn the joy of play.</p> + +<p>The new recruits to the troop, however, as +well as the Angus boys, had been close students +of their native wilderness. Their eyes were +sharp and their ears were quick. They knew +every tree and flower and plant that grew +about them. They knew the birds and their +calls and songs. They knew every animal, its +cry and its habits of life. They knew the fish +of the sea and lake and stream. All this +was a part of their training for their future +profession of hunters and fishermen.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152"></a>As hunters they had not learned to look +upon the wild things of the woods as friends +and associates. To them the animals were +only beasts whose valuable pelts could be traded +at the Post for necessaries of life or whose flesh +was good to eat. Success in life depended +upon man's ability to outwit and slay birds +or animals, and the lads held for them none of +the human sympathy that would have added +so much to their own enjoyment.</p> + +<p>Now they were to have a new view of life. +Doctor Joe was to open to them a wider, happier +vista. It was not in the least to breed in them +discontent with their circumscribed life, but +rather to open to their consciousness the +opportunities that lay within their reach, and +to make their life richer and broader and vastly +more worth while.</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe explained to the five recruits +the Tenderfoot Scout requirements, much as +he had explained them to David and Andy +and Jamie. Wilderness dwellers who must +take in and fix in the mind at a glance every +unusual tree or stump or stone if they would +find their trail, have a peculiar and remarkable +gift of memory born of long practice and the +fact that they must perforce depend upon +<a name="Page_153" id="Page_153"></a>their ability to retain the things they see and +hear. The lads, therefore, required no repetition, +and learned their lessons with ease.</p> + +<p>Though they had never attended school they +could all read, stumbling, to be sure, over the +big words, but nevertheless grasping the meaning. +Doctor Joe, during his years in the Bay, had +taught not only the Angus boys but many of +the other young people to read. Doctor Joe +now marked the pages that they were to study, +and before he and the Angus boys turned back +across the Bay to The Jug it was agreed that +the new troop should hold a week's camp +to study and practise together. Hollow Cove, +some five miles from The Jug, was to be the +camping ground, and the first week in October +was decided upon as the time.</p> + +<p>"We'll start to camp on Monday marnin' of +that week," suggested David. "Come over +to The Jug on Sunday. 'Twill be fine to have +us all go to camp together."</p> + +<p>"Aye," agreed Micah, "'twill be now, and +we'll come, and have a fine time."</p> + +<p>"And we'll all study about the scout things +whilst we're in camp," piped up Jamie enthusiastically.</p> + +<p>"That we will now," David assured.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154"></a>"Lige, you and Peter bring a tent and stove, +and all you need for setting up camp," Doctor +Joe directed. "Can you bring one, too, +Seth?"</p> + +<p>"Aye," said Seth, "I'll bring un, but we +have no tent stove. Pop took un to the +huntin'."</p> + +<p>"Obadiah or Micah may bring a stove. +You have one, haven't you?" Doctor Joe +asked.</p> + +<p>"Aye," said Obadiah, "I has one. I'll +bring un along."</p> + +<p>"You three fix up an outfit amongst you. +There'll be three in a tent," Doctor Joe explained. +"Andy can go in with Peter and +Lige, and I'll tent with Davy and Jamie."</p> + +<p>There was little else than the proposed +camping expedition talked about on the return +to The Jug, and in the days that followed +David, Andy and Jamie devoted every spare +moment to the study of first aid and signalling. +Doctor Joe, with no end of patience, drilled +them so thoroughly in first aid that they were +soon really expert in applying bandages. He +even instructed them in improvising splints +and reducing fractures. In this secluded land, +where for three hundred miles up and down +<a name="Page_155" id="Page_155"></a>the coast there was no other surgeon than +Doctor Joe, it was not unlikely that some day +they would be called upon to set a leg or an +arm.</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe was as ignorant, however, of +the art of signalling as were the lads, and he +must needs take it up from the very beginning +and study with them. It was decided that +they should learn both the semaphore and +Morse codes, and Doctor Joe insisted that +neither he nor the lads should consider the +Second Class test satisfactorily passed until +they had not only learned the codes but could +send and receive messages at the rate of speed +designated in the handbook as required for +the First Class test.</p> + +<p>"It wouldn't be fair to the scouts in the +big cities," he declared. "They have to learn +a great many things that we already know +how to do, like building fires, using the axe +and knife, and tracking. Those are things +we've been doing all our lives and won't have +to practise. We must make it just as hard +for ourselves to become Second Class Scouts +as it is for the city lads. So we'll make the +signalling test that much more difficult."</p> + +<p>"I'm thinkin' that's fine now," enthused +<a name="Page_156" id="Page_156"></a>David, "and when we learn un we'll know +that much more."</p> + +<p>"That's the idea!" said Doctor Joe. "And +we'll not only learn the sixteen principal points +of the compass, but we'll learn to box the +compass to the quarter point as navigators +do."</p> + +<p>"I can box un now," grinned David.</p> + +<p>"So can I box un!" Andy exclaimed. +"Dad told me how, same as he told Davy."</p> + +<p>"And I can learn to box un easy," promised +Jamie.</p> + +<p>Margaret joined them one fine day in the +forest behind the cabin when they took their +Second Class cooking test, and a jolly day +they made of it. It was easy enough to roast +a spruce grouse on the end of a stick. Even +Jamie had done that many times. But Doctor +Joe was called upon to solve the problem of +cooking potatoes without cooking utensils, and +he did it so satisfactorily that the lads practised +it every day afterward for a week.</p> + +<p>He resorted to a simple and ordinary method. +He dug a narrow trench about six inches deep. +Upon this he built a fire, which he permitted +to burn until there was a good accumulation +of ashes. Then he pushed the fire back and +<a name="Page_157" id="Page_157"></a>raked the ashes out of the trench. The potatoes +were now placed in a row at the bottom of the +trench and covered with a good layer of hot +ashes. The fire was now drawn back over +the ashes that covered the potatoes and permitted +to burn briskly.</p> + +<p>At the end of an hour he brushed the fire +back at one end sufficiently to allow a long +slender splinter to be pushed down through the +ashes and through a potato. The splinter did +not penetrate the potato easily and the fire +was drawn in again to burn for another quarter +of an hour. Then it was raked out and the +potatoes removed, to find that, while the skins +were not in the least burned or even scorched, +the potatoes were done to a turn.</p> + +<p>"You couldn't have baked them better in +your oven, Margaret," laughed Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p>"I never could have baked un half as well," +admitted Margaret, adding, "'tis a wonderful +way of cookin'."</p> + +<p>"Doctor Joe's fine cookin' everything," +declared Andy. "I always likes his cookin' +wonderful well."</p> + +<p>"Thank you, Andy. That's high praise," +acknowledged Doctor Joe, "but I could learn +a great deal about cooking from Margaret."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158"></a>"I just does plain cookin'," Margaret +deprecated, but flushed with pleasure at the +compliment.</p> + +<p>On the last day of September, which was +a Friday, David and Doctor Joe crossed over +to the Hudson's Bay Post and took Margaret +with them for a visit to Kate Huddy, the +Post servant's daughter, where she was to +remain while the Scouts were enjoying their +camp at Hollow Cove.</p> + +<p>David and Doctor Joe returned to The Jug +on Saturday, and when the other members +of the troop arrived in a boat on Sunday, had +their own tent equipment and food packed +and ready for the little expedition on Monday +morning.</p> + +<p>It was a jolly meeting. The evening was +cold, and when supper was eaten they gathered +around the big box stove which crackled +cheerfully, and Doctor Joe announced that as +this was the first meeting of the troop they +must organize and elect leaders, just as troops +were organized everywhere else in the world.</p> + +<p>When he had thoroughly explained the +necessary steps he read to them a brief constitution +and by-laws which he had previously +prepared. These he had them adopt in due +<a name="Page_159" id="Page_159"></a>form, and then asked some one to nominate a +patrol leader.</p> + +<p>Every one, with one accord, nominated +David, and he was duly, solemnly, and unanimously +elected.</p> + +<p>"Now," suggested Doctor Joe, "we must +have an assistant patrol leader. Who shall +it be?"</p> + +<p>"Andy," said Seth Muggs. "Andy's been to +the trails and he knows more about un than +anybody exceptin' Davy."</p> + +<p>"'Twouldn't be fair," objected Andy. +"Davy's patrol leader. 'Tis but right we +put in one of you that comes from across the +Bay. I'm saying Peter Sparks, now."</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe agreed with Andy, and Peter +Sparks was declared elected. Then Seth +nominated Andy for scribe.</p> + +<p>"Because," Seth explained, "Andy'll be +right handy to Doctor Joe all the time and +Doctor Joe can help he to do the writin', and +he needs help."</p> + +<p>When the election was completed Doctor +Joe explained the duties of the officers and the +necessity of obedience to them in the performance +of scout duties.</p> + +<p>"Our troop is a team," said Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160"></a>"We must pull together. We are like a team +of dogs hauling a komatik. If the dogs all +follow the leader and pull together the best +that ever they can they get somewhere. If +they don't follow the leader, and one pulls in +one direction and another pulls in a different +direction and some don't pull at all, they never +get anywhere and aren't of much use. Our +troop is going to be the best we can make it, +by all pulling together and doing the very best +we know how.</p> + +<p>"We must always be ready to help other +people at all times, as we promise to do in +our oath. If we live up to that we'll do a great +deal of good, first and last, up and down the +Bay. If some one's life is in danger and we +can help them even at the risk of our own we +must help them. Everybody wants to be +happy. There's nothing that will make us +so happy as to do some fine thing every day +that will make someone else happy.</p> + +<p>"We must train our brains and our hands +so that we shall always be prepared to do the +right thing and do it quickly. We must learn +to keep our temper and not get angry. Let +us take the hard knocks that come to us with +a smile."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161"></a>The remainder of the evening was spent +in playing some rollicking games that the lads +had never heard of before, and which Doctor +Joe taught them. There was the one-legged +chicken fight, and one or two others, as well +as hand wrestling, though that they had seen +the Indians play and had practised themselves. +They all declared that they had never in their +lives had so much fun.</p> + +<p>An early start the following morning brought +them to Hollow Cove at ten o'clock. Hollow +Cove was a fine natural harbour. A brook +poured down through a gulch to empty into +the Bay, and near its mouth was an excellent +landing-place. Not far from the brook, and +a hundred feet back from the shore, they +pitched their tents in the shelter of the spruce +forest where the camp would be well protected +from winds and storms.</p> + +<p>While the others set up the sheet-iron stoves +in the three tents and broke spruce boughs +and laid the bough beds, David, Micah, and +Lige volunteered to cut wood.</p> + +<p>"There's some fine dry wood just to the +east'ard and close to shore," suggested David, +as they picked up their axes. "It's right +handy."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162"></a>A dozen yards from the camp David suddenly +stopped and exclaimed:</p> + +<p>"What's that now?"</p> + +<p>On a great sloping rock close to the shore, +but hidden by a jutting point from the place +where they had landed, was a recently made +cairn of boulders capped by a large flat stone.</p> + +<p>"Somebody's been here!" said David as +they hurried forward to examine the cairn.</p> + +<p>"'Tis wonderful strange to pile stones that +way," said Micah. "'Tis new made, too."</p> + +<p>"Maybe it's a cache," suggested Lige, "but +it's a rare small un. Look and see. 'Tis a +strange place for a cache!"</p> + +<p>David lifted the flat stone from the top and +discovered beneath it a small tin can. In the +can was a folded paper. He removed the +paper and unfolding it discovered a message +written in a cramped, scrawling hand.</p> + +<p>"Read un, Davy! Read un out loud! +You reads writin' good!" said Lige, and David +read:</p> + +<div class="blockquot"><p>"i cum and stayed 2 hour, and wood not stay no +longer for i hed to go and did not see you comin any +were. Then i gos to the rock were We Was the day +We was hunting Wen We come here ferst time. Then +i done this way. i Pases 20 Pases up To a Hackmatack +<a name="Page_163" id="Page_163"></a>Tree. it was north. then i Pases 40 Pases west To +a round rock, Then i Pases 60 Pases south To a wite +berch i use cumpus. Then i climes a spruce Tree +and hangs it and it is out of site in the Branches. +if You plays me Crookid look out, i wont Stand for +no Crooked work and You know what i will do to +anybody plays me Crooked. You no Were to put +my haf of the Swag. So i can get it Wen i go to +get it."</p></div> + +<p>There was no signature.</p> + +<p>"That's a strange un—wonderful strange," +said David.</p> + +<p>"Stranger'n anything I ever sees," declared +Lige.</p> + +<p>"Whatever is un all about?" asked Micah.</p> + +<p>"That's the strangeness of un," said Lige.</p> + +<p>"Let's show un to Doctor Joe," suggested +David.</p> + +<p>But Doctor Joe, when they broke in upon +him a moment later, was as mystified as they.</p> + +<p>"It looks," said he, "as though something +had been cached and here are the directions +for finding the cache. There's a threat in the +letter, too, and that looks bad. It's a mystery, +lads, we'll try to search out. It doesn't look +right. Perhaps it's the clue to some crime."</p> + +<p>"How can we search un out?" asked David +<a name="Page_164" id="Page_164"></a>excitedly. "We're not knowin' the rock, and +there's plenty of rocks hereabouts."</p> + +<p>"That's true," admitted Doctor Joe. "Go +and put the paper back as you found it, and +we'll see what we can make out of it later."</p> + +<p>The whole camp was excited and every one +followed David back to the cairn when he +returned to restore the letter to its place in +the can.</p> + +<p>"'Tis something somebody's tryin' to hide," +suggested Peter.</p> + +<p>"There's no doubtin' that," said David. +"I'm thinkin' 'tis not right whatever 'tis."</p> + +<p>"We'll get camp in shape and have our +dinner and then try to solve the mystery," +said Doctor Joe. "It is a real mystery, for +no one would make an ordinary cache in this +way, and if it was an honest matter there would +be no threat."</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII"></a>CHAPTER XII</h3> + +<h2>THE HIDDEN CACHE</h2> + + +<p>When camp was made snug and dinner +disposed of, Doctor Joe followed the boys +down to the cairn. A careful examination +was made of the soil surrounding the rock +upon which the cairn was built, and in loose +gravel close to the shore were found the imprints +of feet. It was evident, however, that +rain had fallen since the tracks were made, for +they were so nearly washed away that there +could be no certainty whether they were made +by moccasins or nailed boots.</p> + +<p>"'Twere a week ago they were here whatever," +observed David, rising upon his feet +after a close scrutiny upon hands and knees. +"I'm thinkin' we'll see no sign of un now to +help us trail un to the rock the writin' tells +about."</p> + +<p>"The ground was hard froze a week ago +<a name="Page_166" id="Page_166"></a>just as 'tis now," said Lige. "They'd be +leavin' no tracks on froze ground."</p> + +<p>"They makes the tracks that shows here +whether the ground were froze or not," observed +Seth.</p> + +<p>"The gravel were loose and dry so 'tweren't +froze," explained Lige, "but away from the +dry gravel 'twere all froze, and they'd make +no tracks to show. Leastways that's how I +thinks about un."</p> + +<p>"That's good logic," said Doctor Joe. "I'm +afraid we'll have to find the rock without the +assistance of any tracks to guide us. There will +surely be other signs, however, and we'll look +for them while we look for the rock."</p> + +<p>"Suppose now we scatters and looks up +along the brook and along the ridge for the +rock the pacin' were done from," suggested +Andy. "'Tis like to be a different lookin' +rock from most of un around here or they +wouldn't have picked un."</p> + +<p>"And 'tis like to be a big un too," volunteered +Micah. "They'd be pickin' no little rock +for that, whatever. I'm thinkin' 'twill be +easy to know un if we sees un."</p> + +<p>"Yes," agreed Doctor Joe, "the rock is +probably larger or in some other way noticeably<a name="Page_167" id="Page_167"></a> +different from the others. It may be +along the brook, or it may not. They were +hunting. It may be a rock where they camped, +or where they agreed to meet after their +hunt, and probably where they boiled their +kettle."</p> + +<p>"They weren't Bay folk, whatever," asserted +David. "The writin' ain't like any +of the Bay folkses writin'. None of un here +could write so fine."</p> + +<p>"None of the Bay folk would be hidin' +things that way either," said Andy. "If +'twere anything small enough to hide in a tree +they'd been takin' un with un and not leavin' +un behind. If 'twere too big to carry, they'd +just left un in a cache and come back for un +when they gets ready and not do any writin' +about un."</p> + +<p>"I think you are right, Andy," agreed Doctor +Joe. "For the reasons you give and for still +other reasons I feel very certain strangers to +the Bay left the cache."</p> + +<p>"What were they meanin' by 'swag,' Doctor +Joe?" asked Andy. "I never hears that +word before. 'Tis a wonderful strange word."</p> + +<p>"It usually means," explained Doctor Joe, +"something that has been stolen. The use +<a name="Page_168" id="Page_168"></a>of that word is one of the reasons that leads +me to conclude that it was not written by any +of our people of the Bay. I am quite sure none +of them knows what the word means, and +like you I doubt if any of them ever heard it. +There seems no doubt, indeed, that strangers +to these parts wrote it, and as there are no +other strangers in the Bay than the lumbermen, +we are safe in concluding that the cairn +was built and the note written by someone +from the lumber camp at Grampus River."</p> + +<p>"'Swag' is a wonderful strange soundin' word, +now," said David. "I never hears un before."</p> + +<p>"I'm thinkin' I knows what 'tis they hid +now!" exclaimed Andy suddenly. "'Tis <i>Lem +Horn's silver</i>! 'Tis the men hid un that shot +Lem and stole the silver! 'Tweren't Indian +Jake shot Lem at all! 'Twere men from the +lumber camp! What they calls 'swag' is +Lem's silver!"</p> + +<p>"That's what 'tis, now! 'Tis sure Lem +Horn's silver!" David exploded excitedly. +"I never would have thought of un bein' +that! Andy's wonderful spry thinkin' things +out, and he's mostly always right, too!"</p> + +<p>"And Indian Jake never stole un! He never +stole un!" Jamie burst out joyfully. "I +<a name="Page_169" id="Page_169"></a>were knowin' all the time he wouldn't steal un! +Indian Jake wouldn't go shootin' folk and +stealin' from un!"</p> + +<p>"It may be," said Doctor Joe. "At any +rate it seems extremely probable the 'swag' +as they call it is stolen property that has been +hidden. That word and the threat together +with the other circumstances make it quite +certain, indeed, that whatever it is they refer +to was stolen. That's a safe conclusion to +begin with. We have decided that we may be +quite sure, also, that the men that hid the cache +so carefully were none of our own Bay people, +but men from the lumber camp. We have +heard of nothing else than Lem Horn's silver +fox having been stolen in the Bay. We have +some ground, therefore, to suppose that the +'swag' is Lem Horn's silver fox. It will +be a fine piece of work to search out the cache, +and if it proves to contain Lem's silver fox, +recover it for him. We will be doing a good +turn to Lem and at the same time will lift +suspicion from Indian Jake. If we find the +cache and there is nothing in it that should not +be there, we will not interfere with it. Now +how shall we go about it to trace it? Let's +hear what you chaps think is the best plan."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170"></a>"We'll separate and look for the rock they +tells about," suggested David. "There's like +to be some signs so we'll know un when we +sees un. If we finds the rock 'twill not be +hard to pace off the way they says in the +paper."</p> + +<p>"And we'll be lookin' out for other signs," +added Peter. "'Tis likely they've been cuttin' +wood or breakin' twigs or makin' a fire."</p> + +<p>"The brook ain't froze, and I'm thinkin' +now they been walkin' there and leavin' tracks, +if they were going' for water, and 'tis likely +they were gettin' water to boil the kettle," +reasoned Seth.</p> + +<p>"Suppose," suggested Doctor Joe, "two of +you follow up the brook, one on each side, and +the rest of us will spread out on each side of +the two following the brook, and look for the +rock and other signs that will guide us."</p> + +<p>"We better make a writin' for each of us +just like the writin' in the can with what it +says about how to find the cache if we finds +the rock," suggested Andy. "I for one'll +never be rememberin' all of un without a writin' +to look at whatever."</p> + +<p>"That's true, Andy," agreed Doctor Joe, +"and none of us would."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171"></a>"Andy always thinks of things like that!" +exclaimed David admiringly.</p> + +<p>"Get the paper from the can and bring it +up to camp," directed Doctor Joe. "We'll +make several copies of the directions. I have +paper and pencil there in the tent."</p> + +<p>David lifted the flat stone from the top of +the cairn, and removing the paper he and the +others followed Doctor Joe to his tent, where +Doctor Joe made nine copies of the explicit +directions, one for himself and one for each of +the lads.</p> + +<p>"You had better return this now to the can," +said Doctor Joe, handing the paper back to +David, "for if it should prove after all that +we have been mistaken, and that the cache +does not contain Lem's silver fox or other +stolen property, it would be wrong, and +we would not wish, to interfere with the man +for whom this paper was left here finding +the cache."</p> + +<p>"'Twould be fair wicked to do that," agreed +David. "I'll put un back."</p> + +<p>When the paper had again been returned +to its hiding-place Doctor Joe detailed the +boys to their different positions. David and +Peter were to follow the brook, David on the +<a name="Page_172" id="Page_172"></a>left side and Peter on the right side as they +ascended. Seth Muggs, Obadiah Button, Andy +and Jamie were to spread out at intervals +on the left from David, and Lige Sparks, Micah +Dunk and Doctor Joe on the right side of the +brook from Peter. All were to ascend through +the woods at the same time, keeping a sharp +look-out to right and to left for any unusual +rock or other possible signs that might lead +to a clue.</p> + +<p>"Now we had better keep close enough +together to keep in sight the man nearest us +on the side toward the brook," directed Doctor +Joe. "If we spread farther apart than that +we shall be too far apart to see any rock that +may be between us."</p> + +<p>"Aye, and we'll keep lookin' both ways," +said Andy. "That way we can't miss un."</p> + +<p>"It's now," Doctor Joe consulted his watch, +"one-thirty o'clock. It's cloudy and it will +be dark by half-past four. I'll call to Micah +at half-past three and he will pass the word +along to the next man and he to the next +and so on until all have been notified. Then +we will immediately come together and return +to camp, that is, of course, if we have not already +found the cache. If before that time anyone +<a name="Page_173" id="Page_173"></a>finds what he thinks may be the rock he will +pass the word to his neighbour, and we'll +close in and make our search together. If it +begins to snow, and the snow is too thick +for us to see our next neighbour, we'll close in, +for in that case we would miss the rock anyway. +Do you all understand?"</p> + +<p>Every one understood, as the chorus of "Yes, +sir," testified.</p> + +<p>"Jamie," said Doctor Joe, "you're the +youngest one, and you haven't had much +experience tramping through the woods. If +you get tired, or find it hard, just come over +to the brook and follow it down to camp. If +you get there ahead of us you might start a +fire in our tent stove and put the kettle over."</p> + +<p>"I've got plenty o' grit, sir," Jamie boasted. +"I can stand un."</p> + +<p>"I think you can," agreed Doctor Joe, +"but your legs are short. If you get tired +don't keep going. Perhaps you had better +take the outside place, and if you do get tired +and fall out it won't break the line."</p> + +<p>Full of eagerness and excitement, the boys +took their positions. On the left bank of the +brook was David, next him to the left Obadiah +Button, then Andy, beyond him Seth Muggs, +<a name="Page_174" id="Page_174"></a>and finally Jamie. This placed Jamie on the +extreme left flank, in accordance with Doctor +Joe's suggestion, and the farthest from David +and the brook.</p> + +<p>On the right bank of the brook were Peter +Sparks, Doctor Joe, Lige Sparks and Micah +Dunk in the order named, with Micah on the +extreme right flank.</p> + +<p>It was a great and thrilling adventure for all +the boys, but particularly for Jamie. There +was a mystery to be solved, and in the attempt +to solve it there was not merely curiosity but +a worthy object in view. If the cache proved +to contain Lem Horn's silver fox skin Lem and +his whole family would be made happy.</p> + +<p>Jamie, in his unwavering loyalty, was anxious +to lift from Indian Jake all suspicion of the +crime. At present every one in the Bay, save +only the Angus boys, believed Indian Jake +guilty of it. Even Doctor Joe was not satisfied +of his innocence, and, indeed, everything pointed +to Indian Jake's guilt. Doctor Joe believed +that the Angus boys were prejudiced in their +loyalty to Indian Jake because of the fact +that he had done them kindnesses.</p> + +<p>Jamie was sure that if they found this cache +there would be proof that he and David and +<a name="Page_175" id="Page_175"></a>Andy were right and everybody else wrong. +Not only did this feature of the adventure +appeal to him, but also the fact that he was +for the first time in his life trailing in the +wilderness and taking part in an undertaking +that seemed to him one of vast importance.</p> + +<p>Jamie had never slept in a tent. His only +acquaintance with the great wilderness had +been confined to the woods surrounding The +Jug, and always when in company with David +or Andy or his father or Doctor Joe. Now he +was determined to do as well as any of them, +and, no matter how tired he became, to stick +to the trail until Doctor Joe gave the signal +to return to camp.</p> + +<p>As they ascended the slope Jamie kept a +sharp look-out to right and left. Now and +again Seth Muggs on his right was hidden +by a clump of thick spruce trees or would disappear +behind a wooded rise, presently to +appear again through the trees.</p> + +<p>Jamie was happy. He was keeping pace +with the others without the least difficulty. +Doctor Joe had hinted that his short legs might +not permit him to do this. He would prove +that he was as able as Seth Muggs or any of +them!</p> + +<p><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176"></a>Nothing happened for nearly an hour, and +Jamie was beginning to think that the search +was to end in disappointment, when suddenly +his heart gave a leap of joy. Far to the left +and just visible through the trees rose the +outlines of a great grey rock.</p> + +<p>"That's the rock!" exclaimed Jamie. +"That's sure he! I'll look at un for signs, +and then if there's any signs to be seen about +un I'll call Seth!"</p> + +<p>Jamie ran through the trees and brush to +the rock, which proved, indeed, to be a landmark. +It stood alone, and was twice as high +as Jamie's head.</p> + +<p>Here he was treated to another thrill. On +the west side of the rock was the charred wood +of a recent camp fire. A tent had been pitched +near at hand, as was evidenced by the still +unwithered boughs that had formed a bed, +and discarded tent pegs, and there were many +axe cuttings.</p> + +<p>"'Twere white men and not Injuns that +camped here," reasoned Jamie. "All the +Injun fires I ever heard tell about were made +smaller than this un. And these folk were +pilin' up stones on the side. No Injuns or +Bay folk does that, whatever!"</p> + +<p><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177"></a>Jamie continued to investigate.</p> + +<p>"'Twere not Bay folk did the axe cuttin' +either," he decided. "All the Bay folk and +Injuns uses small axes when they travels, and +this cuttin' were done with big uns!"</p> + +<p>Looking about the rock he found other +evidences that the campers had been strangers +to the country. There was a piece of a Halifax +newspaper, an empty bottle, and a small tin +can containing matches. The box of matches +he put into his pocket. They had been lost +or overlooked, and no hunter of the Bay or +Indian would ever have been guilty of such +carelessness. Of this Jamie had no question.</p> + +<p>"'Tis sure the rock the writin' tells about," +he commented.</p> + +<p>Jamie looked a little farther, and then +suddenly realizing that he should not wait +too long before calling, shouted lustily:</p> + +<p>"Seth, I finds un! Seth! Seth! I finds +the rock!"</p> + +<p>He waited a moment for Seth's answering +call, but there was no response. A much +longer time had elapsed during Jamie's examination +of the rock and the surroundings than he +realized, and in the meantime Seth and the +others had passed on, and Seth was now in +<a name="Page_178" id="Page_178"></a>a deeply wooded gully where Jamie's shouts +failed to reach him.</p> + +<p>"Seth! Seth! I finds un! I finds the +place!" he shouted again, but still there was +no response from Seth.</p> + +<p>"I'm thinkin' now Seth has gone too far to +hear," said Jamie to himself. "'Twould be +fine to find Lem's silver all alone and take un +back to camp. I'll just do what the writin' +says. I'll pace up the places. I can do un all +by myself, and 'twill be a fine surprise to un +all to take the silver back to camp."</p> + +<p>Jamie had no doubt that the mysterious cache +contained the stolen fox pelt. No thought of +disappointment in this or of danger to himself +entered his head. His whole mind was +centred upon one point. He would be the hero +of the Bay if, quite alone, he succeeded in +recovering Lem's property and at the same +time in clearing Indian Jake of suspicion.</p> + +<p>Without further delay he drew from his +pocket the carefully folded copy of directions +that Doctor Joe had given him and sat down +to study it.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII</h3> + +<h2>SURPRISED AND CAPTURED</h2> + + +<p>"Twenty paces to a hackmatack tree, +north," read Jamie. He drew from his +pocket the little compass Doctor Joe had given +him, and took the direction.</p> + +<p>"That's the way she goes, the way the +needle points," he said to himself. "I'll pace +un off. North is the way she goes first."</p> + +<p>But an obstacle presented itself. The +northern face of the rock was irregular, and +from end to end fully thirty feet in length. +From what point of the rock was the northerly +line to begin? Where should he begin to pace? +Finally he selected a middle point as the most +probable.</p> + +<p>"'Twill be from here," he decided. "They'd +never be startin' the line from anywheres but +the middle."</p> + +<p>Holding the compass in his hand that he +<a name="Page_180" id="Page_180"></a>might make no mistake, and trembling with +the excitement of one about to make a great +discovery, he paced to the northward, stretching +his short legs to the longest possible stride, +until he counted twenty paces. It brought +him not to a hackmatack tree, but to the middle +of several spruce trees. He returned to the +rock and tried again. This time he was led to +a tangle of brush to the left of the spruce trees +into which his former effort had taken him. +He was vastly puzzled.</p> + +<p>"'Tis something I does wrong," he mused. +"Doctor Joe were sayin' the compass points +right, and she is right. 'Tis wonderful strange +though."</p> + +<p>He experimented again and discovered that +if he did not hold the compass perfectly level +the needle did not swing properly. In his +excitement he had doubtless tipped the compass, +and with the needle thus bound he had been +led astray.</p> + +<p>He climbed to the top of the rock, and placing +his compass in a level position, permitted the +needle to swing to a stationary position. He +extracted a match from the tin box in his pocket +and laid it upon the compass dial exactly +parallel with the needle. Lying on his face, +<a name="Page_181" id="Page_181"></a>he squinted his eye along the match to a distant +tree. Rising, he observed the tree that he might +make no mistake, and returning to the face of +the rock strode twenty of his best paces in the +direction of the tree. Again he was disappointed. +There was no hackmatack tree +at the end of his line.</p> + +<p>"Maybe he was a big man that does the +pacin' and takes longer paces," he said to +himself. "I'll go a bit farther."</p> + +<p>He looked directly ahead, but saw no hackmatack +within a reasonable extension of his +twenty paces to account for the longer strides +the original pacer may have taken. Much +discouraged, he was about to return again +to the rock when suddenly his eye fell upon +a small and scarcely noticeable hackmatack +six paces to the right of his north line and +a little beyond him.</p> + +<p>"That must be he, now!" he exclaimed. +"'Tis the only hackmatack I sees hereabouts. +'Tis <i>sure</i> he! I'll pace un back to the rock! +If the tree's nuth'ard from the rock, the rock'll +be south'ard from the tree. I'll try pacin' +that way."</p> + +<p>With his compass Jamie sighted from the +tree to the rock, and to his satisfaction the +<a name="Page_182" id="Page_182"></a>rock, lying due south, fell within his line of +sight, but at the extreme easterly end of its +northerly face instead of at the centre, the point +from which he had run his original line. He +now paced the distance, which proved to be +a little farther than twenty of Jamie's longest +strides, which he accounted for again by +reasoning that a man could take longer steps +than he could stretch with his short legs.</p> + +<p>Then for the first time Jamie observed two +stones, one on top of the other, at the foot +of the rock and at the very place to which his +compass had directed him. He lifted the stones +and an examination proved that they had not +long since been placed in the position in which +he found them. Both had marks of earth upon +them on the lower side, but the stone which +was below rested upon the carpet of caribou +moss which covered the ground and prevented +it from coming in contact with the earth. +It could not, therefore, have been stained +with soil in the place where Jamie now +found it.</p> + +<p>"They was put there as a pilot mark! They +shows the true mark of the place to pace from," +he soliloquized, replacing them in the position +in which he had found them. "I'll take un +<a name="Page_183" id="Page_183"></a>as a pilot, whatever, and see how she comes +out on the next track."</p> + +<p>He returned to the little hackmatack tree +and again consulted the paper.</p> + +<p>"Forty paces west to a round rock," he read, +observing, "that won't be so hard now as +findin' the hackmatack tree. 'Twill be easier +to see, whatever."</p> + +<p>Methodically he gathered some stones and +erected a small pedestal upon which to rest +his compass while he ran his westerly line. +Loose stones of proper size were hard to find. +The smaller ones were frozen fast to the ground, +and the larger ones were too heavy for him +to move. But presently he collected a sufficient +number of small stones to form a pedestal +a foot and a half high.</p> + +<p>Upon the top of this he levelled his compass, +and turned it until the needle, swinging freely, +rested upon the north point on the dial. Then, +as before, he placed a match upon the face of +the compass to form a line from the "E" +to the "W" on the dial. Crouching down +upon the ground Jamie sighted, as before, to +a distant tree, but as he did so be became +suddenly aware that the light was fading. He +had been much longer than he had realized, +<a name="Page_184" id="Page_184"></a>consuming a great deal of time in examining +the signs around the big rock and in taking his +distances from the rock.</p> + +<p>"This line is sure right the first time," he +said. "'Twill not take me much longer, and +I finds the round rock now. If I finds un I'll +be sure I'm goin' the right way, and I'll be +right handy to the cache."</p> + +<p>Thirty-nine of Jamie's paces brought him to +the tree upon which he had taken sight, and +looking a little way beyond he saw, to his +great joy, a round rock.</p> + +<p>Jamie was trembling with excitement as he +ran eagerly to the rock. This was the second +direction laid down upon the paper! There +could be no doubt that he was right! Everything +answered the description! He would +surely find the cache now! What a surprise +it would be to Doctor Joe and the boys if he +came walking into camp triumphantly bearing +Lem Horn's silver fox skin.</p> + +<p>"Sixty paces south," he next read from his +directions.</p> + +<p>He placed his compass upon the top of the +round rock, which rose perhaps three feet +above the ground, and repeated his former +method, again sighting to a convenient tree. +<a name="Page_185" id="Page_185"></a>Twilight was perceptibly thickening. At this +season darkness falls early in Labrador, and +now, because of a heavily clouded sky, it was +following twilight quickly.</p> + +<p>"I'll keep at un till I finds the cache. I'll +find un before I goes back to camp whatever," +he determined. "'Twill be easy enough gettin' +to camp even if 'tis dark before I gets there. +The brook's handy by, and I'll just go to un and +follow un down to camp. I hope they'll not +be worryin' about me, but if they does 'twill +not be for long. I'll soon be there now."</p> + +<p>The distance from the round rock to the +tree upon which he had sighted proved to be +but thirty of his short paces. Here he was +compelled to pile stones again upon which +to build a resting-place for his compass before +taking another sight. Small stones such as +he could lift were not easily found, and when +at length he was prepared to take the sight +the gloom had grown so thick that he had +difficulty in locating a tree that he judged was +sufficiently far away to cover the remaining +distance. Thirty more paces, however, brought +him to the tree, and to his unbounded joy a +lone white birch stood just beyond.</p> + +<p>Within three paces of the birch the +<a name="Page_186" id="Page_186"></a>mysterious cache was hidden. Here, however, +the directions failed to be sufficiently explicit. +Either through oversight or purposely the +bearings from the birch were omitted.</p> + +<p>Jamie paced first to one tree and then to +another; any of several trees might be the +correct one. They were all thickly branched +spruce trees capable of concealing the coveted +cache. Jamie was puzzled, and every moment +it was growing darker. He looked up into +the branches of one and then another, hoping +to see a bag suspended from a limb, but if a +bag were there it blended so completely with +the foliage that even its outlines were not +revealed.</p> + +<p>"I'll have to climb un all," said Jamie +finally, "and I'll have to be spry about un +too or 'twill be fair dark before I gets to climb +the last of un."</p> + +<p>For his first effort he chose a tree three paces +beyond the birch and in a line with the rock. +He had no difficulty in shinning up the trunk +until he reached a lower limb, and then he +quite easily drew himself up.</p> + +<p>Climbing through the thick screen of branches +he looked eagerly for the coveted hidden +mystery, not stopping until he was well into +<a name="Page_187" id="Page_187"></a>the tree top and had made quite certain that +no cache was hidden there. Then, as he +looked up toward the sky, he felt a snowflake +on his face.</p> + +<p>"Snowin'!" he exclaimed. "I'll have to +be hurryin' now. If it snows hard Doctor +Joe sure will be gettin' worried about me."</p> + +<p>At that moment Jamie heard the breaking +of a twig. He paused and listened. Presently +he heard footsteps, and a moment later a +man's voice. Through the gathering darkness +appeared the figures of two men, and even at +that distance Jamie knew they were not Bay +folk. They travelled less silently, and the +tread of heavy boots is quite unlike that of +moccasined feet.</p> + +<p>Jamie crouched close to the tree trunk. He +scarcely breathed. The approaching figures +came directly toward the white birch.</p> + +<p>"It's lucky we saw them fellers first," said +a gruff voice. "They'd sure suspicioned somethin' +if they'd got a glim on us. They never +seen us comin' over, and they'll never find +our boat where we hid her."</p> + +<p>"If they found that there writin' you went +and left in the tin can you were tellin' about, +they've like as not follered the directions you +<a name="Page_188" id="Page_188"></a>give and found the swag," growled the other. +"That won't be very lucky for us."</p> + +<p>"They'd never find her," assured the first +speaker. "They'd have to find the rock first, +and she's a good two mile from shore. They'd +never find her in a dog's age. Here we be. +Here's the white birch."</p> + +<p>"Well, where's the tree you went and hid +the stuff in?"</p> + +<p>"Here she is." The man indicated a tree +next to that in which Jamie was perched. +"Here, take my leg and gimme a boost. I'll +go up and get it."</p> + +<p>Jamie scarcely dared breathe. He could +see one of the men make a stirrup of his hands, +and the other man step into it and swing into +the tree. Up he climbed to a point directly +opposite Jamie, and so near Jamie could hear +him breathe.</p> + +<p>"Got her, Bill?" asked the man below.</p> + +<p>"You bet I got her! She's here all right, +just like I said she'd be," answered the man +in the tree.</p> + +<p>Jamie's heart sank. After all his hopes and +efforts he became suddenly aware that he +could not return to camp triumphantly bearing +Lem Horn's silver fox pelt as he had pictured +<a name="Page_189" id="Page_189"></a>himself doing. Lem would never get the pelt +again. Every one in the Bay would go on +believing that Indian Jake had shot Lem and +stolen the pelt. And he had been so near +setting all this right!</p> + +<p>It never entered his head that the cache could +contain anything else than the pelt. Because +he wished Indian Jake to be innocent of the +crime, he had come to believe that he <i>was</i> +innocent, even though Indian Jake himself +had not denied having the stolen property in +his possession, and everybody, save only himself +and David and Andy, believed Indian +Jake had it.</p> + +<p>"Here she be safe and sound and as good +as ever," said the man as he dropped from the +lower limb of the tree to the ground. "Let's +open her up and have a drink, Hank."</p> + +<p>"I'll go you, Bill. My throat feels as long +as a camel's and as dry as a snake's back."</p> + +<p>Jamie could see the man called Bill stooping +over the small bag to untie it, and presently +draw forth a bottle.</p> + +<p>"Here she be, and the other three bottles +too," said Bill. "You open her up, Hank, +while I see if the roll is there and the other +stuff."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190"></a>Bill ran his arm in the bag.</p> + +<p>"Yes, it's all right," he assured. "I guess +the Captain didn't miss the money before the +ship sailed, and there ain't any way of his +gettin' word in to the boss about it now before +next spring. We're safe enough to take it +back and make our divvy. There won't be +any search made for it now."</p> + +<p>"Naw, we're safe enough now." Hank +tipped the bottle to his lips, and handed it to +Bill. "The boss ain't missed his liquor neither, +and there won't be any to miss pretty soon +the way you're pulin' at it."</p> + +<p>"I don't know's I took any more'n you did," +said Bill petulantly, corking the bottle and +returning it to the bag. "It was a good move +to play safe anyhow and hide the swag until +we made sure the boss wouldn't go searching +through our stuff for it. I don't know's he'd +suspicion us any more'n the rest of the crew, +but he'd search everybody's stuff if the Captain +had give him a tip."</p> + +<p>"You bet he would!" agreed Hank. "We +just played in luck right through. They won't +blame us for that other job, will they? They +ain't likely to go makin' a search for that, be +they?"</p> + +<p><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191"></a>"Naw!" said Bill. "That other feller, +whatever his name is, has got 'em on his trail +for that. We ain't in it. They'll never +suspicion us for that. We made a slick job +of that."</p> + +<p>"Well, let's beat it back," said Hank. "It's +snowin' and it's goin' to snow hard. The +sooner we gets back to camp the better we'll +be off."</p> + +<p>Bill swung the bag over his shoulder, when +suddenly he stopped and exclaimed:</p> + +<p>"What's that?"</p> + +<p>Jimmy had sneezed, and again he sneezed.</p> + +<p>"Some sneak in that there tree!" and Bill +with an oath dropped his bag and seized his +rifle, which he had leaned against the tree +in which Jimmy was perched. "I'll put a +bullet up there! That'll settle that feller, +whoever he is!"</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV</h3> + +<h2>THE TWO DESPERADOS</h2> + + +<p>"Don't shoot, sir! It's just me!" Jamie +piped in terror from the tree.</p> + +<p>"It's only a kid!" Bill swore an oath of +disgust and lowered his rifle. "You git down +out'n that tree! Git down quicker'n lightnin', +too!"</p> + +<p>"I'm comin', sir!" came Jamie's frightened +voice from the tree-top.</p> + +<p>Jamie lost no time in descending from his +perch and in a moment stood trembling before +his captors. It was quite dark now and snowing +hard, and to the frightened little lad the two +big lumbermen loomed up like giants.</p> + +<p>"What you doin' here?" demanded Bill +with an oath as he seized Jamie's arm with a +grip that made the lad wince.</p> + +<p>"I were—I were huntin' for the cache," +confessed Jamie.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193"></a>"Goin' to steal our cache, was ye? Well, +we'll teach you to leave other folkses things +be!" The man gave Jamie a savage shake. +"Tryin' to steal our cache, eh? Who set you +on to it? That's what I want to know! +Who set you on to stealin' it, now?"</p> + +<p>"I weren't goin' to steal un, sir," chattered +Jamie, horrified at the implication that he was +a thief.</p> + +<p>"What were you huntin' the cache for, then? +Don't lie, you little rat, or I'll twist your neck +off!"</p> + +<p>The fellow seemed quite capable of executing +the threat literally, as he again shook Jamie +savagely.</p> + +<p>"I—aint'—lyin'—about—un, sir!" pleaded +Jamie between the shakes. "I were—just—goin'—to—look—at +un, and—if—'tweren't—Lem +Horn's silver fox—I weren't—goin' to +touch un!"</p> + +<p>"Well, 'tain't Lem Horn's silver fox. It's +things of our'n! Do you hear that? <i>'Tain't</i> +Lem Horn's silver, it's our'n what's in that +there bag! You leave our things be! Do +you hear what I'm sayin'? You and your +gang keep away from our cache, and don't +go foolin' with anything you don't know any<a name="Page_194" id="Page_194"></a>thing +about! Do you hear?" The man gave +Jamie another shake.</p> + +<p>"I—I didn't know! We—we just suspicioned +'twere Lem's silver, and I were wantin' +to take un back to he," explained Jamie.</p> + +<p>"You heard what I said? 'Tain't Lem +Horn's silver! You hear that, don't you?"</p> + +<p>"Aye, sir, I saw what you was takin' out +of the bag, and 'tweren't Lem Horn's silver. +'Twere something to drink out of a bottle. +I sees you drinkin' it."</p> + +<p>"Let the kid go, Bill," laughed Hank, +who until now had kept silent.</p> + +<p>"We were all thinkin' 'twere Lem's silver. +I'll tell un 'twere not the silver but somethin' +else that you takes from the Captain that you +were hidin' in the cache," said Jamie hopefully.</p> + +<p>"You goin' to tell that! You heard what +we said, and you goin' to blab it?" the man +roared in a rage.</p> + +<p>"Aye, sir, I'll just tell the others so's they'll +not be thinkin' 'tis Lem's silver," said Jamie +innocently.</p> + +<p>"The others? Who's 'the others'?" demanded +Bill.</p> + +<p>"Doctor Joe and the other scouts," Jamie +explained.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195"></a>"'Doctor Joe and the other scouts,'" quoted +the big lumberman. "Who's this here Doctor +Joe? And who's the other scouts?"</p> + +<p>"He's Doctor Joe! Everybody knows +Doctor Joe!" explained Jamie, quite astonished +that any one should ask who Doctor Joe might +be. "The scouts be the other lads of the +Bay, sir."</p> + +<p>"Well, this here Doctor Joe, whoever he is, +and these here other scouts, whoever they +be, better keep out'n our business and mind +their own," roared the man. "I suppose +they're this here bunch what's campin' down +by the brook and been runnin' all over the +country to-day?"</p> + +<p>"Aye, sir, we're all campin' down handy +to the brook, and we've all been lookin' for +the cache, but I'm the only one that finds +the rock," admitted Jamie.</p> + +<p>"You ain't camped down there now!" +The man swore a mighty and strange oath +that made Jamie tremble. "You was camped +there, but <i>now</i> you ain't! You're goin' with +us, <i>you</i> be! Hear that?"</p> + +<p>"Aw, let the kid go!" broke in Hank, +impatiently. "We better be gettin' a jog on +us too. Leave the kid be, and come on. He's +<a name="Page_196" id="Page_196"></a>just a kid and he can't kick up any trouble. +Leave him be, and let's get out of here."</p> + +<p>"Not me!" The man gave Jamie's arm a +painful twist. "I ain't goin' to leave this here +kid to go back and blab to that there Doctor +Joe and the hull country. He heard our +talk, and if it gets to the boss you know what +that means. I ain't takin' any chances on +him, and I'm half of this."</p> + +<p>"We'll be gettin' in bigger trouble if we +takes him along. We'll have the hull country +huntin' us," Hank protested.</p> + +<p>"You heard me! I ain't goin' to take +chances on his blabbin'! He goes along, and +I'll fix him so's he won't blab and nobody'll +get our trail if they do hunt us. The snow'll +hide it," insisted Bill.</p> + +<p>"Well, let's get a move on then," said +Hank. "The wind's risin' and it's goin' to +kick up a sea. I don't want to be caught out +on the Bay again in a sea like we had that +other time. The snow's goin' to be thick +too, and we'll lose our bearings."</p> + +<p>"Go on, then. I'll foller with the kid," +said Bill, still holding Jamie's aching arm.</p> + +<p>"Better let the kid go," said Hank, swinging +a rifle over his left shoulder and with an axe +<a name="Page_197" id="Page_197"></a>in his right hand striding away through the +darkness and thickly falling snow.</p> + +<p>"Come along you!" and Jamie's captor, +gripping Jamie's arm in one hand and with a +rifle in the other, followed in the trail of the +man Hank, dragging Jamie almost too fast +for his legs to carry him.</p> + +<p>On and on they went through the darkness. +Now and again Jamie fell over stumps or other +obstructions, and each time the man, with a +curse, jerked him to his feet.</p> + +<p>Snow was falling heavily and the wind was +rising. Once they crossed a frozen marsh +where the snow swirled around them in +clouds. Then they were again among the +forest trees, forging ahead in silence save for +an occasional curse by the man who held +Jamie in his merciless and relentless grip.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV"></a>CHAPTER XV</h3> + +<h2>MISSING!</h2> + + +<p>Seth Muggs, intent upon keeping pace +with Andy on his right, and not permitting +him to get out of sight, quite neglected +to be equally cautious as to Jamie on his left. +In this Seth was in no wise neglectful. The +responsibility in each case, in order to keep +the line from breaking, was to keep the neighbour +nearer the brook in view. In this Jamie +alone had failed.</p> + +<p>Jamie had, indeed, been out of line for a +considerable time before Seth became aware +of the fact. Even then he felt no concern. +Doctor Joe had instructed Jamie to return +to camp if he became weary, and when he was +missed had no doubt he had taken advantage +of the suggestion.</p> + +<p>Nevertheless, when Doctor Joe passed the +word along the line to reassemble, Seth gave +several lusty shouts for Jamie. When, after +<a name="Page_199" id="Page_199"></a>a reasonable time, he received no reply, he was +satisfied Jamie was snug in camp with the kettle +boiling for tea, and he turned down to join the +others at the brook.</p> + +<p>"It's a little later than I thought," said +Doctor Joe as they came together, "but we'll +have plenty of time to reach camp before dark. +Now let's count noses."</p> + +<p>"Where's Jamie?" asked David. "We're +all here but Jamie."</p> + +<p>"I'm thinkin' he gets tired and goes back +to camp like Doctor Joe were sayin' for he to +do," suggested Seth. "I missed he a while +back."</p> + +<p>"How long has it been since you saw him +last, Seth?" asked Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p>"I'm not rightly knowin', but a half-hour +whatever," said Seth, "and I'm thinkin' 'twere +a bit longer."</p> + +<p>"He has probably gone back to camp, then," +agreed Doctor Joe. "It was a pretty hard +tramp for such a little fellow. It is quite +natural that he did not like to admit to you that +he could not keep up with us, and he just +slipped quietly away and returned to camp +and said nothing about it. He couldn't well +get lost with the brook so near to guide him."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200"></a>"Jamie'd never be gettin' lost whatever," +asserted Andy. "He's wonderful good at +findin' his way about."</p> + +<p>"'Tis goin' to snow, and 'twill be dark +early," suggested David, as the little party +turned down the brook to retrace their steps +to camp. "There's a bend in the brook here; +let's cut across un and save time. If she +sets in to snow to-night 'tis like to keep un +up all day to-morrow, and we'd better get +back as quick as we can to cut plenty of wood +and have un on hand."</p> + +<p>"Very well," agreed Doctor Joe. "You go +ahead and guide us, David."</p> + +<p>"'Twill be fine and cosy just bidin' in camp +and studyin' up the things in the book," said +Obadiah as they followed David in a short +cut toward camp. "We'll be havin' a fine +time even if it does snow too hard to go about."</p> + +<p>"Yes," agreed Doctor Joe, "we can do that +and learn a great many things about scouting."</p> + +<p>Suddenly David held up his hand for silence, +and stooping peered through the trees ahead. +The others followed his gaze, and there, not +above fifty yards away and looking curiously +at them, stood a caribou.</p> + +<p>Only David and Doctor Joe had brought +<a name="Page_201" id="Page_201"></a>rifles. Almost instantly David's rifle rang out, +and the caribou turned and disappeared.</p> + +<p>"I'm sure I hit he!" exclaimed David +running in the direction the caribou had taken. +"I couldn't miss he so close, and a fair shot!"</p> + +<p>"You hit he!" exclaimed Andy who had +dashed ahead. "You hit he, Davy! Here's +the mark of blood!"</p> + +<p>A trail of blood left no doubt that the caribou +had been hard hit, but it was followed for +nearly a mile before they came upon the +prostrate animal.</p> + +<p>"Now we'll have plenty of fresh deer's +meat!" burst out Obadiah enthusiastically. +"We'll have meat for supper, and I'm wonderful +hungry for un!"</p> + +<p>"Yes," agreed Doctor Joe, "we had better +dress it at once. There are enough of us to +carry all the meat back with us to camp, and +that will save making a return trip."</p> + +<p>"'Twill be a fine surprise for Jamie when +we comes back with deer's meat," said Andy +enthusiastically.</p> + +<p>"'Twill make us a bit late and he'll be +thinkin' we finds the cache," suggested David. +"I hopes he won't be comin' up the brook +again to look for us."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202"></a>"I hardly think he'll do that," said Doctor +Joe, "but to be sure he does not some of you +had better go to the brook and leave a sign +to tell him which way we've gone. David and +I will skin and dress the caribou."</p> + +<p>"Come along, Seth," Andy volunteered. +"We'll be goin' over to make the sign."</p> + +<p>"Come back here as soon as you've done it," +directed Doctor Joe. "We'll need your help +in carrying the meat to camp."</p> + +<p>"Aye, sir, we'll be comin' right back," agreed +Andy as he and Seth hurried away.</p> + +<p>Close to the brook, in a place where it could +not fail to be seen, the lads set a pole at an +angle of forty-five degrees, pointing in the +direction in which the caribou had been killed. +Against the pole and about a third of the +distance from its lower end an upright stick +was placed. This was an Indian sign familiar +to all the hunters and wilderness folk, indicating +that the party had gone in the direction in +which the pole sloped, the upright stick a +little way from the butt further indicating +that the distance was not far.</p> + +<p>"Jamie'll know what that means, and if +he wearies of bidin' alone in camp and comes +to find us he'll not be missin' us now whatever,"<a name="Page_203" id="Page_203"></a> +said Andy with satisfaction, as he and +Seth turned back.</p> + +<p>"I'm goin' to blaze the trail over, and he +won't be like to miss un, then," suggested Seth, +taking the axe.</p> + +<p>When Andy and Seth rejoined the others +Doctor Joe and David had nearly finished +skinning the caribou, and in due time they +had it ready to cut up. The head was severed +with as little of the neck meat as possible +that there might be no unnecessary waste, +for they could not carry the head with them. +Then the tongue was removed, for this was +considered a titbit.</p> + +<p>The question of how to carry the meat to +camp was finally settled by making two litters +with poles. The carcass was now cut into two +nearly equal parts, one of which was placed +on each litter. Doctor Joe took the forward +end of one of the litters, and David the forward +end of the other. With two boys carrying the +rear end of each litter, and the other lads the +skin, heart, liver and tongue, and the two +rifles and the axe, they at length set out for +camp.</p> + +<p>Night was falling and the first flakes of the +coming snow-storm were felt upon their faces +<a name="Page_204" id="Page_204"></a>when finally the little white tents came in +view.</p> + +<p>"There's no light," remarked David, who +was in advance. "Jamie's savin' candles. +I'm hopin' now he has the kettle boilin'."</p> + +<p>"He'll have un boilin'," assured Andy, who +was one of the two boys at the rear of David's +litter. "He'll be proud to have un boilin' +and supper started."</p> + +<p>"There's no smoke!" exclaimed David +apprehensively as they came closer. "Jamie, +b'y!" he shouted. "Where is you? Come +out and see what we're gettin'!"</p> + +<p>But no Jamie came, and there was no answering +call. The stretchers were hastily placed +on the ground, and every tent searched for +Jamie.</p> + +<p>"Jamie's never been comin' back since we +leaves!" David declared. "Whatever has +been happenin' to he?"</p> + +<p>"I can't understand it," said Doctor Joe. +"He could not possibly have been lost. Andy, +you and Micah run down and look at the boats +and see if he has been there."</p> + +<p>Andy and Micah ran excitedly to the boats +to report a few moments later that there were +no indications of Jamie's return.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205"></a>"David, you and I shall have to go and look +for him," said Doctor Joe quietly. "Andy, +you and the other lads build a fire outside as +a guide. Get your supper, and don't worry +until we return."</p> + +<p>"What do you think's been happenin' to +Jamie?" asked Andy anxiously.</p> + +<p>"We took a short cut and did not follow the +brook where it makes a wide bend," suggested +Doctor Joe. "He may be waiting for us +along the brook at that point."</p> + +<p>"Oh, I hopes you'll find he there!" said +Andy fervently.</p> + +<p>"Get your rifle and plenty of cartridges, +David," directed Doctor Joe. "I'll carry mine +also. When we get up the trail we'll shoot +to let Jamie know we're looking for him."</p> + +<p>Each with a rifle on his shoulder, Doctor +Joe in the lead and David following close +behind, the two turned away into the now +thickly falling snow and darkness.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XVI" id="CHAPTER_XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI</h3> + +<h2>BOUND AND HELPLESS</h2> + + +<p>"See here," said the man in front, stopping +and turning about after what had seemed +hours to the exhausted and bruised Jamie, +"I for one ain't goin' to try to cross the Bay +to-night in this here snow. It's thicker'n mud, +and there's a sea runnin' I won't take chances +with, not while I'm sober. We may's well +bunk."</p> + +<p>"Guess you're right, pardner, we better +bunk. But pull farther away to the west'ard +before we put on a fire," agreed Jamie's captor +with evident relief. "That bunch'll be out +huntin' this here kid, and they may run on +to us if we camp too close to 'em."</p> + +<p>"We're a good two mile from 'em now. +They'll never run on to us," argued the other.</p> + +<p>"Go on a piece farther," insisted the man +called Bill, who was gripping Jamie's arm so +hard that it ached.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207"></a>"Let the kid go! What's the use of draggin' +him along? He'll just be in our way, and +we've got troubles enough of our own," suggested +the other.</p> + +<p>"He ain't goin' back and have a chance to +give us away to that bunch, not if I knows it. +I've about made up my mind to croak him. +He knows too much. Go on and find a place +to bunk. I'm follerin'."</p> + +<p>"You won't croak anybody while I'm +hangin' around! I'm tellin' you I've got +troubles enough on my hands already without +chasin' a noose. I'm goin' to save my neck +anyhow, and I ain't goin' to be mixed up in +any croakin'," muttered the one called Hank, +as he turned and plunged forward again through +the darkness.</p> + +<p>What "croaking" meant Jamie did not in +the least know, but he suspected that it referred +to something not in the least pleasant for +himself. He was too tired, however, to think +or care a great deal as he was dragged on, +stumbling in the darkness over fallen logs, +and bumping into trees.</p> + +<p>It seemed an interminable time to Jamie +before the man ahead again stopped, and said +decisively:</p> + +<p><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208"></a>"We'll camp here. We've gone far enough, +and I ain't goin' another rod. We're a good +five mile from them fellers you're afraid of."</p> + +<p>"All right, I'm satisfied. You've got the +axe, go ahead and make a cover," said Bill. +"Kid, you come with me and help break +branches for the bed. Don't you loaf neither. +Do you hear me?"</p> + +<p>"Yes, sir," answered Jamie timidly.</p> + +<p>It was a relief to stop walking and to feel +the man relax the relentless grip upon his arm, +and Jamie, meekly enough, began breaking +boughs with the man always within striking +distance, as though afraid that he might run +away and make his escape, though Jamie was +quite too tired for that.</p> + +<p>The man with the axe cut a stiff pole and +trimmed it. Then he lopped off the lower +branches of two spruce trees that stood a +convenient distance apart, and laid the pole +on a supporting limb of each tree, about four +feet from the ground. This was to form the +ridge of a lean-to shelter. Poles were now +cut and formed into a sloping roof by resting +one end upon the ridge pole, the other upon +the ground, and the poles covered with a thick +thatch of branches to exclude the snow.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209"></a>When this was completed a quantity of dry +wood was cut, and in front of the lean-to a +fire was lighted.</p> + +<p>While the man with the axe was engaged +in thatching the roof and lighting the fire +and gathering wood, the other turned his +attention to the preparation of the bed.</p> + +<p>"Don't you try to break away, now!" he +growled at Jamie. "I'll shoot you like I +would a rat if you do. Just stand there and +hand me them branches, and shake the snow +off'n 'em first, too."</p> + +<p>Running was the last thing that Jamie +contemplated doing, even though there had +been no danger of the man executing his threat. +He was so tired he could scarcely stand upon +his feet, and he had eaten nothing since the +hurried meal at midday.</p> + +<p>At length the bed was laid, and the men sat +down within the shelter of the lean-to, and +Bill ordered:</p> + +<p>"Git down here, you kid, and set still too. +Don't you try to leave here. You know what's +comin' to you if you do."</p> + +<p>As Jamie meekly and thankfully complied, +Bill ran his arm into the bag that had been +cached in the tree, and which had been the +<a name="Page_210" id="Page_210"></a>cause of all of Jamie's trouble, and drawing +forth a bottle removed the cork and took a +long pull from its contents. Making a face as +though it did not taste good, he handed it +over to Hank, remarking:</p> + +<p>"Have a nip, Hank. It'll warm you up and +make you feel good. I don't like this cruisin' +in the dark."</p> + +<p>Hank accepted the bottle and after drinking +from it returned it to the bag. Then each +drew a pipe and a plug of black tobacco from +his pocket, and cutting some of the tobacco +with the knife rolled it between the palms of +his hands, stuffed it into his pipe and lighted +it with a brand from the fire. For several +minutes they sat and smoked in silence.</p> + +<p>In the meantime Jamie sat timidly upon +the boughs next the man Bill. As the fire +blazed, the chill of the storm and night was +driven out, and a cozy, comfortable warmth +filled the lean-to. Jamie's eyes became heavy, +and in spite of his unhappy position he +dozed.</p> + +<p>"See here," said the man, "you may's well +sleep, but I ain't goin' to take any chances +on you. I'm goin' to tie you so's you won't +be givin' us the slip."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211"></a>"Oh, leave the kid be, Bill! He's all right!" +the other man objected.</p> + +<p>"I ain't takin' chances," growled Bill. "I'm +goin' to have some say about it, too."</p> + +<p>He fumbled in his pocket, and drawing forth +some stout twine proceeded to tie Jamie's +hands securely behind his back. Then he tied +Jamie's feet, and gave him a push to the +rear.</p> + +<p>"Now I guess you'll stay with us all right," +he grinned.</p> + +<p>"Aw, leave the kid be! What you want +to tie him for?" Hank protested. "He +can't get away. Better let him go anyhow."</p> + +<p>"You leave me be to do what I wants to +do and I'll leave you be to do what you wants +to," growled Bill. "I'm goin' to keep this +kid fast. This is my business."</p> + +<p>"I don't know as it's all your business," +snapped Hank. "I'm mixed up in it too, +seems to me."</p> + +<p>"Well, I caught the kid, and I'm goin' to +have my say about what I do with him," Bill +retorted. "I ain't goin' to let him make +trouble for us, not if I knows what I'm about."</p> + +<p>Hank made no reply, but puffed silently +at his pipe.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212"></a>Jamie was wide awake again. This man +Bill meant some evil, and the little lad wondered +vaguely what it could be that was to be done +to himself, and what his fate was to be. He +was vastly uncomfortable, too, with his hands +tied behind his back, though he was glad enough +to be permitted to lie down. He could scarcely +keep the tears back, as he thought of the happy +time in camp that had been planned, of the +snug tent where he was to have slept with +Doctor Joe, and of his own warm bed at home, +and he wondered whether he would ever see +The Jug again.</p> + +<p>"The boss'll be sore at us, Hank, if we ain't +back to camp to-morrow," remarked Bill +presently, breaking the silence. "He can be +sore though if he wants to. He can't fire us +fellers for bein' away even if he does get sore +and cuss us out. He needs us bad, and he can't +get any more men now. I don't mind his +cussin'. Cussin' don't hurt a feller."</p> + +<p>"If the wind don't get worse and the snow +lets up some so we can make out our way we +better go back though as soon as it's light +enough in the mornin'," answered Hank. "I +wish I was out'n this business anyhow."</p> + +<p>"We can get across the Bay even if it does +<a name="Page_213" id="Page_213"></a>snow some in the mornin', long's there ain't +too much sea," said Bill. "I'm for gettin' +away from here too. We've got the swag all +right and nobody'll know about it, if we don't +let this kid loose to blab. It was lucky we +caught this feller before he found it, but he +heard too much."</p> + +<p>"What you goin' to do with him, Bill?"</p> + +<p>"Croak him. I ain't goin' to take chances +with him. It ain't my way to take chances +I don't have to take."</p> + +<p>"You better not do any croakin', Bill. I +won't stand for <i>that</i>. I'm tough, and I've +done plenty of tough things in my day, but I +never croaked a little kid like him, and I won't +stand for it."</p> + +<p>"Don't you go and get soft now. 'Tain't +any worse to croak a kid than a man. You'd +croak a man if you had to, and this is a time +when we've got to do it to save ourselves."</p> + +<p>"Well, I won't stand for it while I'm sober, +and I'm sober now even if I have had a drink +or two." Hank reached for a firebrand with +which to relight his pipe.</p> + +<p>"Well, you've got to stand for this. I'm +mixed up in it just as much as you be, and I'm +goin' to have some say. I ain't goin' to take +<a name="Page_214" id="Page_214"></a>chances on him goin' back to his gang and +givin' us away."</p> + +<p>"How you goin' to do it?"</p> + +<p>"Take him along in the boat and drop him +overboard. That's the easiest way. There +ain't much chance of anybody findin' him, +and if they do they'll just think he got +drowned some way hisself. Dead folks don't +talk."</p> + +<p>"That's somethin' I won't stand for! You +can't go droppin' anybody overboard while +I'm in the boat! Not if I know it!"</p> + +<p>"What you goin' to do, play the sucker?" +Bill turned angrily toward his companion. +"Maybe you'll go and peach!"</p> + +<p>"Don't you call me a sucker! Don't you +say I'm a peacher!" Hank rose to his feet +and faced Bill menacingly.</p> + +<p>For a moment Jamie thought the men were +going to fight, but Bill remained seated and his +manner suddenly changed. Jamie thought he +acted as though he were afraid.</p> + +<p>"See here, Hank," Bill's voice was modified +and conciliatory. "I ain't callin' you a sucker, +and I ain't sayin' you'll peach. What's the +use of us fellers fightin' about it? We're in +this together and we're pardners. We've got +<a name="Page_215" id="Page_215"></a>to hang together. What's the use of us fallin' +out?"</p> + +<p>"I'm willin' to hang together but I won't +be called a sucker or peacher by anybody, +and I ain't goin' to stand for any croakin' +neither while I've got a gun! Hear me?"</p> + +<p>"What we goin' to do about this here kid +then? We can't let him go. He'll up and run +back and blab. He's heard too much about +our business. We don't want to go huntin' +trouble, do we? Well, we'll be huntin' trouble +if we let him go. He knows too much and he +knows all about who we be too."</p> + +<p>"What does he know, now? He don't +know anything except what you've gone and +blabbed yourself. We just caught him tryin' +to swipe our cache. The stuff is our'n. 'Tain't +his'n. Our stuff is our'n, ain't it? What +can he blab about? That's what I want to +know!"</p> + +<p>"He'll go and tell folks we've got this here +swag from the ship, and it'll go to the boss. +That's what he knows, and that's what he'll +blab."</p> + +<p>"Well, what we've got is our'n. He can't +prove we've got that there swag, and we'll +hide it where the boss can't find it. He hain't +<a name="Page_216" id="Page_216"></a>seen any swag around, has he? He can't say +he has neither, and he won't. He just thought +maybe we had that there fox skin. What's +that got to do with us? We don't care what +he thinks, and what he thinks won't hurt us +as I knows of. What we've got and what we +ain't got don't make any difference to these +fellers. What they don't know won't hurt +'em. It ain't theirs, and nobody better go +meddlin' in what I has and does. Let that +there kid go now, Bill, and get him off'n our +hands."</p> + +<p>"You just leave him to me, Hank. I +ain't goin' to let him go and blab, I say, and get +both of us in a hole. I've got <i>some</i> say, hain't +I, Hank?"</p> + +<p>"Well, don't do any croakin' when I'm around +to see, that's all I've got to say. He's your'n +to do the way you want to with. I won't +have any finger in it. It's your job, it ain't +mine."</p> + +<p>"Well, I'll do the croakin' some other way. +You needn't have anything to do about it if +you're afraid. I'll do it all by myself."</p> + +<p>"Afraid or no afraid I ain't goin' to be +mixed up in any croakin', and that ends it as +far as I go."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217"></a>Hank knocked the ashes from his pipe, +refilled it from the black plug, and lifting a red +hot coal from the fire placed it upon the bowl, +and puffed for a moment. When the tobacco +was glowing to his satisfaction, he flicked the +coal back into the fire, and sat silently +smoking.</p> + +<p>Jamie, lying quiet, had listened to the +conversation of the two men. He was wide +awake now. He did not understand the significance +of "croaking," but the word had an +ominous sound. It referred to something the +man called Bill wished to do to him and something +to which the man called Hank objected. +He understood, however, the threat to throw +him into the Bay. The fellow Bill wished to +do this while Hank was determined to prevent +it.</p> + +<p>Instinctively Jamie felt that Hank was only +defending him in order to protect himself. +He had no personal interest in him, but did +not propose to be involved in any trouble that +might arise through some action that Bill +wished to take. He was glad when, finally, +it appeared settled that he was not to be +thrown into the sea.</p> + +<p>Bill arose and replenished the fire, and +<a name="Page_218" id="Page_218"></a>following Hank's example refilled and lighted +his pipe, then reseated himself.</p> + +<p>Neither of the men spoke. Beyond their +great hulking figures the fire gleamed and sent +a circle of radiance. Beyond the circle the forest +lay as black as a tomb. The snow fell steadily, +and the wind sighed and moaned ominously +through the tree tops.</p> + +<p>What were Doctor Joe and the lads doing? +Were they searching for him through the +blackness of the night and the storm? If +he had only followed Doctor Joe's instructions +and returned to camp in season! Would these +men kill him? Would he ever see the dear old +home at The Jug again?</p> + +<p>With these thoughts flashing through his +mind Jamie prayed a silent little prayer:</p> + +<p>"Dear Lord, don't let un kill me! Take +me back to The Jug again!"</p> + +<p>Many times he repeated this to himself. +Then there came to him something Thomas +had once said when the mist was clouding +his eyes:</p> + +<p>"Have plenty o' grit, lad, and a stout heart +like a man."</p> + +<p>This comforted and strengthened him, and, +like the prayer, he repeated it over and over +<a name="Page_219" id="Page_219"></a>again to himself as he lay watching the silent +men. For a long time he watched them and +the fire beyond, and the falling snow and the +black wall of the forest. Finally tired nature +came to his relief. His eyes closed and he +fell into a troubled sleep.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XVII" id="CHAPTER_XVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII</h3> + +<h2>LOST IN A BLIZZARD</h2> + + +<p>After a time Jamie awoke. The two men +were still sitting by the fire and were +again drinking from the bottle. He was uncomfortable +in his cramped position, but dared +not move, and he lay very still and watched +the men and the fire and the black wall of the +mysterious, trackless forest beyond. Shadows +rose and fell and flitted in and out of the circle +of firelight. Weird and uncanny they seemed, +taking strange forms like dancing spirits. In +the darkness outside the firelight and moving +shadows Jamie fancied that terrible ghoulish +forms were stalking stealthily and grinning +maliciously at him.</p> + +<p>For a long while Jamie lay awake and watched. +Again and again the men drank from the bottle, +and when they spoke at intervals their voices +sounded unnatural and thick. Once one of +them arose to replenish the fire, and he moved +<a name="Page_221" id="Page_221"></a>unsteadily upon his feet, at which the little +lad marvelled, for he was a large, strong man. +Presently Jamie's eyes drooped again, and once +more he slept.</p> + +<p>When he again awoke dawn was breaking. +Snow was falling heavily. The two men were +in a deep sleep. The fire had died down to a +bed of coals, and Jamie was shivering with +the cold.</p> + +<p>His arms were numb, and his body and limbs +ached from the cramped position in which he +lay because of his bound arms and feet. With +some effort he turned over, and this brought +him some relief, but not for long, and presently +he rolled back to his original position that he +might see the red coals of the fire.</p> + +<p>Jamie tried to move his hands, but his wrists +were too firmly tied, and the effort brought +only pain. Then he lay still and studied the +smouldering fire. Behind it lay the remnants +of a back log that had been burned through in +the centre. The inner ends of the log, where +it was separated, were, like the coals before it, +red and glowing, and he thought that if he +could push them together they would blaze +and give out warmth.</p> + +<p>Then, suddenly, an idea flashed into Jamie's +<a name="Page_222" id="Page_222"></a>brain. Those red ends of the log would burn +the string that bound him, and he could free +himself if he could only reach them and press +the string against them.</p> + +<p>His movements in turning over had not +disturbed his captors. They were still sleeping +profoundly. From the condition of the fire +it was evident they had been sitting by it +the greater part of the night and had replenished +it at a late hour, else all the coals would have +been dead.</p> + +<p>Hank lay at the opposite end of the lean-to +from Jamie, and Bill in the centre, with their +feet toward the fire. Jamie was lying at the +back, his head near Bill's head and his feet +toward the end of the lean-to farthest from +Hank.</p> + +<p>For several minutes Jamie studied the +position of each and the possibilities of working +his way out of the lean-to without awakening +the men. Finally he determined to make an +attempt to gain his freedom.</p> + +<p>Cautiously and as noiselessly as possible he +began to wriggle away, inch by inch, from +Bill, and toward the fire. Several times he +fancied the men moved restlessly in their +sleep, but when he looked toward them +<a name="Page_223" id="Page_223"></a>they appeared to be still sleeping heavily. +On each occasion, however, he lay still until +he became wholly satisfied that he had +been mistaken and that they had not been +disturbed.</p> + +<p>Little by little he edged away until at length +he was well outside the lean-to. His efforts +were painful and slow, but in the course of half +an hour he was near enough to the end of +the log to touch it with his bound feet. His +exertions had set his blood in motion and +inspired him with hope of success.</p> + +<p>With much care and patience he pushed +the stick until he was able to rest the string, +where it crossed between his ankles, upon the +glowing end. Drawing his feet as far apart +as possible, with all the strength he possessed, +he was quickly rewarded by feeling a relaxation, +and in a moment his heart leaped with joy. +The string was severed.</p> + +<p>Squirming around upon his chest, Jamie +arose to a kneeling position, and then stood +erect. So far as his legs were concerned he +was free.</p> + +<p>Jamie's first impulse was to run wildly away, +but he restrained himself. Standing over the +men he looked down upon them. Neither had +<a name="Page_224" id="Page_224"></a>moved, and to all appearances they were sleeping +as soundly as ever.</p> + +<p>"I'm thinkin' now I'll try to burn off the +string on my hands too," he decided. "'Twill +be easier gettin' on with un free, and I'll +travel a rare lot faster with my arms loose."</p> + +<p>Burning the strings from his wrists, however, +proved a much more difficult problem than +burning them from his ankles. He sat down +with his back to the hot end of the stick, but +discovered that it was no easy matter to find +just the right position between the wrists. +Several efforts resulted only in painful burns +on his hands, but he was not discouraged, and +finally was rewarded. The string where it +crossed between his wrists was brought into +contact with the sharp point of the glowing +hot stick, and though the reflected heat burned +him cruelly he held the string pressed against +the fire until at last it crumbled away and his +hands flew apart.</p> + +<p>"She took grit," said he, "but I made out +to do un."</p> + +<p>With the joy of freedom and the anxiety to +escape his tormentors, Jamie was oblivious to +the pain of his burned and blistered wrists. +He could use both hands and feet, and was +<a name="Page_225" id="Page_225"></a>confident that he would soon find the camp and +his friends.</p> + +<p>Jamie ran as fast as his short legs would +carry him. The snow was nearly knee deep, +but it was soft and feathery and he scarcely +gave it thought at first. He had no doubt +that he knew exactly in which direction camp +lay, and it never entered his head that he might +go wrong or lose his way as he dashed through +the woods at the best speed of which he was +capable.</p> + +<p>Presently the impediment of the snow compelled +him to reduce his gait to a walk, and +for nearly an hour he pushed on in what he +supposed was a straight line, when he came +suddenly upon fresh axe cuttings and a moment +later saw through the thickly falling snow a +familiar lean-to. He stopped in consternation +and fright, scarcely knowing which way to turn. +He was within fifty feet of the two desperate +men from whom he had so recently fled. In +the storm he had made a complete circuit.</p> + +<p>The men were still soundly sleeping, and +instinctively Jamie backed away. He had lost +a full hour of valuable time. The men might +awake at any moment, discover his absence +and trail him and overtake him in the snow.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226"></a>These thoughts flashed through Jamie's mind, +and in wild panic he turned and ran until at +length exhaustion brought him to a halt.</p> + +<p>"They'll sure be cotchin' me," he panted, +"and I'm not knowin' the way in the snow! +I'll be goin' right around and comin' back +again to the same place if I don't look out! +I can't bide here," he continued in desperation. +"I'll have to go somewheres else or they'll +sure cotch me!"</p> + +<p>Bewildered and frightened Jamie looked +wildly about him. Then he bethought himself +of the compass in his pocket. Eagerly drawing +it forth he held it in his hand and studied its +face.</p> + +<p>"The Bay's to the suth'ard, whatever," he +calculated. "If the Bay's to the suth'ard the +brook's to the east'ard. I'll be lettin' the +compass pilot me to the east'ard. 'Twill take +me the right direction whatever."</p> + +<p>Levelling the compass carefully in his hand +so that the needle swung freely he found the +east, and as rapidly as his little legs would +carry him set out again in his effort to escape +the two sleeping men and to find camp and his +friends.</p> + +<p>At intervals he stopped to consult his compass. +<a name="Page_227" id="Page_227"></a>Then he would hurry forward again as fast +as ever he could go through the snow, looking +behind him fearfully, half expecting each time +to see the men in close pursuit, and always +with the dread that a gruff voice in the rear +would command him to halt, or that a rifle +bullet would be sent after him without +warning.</p> + +<p>As time passed and there was no indication +that he was followed, Jamie began to feel some +degree of security. Because of the storm it +was unlikely that the men would venture upon +the Bay. They had kept late hours drinking +at the bottle, and unless they were awakened +by the cold they would in all probability sleep +late and therefore not discover his absence +until the thickly falling snow had so far covered +his trail as to preclude the possibility of them +following it with certainty.</p> + +<p>With his mind more or less relieved on this +point, Jamie suddenly realized that he was +hungry. It was nearing midday. He had +eaten nothing for twenty-four hours, and he +had the normal appetite of a healthy boy. +The snow had perceptibly increased in depth +since his escape from the lean-to, and walking +was correspondingly hard. He was so hungry +<a name="Page_228" id="Page_228"></a>and so weary that at length he could scarcely +force one foot ahead of the other.</p> + +<p>The wind was rising, and in crossing an open +frozen marsh the snow drifted before the gale +in clouds so dense as to be suffocating. The +storm was attaining the proportions of a +blizzard, and when Jamie again reached the +shelter of the forest beyond the marsh he found +it necessary to stop to rest and regain his +breath.</p> + +<p>"'Twill never do to try to cross another +mesh," he decided. "I'm like to be overcome +with un and perish before I finds my +way out of un to the timber. I'll stick to the +woods, and if I can't stick to un I'll have to +bide where I is till the snow stops. I wonders +now if Doctor Joe and David is out lookin' +for me. I'm not thinkin' they'd bide in the +tent with me lost out here and they not knowin' +where I is."</p> + +<p>When he was rested a little he arose, took +his direction with the compass, and floundered +on through the snow.</p> + +<p>"They's sure out somewhere lookin' for me," +he thought, "but 'tis snowin' so hard they +never will find me! I'll have to keep goin' till +I finds camp. 'Tis strange now I'm not comin' +<a name="Page_229" id="Page_229"></a>to the brook, 'tis wonderful strange. I'm +thinkin' though I were crossin' two meshes +with the men in the night, and I've only been +crossin' one goin' back to-day. I'm fearin' +I'll never be able to cross un though, when I +comes to the next un."</p> + +<p>Presently, as Jamie had thought would be +the case, he came to another marsh. It satisfied +him that he was going in the right direction, +but at the same time it lay out before him as +a well-nigh impassable barrier. The wind +was driving the snow across it in swirling dense +clouds, and he stood for a little in the shelter +of the trees and viewed it with heavy heart.</p> + +<p>"'Tis a bigger mesh than the other," he +commented to himself, "but I'll have to try +to cross un. I can't bide here. I'll freeze +to death with no shelter and I has no axe for +makin' a shelter. I'm not knowin' what to do."</p> + +<p>For a little while he hesitated, then he plunged +out upon the edge of the marsh. He was +nearly swept from his feet, and to recover +his breath he was forced to retreat again to +the woods. Three times he tried to face the +storm-swept marsh, but each time was sent +staggering back to shelter. It was a task +beyond the strength and endurance of so young +<a name="Page_230" id="Page_230"></a>a lad, and utterly exhausted and bitterly +disappointed, he sat down upon the trunk of +a fallen tree to rest.</p> + +<p>"I never can make un whilst the nasty +weather lasts," he acknowledged. "I'm fair +scrammed and I'll have to wait for the wind +to ease before I tries un again."</p> + +<p>He could scarce restrain the tears. It was +a bitter disappointment. He was so hungry, +and so weary, and wished so hard to reach the +safety of camp and freedom from the still +present danger of being recaptured.</p> + +<p>"I'll have plenty o' grit and a stout heart +like a man," he presently declared. "I don't +mind bein' a bit hungry, and I'll never be +givin' up! I'll never give up whatever! Pop +says plenty o' grit'll pull a man out o' most +any fix. I'm in a bad fix now, and I'll have +grit and won't be gettin' scared. 'Twill never +do to be gettin' scared whatever."</p> + +<p>Jamie sat quietly upon the log, and presently +found himself dozing. He sprang to his feet, +for sleeping under these conditions was +dangerous. He tried to walk about, but was +so tired that he again returned to the log to +rest. It was growing colder, and he shivered. +The storm was increasing in fury.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231"></a>"I'm not knowin' what to do!" he said +despairingly. "If I goes on I'll perish and if +I keeps still I'll freeze to death and I'm too +wearied to move about to keep warm. 'Tis +likely the storm'll last the night through whatever, +and I'll never be able to stick un out +that long."</p> + +<p>Jamie again found himself dozing, and again +he got upon his feet.</p> + +<p>"I'll have to be doin' somethin'," said he. +"I'll keep my grit and try to think of somethin' +to do or I'll perish."</p> + +<p>Jamie was right. He was in peril, and grave +peril. Even though the storm-swept marsh +had not stood in his way he was quite too +weary to walk farther. He was thrown entirely +upon his own resources. His life depended +upon his own initiative, for he was quite beyond +help from others. It was a great unpeopled +wilderness in which Jamie was lost, and he +was but a wee lad, and even though Doctor +Joe and David were looking for him there was +scarce a chance that they could find him in +the raging storm.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XVIII" id="CHAPTER_XVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII</h3> + +<h2>A PLACE TO "BIDE"</h2> + + +<p>Dazed and almost hopeless Jamie stood +and gazed about him at the thick falling +snow. His body and brain were tired, but +some immediate action was imperative or he +would be overcome by his weariness and the +cold.</p> + +<p>"If I were only bringin' an axe, I could fix +a place to bide in and cut wood for a fire," +he said. "If I were only bringin' an axe!"</p> + +<p>He thrust his hands deep into his pocket +and felt the big, stout jack-knife that Doctor +Joe had given him, and he drew it out.</p> + +<p>"Maybe now I can fix un with just this," +he said hopefully. "I've got to have grit +and I've got to try my best whatever."</p> + +<p>He looked up and there, within two feet +of the log upon which he had been sitting, +were two spruce trees about six feet apart.</p> + +<p>"Maybe I can fix un right here," he commented,<a name="Page_233" id="Page_233"></a> +"and maybe I can lay a fire against +the log and if I can get un afire she'll burn a +long while and keep un warm."</p> + +<p>With much effort he cut and trimmed a stiff, +strong pole. The lower limbs of the trees were +not above four feet from the ground, and upon +these he rested his pole, extending it from +tree to tree. This was to form the ridge pole +to support the roof of his lean-to, for he was +to form a shelter similar to that improvised +by the two men the evening before.</p> + +<p>Then he cut other poles to form the roof, +and resting them upon the ridge pole and the +ground at a convenient angle to make a commodious +space beneath, he covered them with +a thick thatch of boughs, which were easily +broken from the overhanging limbs of surrounding +trees. This done he enclosed the +ends of his shelter in like manner, and laid +beneath it a floor of boughs.</p> + +<p>Jamie surveyed his work with satisfaction +and hope. No snow could reach the cave-like +interior; it was as well protected and as comfortable +as ever a lean-to could be made, and +a very little fire would warm it. Though much +smaller, it was quite as good a shelter as that +made by the two men, and possessed the added +<a name="Page_234" id="Page_234"></a>advantage of closed ends, which would render +it much easier to heat. He had occupied more +than two hours in its construction, and it had +called for ingenuity and much hard work.</p> + +<p>The opening of the lean-to faced the fallen +tree trunk, which lay before it in such a position +that it would serve excellently as a backlog.</p> + +<p>Though he had no axe with which to cut +firewood, he soon discovered upon scouting +about that scattered through the forest were +many dried and broken limbs that could be +had for the gathering, and in a little while he +had accumulated a sufficient supply to serve +for several hours.</p> + +<p>This done he pushed away the snow from +before the fallen tree trunk as best he could. +Using as tinder a handful of the long hairy +moss that hung from the inner limbs of the +spruce trees, he lighted it with a match from +the tin box salvaged the previous day at the +big rock. Placing the burning moss upon the +cleared spot next the log he applied small +sticks and, as they caught fire, larger ones, +until presently a fire was blazing and crackling +cheerily in front of his lean-to with the fallen +tree as a backlog to reflect the heat.</p> + +<p>Utterly weary Jamie stretched himself upon +<a name="Page_235" id="Page_235"></a>his bed of boughs, and it seemed to him that +he had never been in a cosier place in all his +life.</p> + +<p>"Pop were sayin' right when he says grit +will help a man over any tight place," breathed +Jamie contentedly. "If I were givin' up I'd +sure perished before to-morrow mornin', for +'tis growin' wonderful cold; but I has grit +and a stout heart like a man, and I gets a +place to bide and a fine warm fire to heat un."</p> + +<p>With the first moments of relaxation, Jamie +became aware that his wrists were exceedingly +painful, and upon examination he discovered +that they had been burned much worse than +he had realized in his attempts to sever the +string that bound them. Large blisters had +been raised, and one of the blisters had been +broken, doubtless while he was engaged in +building his lean-to shelter. The loose skin +had been rubbed off, and the angry red wound +left unprotected.</p> + +<p>"I'll have to fix un," he declared. "The +sore places'll be gettin' rubbed against things, +and be a wonderful lot worse and I leaves un +bide as they is."</p> + +<p>In the course of the first aid instruction, +Doctor Joe had taught Jamie, as well as David +<a name="Page_236" id="Page_236"></a>and Andy, the art of applying bandages, but +now Jamie had no bandages to apply. For a +little while he helplessly contemplated his +wrists. But for the fact that they were becoming +exceedingly painful he would have +decided to ignore them, for in his wearied +condition it was an effort to do anything.</p> + +<p>"I knows how I'll fix un," he said at length. +"I'll cut pieces from the bottom o' my shirt +to bind un up with. They'll keep un from +gettin' rubbed whatever, and when I gets +back to camp Doctor Joe'll fix un up right."</p> + +<p>This he proceeded to do at once with the +aid of his jack-knife, and presently had two +serviceable bandages ready to apply.</p> + +<p>"Doctor Joe were sayin' how to keep the air +away from burns by usin' oil or molasses or +flour or somethin'," he hesitated. "And he +were sayin' to keep sores from gettin' dirt +into un whatever. He says the sores'll be +gettin' inflicted or infested or somethin'—I'm +not rememberin' just what 'twere, but somethin' +bad whatever—if they gets dirt into un. I've +been wearin' the shirt three days, and I'm +thinkin' 'tis not as clean as Doctor Joe wants +the bindin' for sores to be, and I'll cover the +sore place where the blisters were rubbin' off +<a name="Page_237" id="Page_237"></a>with fir sap. That'll keep un clean. Pop says +'tis fine for sores."</p> + +<p>Crawling out of his nest Jamie found a young +balsam fir tree, and with his sharp jack-knife +cut from the bark several of the little sacs in +which sap is secreted. He had often seen +Thomas cut them and daub the contents upon +cuts and bruises, and sometimes even have him +and the other boys take the sap as medicine. +Returning to the lean-to he pierced the ends +of the sacs with the point of his knife, and +carefully smeared the contents over his burned +wrist where the skin was broken, taking care +that all of the exposed flesh was well covered +with the sap. Jamie had, indeed, fallen upon +the best antiseptic dressing that the surrounding +woods supplied.</p> + +<p>This done to his satisfaction, he bound his +wrists with the improvised bandages, applying +them carefully, after the manner in which +Doctor Joe had taught him in his lessons in +first aid.</p> + +<p>"'Tain't so bad," commented Jamie holding +the wrists up and surveying them with satisfaction. +"They feels a wonderful lot easier, +whatever. But I'd never been knowin' how +if 'tweren't for Doctor Joe showin' me."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238"></a>Jamie stretched himself upon the bed of +boughs, and for a time lay watching the fire +and thickly falling snow and listening to the +wind shrieking and howling through the tree +tops. Several times he fancied he heard the +report of distant rifle shots, and at these times +he would start up and listen intently and look +cautiously out, half expecting and fearful that +he would see the two lumbermen coming to +recapture him.</p> + +<p>But no one came to disturb him, and he +assured himself at length that he had heard +only the cracking of dead branches in the +storm, and that there had been no rifle shots. +Then, at last, his eyes drooped and he slept.</p> + +<p>Hours afterward Jamie awoke. He was +shivering with the cold. The fire had burned +out, save the backlog which still glowed. It +was night. The storm had passed and the +wind dropped to fitful blasts. The stars were +shining brightly, and the sky was clear save +for feathery, fast moving cloud patches.</p> + +<p>Jamie rebuilt the fire, and lay down to await +morning. He was so hungry that he could +scarce lie still, but again his eyes drooped +and again he slept.</p> + +<p>It was near daybreak when Jamie was +<a name="Page_239" id="Page_239"></a>startled by some unusual noise, and sat up +with a jerk. He listened intently, and satisfied +that someone was approaching sprang up and +looked cautiously out, seized with panic and +ready for flight. In the dim starlight he could +plainly see two men coming toward him over +the marsh.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_240" id="Page_240"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XIX" id="CHAPTER_XIX"></a>CHAPTER XIX</h3> + +<h2>SEARCHING THE WHITE WILDERNESS</h2> + + +<p>Nearly three hours passed before Doctor +Joe and David returned to camp, disheartened +and thoroughly alarmed, to report that +they had found no trace of Jamie. In the thick-falling +snow and darkness they had been forced +to relinquish the search until daylight should +come to their assistance.</p> + +<p>Andy and the boys were dazed. It could +hardly be comprehended or credited that Jamie +was, indeed, lost. They ate their belated supper +in silence, half expecting that he would, after +all, come walking in upon them. Doctor Joe +was grave and preoccupied. Several times, +now he, now David, went out into the night +to stand and listen in the storm, but all they +heard was the wail of wind in the tree tops.</p> + +<p>At last, with heavy hearts, they went to bed, +upon Doctor Joe's advice. Andy asked that +he might pass the night in the tent with Doctor +<a name="Page_241" id="Page_241"></a>Joe and David, and so it was arranged. Neither +Andy nor David, more worried than they had +ever been in all their lives before, felt in the +least like sleep. Doctor Joe did not lie down +with them. For a long while the two lads +lay awake and watched him crouching before +the stove smoking his pipe, his face grave and +thoughtful. He had spoken no word of encouragement, +and the lads knew that he was +troubled beyond expression.</p> + +<p>The wind was rising. In sudden gusts of +anger it dashed the snow against the tent in +swirling blasts, and moaned dismally through +the tree tops. The crackling fire in the stove, +usually so cheerful, only served now to increase +their sorrow. It offered warmth and comfort and +protection from the night and cold and drifting +snow, which Jamie, if he had not perished, +was denied. They could only think of him as +wandering and suffering in the cold and darkness, +hungry and miserable, and they condemned +themselves.</p> + +<p>When sleep finally carried the lads into +unconsciousness, Doctor Joe's tall figure was +still crouching before the stove, and when +they awoke he was already up and had kindled +a fresh fire in the stove, though it was not yet +<a name="Page_242" id="Page_242"></a>day, and the tent was lighted by the flickering +flame of a candle.</p> + +<p>"'Twill be daylight by the time we've +finished breakfast," said Doctor Joe as the +lads sat up. "It's snowing harder than ever, +but I think we had better go out as soon as +we can see and have a look up the brook. +Jamie may not be so far away. We may find +him bivouacked quite close to camp. The +snow is getting deep and we shall not find +travelling easy."</p> + +<p>"We'll be lookin' the best we can, whatever," +agreed David. "I couldn't bide in the tent +with Jamie gone. I'm wakin' with a wonderful +heavy heart. I'm findin' it hard to believe +he's not about camp, and I were just dreamin' +about he bein' lost."</p> + +<p>"That's the way I feels too," said Andy. +"I wakes feelin' most like I'd have to cry. +Can't I be goin' with you and Davy? I never +can bide here whilst you're away, Doctor +Joe."</p> + +<p>"Yes, we three will go and we'll take some +of the other lads with us, though we'll have +to leave somebody in camp to keep the fire +going," agreed Doctor Joe. "We'll need warm +tents when we come back, if we bring Jamie +<a name="Page_243" id="Page_243"></a>with us, and I hope we'll find him none the +worse for his night out."</p> + +<p>"'Tisn't like 'twere winter," suggested David +hopefully. "'Tisn't so cold, if he were havin' +matches to put on a fire, but I'm doubtin' he +has matches."</p> + +<p>"Let us hope he had. Andy, suppose you +call the others," suggested Doctor Joe. +"Breakfast is nearly ready."</p> + +<p>Andy was already dressed, and hurrying +out he presently returned with the other lads. +Breakfast of venison and bread with hot tea +was hurriedly eaten, while they put forth all +sorts of theories as to the cause of Jamie's +disappearance and the possibilities of finding him.</p> + +<p>"I'm thinkin' now," said David with a +more hopeful view as daylight began to filter +through the tent, "that Jamie'll be knowin' +how to fix a shelter, and that we'll be findin' +he safe and that he'll be just losin' his way a +bit in the storm. If he has matches he'll sure +be puttin' a fire on."</p> + +<p>"I'm doubtin' he has the matches," suggested +Andy discouragingly. "He weren't thinkin' +to be away from camp and he weren't takin' +any. He were never on the trails, and he'd +sure be forgettin' to take un."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_244" id="Page_244"></a>"Let us hope he has them," Doctor Joe +encouraged. "If he has matches I'm sure he'll +be safe enough."</p> + +<p>"'Twere my fault he were gettin' lost," said +Seth. "He'd never been gettin' lost if I'd +only kept he in sight the way you said to do."</p> + +<p>"No," objected Doctor Joe, "we'll not say +it was anybody's fault."</p> + +<p>Presently they were ready. Seth and Micah +were detailed to remain in camp, and the others +set forth, David and Doctor Joe carrying their +rifles.</p> + +<p>In much the same manner as that adopted +in the search for the rock the previous day, +Doctor Joe and the boys spread out on the +left, or westward, side of the brook. Now, +however, they were much closer together, +because they could see so short a distance +through the snow. Walking was much harder, +and their progress correspondingly slower.</p> + +<p>Thus they continued to the farthest point +reached before turning back the previous day, +David or Doctor Joe now and again firing +shots from their rifles. Then they turned back, +making the return just to the westward of the +trail made by Doctor Joe, who was on the +left flank as they passed up the brook.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_245" id="Page_245"></a>"There's a rock! There's a big rock!" +shouted David, as the rock where Jamie had +begun his search for the cache loomed high +through the snow.</p> + +<p>Every one ran to the rock, and as they +gathered by its side, Andy exclaimed:</p> + +<p>"I knows now what Jamie does! He were +near enough to see the rock! He were the last +one beyond Seth, and he finds un and he goes +huntin' the cache by himself, and it gets dark +and he gets lost when the snow comes!"</p> + +<p>"That sounds reasonable," admitted Doctor +Joe. "I shouldn't be the least surprised if +you were right! It's more than probable +that's just what happened! The thing now is +to find the direction Jamie probably took +from here, and the snow has covered all trace +of him."</p> + +<p>"With his trail all covered, there'll be no +trackin' he. What'll we do about un?" asked +David. "'Tis hard to think out what way +Jamie'd be like to go from here."</p> + +<p>"Let's try goin' the way the paper said the +cache was," suggested Andy. "Maybe Jamie +finds un in the tree and climbs the tree and +falls and hurts himself."</p> + +<p>"Andy is right," agreed Doctor Joe. "It is +<a name="Page_246" id="Page_246"></a>quite likely he used his copy of the directions +to find the cache, and that he went in the +direction specified. We'll do the same."</p> + +<p>It did not take them long to find the +hackmatack tree, and in doing so they stumbled +upon the pile of rocks Jamie had built up for +a compass rest. It was covered with snow, +but was high enough to be discernible, and a +careful clearing of the snow discovered the fact +that the stones had been recently piled.</p> + +<p>"They may have been piled by the man +who made the cache," suggested Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p>"He'd never been doin' that!" objected +David. "'Twould make the tree too easy to +find. I'm thinkin' 'twere Jamie piles un."</p> + +<p>"What would Jamie be pilin' the stones for +now?" asked Lige sceptically. "He'd not +be takin' time to go pilin' up stones that way."</p> + +<p>"He piles un to pilot us when we comes +huntin' he," suggested David.</p> + +<p>They took the next direction, and in due +time discovered the round rock, the top of +which they likewise cleared of snow that they +might make quite certain it was the rock for +which they were searching. Then, in due +time, Jamie's second pile of rocks and finally +the birch tree were located.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_247" id="Page_247"></a>At the birch tree all clues were lost. Vainly +they circled the surrounding country, firing +rifles occasionally until they came to the edge +of the marsh.</p> + +<p>"We'd never be findin' he on the mesh, if +he gets out there," suggested David.</p> + +<p>"No," agreed Doctor Joe, "and there's no +reason to suppose that he crossed it to the +other side."</p> + +<p>"That's what I thinks," said David. "He's +somewheres this side of the mesh. He'd never +cross un. He'd be knowin' there's no mesh +between here and camp."</p> + +<p>"He'd know 'twere not the way to camp," +declared Andy. "Jamie'd never be forgettin' +that he crosses no mesh comin' from camp +however turned about he is. He'd never be +so turned about as that."</p> + +<p>"We'll search all the country, then, between +this marsh and the brook," suggested Doctor +Joe.</p> + +<p>They could not know that Jamie, on the +opposite side of the marsh, was at that moment +in a snug shelter, and had been listening to +their rifle shots, and supposing them to be +the breaking of dead branches in the wind. +Jamie was too small and too inexperienced +<a name="Page_248" id="Page_248"></a>to face and weather the storm on the marsh, +unassisted, but Doctor Joe or David or even +Andy might have crossed it. How often it +happens that an obstacle that might be surmounted +turns us back at the very door of +success!</p> + +<p>Wearily they trailed back through the woods, +and up and down until darkness finally forced +them to return to camp unsuccessful and heavy +hearted. The younger lads were almost too +weary to drag their feet behind them. They +had eaten nothing since their early breakfast, +but Seth and Micah, anxiously watching and +hoping, had a hot supper of fried venison +and bread and tea ready, and as soon as they +had finished their meal, Doctor Joe directed +that they go to bed and rest.</p> + +<p>Long before daybreak Doctor Joe was stirring. +He lighted the fire, and when the kettle boiled +roused David. Breakfast was ready when +Andy awoke.</p> + +<p>"Is you startin' so early?" he asked, rubbing +his eyes. "'Tis wonderful early. We can't +see to travel till light with snow fallin'."</p> + +<p>"Clear and fine outside!" said Doctor Joe, +"I'm not satisfied that Jamie didn't cross +the marsh. It's likely to be a long hard tramp +<a name="Page_249" id="Page_249"></a>and David and I are going alone this morning +because we can travel faster. If we don't +find Jamie by noon we'll come back after you +and the other lads. You'll be fresh and rested +then for the afternoon's search. We can't +give it up till we find Jamie."</p> + +<p>"I'd be keepin' up with you," protested +Andy.</p> + +<p>"If you go we'll have to take some of the +others," objected Doctor Joe. "The snow is +deep and they'll not be able to travel as fast +as we shall. Let us go alone and if we need +you we'll come for you."</p> + +<p>And so it was arranged.</p> + +<p>Presently David and Doctor Joe set forth +in the frosty starlit morning. They turned +their steps toward the marsh, and were near +its eastern border when David stopped and +sniffed the air.</p> + +<p>"I smell smoke!" he exclaimed eagerly.</p> + +<p>"Are you sure?" asked Doctor Joe, also +sniffing. "I don't smell it."</p> + +<p>"There's a smell o' smoke!" insisted David. +"The wind's from the west'ard, and the smoke +comes from over the mesh. There's a fire +somewheres over there."</p> + +<p>"Your nose is keener than mine," said Doctor +<a name="Page_250" id="Page_250"></a>Joe hopefully. "Go ahead, Davy. We'll see +if you really smell smoke."</p> + +<p>David led the way out upon the marsh, and +they had gone but a short distance when Doctor +Joe was quite sure that he, also, smelled smoke. +David hurried on with Doctor Joe at his heels.</p> + +<p>"There's somebody movin'!" exclaimed +David presently. "See un? See un? 'Tis +sure Jamie!"</p> + +<p>Then he ran and Doctor Joe ran, and thus +they came upon the frightened Jamie, standing +uncertainly before his lean-to.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_251" id="Page_251"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XX" id="CHAPTER_XX"></a>CHAPTER XX</h3> + +<h2>"WOLVES!" YELLED ANDY</h2> + + +<p>"Jamie! Jamie! We've been lookin' and +lookin' for you!" shouted David, quite +overcome with excitement and relief.</p> + +<p>"I'm so glad 'tis you!" exclaimed Jamie, +tears springing to his eyes as he recognized +Doctor Joe and David. "I was scared!"</p> + +<p>"Safe and sound as ever you could be, and +all of us thinking you were lost under a snow-drift!" +Doctor Joe in vast good humour +slapped Jamie on the shoulder. "You gritty +little rascal! I'll never worry about you again! +Here you are as able to take care of yourself +as any man on The Labrador! Come on now +back to camp and we'll hear all about your +adventures when you've eaten. Are you +hungry?"</p> + +<p>"Wonderful hungry!" admitted Jamie.</p> + +<p>"Aye, we'll be makin' haste, for Andy and +the lads are sore worried," said David.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_252" id="Page_252"></a>In single file, Doctor Joe and David tramping +the trail for Jamie, they set out for camp. +An hour later they crossed the brook, and +with the first glimpse of the tents heard a +shout of joy, as Andy and the other lads discovered +them and came running to meet +them.</p> + +<p>While Jamie satisfied an accumulated appetite +he answered no end of questions. Every one +was vastly excited as he related the story of +his experience.</p> + +<p>"'Tweren't Lem Horn's silver they has after +all," Jamie declared. "There were nothin' +in the cache but the bottles they drinks from, +and they were thinkin' a wonderful lot o' +them bottles."</p> + +<p>David, in high indignation, was for setting +out at once in search of the two lumbermen, +but it was decided that they had doubtless +already returned to the lumber camp.</p> + +<p>"They'd probably say that they were only +having sport with you, Jamie, and meant you +no harm," said Doctor Joe. "The people over +at their camp would believe them rather than +a little Labrador lad. We may as well waste +no time with them. We'll leave them alone, +and be thankful that Jamie is safe and well +<a name="Page_253" id="Page_253"></a>except for the burned wrists, and they'll soon +be cured."</p> + +<p>"And we'll be havin' a fine time campin' +here," agreed Jamie. "I wants to keep clear +o' them men whatever."</p> + +<p>It was a week later when they broke +camp to return to The Jug, and when the +visiting lads said good-bye and set sail to +their homes across the Bay every one declared +he had never had so good a time in all his +life.</p> + +<p>With the coming of November the boats +were hauled out of the water. The shores +were already crusted with ice and the +temperature never rose to the thawing point +even in the midday sun. The mighty Frost +King had ascended his throne and was asserting +his relentless power. Presently all the world +would be kneeling at his feet.</p> + +<p>Buckskin moccasins with heavy blanket duffle +socks of wool took the place of sealskin boots. +The dry snow would not again soften to wet +them until spring. The adiky, with its fur-trimmed +hood, took the place of the jacket, +soon to be augmented by sealskin netseks or +caribou skin kulutuks.</p> + +<p>"The Bay's smokin'," David announced one +<a name="Page_254" id="Page_254"></a>evening as he came in after feeding the dogs. +"She'll soon freeze now."</p> + +<p>In the days that followed the smoke haze +hung over the water until, one morning, the +Bay was fast, and the lapping of the waves was +not to be heard again for many months.</p> + +<p>The nine sledge dogs were in fine fettle. +Handsome, big fellows they were, but fearsome +and treacherous enough. They looked like +sleek, fat wolves, and they were, indeed, but +domesticated wolves. Friendly they seemed, +but they were ever ready to take advantage +of the helpless and unwary, and their great +white fangs were not above tearing their own +master into shreds should he ever be so careless +as to stumble and fall among them.</p> + +<p>The sledge was taken out and overhauled by +David. It was fourteen feet long and two and +a half feet wide. Twenty cross-bars formed +the top. Not a nail was used in its construction, +for nails would not hold an hour on rough ice. +Everything was bound with sealskin thongs. +The sledge shoes were of iron. These David +polished bright with sand, and then applied +a coating of seal oil. Finally the harness and +long sealskin traces were examined, and all +was ready.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_255" id="Page_255"></a>It was the end of November when the Bay +froze, but there was no certainty that travelling +would be safe upon the sea ice beyond Fort +Pelican before the beginning of January. +Therefore Doctor Joe confined his visits to +the Bay folk during December, and on his first +tour Andy served as driver with Jamie as +passenger.</p> + +<p>The dogs were harnessed after the Eskimo +fashion. That is to say, "fan shape," and +not, as is customary in Alaska and among +white men of the far northwest, in tandem.</p> + +<p>Leading from the komatik (sledge) in front +was a single thong of sealskin with a loop on +its end. This was called the "bridle." Each +dog had an individual trace, its end passed +through the loop in the bridle and securely +tied. Tinker, the leading dog, was fully thirty-five +feet from the komatik when his trace was +stretched to its full length. He had the longest +trace of all. He was trained to respond to +shouted directions, turning to the right when +"ouk" was called, or left for "rudder," the +word being repeated several times by the driver +in rapid succession. When it was desired that +the dogs should stop, "ah" was the order, and +when they were to go forward "ooisht," or +<a name="Page_256" id="Page_256"></a>"oksuit." The other dogs followed Tinker as +a pack of wolves follows the leader. The two +dogs directly behind Tinker had traces of +equal length, but somewhat shorter, the pair +behind them still shorter, and so on to the +last pair.</p> + +<p>A long whip was used to keep them in subjection. +This was of braided walrus hide an +inch thick at its butt and tapering to a thin +lash. To the butt was attached a short wooden +handle a foot in length, to which was fastened +a loop which was hooked over the protruding +end of the forward cross-bar and the whip +permitted to trail upon the ice when not in +use, and at the same time it was always within +the driver's reach.</p> + +<p>The boys had practised the manipulation of +the whip all their lives. They could flick a +square inch of ice at thirty feet with its tip. +It was capable of a gentle tap, or the force of +a pistol shot, at its wielder's discretion. The +whip was the terror of the team, for even at +his distance Tinker, the leader, could be brought +to account if he failed to do his duty or obey +commands.</p> + +<p>There was little sickness in the Bay, and after +patching up a lumberman at Grampus River, +<a name="Page_257" id="Page_257"></a>and providing some medicine for old Molly +Budd's rheumatics, Andy and Jamie turned +homeward with Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p>Near the mouth of Grampus River there was +a section of "bad ice" or ice that was not always +safe to be crossed, the result doubtless of +cross currents in the tide. To avoid this +bad ice Andy followed the shore for a considerable +distance before turning northward for +the twelve-mile run directly across the Bay +to The Jug.</p> + +<p>It was a dull, cold, dreary day. The snow +ground and squeaked under the sledge runners. +Now and again a confusion of shore ridges +rendered the hauling bad and the dogs lagged.</p> + +<p>They were midway between Grampus River +and the place where they were to make the +turn northward when Jamie warned:</p> + +<p>"Look out, Andy! There's some loose dogs +comin' out of the woods! They'll be fightin' +the team!"</p> + +<p>Six big beasts, larger even than Thomas +Angus's big dogs, were trotting out of the woods +and upon the ice a hundred yards in advance. +The team saw them, and with a howl rushed +forward to the attack.</p> + +<p>"Wolves!" yelled Andy. "They's wolves!"</p> + +<p><a name="Page_258" id="Page_258"></a>The wolves were free. The dogs were bound +by harness, and thus fettered were no match +for the big, wild creatures. Andy's rifle was +lashed upon the komatik. It was out of the +question to free it in the moment before the +wolves were upon them, and it was to be a +hand-to-hand fight.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_259" id="Page_259"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XXI" id="CHAPTER_XXI"></a>CHAPTER XXI</h3> + +<h2>THE ALARM IN THE NIGHT</h2> + + +<p>The clash came instantly. The wolf pack +was upon the dogs, and dogs and wolves +were at once a howling, snarling, fighting mass. +Great bared fangs gleamed and snapped. It +was a fight to the death, a primordial fight +for the survival of the fittest.</p> + +<p>The attack was launched with such indescribable +suddenness that Doctor Joe and Jamie +had scarcely time to drop from the komatik +before it was begun. Andy had instinctively +seized his whip and began to ply it with every +opening that offered. The first stroke caught +a big wolf across the eyes, and with howls +of pain it immediately endeavoured to extricate +itself from the fight. The lash had blinded it.</p> + +<p>With feverish haste Doctor Joe and Jamie +undid the axe and rifle from the komatik, +and Doctor Joe with the axe and Jamie with +<a name="Page_260" id="Page_260"></a>the rifle charged the fighting beasts. A lucky +blow from the axe split a wolf's head. Jamie +quickly found that to shoot at a distance he +must take the risk of killing one of the dogs, +but watching for an opening, with the muzzle +of the rifle within an inch of a big wolf's body, +he fired and another wolf was disposed of.</p> + +<p>In the meantime Andy had been plying +the whip with such precision that the foot of +one of the wolves had been torn off and another +wolf so badly lacerated that as it broke temporarily +away Jamie dropped it with the rifle, +and then shot the blind wolf which was now +roaming aimlessly about. A stroke from Doctor +Joe's axe dispatched the fifth animal, and the +remaining wolf, now at the mercy of the dogs, +was literally torn into shreds.</p> + +<p>Hardly five minutes had elapsed from the +moment Jamie discovered the pack trotting out +of the woods until the fight was ended. The +attack had been made with such suddenness +and such savage fierceness that Doctor Joe +and the boys had scarcely uttered a word.</p> + +<p>Now there was the tangle of dogs to be +straightened out, and Andy was compelled to +use his whip to drive them from the dead wolves +and quiet them. Hardly one of them had +escaped injury from the wolf fangs, and Dick, +a faithful old fellow, was so badly mangled +that Andy cut him loose from the harness to +follow the komatik home at his leisure.</p> + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><a name="Page_260a" id="Page_260a"></a></p> +<p class="figcenter" style="width: 726px;"> +<img src="images/image005.jpg" width="726" height="500" alt="IT WAS A FIGHT TO THE DEATH" title="IT WAS A FIGHT TO THE DEATH" /> +<span class="caption">IT WAS A FIGHT TO THE DEATH</span> +</p> +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + +<p><a name="Page_261" id="Page_261"></a>"Dick's too much hurt to do any hauling for +a month whatever," said Andy regretfully.</p> + +<p>"He won't die, will he?" asked Jamie +sympathetically.</p> + +<p>"He'll get over un," Andy assured.</p> + +<p>"The dogs had grit, now!" Jamie boasted. +"There's nary a team in the Bay could have +fought like that!"</p> + +<p>"And I noticed you had some grit too," +said Doctor Joe. "A wolf's fangs snapped +within an inch of your leg, you young rascal, +when you held the rifle against that fellow +you shot."</p> + +<p>"I weren't thinkin' of that," said Jamie.</p> + +<p>One of the pelts was so badly torn by the +dogs as to be valueless. The remaining carcasses +were skinned, and the skins lashed upon the +sledge, and as they turned homeward Andy +remarked:</p> + +<p>"There's five good skins and they'll bring +four dollars apiece whatever. 'Tweren't a bad +hunt when we weren't huntin'."</p> + +<p>"You and Jamie can take the money you +<a name="Page_262" id="Page_262"></a>get for them and start a bank account," +suggested Doctor Joe. "I'll send it to St. +John's and put it in a bank for you, and then +you'll have that test completed for both the +second and first class. There's no doubt you've +earned it."</p> + +<p>"Will you, sir? That's fine now!" exclaimed +Andy. "Davy wasn't with us, and +he'll have to set traps to earn his. But he'll +get a marten or two, whatever."</p> + +<p>"There's no doubt about David's catching +the martens," said Doctor Joe. "If there's a +marten around he'll catch it."</p> + +<p>It was dark when they reached The Jug. +Margaret and David were quite excited when +they heard the story of the adventure, and +mighty pleased with its ending.</p> + +<p>"'Twere a stray pack," said David, "and +they were hungry. Pop had a pack come at +he that way once, but they just took one of +the dogs and ran off."</p> + +<p>A wonderful Christmas they had at The Jug +that year. Doctor Joe had no end of surprises +stowed away in mysterious boxes that he had +brought from New York and deposited in his +old cabin at Break Cove. He and David +brought them over with the dogs on Christmas +<a name="Page_263" id="Page_263"></a>eve, and on Christmas morning they were +opened.</p> + +<p>The one disappointment of the day was the +failure of Thomas to be with them. He had +suggested at the time he departed for the Seal +Lake trails in the autumn that he might come +out of the wilderness for additional provisions +at Christmas time, but it was a long and +tedious journey, and they knew it was one +he would hardly undertake unless pressed by +need.</p> + +<p>Christmas holiday week was always one of +celebration at the Hudson's Bay Company's +Post. At this time trappers and Indians +emerged from the silent wilderness to barter +their early catch of furs and to purchase fresh +supplies; and on New Year's eve it was +the custom of the men and women of the +Bay to gather at the Post for the final +festivities. All day long sledge load after +sledge load of jolly folk appeared to take +part in the great New Year's eve dance, and to +enter into the shooting contests and snowshoe +and other races on New Year's day.</p> + +<p>Eli and Mark Horn drove their team in at +The Jug just at dinner time on New Year's +eve, and Eli invited Margaret to go on with +<a name="Page_264" id="Page_264"></a>them and visit Kate Hodge, the daughter of +the Post servant.</p> + +<p>"We'll be short of lasses at the dance, and +we needs un all," said Eli.</p> + +<p>"I'd like wonderful well to go," said Margaret +wistfully.</p> + +<p>"Go on," urged Doctor Joe. "You'll have +a good time and the boys and I will make out +famously here. You get away seldom enough +and see too few people. 'Twill do you good, +lass."</p> + +<p>"Aye, come on now!" Eli urged. "We'll +take you over snug and warm in our komatik +box. Kate'll be wonderful glad to see you, +and we'll bring you back the day after New +Year."</p> + +<p>"I'll go," Margaret consented, her eyes +dancing with pleasure.</p> + +<p>"And there'll be no prettier lass there," said +Doctor Joe gallantly, which brought a blush to +Margaret's cheek and caused Eli to chuckle.</p> + +<p>Margaret hastened her toilet and was ready +in a jiffy. She was all a-flutter with excitement +when Eli tucked her in a box rigged on +the rear of the komatik, and wrapped her +snugly with caribou skins.</p> + +<p>"You must have had it in mind to capture +<a name="Page_265" id="Page_265"></a>Margaret when you left home, Eli," Doctor +Joe suggested with a twinkle in his eye. "Men +don't take travelling boxes when they go alone."</p> + +<p>Eli grinned sheepishly as he broke the +komatik loose, and the dogs dashed away.</p> + +<p>It was a dull cold day with a leaden sky, +and snow was shifting restlessly over the ice. +The wind was in the south-east, and as they +entered the cabin David remarked:</p> + +<p>"There'll be snow before to-morrow mornin'."</p> + +<p>When they had eaten supper that evening +and cleared the table David stepped out for +a look at the weather, and returning reported:</p> + +<p>"'Twill be a nasty night. The snow's started +and the wind's risin'. 'Tis wonderful frosty, +too, for a wind."</p> + +<p>"Let's see how cold it is," said Doctor Joe, +stepping out to consult his spirit thermometer. +"Thirty-eight below zero. Frosty enough with +a gale, and a gale's rising," he reported. "I'm +glad we're all snug inside."</p> + +<p>"Tell us a story," Jamie suggested, as +they settled themselves comfortably by the +fire.</p> + +<p>"There's dogs comin'!" Andy broke in.</p> + +<p>David ran to the door, and a moment later +ushered Eli Horn into the cabin.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_266" id="Page_266"></a>"What's the matter, Eli? Has anything +happened?" asked Doctor Joe, immediately +concerned for Margaret's safety.</p> + +<p>"Margaret's safe," said Eli with suppressed +excitement. "There's murder at the Post!"</p> + +<p>Questions brought forth the fact that Eli +and Margaret had reached the Post at about +half-past three and found the people in confusion. +Three lumbermen from Grampus River +had come there. There had been a dispute +among them and one of them was stabbed. +The other two had immediately departed, +presumably to return to the lumber camps. +Eli did not know how seriously the man was +injured. He had not seen him. It had +occurred shortly before his arrival, and at +Margaret's suggestion he had turned directly +about and returned to The Jug to fetch Doctor +Joe to attend the injured man.</p> + +<p>"My dogs is fagged," said Eli, "and 'twere +slow comin' back."</p> + +<p>"David will take me over with his dogs. +They're fresh, and will travel faster," said +Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p>In ten minutes David was ready with the +dogs harnessed, and the two teams drove away +into the darkness and storm.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_267" id="Page_267"></a>Andy and Jamie were greatly excited. +Tragedies enough happened up and down the +coast when men were drowned or lost in the +ice or met with fatal injuries. But never +before in the Bay had one man been cut down +by the hand of another. It was a ghastly +thought, and the awfulness of it was perhaps +accentuated by the snow dashing against the +window panes and the wind shrieking around +the gables of the cabin.</p> + +<p>It was near ten o'clock, long past their usual +bedtime, and they were still talking, for there +was matter enough in their brains to banish +sleep, when the door suddenly opened and +accompanied by the howl of the wind a snow-covered +figure lurched in upon them.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /><p><a name="Page_268" id="Page_268"></a></p> +<h3><a name="CHAPTER_XXII" id="CHAPTER_XXII"></a>CHAPTER XXII</h3> + +<h2>THE IMMUTABLE LAW OF GOD</h2> + + +<p>"Peter! 'Tis Peter Sparks!" exclaimed +Andy with vast relief to find it was not +a murderous lumberman.</p> + +<p>"I'm comin' after Doctor Joe!" gasped +Peter, as half frozen he drew off his snow-caked +netsek.</p> + +<p>"Me rub your nose, Peter. She's froze, and +your cheeks too," broke in Andy, vigorously +rubbing Peter's whitened nose and cheeks.</p> + +<p>Peter was silent perforce while Andy manipulated +the frosted parts until circulation and +colour were restored.</p> + +<p>"Come to the fire now and warm up," directed +Andy. "What you wantin' of Doctor Joe?"</p> + +<p>"There's been murder done, or clost to un!" +Peter, at last free to articulate, continued. +"Murder at the lumber camp!"</p> + +<p>"Murder!" repeated Jamie, awesomely.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_269" id="Page_269"></a>"Aye, nigh to murder whatever!" Peter +reiterated.</p> + +<p>"Doctor Joe's gone to the Post," said Andy. +"Eli Horn came for he. Two of the lumber +folk most killed another of un over there. +Davy took Doctor Joe over."</p> + +<p>"And two of un most killed the boss at +the camp," explained Peter. "They comes +there from the Post about six o'clock and were +packin' a flatsled with things. The boss asks +un where they's goin'. They answers some +way that makes he mad, and he hits one of un. +Then they jumps at he and pounds and kicks he +till he's like dead, and he don't come to +again. The two men has rifles and they keeps +all the lumbermen back, and off they goes +with the flatsled, and they gets away."</p> + +<p>"Will the boss die then?" asked Jamie in +horror.</p> + +<p>"With Doctor Joe gone he'll sure be dyin'," +declared Peter desperately. "His arm is broke +and he's broke somewhere inside, and his face +is awful to look at, all pounded and kicked +and bleedin'. Me and Lige goes up to sit a +bit and hear un tell their stories, and we gets +there just after the two men gets away. With +Doctor Joe's teachin' we fixes the boss up the +<a name="Page_270" id="Page_270"></a>best we can, and whilst Lige stays to help +look after he, I comes for Doctor Joe. Pop's +to the Post with the dogs and I has to walk, +and facin' the wind 'twere hard. And now +Doctor Joe's gone, the poor man'll sure die!"</p> + +<p>"You has wonderful grit to come!" said +Jamie admiringly. "'Tis wonderful frosty and +nasty outside."</p> + +<p>"'Twere to save the boss's life! 'Tis the +scout law," Peter asserted stoutly. "I'll be +goin' to the Post now for Doctor Joe."</p> + +<p>"You're nigh done up, Peter. You'll be +stayin' here with Jamie. <i>I'm</i> goin' to the +Post for Doctor Joe," declared Andy.</p> + +<p>"I am most done up," Peter confessed. +"But the wind'll be in your back goin' to the +Post. She's just startin' though, and she'll +be a wonderful sight worse than she is now +before you gets there. 'Twill be terrible nasty."</p> + +<p>"I'm goin' too," said Jamie.</p> + +<p>"You're not goin'," said Andy. "I'm bigger +and I can travel faster if you're not comin'. +'Twould be wrong to leave Peter here alone."</p> + +<p>"I'm <i>goin</i>!" repeated Jamie stubbornly.</p> + +<p>"Won't you be stayin' with me?" pleaded +Peter. "I—I'm afeared to stay here alone +with those two men like to come in on me."</p> + +<p><a name="Page_271" id="Page_271"></a>"I'll stay," Jamie consented.</p> + +<p>A blast of wind shook the cabin.</p> + +<p>"I'm fearin' you can't do it, Andy! 'Twill +soon be too much for flesh and blood out on +the Bay!" said Peter.</p> + +<p>"'Tis in my scout oath to do my best," said +Andy, adjusting the hood of his sealskin netsek. +"I'm goin', now."</p> + +<p>Andy closed the door behind him. It was +pitchy dark. The snow was driving in blinding +clouds, and he stood for a moment to catch +his breath. Then he felt his way down across +The Jug and out upon the Bay ice. Here the +full force of the north-east blizzard met him. +He staggered and choked with the first blast, +then in a temporary lull forged ahead.</p> + +<p>The storm, as Peter predicted, had not reached +its height. Each smothering blast of fury was +stronger and fiercer than the one before it. +Andy took advantage of the lulls, and save +when the heavier blasts came and nearly swept +him from his feet, maintained a steady trot. +In the swirl of snow-clouds he could see nothing +a foot from his nose. Once he found himself +floundering through pressure ridges formed +by the tide near shore. This he calculated +was the tip of a long point jutting out into +<a name="Page_272" id="Page_272"></a>the Bay, half-way between The Jug and the +Post. Ten miles of the distance was behind +him. He drew farther out upon the ice.</p> + +<p>There were times when Andy had to throw +himself prone upon the ice with his face down +and sheltered by his arms to escape suffocation.</p> + +<p>"'Tis gettin' wonderful nasty," he said, +"but I'll have plenty o' grit, like Jamie says, +and with the Lord's help I'll pull through."</p> + +<p>Then he found himself repeating over and +over again the prayer:</p> + +<p>"Dear Lord, help me through! 'Tis to save +a life, and the scout oath! Dear Lord, help +me through!"</p> + +<p>The gale had now risen to such terrific +proportions that often he was compelled to +crawl upon his hands and knees. With each +momentary lull he would rise and stagger +forward. His legs worked at these times without +conscious effort. It was strange his legs +should be like that. They had never felt like +that before.</p> + +<p>And so, crawling, staggering upright, crawling +again, and lying for minutes at a time with +his face in his arms that he might breathe +when he was well-nigh overwhelmed and +suffocated, Andy kept on.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_273" id="Page_273"></a>He could recall little of the last hours on the +ice. It was a confused sensation of rising +and falling, staggering and crawling until he +collided with an obstruction, and recognizing it +as the jetty at the Post, his brain roused to a +degree of consciousness, and his heart leaped +with joy.</p> + +<p>With much fumbling he succeeded in donning +his snow-shoes, which were slung upon his +back, for the twenty yards that lay between +the ice and the buildings was covered with deep +drift. Once he stepped upon a dog that lay +huddled and sleeping under the drift. It sprang +out with a snarl and snapped at his legs. A +hundred of the savage creatures were lying +about in the snow.</p> + +<p>Day comes late in Labrador. It was still +pitchy dark outside when Andy, at eight +o'clock in the morning, lurched into the kitchen +at the Post house, and fell sprawling upon the +floor. He had been battling the storm for ten +hours.</p> + +<p>David and Margaret, Eli and Mark and +several others were there. Doctor Joe was +at breakfast in the Factor's quarters, and +they called him. Andy's face was covered +with a mass of caked snow and ice. His nose +<a name="Page_274" id="Page_274"></a>and cheeks and chin were white and badly +frosted, and upon removing his mittens and +moccasins, his hands and feet were found to +be in the same condition.</p> + +<p>Mr. MacCreary, the factor, placed a bed at +Doctor Joe's disposal, and when the frost had +been removed and circulation had been restored, +Andy was tucked into warm blankets.</p> + +<p>"That chap had grit," remarked Mr. MacCreary +as he and Doctor Joe left David and +Margaret by the bedside and Andy asleep. +"The Angus boys are all gritty fellows. They're +the sort the Company needs."</p> + +<p>"Yes," Doctor Joe agreed heartily, "and +they never shirk their duty. Andy is a Boy +Scout, and he did what he considered his duty. +Now I must go to the lumber camp and fix +up that boss, if he isn't beyond fixing up."</p> + +<p>With the coming of dawn the wind subsided +and the snow ceased to fall. Eli harnessed his +dogs when it was light, and with the lumberman +who had been stabbed, but whose injuries +were not after all serious, he and Doctor Joe +set out for Grampus River.</p> + +<p>At the lumber camp they found Lige Sparks, +Obadiah Button and Micah Dunk installed as +volunteer nurses. The man had a broken +<a name="Page_275" id="Page_275"></a>arm, three broken ribs, and had suffered internal +injuries that demanded prompt attention.</p> + +<p>"If Andy hadn't come for me, and if I'd +been delayed much longer in reaching the +camp," said Doctor Joe later, "the man would +have died. Thanks to the boys, his life will +be saved."</p> + +<p>That day and that night Doctor Joe remained +with his patient. On the following morning it +became necessary for him to return to The +Jug for additional dressings and medicines. +Eli drove him over.</p> + +<p>The sky was clear, and the morning was +bitterly cold, with rime hanging like a filmy +veil in the air and glistening like flakes of +silver in the sunshine. Doctor Joe and Eli +ran in turns by the side of the komatik, while +the dogs trotted briskly.</p> + +<p>"What's that, now?" asked Eli, pointing +to a black object far out on the white field of +ice, as they approached The Jug.</p> + +<p>"I can't make out," said Doctor Joe after +a long scrutiny.</p> + +<p>"We'll see," and Eli turned the dogs toward +the object.</p> + +<p>"It looks like a flatsled," said Doctor Joe +as they approached.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_276" id="Page_276"></a>"'Tis a flatsled," said Eli. "'Tis the men +ran away from the lumber camp."</p> + +<p>A gruesome sight met them as Eli brought +the dogs to a stop. Huddled close and lying +by the side of the toboggan, partially covered +by drift, were the stiff-frozen bodies of two +men.</p> + +<p>"They were lost in the storm," said Eli +presently. "They must have been wanderin' +about till the frost got the best of un."</p> + +<p>Doctor Joe and Eli lifted the remains to the +komatik, attaching the toboggan to trail behind, +and with their ghastly burden they turned in +at The Jug.</p> + +<p>Jamie and Peter, vastly concerned for Andy's +safety, met them, and were as vastly relieved +when they learned that Andy would be not +much the worse for his experience, and that +the lumber boss would live.</p> + +<p>The two bodies were carried into the wood-shed +and laid side by side upon the floor, +to remain there until evening, when Doctor +Joe and Eli would return them to Grampus +River for burial. It was then that Jamie +looked for the first time upon the upturned +dead faces, and as he did so he exclaimed, +with horror:</p> + +<p><a name="Page_277" id="Page_277"></a>"They's the men! They's the men that had +the cache and tied me up!"</p> + +<p>"They've been hard men in life and probably +done much evil in their day, but they're past +it now and we'll treat their remains gently +and humanly," said Doctor Joe as he covered +their faces with a cloth.</p> + +<p>Then they undid the flatsled and carried +the contents into the cabin, where the things +would be safe from the dogs. There were +provisions, a bag of clothing, two thirty-eight +calibre rifles, a quantity of ammunition and a +small bag, which Jamie declared was the bag +which had been cached in the tree.</p> + +<p>"I'm goin' to look at un," said Eli. "'Twill +do no harm."</p> + +<p>Eli undid the bag and drew forth a package +which proved to contain a large roll of bills, +amounting to several hundred dollars. Then +followed two marten pelts, a red fox pelt, and +the pelt of a beautiful silver fox. Eli shook +the silver fox pelt, and holding it up examined +it critically.</p> + +<p>"'Tis Pop's silver!" he exclaimed.</p> + +<p>"Are you sure?" asked Doctor Joe.</p> + +<p>"'Tis Pop's silver! I'd know un anywheres!" +declared Eli positively.</p> + +<p><a name="Page_278" id="Page_278"></a>"Then," said Doctor Joe, "it was not +Indian Jake but these men who shot your father +and stole the fur."</p> + +<p>"And stole our boat!" Jamie broke in +excitedly.</p> + +<p>"'Twere they stole the silver," Eli admitted, +"and the Lord punished un. I'm wonderful +glad my bullet went abroad and didn't hurt +Indian Jake."</p> + +<p>"We all thought Indian Jake guilty," said +Doctor Joe. "How easy it is to pass judgment +on people, and how often we misjudge +them!"</p> + +<p>"And knowin' he didn't take un, and after +I'd tried to kill he," went on Eli contritely, +"he were wonderful good to me, havin' me +bide to supper and givin' me deer's meat."</p> + +<p>"I'm rememberin'," broke in Jamie, "that +the men were talkin' o' somethin' they were +takin' from the ship, and fearin' the lumber +boss would find out about un. 'Twere the +money they means."</p> + +<p>There was a howl of arriving dogs outside, +and Jamie rushed to the door to meet David +and Andy and Margaret, and, to his unbounded +delight, Thomas and Indian Jake.</p> + +<p>While Thomas was being overwhelmed by +<a name="Page_279" id="Page_279"></a>Jamie, Indian Jake with a broad grin extended +his hand to Eli.</p> + +<p>"How do, Eli?"</p> + +<p>"How do, Jake?" Eli took Indian Jake's +hand. "I got the silver back, Jake, and you +never took un. I'm wonderful sorry the way +I done."</p> + +<p>"I've got your ca'tridges here, Eli," grinned +Indian Jake. "You can have un back now."</p> + +<p>"But didn't Andy have grit, now!" Jamie's +voice rose above the babel. "Didn't he have +grit to go out in the night when 'twas <i>that</i> +nasty! And a stout heart, too, like a man! +Andy's a wonderful fine scout, whatever!"</p> + +<p>And so ended the mystery of the shooting +and the robbery of Lem Horn, and so the guilty +were discovered and punished, as in some +manner and at some time all wrong-doers are +discovered and punished. It is the immutable +law of God.</p> + + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Troop One of the Labrador, by Dillon Wallace + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TROOP ONE OF THE LABRADOR *** + +***** This file should be named 16048-h.htm or 16048-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/6/0/4/16048/ + +Produced by Wallace McLean, Diane Monico, and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net. + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/16048-h/images/image001.jpg b/16048-h/images/image001.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..550efe0 --- /dev/null +++ b/16048-h/images/image001.jpg diff --git a/16048-h/images/image002.jpg b/16048-h/images/image002.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..559440d --- /dev/null +++ b/16048-h/images/image002.jpg diff --git a/16048-h/images/image003.jpg b/16048-h/images/image003.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..057a93c --- /dev/null +++ b/16048-h/images/image003.jpg diff --git a/16048-h/images/image004.jpg b/16048-h/images/image004.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..796deb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/16048-h/images/image004.jpg diff --git a/16048-h/images/image005.jpg b/16048-h/images/image005.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4c1399c --- /dev/null +++ b/16048-h/images/image005.jpg diff --git a/16048-h/images/image1.png b/16048-h/images/image1.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d0b3cf2 --- /dev/null +++ b/16048-h/images/image1.png diff --git a/16048.txt b/16048.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f7ba992 --- /dev/null +++ b/16048.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6661 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Troop One of the Labrador, by Dillon Wallace + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Troop One of the Labrador + +Author: Dillon Wallace + +Release Date: June 13, 2005 [EBook #16048] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TROOP ONE OF THE LABRADOR *** + + + + +Produced by Wallace McLean, Diane Monico, and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net. + + + + + + + + + + + +TROOP ONE OF THE LABRADOR + + + + +_The Talbot Baines Series_ + +With fine attractive new wrappers + + +THE FIFTH FORM AT ST. DOMINIC'S. By Talbot Baines Reed +THE ADVENTURES OF A THREE-GUINEA WATCH. By Talbot Baines Reed +THE COCK-HOUSE AT FELLSGARTH. By Talbot Baines Reed +A DOG WITH A BAD NAME. By Talbot Baines Reed +THE MASTER OF THE SHELL. By Talbot Baines Reed +THE SCHOOL GHOST, AND BOYCOTTED. By Talbot Baines Reed +THE SILVER SHOE. By Major Charles Gilson +THE TREASURE OF TREGUDDA. By Argyll Saxby +THE TWO CAPTAINS OF TUXFORD. By Frank Elias +THE RIDERS FROM THE SEA. By G. Godfray Sellick +A SON OF THE DOGGER. By Walter Wood +A FIFTH FORM MYSTERY. By Harold Avery +A SCOUT OF THE '45. By E. Charles Vivian +FROM SLUM TO QUARTER-DECK. By Gordon Stables +COMRADES UNDER CANVAS. By F.P. Gibbon + +(_For Complete List see Catalogue_) + +OF All BOOKSELLERS + + + + +[Illustration: IT WAS DR. JOE BEYOND A DOUBT!] + + + + +TROOP ONE OF THE LABRADOR + +BY + +DILLON WALLACE + +AUTHOR OF "GRIT-A-PLENTY," "THE RAGGED INLET GUARDS," ETC., ETC. + + +THE "BOY'S OWN PAPER" OFFICE +4 BOUVERIE STREET AND 65 ST. PAUL'S CHURCHYARD, E.C.4 + + +MADE IN GREAT BRITAIN +_Printed by_ +UNWIN BROTHERS, LIMITED +LONDON AND WOKING + + + + +CONTENTS + + Page + +I. DOCTOR JOE, SCOUTMASTER 9 + +II. PLANS 37 + +III. "'TIS THE GHOST OF LONG JOHN" 51 + +IV. SHOT FROM BEHIND 63 + +V. LEM HORN'S SILVER FOX 71 + +VI. THE TRACKS IN THE SAND 94 + +VII. THE MYSTERY OF THE BOAT 109 + +VIII. TRAILING THE HALF-BREED 120 + +IX. ELI SURPRISES INDIAN JAKE 126 + +X. THE END OF ELI'S HUNT 135 + +XI. THE LETTER IN THE CAIRN 147 + +XII. THE HIDDEN CACHE 165 + +XIII. SURPRISED AND CAPTURED 179 + +XIV. THE TWO DESPERADOS 192 + +XV. MISSING! 198 + +XVI. BOUND AND HELPLESS 206 + +XVII. LOST IN A BLIZZARD 220 + +XVIII. A PLACE TO "BIDE" 232 + +XIX. SEARCHING THE WHITE WILDERNESS 240 + +XX. "WOLVES!" YELLED ANDY 251 + +XXI. THE ALARM IN THE NIGHT 259 + +XXII. THE IMMUTABLE LAW OF GOD 268 + + + + +ILLUSTRATIONS + + +IT WAS DR. JOE BEYOND A DOUBT! _Frontispiece_ + + Facing Page +STRETCHED UPON THE FLOOR LAY LEM HORN 70 + +ON THE RIGHT SEETHED THE DEVIL'S TEA + KETTLE 104 + +"YOU STAND WHERE YOU IS AND DROP YOUR + GUN!" 132 + +IT WAS A FIGHT TO THE DEATH 260 + + + + +Troop One of the Labrador + + + + +CHAPTER I + +DOCTOR JOE, SCOUTMASTER + + +"Doctor Joe! Doctor Joe's comin'! He just turned the p'int!" + +Jamie Angus burst into the cabin at The Jug breathlessly shouting this +joyful news, and then rushed out again with David and Andy at his +heels. + +"Oh, Doctor Joe! It can't be Doctor Joe, now! Can it, Pop? It must be +some one else Jamie sees! It can't be Doctor Joe, _what_ever!" +exclaimed Margaret in a great flutter of excitement. + +"Jamie's keen at seein'! He'd know anybody as far as he can see un!" +assured Thomas, no less excited at the news than was Margaret. "But +'tis strange that he's comin' back so soon!" + +Of course Margaret, who was laying the table for supper, must needs +follow the boys; and Thomas, who was leaning over the wash basin +removing the grime of the day's toil, snatched the towel from its peg +behind the door and, drying his hands as he ran, sacrificing dignity +to haste, followed Margaret, who had joined the three boys at the end +of the jetty which served as a boat landing. + +A skiff had just entered the narrow channel which connected The Jug, +as the bight where the Anguses lived was called, with the wider waters +of Eskimo Bay. There could be no doubt, even at that distance, that +the tall man standing aft and manipulating the long sculling oar, was +Doctor Joe. As the little group gathered on the jetty he took off his +hat and waved it high above his head. It was Doctor Joe beyond a +doubt! The boys waved their caps and shouted at the top of their lusty +young lungs, Margaret, undoing her apron, waved it and added her voice +to the chorus, and Thomas, quite carried away by the excitement, waved +the towel and in a great bellowing voice shouted a louder welcome than +any of them. + +There was no happier or better contented family on all The Labrador +than the family of Thomas Angus, though they had their trials and ups +and downs and worries like any other family in or out of Labrador. + +"Everybody must expect a bit o' trouble and worry now and again," +Thomas would say when things did not go as they should. "If we never +had un, and livin' were always fine and clear, we'd forget to be +thankful for our blessin's. We has t' have a share o' trouble in our +lives, and here and there a hard knock whatever, t' know how fine the +good things are and rightly enjoy un when they come. And in the end +troubles never turn out as bad as we're expectin', by half. First and +last there's a wonderful sight more good times than bad uns for all of +us." + +Thomas had reason to be proud and thankful. Jamie could see as well as +ever he could, and it was all because of Doctor Joe and his wonderful +operation on Jamie's eyes when it seemed certain the lad was to become +blind. Through the skill of Doctor Joe, Jamie's eyes were every whit +as keen as David's and Andy's, and there were no keener eyes in the +Bay than theirs. + +David was now nearly seventeen and Andy was fifteen--brawny, +broad-shouldered lads who had already faced more hardships and had +more adventures to their credit than fall to many a man in a whole +lifetime. In that brave land adventures are to be found at every turn. +They bob up unexpectedly, and the man or boy who meets them +successfully must know the ways of the wilderness and must be +self-reliant and resourceful, must have grit a-plenty and a stout +heart. + +Margaret kept house for the little family, a responsibility that had +been thrust upon her, and which she cheerfully accepted, when her +mother was laid to rest and she was a wee lass of twelve. Now she was +eighteen and as tidy and cheerful a little housekeeper as could be +found on the coast, and pretty too, in manner as well as in feature. +"'Tis the manner that counts," said Thomas, and he declared that there +was no prettier lass to be found on the whole Labrador. + +Doctor Joe, whose real name was Joseph Carver, was their nearest +neighbour at Break Cove, ten miles down Eskimo Bay. He had come to the +coast nine years before, a mysterious stranger, nervous and broken in +health. Thomas gave him shelter at The Jug, helped him build his +cabin at Break Cove and taught him the ways of the land and how to set +his traps. Doctor Joe became a trapper like his neighbours, and in +time, with wholesome living in the out-of-doors, regained his health +and came to love his adopted country and its rugged life. + +No one knew then that Joseph Carver was indeed a doctor, but he was so +handy with bandages and medicines that the folk of the Bay recognized +his skill and soon fell, by common consent, to calling him "Doctor +Joe." + +It was a year before our story begins that Jamie had first complained +of a mist in his eyes. With passing weeks the mist thickened, and one +day Doctor Joe examined the eyes and announced that only a delicate +and serious operation could save the lad's sight. This demanded that +Jamie be taken to a hospital in New York where a specialist might +operate. It was an expensive undertaking. Neither Thomas nor Doctor +Joe had the necessary money, but Thomas hoped to realize enough from +his winter's trapping in the interior and Doctor Joe was to add the +proceeds of his own winter's work to the fund. Then Thomas broke his +leg. Doctor Joe must needs remain at The Jug to care for him, and +there seemed no hope for Jamie but a life of darkness. + +But David was confident that he could take his father's place on the +trails, and with some persuasion, for the need was desperate, Thomas +consented that David and Andy should spend the winter in the great +interior wilderness with no other companion than Indian Jake, a +half-breed. + +That was an experience needing the stoutest heart. Through long dreary +months they faced the sub-arctic cold and fearful blizzards that swept +the wilderness, following silent trails over wide white wastes or +through the depths of dark forests, and falling upon many a wild +adventure that tried their mettle a hundred times. It was a man's job, +but they both made good, and that is something to be proud of--to make +good at the job you tackle. + +Jamie had pluck too, but pluck alone could not save his eyes. The mist +thickened more rapidly than Doctor Joe had expected it would, and +there came a time when Jamie could scarcely see at all. Then it was +that Doctor Joe announced one day before the return of David and Andy +from the trails, that the operation could be no longer delayed if +Jamie's eyesight was to be saved, and that to attempt to delay it +until the ice cleared from the coast and the mail boat came to bear +him away to New York would be fatal. + +After making this announcement, Doctor Joe revealed the fact that he +had once been a great eye surgeon. With Thomas's consent he offered to +perform the operation on Jamie's eyes. Thomas had unbounded faith in +his friend. Doctor Joe operated and Jamie's sight was saved. + +In curing Jamie, Doctor Joe discovered that he himself was cured, and +that he was again in possession of all his former skill. It was quite +natural, therefore, that he should wish to resume the practice of +surgery. He was an indifferent trapper, and the living that he made +following the trails amounted to a bare existence. He decided, +therefore, that it was his duty to himself to return to the work for +which, during long years of study, he had been trained. + +Six weeks before Doctor Joe had sailed away on the mail boat from Fort +Pelican, bound for New York, that far distant, mysterious, wonderful +city of which he had told so many marvellous tales. Thomas had grave +doubts that they would ever see him again, though he had said that he +would some day return to visit his friends at The Jug and to see his +own little deserted cabin at Break Cove, where he had spent so many +lonely but profitable years, for it was here that he had rebuilt his +broken health. He had good reason to love the place, and he was quite +sure he had no better or truer friends in all the world than Thomas +Angus and his family. + +"Thomas," said he at parting, "if I had the means to support myself I +would stay here on The Labrador and be doctor to the people that need +me, for there are folk enough that need a doctor's help up and down +the coast. But I'm a poor man, and if I stopped here I'd have to make +my living as a trapper, and you know how poor a trapper I've been all +these years. Back in New York I can do much good, and there I can live +as I was reared to live. But I'll not forget you, Thomas, and some day +I'll come to see you." + +"I'm not doubtin' 'tis best you go and the Lord's will," said Thomas. +"But we'll be missin' you sore, Doctor Joe. I scarce knows how we'll +get on without you. 'Twill seem strange--almost like you were dead, +I'm fearin'." + +"Thomas," and Doctor Joe's voice trembled with emotion, "there's no +one in the wide world nearer my affections than you and the boys and +Margaret. It hurts me to go, but it's best I should. I might scratch +along here for a few years, but I was not born to the work and the +time would come when I'd be a burden on some one, and it would make me +unhappy. I know that I'll wish often enough to be back here with you +at The Jug." + +"You'd never be a burden, _what_ever!" Thomas declared, quite shocked +at the suggestion. "I feels beholden to you, Doctor Joe. There's nary +a thing I could ever do to make up to you for savin' Jamie's eyes. You +made un as good as new. He'd ha' been stone blind now if 'tweren't for +you--and the mercy o' God." + +"The mercy of God," Doctor Joe repeated reverently. + +And here at the end of six weeks was Doctor Joe back again. What +wonder that Thomas Angus and his family were quite beside themselves +with joy, shouting themselves hoarse down there on the jetty. + +And presently, when the skiff drew alongside, and Doctor Joe stepped +out upon the jetty, he was quite overwhelmed with the welcome he +received. + +"Well, Thomas," he said as they walked up to the cabin with Jamie +clinging to one of his hands and Andy to the other, "here I am back +again, as you see. I couldn't stay away from you dear, good people. I +may as well confess, I was homesick for you before I reached New York, +and I'm back to stay. I found my fortune had been made while I was +here, and now I can do as I please." + +"Oh, that's fine now!" exclaimed Margaret. "'Tis fine if you're to +stay!" + +"We were missin' you sore," said Thomas. "'Tis like the Lord's +blessin' to have you back at The Jug!" + +"And there's good old Roaring Brook!" Doctor Joe stopped for a moment +with half closed eyes, to listen to the rush of water over the rocks, +where Roaring Brook tumbled down into The Jug. "It's the sweetest +music I've heard since I left here! And the smell of the spruce trees! +And such a scene! Thomas, my friend, it's a rugged land where we live, +but it's God's own land, just as He made it, beautiful, and undefiled +by man!" + +Doctor Joe turned about and stretched his right arm toward the south. +Before them lay the shimmering placid waters of The Jug, reaching away +to join the wider, greater waters of Eskimo Bay. In the distance, +beyond the Bay, the snow-capped peaks of the Mealy Mountains stood in +silent majesty, now reflecting the last brilliant rays of the setting +sun. As they tarried, watching them, the light faded and shafts of +orange and red rose out of the west. The waters became a throbbing +expanse of colour, and the woods on the Point, at the entrance to The +Jug, sank into purple. + +"'Tis a bit of the light of heaven that the Lord lets out of evenin's +for us to see," said Jamie, and perhaps Jamie was right. + +"You must be rare hungry, now," observed Thomas, as they entered the +cabin. "Margaret were just puttin' supper on when Jamie sights you +turnin' the P'int. 'Twill be ready in a jiffy." + +"What have you got for us, Margaret?" asked Doctor Joe. "I believe I +am hungry for the good things you cook." + +"Fried trout, sir," said Margaret. + +"Fried trout!" Doctor Joe rolled his eyes in mock ecstasy. "It +couldn't have been better!" + +"You always says that, whatever," laughed Margaret. "If 'twere just +bread and tea I'm thinkin' you'd like un fine." + +"But trout!" exclaimed Doctor Joe. "Why, fresh trout are worth five +dollars a pound where I've been--and couldn't be had for that!" + +"Well, now!" said Margaret in astonishment. "And we has un so +plentiful!" + +David lighted a lamp and Thomas renewed the fire, which crackled +cheerily in the big box stove, while everybody talked excitedly and +Margaret set on the table a big dish of smoking fried trout, a heaping +plate of bread, and poured the tea. + +"Set in! Set in, Doctor Joe!" Thomas invited. + +And when they drew up to the table, with Thomas at one end and +Margaret at the other, and Doctor Joe and Jamie at Thomas's right, and +David and Andy at his left, Thomas devoutly gave thanks for the return +of their friend and asked a blessing upon the bounty provided. + +"Help yourself, now, and don't be afraid of un," Thomas admonished, +passing the dish of trout to Doctor Joe. + +"A real banquet," Doctor Joe declared, as he helped himself +liberally. "I've eaten in some fine places since I've been away, but +I've had no such feast as this! And there's no one in the whole world +can fry trout like Margaret!" + +"You always says that, sir," and Margaret's face glowed with pleasure +at the compliment. + +"'Tis true!" declared Doctor Joe. "'Tis true!" + +"I'm wonderin' now about the trout," remarked David. + +"What are you wondering?" asked Doctor Joe. + +"How folks get along with no trout to eat off where you've been, sir." + +"There are men who go far out from the city and fish in the streams +for trout, just for the sport of catching them," explained Doctor Joe. +"They will tramp all day along brooks, and feel lucky if they catch a +dozen little fellows so small we'd not look at them here. But it is +only the few who do it for sport that ever get any at all, and there +are hundreds of people there who never even saw a trout, they catch so +very few of them." + +"'Twould seem like a waste o' time," remarked Thomas, "if they +catches so few. I'd never walk all day for a dozen trout unless I was +wonderful hard up for grub. If I were wantin' fish so bad I'd set a +net for whitefish or salmon, or if there were cod grounds about I'd +gig for cod, though salmon or cod or whitefish would never be takin' +the place o' good fresh trout with me." + +"It's not altogether for the trout the sportsmen tramp the streams all +day," laughed Doctor Joe. "They prize the trout they get as a great +delicacy, to be sure, but it's the joy of getting out into the open +that pays them for the effort. I've done it myself. They get plenty of +sea fish, they buy them at the shops." + +"I never were thinkin' o' that," said Thomas. "I'm thinkin', now, +that's where all the salmon we salts down and sells to the Post goes." + +The boys were vastly interested, and asked many questions, which +Doctor Joe answered with infinite patience, concerning the various +kinds of fish people bought in the shops, and how the fish were caught +and shipped to the shops to be sold fresh. + +"And you'll stay now? You'll not be leavin' The Labrador again?" +asked Thomas, after supper. + +"Aye," said Doctor Joe, "I've elected to be a Labradorman." Then, +turning to the boys, he suggested: + +"Lads, there are a lot of things in that skiff of mine. I wish you'd +bring them in. Will you do it while your father and I visit?" + +The boys were not only glad but eager to do it, for there were +doubtless many surprises for themselves in the skiff, and with one +accord the three hurried out. + +"Years ago, Thomas," said Doctor Joe, when the boys were gone, "in my +days in New York, I invested a little money in a mining property. +Shortly after I made the investment it was said the ore had run out, +and I believed my money was lost. When I returned to New York this +summer I found that more ore had been found later, and the mine had +earned me a lot of money. I invested what was due to me in such a way +that it will bring me an income each year sufficient to provide me +with all I shall ever need." + +"Oh, but that's fine now!" said Thomas. + +"Thomas," Doctor Joe continued "I should not have been able to enjoy +this had it not been for your kindness to me years ago, when I came +first to The Labrador a man of broken health. If you had not offered +me your friendship then I should have died an invalid in poverty. + +"I've thought of this a thousand times. I believe God sent me here. I +only knew then that I came because I sought a secluded spot on the +earth where I could find relief from turmoil. Now, I believe He guided +me to The Labrador and to The Jug to you. He had something for me to +do in the world, and this was His way of saving me. + +"When Jamie needed me I was here, and because you had befriended me I +was prepared with God's help and with my skill and training to restore +Jamie's eyesight. There are others on the coast who need a doctor's +skill just as Jamie needed it, and they have no one to help them. I +have decided that I shall be doctor to the people. If I can help the +folk, as I am sure I can, I'll be happy in the knowledge that I'm +making some little return for the great deal that you have done for +me." + +"I were never doin' much for you, Doctor Joe--just what one man would +always do for another," Thomas protested. "But 'twill be a blessin' +to the folk of The Labrador to have you doctor un! We all need doctors +often enough when there's none to be had, and folks die for the need +of un." + +"Yes, folks die here for the need of a doctor," Doctor Joe agreed, +"and I hope I may be the means of saving lives and giving relief." + +The three boys broke in upon them with their arms full of packages. + +"There's a lot more!" exclaimed Jamie depositing his load upon the +floor. + +"Perhaps we had better help them, Thomas," suggested Doctor Joe, +rising. + +"Oh, no, sir," Jamie protested. "Let us bring un up!" + +And so said David and Andy also. They quickly had the contents of the +skiff transferred to the cabin, and the exciting process of opening +the packages began. + +The first to be opened was for Margaret, and it contained many pretty +and useful things, including two neat, substantial warm dresses, finer +than any Margaret had ever before possessed or seen. Her eyes sparkled +as she held them up for inspection, and she exclaimed over and over +again: + +"Oh, how wonderful pretty they is!" + +For the boys there were innumerable gifts dear to boys' hearts, +including a compass and a watch for each. For Thomas there was a fine +pair of field-glasses, a compass and a very fine watch indeed, and he +was as pleased and happy as the others. + +"The glasses'll be a wonderful help t' me in huntin'," he declared. +"When I climbs hills for a look around I can see deer that I'd sure to +be missin' with no glasses. I'm not doubtin' the compass'll come in +handy now and again in thick weather." + +Then there was a big box of goodies. There were such candies as they +had never dreamed of--oranges and big red-cheeked apples. Even Thomas +had never before in his life tasted an orange or an apple, and they +all declared that they had never imagined that anything could be so +good. It was quite astonishing to learn that in the great world from +which Doctor Joe had come there were people who ate oranges and apples +every day of their lives if they wished them. + +"'Tis strange the way the Lord fixes things," observed Thomas. "Here +now we never saw the like of oranges and apples before in all our +lives, but we has plenty of trout, and there are folks out there that +has no trout but they all has oranges and apples. We has so many trout +we forgets how fine they is, and what a blessin' 'tis we has un. And +I'm thinkin' 'tis the same with them folks about the oranges and +apples." + +"Yes," agreed Doctor Joe, "it's only when things are taken away from +us that we really appreciate them. Jamie, no doubt, appreciates his +eyes much more than he would have done had the mist never clouded +them." + +"Aye, 'tis so," said Thomas. + +"I dare say," Doctor Joe suggested, "that you've never eaten potatoes +or onions?" + +"No," said Thomas, "I've heard of un, but I never eats un. I never had +any to eat." + +"Well," announced Doctor Joe, "I've had several sacks of potatoes and +a sack of onions and two barrels of apples shipped to Fort Pelican +with a quantity of other goods. We'll have to go with the big boat for +them." + +The boys and Margaret were quite beside themselves with the wonder of +it all, and Thomas was little less excited. + +"We'll go for un to-morrow or the next day whatever," said Thomas. + +There was one box still unopened, and the three boys were eyeing it +expectantly, when Doctor Joe exclaimed: + +"Here we've left till the last the most important thing of all. Get an +axe, David, and we'll knock the cover off this box." + +David had the axe in a jiffy, and when Doctor Joe removed the cover +the box was found to be filled with books. + +"O-h-h!" breathed the boys in unison. + +"'Tis fine! Oh, I've been wishin' and wishin' for books t' look at and +read!" exclaimed Margaret. + +Doctor Joe had taught them all to read and write in the years he had +been with them, an accomplishment that not every boy and girl on The +Labrador possessed, for there were no schools there. + +"There are some books to study and some to read. There are story books +and books about birds and flowers and animals. And here is something +that I know will please the boys," said Doctor Joe, drawing from the +box six paper-bound volumes. "There's an interesting story attached to +these books that I must tell you before you look at them, and then +we'll go through them together. + +"One day I was walking in a park in New York. + +"Suddenly I heard a crashing noise, and I hurried in the direction in +which I heard the noise, and turning a corner saw a motor-car lying on +its side. Some boys wearing khaki-coloured uniforms, very much like +soldiers' uniforms, had already reached the wreck, and before I came +up with them had rescued two injured men. I never saw more efficient +or prompt service than those boys were giving the poor men, who were +both badly hurt. They had the men stretched out upon the grass. One +had a severed artery in his arm, where the arm had been cut upon the +broken glass wind shield. The man's blood was pouring in great spurts +through the wound, but the boys were already adjusting the tourniquet, +for which they used a handkerchief, and in a minute they had the +bleeding stopped, as well as I could have done it. I've no doubt they +saved the man's life, for without prompt help he'd have bled to death +in a short time. + +"The other man was cut and bruised, and the boys were making him as +comfortable as possible until an ambulance came to take him to a +hospital. There was really nothing I could do that the boys had not +already done promptly and remarkably well. + +"The instant they had discovered the accident two boys had run away to +summon an ambulance and to notify the police, and in a little while an +ambulance with a surgeon and two policemen came and took the men away. + +"The boys were only about Andy's age, and I wondered at their training +and efficiency. When the ambulance had gone with the injured men I +walked a little way with the boys, and learned that they belonged to a +wonderful organization called 'Boy Scouts.' I had heard of Boy Scouts, +but I supposed it was one of the ordinary clubs where boys got +together just for play. + +"I was so much interested that I looked up the head office of the Boy +Scouts, and asked questions about them. Then I bought these copies of +the _Boy Scout's Handbook_. They tell about the things the scouts do, +and how a boy may become a scout. I knew you chaps would be so +interested you would each want a book, so I bought a half-dozen +copies. The extra books we can give to other boys up the Bay." + +"Could we be scouts?" asked Andy breathlessly. + +"Yes, to be sure!" Doctor Joe smiled. + +"'Twould be rare fun, now!" exclaimed David. + +"All of us scouts, just like the boys in New York?" Jamie asked, his +face aglow. + +"Yes," answered Doctor Joe. "I knew you chaps would like to be scouts. +We'll organize a troop, and we'll call it Troop One of The Labrador. +There are Boy Scouts of America, and Boy Scouts of England, and Boy +Scouts of nearly every country in the world except The Labrador. We'll +be the Boy Scouts of The Labrador, and become a part of the great army +of scouts. It'll be something to be proud of." + +"How'll we do it?" asked David. + +"I'll be leader, or scoutmaster as they call the leader," explained +Doctor Joe. "These books explain all about the things we're to do. + +"Before you become tenderfoot scouts you'll have to learn some +things," Doctor Joe continued, after looking through one of the +handbooks, until he found the proper page. "You can tie all the knots +already. You do that every day. But there are plenty of boys, and men +too, where I came from that can't even tie the ordinary square knot. + +"You'll have to learn the oath and law. You live pretty close to the +requirements of the law now, but it'll be necessary to learn it, and +I'll explain then what each law means. You'll have to learn what the +scout badge stands for and how it's made up, and other things." + +Doctor Joe carefully marked the necessary pages and references. + +"Now about the flag," said Doctor Joe. "You'll have to learn about the +formation of the flag and what it stands for. This book is for the Boy +Scouts of America, and the flag it refers to is the United States +flag. I'm an American, but you chaps are living in British territory +and you're British subjects, so you'll have to learn about the British +flag or Union Jack, as it's called, for that's your flag. + +"The Union Jack is the national flag of the whole British Empire. The +English flag was originally a red cross on a white field. This is +called the flag of St. George. Three hundred years ago King James the +First added to it the banner of Scotland, which was a blue flag with +a white cross, called St. Andrew's Cross, lying upon the blue from +corner to corner--that is diagonally." + +Doctor Joe opened his travelling bag and drew forth two small flags, +one the Stars and Stripes and the other the British Union Jack. + +"I nearly forgot about these," said he, spreading the flags upon the +table. "This is the flag of my country," and he caressed the United +States flag affectionately. "I love it as you should love your flag. +The Union Jack is the emblem of the great British Empire, of which you +are a part. It is one of the greatest and best countries in the world +to live in. To be a British subject is something to be proud of +indeed." + +"Aye," broke in Thomas, "'tis that, now." + +"Yes," continued Doctor Joe, "I want you to be as proud of it as I am +that I'm a citizen of the United States, and I'm so proud of it I +wouldn't change for any other country in the world. When I reached St. +John's and saw the American flag flying over the office of the United +States Consulate, my eyes filled with tears. I hadn't seen that old +flag for years, and I stood in the street for an hour doing nothing +but look at it and think of all it represents. It makes my blood +tingle just to touch it. You chaps must feel the same toward the +British flag, for that's your flag. + +"Now let me show you how the flag is made up," and Doctor Joe +proceeded to trace St. George's Cross and St. Andrew's Cross, +explaining them again as he did so. "In the year 1801 another banner +was added. This was the Banner of St. Patrick of Ireland. St. +Patrick's Cross was a red diagonal cross on a white field, and here +you see it." + +Doctor Joe traced it on the flag. + +"There," he went on, "you have the British flag complete. No one knows +exactly why it is called the 'Jack,' but it may have been because in +the old days, the English knights, when they went out to fight their +battles, wore a jacket over their armour with the St. George's Cross +upon it, so it would be known to what nation they belonged. This +jacket was sometimes called a 'jack' for short. + +"The Union Jack did not become a complete flag as we have it to-day +until the year 1801, when St. Patrick's Cross was added to it. The +Stars and Stripes, the flag of my country, was first made in 1776, +and on June 14, 1777, it was adopted by the United States Congress as +the national emblem, so you see it is even older than the British +flag. The flags of all nations in the world have changed since 1777 +excepting only the United States flag, and every American is proud of +the fact that his flag is older than the flag of any other Christian +nation in the world." + +The boys, and Thomas and Margaret also, were fascinated with Doctor +Joe's brief story of the flags. They were quite excited with the +thought that they were to be a part of the great army of Boy Scouts, +and to do the same things that other boys in far-away lands were +doing, and the other boys that they had never seen seemed suddenly +very much nearer to them and more like themselves than they had ever +seemed before. + +The three buried their noses in the handbook, now and again asking +Doctor Joe questions. They were so excited and so interested, indeed, +that they could scarcely lay the books aside when Thomas announced +that it was time to "turn in," and Andy declared he could hardly wait +for morning when they could be at them again. + +And so it came about that Troop I, Boy Scouts of The +Labrador, was organized, and in the nature of things the troop was +destined to meet many adventures and unusual experiences. + + + + +CHAPTER II + +PLANS + + +The cabin at The Jug had three rooms. There was a square living-room, +entered through an enclosed porch on its western grade. At the end of +the living-room opposite the entrance were two doors, one leading to +Margaret's room, the other to the room occupied by the boys. Thomas +himself slept in a bunk, resembling a ship's bunk, built against the +north wall. + +The furnishings of the living-room consisted of a home-made table, a +big box stove, three home-made chairs and some chests, which served +the double purpose of storage places for clothing and seats. A +cupboard was built against the wall at the left of the entrance, and +between two windows on the south side of the room, which looked out +upon The Jug, was a shelf upon which Thomas kept his Bible and +Margaret her sewing basket--a little basket which she had woven +herself from native grasses. Behind the stove was a bench, upon which +stood a bucket of water and the family wash basin, and over the basin +hung a towel for general family use. + +Pasted upon the walls were pictures from old newspapers and magazines. +There were no other decorations but these and snowy muslin curtains at +the windows, but the floor, table, chairs--all the woodwork, +indeed--were scoured to immaculate whiteness with sand and soap, and +everything was spotlessly clean and tidy. Despite the austere +simplicity of the room and its furnishings, it possessed an +indescribable atmosphere of cosy comfort. + +Doctor Joe's bed was spread upon the floor. It was still candle-light +when he was awakened by Thomas building a fire in the stove, for in +this land of stern living there is no lolling in bed of mornings. + +"Good-morning, Thomas," said Doctor Joe, with a yawn and a stretch as +he sat up. + +"Marnin'," said Thomas. + +"How's the morning, Thomas, fair for our trip to Fort Pelican?" + +"Aye, 'tis a fine marnin'," announced Thomas, "but I were thinkin' +'twould be better to wait over till to-morrow for the trip. After your +long voyage 'twould be a bit trying for you to turn back to-day to +Fort Pelican without restin' up, and I'm not doubtin' a day +whatever'll do no harm to the potaters and things." + +"I believe you're right, Thomas," and Doctor Joe spoke with evident +relief. "I thought you'd be getting ready for the trapping and would +like to get the Fort Pelican trip out of the way. We'll put the trip +off till to-morrow." + +Doctor Joe dressed hurriedly, and went out to enjoy the cool, crisp +morning. Everything was white with hoarfrost. The air was charged with +the perfume of balsam and spruce and other sweet odours of the forest. +Doctor Joe took long, deep, delicious breaths as he looked about him +at the familiar scene. + +The last stars were fading in the growing light. A low mist hung over +The Jug, and beyond the haze lay the dark, heaving waters of Eskimo +Bay. In the distance beyond the Bay the high peaks of the Mealy +Mountains rose out of the gloom, white with snow and looming above the +dark forest at their base in cold and silent majesty. Behind the +cabin stretched the vast, mysterious, unbounded wilderness which held, +hidden in its unmeasured depths, rivers and lakes and mountains that +no man, save the wandering Indian, had ever looked upon--great +solitudes whose silence had remained unbroken through the ages. + +"If some of those Boy Scouts could only see this!" exclaimed Doctor +Joe. + +"'Twere fashioned by the Almighty for comfortable livin'," said +Thomas, who had called Margaret and the boys and come out unobserved +by Doctor Joe. "There's no better shelter on the coast, and no better +place for seals and salmon, with neighbours handy when we wants to see +un, and plenty o' room to stretch. 'Tis the finest _I_ ever saw, +whatever." + +"Yes, 'tis all of that," agreed Doctor Joe. "But I wasn't thinking now +of The Jug alone. I was thinking of the majestic grandeur of the whole +scene. I was enjoying the freedom from the noise and scramble, the +dirt and smoke and smudge of the city, with its piles upon piles of +ugly buildings, and never a breath of such pure air as this to be +breathed. I was thinking of these fine young chaps, the Boy Scouts I +saw there, who are trying to study God's big out-of-doors and must +content themselves with stingy little parks. It's the love of Nature +that takes them to the parks, and compared with this they have a poor +substitute. This is the world as God made it, with all its primordial +beauty. We're fortunate that circumstances placed us here, Thomas, and +we should be for ever thankful." + +"I'm wonderin' now," observed Thomas, as he and Doctor Joe paced up +and down the gravelly beach, "why folks ever lives in such places as +you tells about. There's plenty o' room down here on The Labrador, and +plenty o' other places, I'm not doubtin', where they'd be free from +the crowds and dirt, and have plenty o' room to stretch, and live fine +like we lives." + +"We're a thousand miles from a railway," said Doctor Joe. "Most of the +people in the cities wouldn't live a thousand paces from a railway if +they could help themselves. They take a car and ride if they've only +half a mile to go. They ride so much they've almost forgotten how to +walk. They like crowds. They'd be lonesome if they were away from +them." + +"'Tis strange, wonderful strange, how some folks lives," remarked +Thomas, quite astonished that any could prefer the city to his own +big, free Labrador. "When folks has enough to keep un busy they never +gets lonesome, and bein' idle is like wastin' a part of life. A man +could never be lonesome where there's plenty o' water and woods about. +I always finds jobs a-plenty to turn my hand to, and I has no time to +feel lonesome. And I never could live where I didn't have room enough +to stretch, _what_ever." + +"That's it!" Doctor Joe spoke decisively. "Room enough to stretch mind +as well as body. Why, Thomas, I've often heard men say that they had +to 'kill time', and didn't know what to do with themselves for hours +together!" + +"'Tis wicked and against the Lord's will," and Thomas shook his head. +"The Lord never wants folks to be idle or kill time. He fixes it so +there's a-plenty of useful things for everybody to do all the time, +and they wants to do un." + +"'Tis the measure of a man's worth," remarked Doctor Joe. "The +worth-while man never has an hour to kill. The day hasn't hours +enough for him. It's the other kind that kill time--the sort that are +not, and never will be, of much account in the world." + +They walked a little in silence, each busy with his own thoughts, when +Thomas remarked: + +"The Lord has been wonderful good to me, Doctor Joe, givin' me three +as fine lads and as fine a lass as He ever gave a man. Then He saves +the little lad's eyes, when they were goin' blind, by sendin' you to +cure un. And when I were breakin' my leg and couldn't work He sends +along Indian Jake to go to the trails to hunt with David and Andy, and +they makes a fine hunt and keeps us out o' debt. And this summer we +has as fine a catch of salmon as ever we has, and we're through with +un a fortnight ahead of ever before, with all the barrels filled and +the gear stowed, and the salt salmon traded in at the Post, and plenty +o' flour and pork and molasses and tea t' see us through the winter, +_what_ever." + +"Last year at this time things looked pretty blue for us," said Doctor +Joe, "but everything worked out well in the end, Thomas." + +"Aye," agreed Thomas, "wonderful well. I'm thinkin' that if we does +our best t' help ourselves when troubles come the Lord is like t' step +in and give us a hand. He wants us to do the best we can t' help +ourselves and when He sees we're doin' it He lifts the troubles." + +"That's true," agreed Doctor Joe, "and if a man takes advantage of +every opportunity that comes to him, and don't waste his time, he's +pretty sure to succeed." + +"Aye, that he is," said Thomas. "Now I were thinkin' that the lads +worked so wonderful hard at the salmon th' summer, I'd let un go with +you to Fort Pelican t' manage the boat, and I'll be staying home to +make ready for the trail. There's a-plenty to be done yet to make +ready without hurry, and a trip to Fort Pelican will be a rare treat +for the lads. But I'll go if you wants. I were just askin' if 'twould +be suitin' you if I stays home and lets they go?" + +"Why, of course! That's great! Simply great!" exclaimed Doctor Joe. +"The boys will make a fine crew! Will Jamie go too?" + +"Aye, Jamie's been workin' like a man, and he'll be keen for the +trip," said Thomas. "And last night I were thinkin' after I goes to +bed how fine 'tis that you're to be doctor to the coast. Indian +Jake's to be my trappin' pardner th' winter, and the lads'll 'bide +home. You'll be needin' dogs and komatik (sledge) to take you about. +There'll be little enough for the dogs to do, and you'll be welcome to +un. The lads can do the drivin' for you and whatever you wants un to +do. Use un all you needs. I wants to do my share to help you do the +doctorin'." + +"Thank you! Thank you, Thomas!" Doctor Joe accepted gratefully. "This +will make it possible for me to see a good many people that I +otherwise would not be able to see, and make it easier for me also." + +"Aye," said Thomas, "I were thinkin' that too, and the lads will be +glad enough to lend you a hand when you needs un." + +It was broad daylight. While Thomas and Doctor Joe talked on the +beach, the boys had been busily engaged in carrying the day's supply +of water from Roaring Brook to a water barrel in the porch. Now Jamie +appeared to announce breakfast. While they ate the boys were able to +talk of little else than the scout books, and the fact they were to do +as boys did in other parts of the world. And they were delighted +beyond measure when they learned that they were to make the voyage to +Fort Pelican with Doctor Joe. It was an event of vast importance. + +"There'll be plenty o' time in the boat to study the scout book +things," Andy suggested. "Maybe now we could learn to be scouts before +we gets back home." + +"I've no doubt you can pass all the tenderfoot tests while we're +away," said Doctor Joe. "And since you're to take me about with dogs +and komatik this winter when I go to visit sick people, there'll be no +end of chances to show what good scouts you are." + +"To take you about?" asked Andy excitedly. + +Then Thomas must needs explain that they must do their share in +looking after the sick folk, and that David and Andy were to be Doctor +Joe's dog drivers when winter came. + +"'Twill be fine to manage the dogs for you, sir!" exclaimed David, +turning to Doctor Joe. + +"Wonderful fine!" echoed Andy. + +"And will you be goin' outside the Bay?" asked David. + +"Aye, outside the Bay and in it, wherever there's need to go," said +Doctor Joe. + +"'Twill be tryin' and hard work sometimes," suggested Thomas, +"travellin' when the weather's nasty, but I'm not doubtin' the lads'll +be able t' manage un." + +"We'll manage un!" David declared with pride in the confidence placed +in him and Andy. + +To drive dogs on these sub-arctic trails in fair weather and foul +calls for courage and grit, and the lads felt justly proud of the +responsibility that had been laid upon them. There would be many a +shift to make on the ice, they knew. There would be blinding blizzards +and withering arctic winds to face, and no end of hard work. But these +lads of The Labrador loved to stand upon their feet like men and face +and conquer the elements like hardy men of courage. This is the way of +boys the world over--eager for the time when they may assume the +responsibility of manhood. Such a time comes earlier to the lads of +The Labrador than with us. In that stern land there is no idling and +there are no holidays, and every one, the lad as well as his father, +must always do his part, which is his best. + +Fort Pelican, the nearest port at which the mail boat called, was +seventy miles eastward from The Jug. With the uncertainty of wind and +tide the boat journey to Fort Pelican usually consumed three days, and +with equal time required for return, the voyage could seldom be +accomplished in less than six days. Lem Horn and his family lived at +Horn's Bight, thirty miles from The Jug, and fifteen miles beyond, at +Caribou Arm, was Jerry Snook's cabin. Save an Eskimo settlement of +half a dozen huts near Fort Pelican and the families of Lem Horn and +Jerry Snook, the country lying between The Jug and Fort Pelican was +uninhabited. It was unlikely that evening would find the travellers in +the vicinity of either Horn's or Snook's cabins, and therefore it was +to be a camping trip, which was quite to the liking of the boys. + +The boys washed the old fishing boat and packed the equipment and +provisions for the voyage. Margaret baked three big loaves of white +bread, and as a special treat a loaf of plum bread. The remaining +provisions consisted of tea, a bottle of molasses for sweetening, +flour, baking-powder, fat salt pork, lard, margarine, salt and pepper. +The equipment included a frying-pan, a basin for mixing dough, a tin +kettle for tea, a larger kettle to be used in cooking, one large +cooking spoon, four teaspoons and some tin plates. Each of the boys as +well as Doctor Joe was provided with a sheath knife carried on the +belt. The sheath knife serves the professional hunter as a cooking +knife, as well as for eating and general purposes. + +For camping use there was a cotton wedge tent, a small sheet-iron tent +stove, three camp axes, some candles and matches, a file for +sharpening the axes and a sleeping-bag for each. Men in that land do +not travel without arms, and it was decided that David should take a +carbine and Andy and Doctor Joe each a double-barrel shotgun, for +there might be an opportunity to shoot a fat goose or duck. + +Thomas's big boat had two light masts rigged with leg-o'-mutton sails. +Just forward of the foremast David and Andy placed some flat stones, +and covering them with two or three inches of gravel set the tent +stove upon the gravel. Here they could cook their meals at midday, and +the gravel would protect the bottom of the boat from heat. A +sufficient quantity of fire-wood was taken aboard, and the provisions +and other equipment stowed under a short deck forward where the things +would be protected from storm and all would be in readiness for an +early start in the morning. + + + + +CHAPTER III + +"'TIS THE GHOST OF LONG JOHN" + + +The morning was clear and crisp. Breakfast was eaten by candle-light, +and before sunrise Doctor Joe and the boys, with the tide to help +them, worked the big boat down through The Jug and past the Point into +Eskimo Bay. In the shelter of The Jug, which lay in the lee of the +hills, the sails flapped idly and it was necessary to bring the long +oars into service. But beyond the sheltered harbour a light north-west +breeze caught and filled the sails, the oars were stowed, the rudder +shipped, and with David at the tiller Doctor Joe lighted his pipe and +settled himself for a quiet smoke while Andy and Jamie turned their +attention to their scout handbooks. + +It was an inspiring morning. The sky was cloudless. The air was +charged with scent of spruce and balsam fir, wafted down by the +breeze from the forest, lying in dark and solemn silence and spreading +away from the near-by shore until it melted into the blue haze of +rolling hills far to the northward. The huge black back of a grampus +rose a hundred feet from the boat and with a noise like the loud +exhaust of steam sank again beneath the surface of the Bay. Now and +again a seal raised its head and looked curiously at the travellers +and then hastily dived. Gulls and terns soared and circled overhead, +occasionally dipping to the water to capture a choice morsel of food. +A flock of wild geese, honking in flight, turned into a bight and +alighted where a brook coursed down through a marsh to join the sea. + +"There's some geese," remarked David, breaking the silence. "They're +comin' up south now. We'll have a hunt when we gets home. They always +feeds in that mesh when they're bidin' about the Bay." + +Presently Andy exclaimed: + +"I can tie un all! I can tie every knot in the book!" + +"I can tie un too!" said Jamie. + +"Yes! Yes! There are the scout tests!" broke in Doctor Joe. "Suppose +we all tie the knots and pass the tests." + +Andy and Jamie tied them easily enough, and then Doctor Joe tied them +himself to keep pace with the boys, and Andy relieved David at the +tiller that he might try his hand at them; David not only tied all the +knots illustrated in the handbook, but for good measure added a +bowline on a bight, a double carrick bend, a marlin hitch and a +halliard hitch. + +"That's wonderful easy to do," David declared as he laid the rope +down. "'Tis strange they calls that a test, 'tis so easy done." + +"Easy for us," admitted Doctor Joe, "but for boys who have never had +much to do with boats or ropes it's a hard test, and an important one. +You chaps knew how to tie them, so in doing it you haven't learned +anything new. Let us make up our minds as scouts to learn something +new every day--something we never knew before, no matter how small or +unimportant it may seem. Think what a lot we'll know next year that we +do not know now; everything we learn, too, is sure to be of use to us +sometime in our lives. + +"As we go along we'll find there is a great deal to learn in this +handbook, and all of it is worth knowing. We don't look far ahead. +Suppose we begin with the scout law. With your good memories you'll +learn it before we go ashore to-night. I want you to learn the twelve +points of the law in order as they appear in the book, so that you can +repeat them and tell me in your own words what each point means." + +Doctor Joe turned to the scout law and explained each point in detail. +When he told them that "A Scout is kind" meant that they must not only +be kind to people, but that they must protect and not kill harmless +birds and animals, David protested: + +"If we promises _that_, sir, 'twould stop us huntin' seals and deer +and pa'tridges and plenty o' things." + +"Oh, no!" explained Doctor Joe. "It does not mean that. It means that +you must kill nothing _needlessly_. Here in Labrador we must kill +seals and deer and partridges and other game for food and for their +skins. That is the way we make our living. In the same way they have +to kill cows and sheep and goats and pigs for food in the country I +came from and to get skins for boots and gloves. In the same way we +are permitted to kill game when necessary. But we're not to kill +anything that's harmless unless we need it for some purpose. The +Indians and other people about here shoot at loons for sport. I've +seen them chase the loons in canoes and keep shooting at them every +time they came up after a dive, until the loons were too tired to dive +quickly enough to get out of the way of the shot, and then the poor +things were killed. The flesh isn't fit to eat and they're always +thrown away. That is cruel." + +"I never thought of un that way. I've killed loons too," David +confessed, "but I'll never shoot at a loon again. 'Tis the same with +gulls and other things we never uses when we kills, and just shoot at +for fun." + +"That's the idea," said Doctor Joe enthusiastically. "Now what do you +think about killing hen partridges in summer?" + +"We can kill pa'tridges, can't we?" asked David. "We always eats un, +and you said we could kill un." + +"But we've got to use our heads about it," Doctor Joe explained. "I'm +talking now about _hen_ partridges in _summer_. They always have +broods of little partridges then. If you kill the mother all the +little ones die, for they're too small to take care of themselves. Do +you think that's right?" + +"I never thought of un before," said David. "'Tis wicked to kill un! +I'll never kill a hen pa'tridge in summer again! Not me!" + +"We'll have to be tellin' everybody in the Bay about that!" declared +Andy. "Nobody has ever thought about the poor little uns starvin' and +dyin'!" + +"That'll be doing good scout work," Doctor Joe commended. "That's one +way you'll be useful as scouts here in Labrador. Not only will you be +showing kindness to the mother and little partridges, but if the +mother is permitted to live and raise her brood, all the little birds +will be full grown by winter, and it will make that many more +partridges that can be used for food when food is needed." + +When presently Jamie announced that it was "'most noon" and he was +"fair starvin'," and the others suddenly discovered that they were +hungry too, a fire was lighted in the stove and a cosy lunch of fried +pork and bread, and hot tea sweetened with molasses, was eaten with an +appetite and relish such as only those can enjoy who live in the open. +Then, with growing interest the lads returned to their scout books, +and camping time came almost before they were aware. + +The sun was drooping low in the west when David, indicating a low, +wooded point, said: + +"That's Flat P'int. There's good water there and 'tis a fine camping +place." + +"Then we'll camp there," Doctor Joe agreed. + +"Look! Look!" exclaimed Andy, as the boat approached the shore. +"There's a porcupine!" + +Following the direction in which Andy pointed, a fat porcupine was +discovered high up in a spruce tree feeding upon the tender branches +and bark. + +"Shall we have un for supper?" Andy asked excitedly. + +"Aye," said David, "let's have un for supper. Fresh meat'll go fine." + +A shot from the rifle, when they had landed, brought the unfortunate +porcupine tumbling to the ground, and Andy proceeded at once to skin +and dress his game for supper. + +"I'll be cook and Andy cookee," Doctor Joe announced. "We'll get wood +for the fire, David, and you and Jamie pitch the tent and get it +ready." + +Flat Point was well wooded, and the floor of the forest thickly +carpeted with grey caribou moss. David selected a level spot between +two trees on a little rise near the shore. The ridge rope was quickly +stretched between the trees and the tent securely pegged down. Then +David and Jamie broke a quantity of low-hanging spruce boughs, which +they snapped from the trees with a dexterous upward bend of the wrist. +When a liberal pile of these had been accumulated at the entrance of +the tent, David proceeded to lay the bed. + +The rear of the tent was to be the head. Here he laid a row of the +boughs, three deep, with the convex side uppermost, then he began +"shingling" the boughs in rows toward the foot. This was done by +placing the butt end of the bough firmly against the ground with half +the bough, the convex side uppermost, overlapping the bough above it, +as shingles are lapped on a roof. Thus continuing until the floor of +the tent was covered he had a soft, fragrant springy bed, quite as +soft and comfortable as a mattress, and upon this he and Jamie spread +the sleeping-bags. + +In the meantime Doctor Joe and Andy had collected an ample supply of +dry wood for the evening, and when, presently, David and Jamie joined +them, a cheerful fire was blazing and already an appetizing odour was +rising from the stew kettle. + +When the stew and some tender dumplings were done Doctor Joe lifted +the kettle from the fire, and while he filled each plate with a +liberal portion, and Andy poured tea, David put fresh wood upon the +fire, for the evening had grown cold and frosty with the setting sun. +The blazing fire was cheerful indeed as they settled themselves upon +the seat of boughs and proceeded to enjoy their supper. + +"Um-m-m!" exclaimed Andy. "You knows how to cook wonderful fine, +Doctor!" + +"'Tis _wonderful_ fine stew!" seconded David. + +"Not half bad," admitted Doctor Joe, "but Andy had as much to do with +it as I, and the porcupine had a good deal to do with it. It was young +and fat, and it's tender." + +There is no pleasanter hour for the camper or voyageur than the +evening hour by a blazing camp fire. There is no sweeter odour than +that of the damp forest mingled with the smell of burning wood. Beyond +the narrow circle of light a black wall rises, and behind the wall +lies the wilderness with its unfathomed mysteries. Out in the darkness +wild creatures move, silent, stealthy and unseen, behind a veil that +human eyes cannot penetrate. But we know they are there going about +the strange business of their life, and our imagination is awakened +and our sensibilities quickened. + +The camp fire is a shrine of comradeship and friendship. Here it was +that the primordial ancestors of every living man and woman and child +gathered at night with their families, in those far-off dark ages +before history was written. The fire was their home. Here they found +rest and comfort and protection from the savage wild beasts that +roamed the forests. It was a place of veneration. The primitive +instinct, perchance inherited from those far-off ancestors of ours, +slumbering in our souls, is sometimes awakened, and then we are called +to the woods and the wild places that God made beautiful for us, and +at night we gather around our camp fire as our ancient ancestors +gathered around theirs, and we love it just as they loved it. + +And so it was with the little camp fire on Flat Point and with Doctor +Joe and the boys. With darkness the uncanny light of the Aurora +Borealis flashed up in the north, its long, weird fingers of changing +colours moving restlessly across the heavens. The forest and the +wide, dark waters of Eskimo Bay sank behind a black wall. + +There was absolute silence, save for the ripple of waves upon the +shore, each busy with his own thoughts, until presently Jamie asked: + +"Did you ever see a ghost, Doctor?" + +"A ghost? No, lad, and I fancy no one else ever saw one except in +imagination. What made you think of ghosts?" + +"'Tis so--still--and dark out there," said Jamie, pointing toward the +darkness beyond the fire-glow. "And--I were thinkin' I heard +something." + +"But there _is_ ghosts, sir, plenty of un," broke in Andy. "Pop's seen +ghosts and so has Zeke Hodge and Uncle Billy and plenty of folks. They +says the ghost of Long John, the old Injun that used to be at the Post +and was drowned, goes paddlin' and paddlin' about in a canoe o' +nights." + +"Yes," said David, "I'm thinkin' I saw Long John's ghost myself one +evenin'. I weren't certain of un, but it must have been he." + +"Nonsense!" Doctor Joe had no patience with the belief popular among +Labradormen that ghosts of men who have been drowned or killed return +to haunt the scene of their death. "There's no such thing as a ghost." + +"What's that now?" Jamie held up his hand for silence, and spoke in a +subdued voice. + +Out of the darkness came the rhythmic dipping of a paddle. They all +heard it now. Doctor Joe arose, and closely followed by the boys, +stepped down beyond the fire glow. In dim outline they could see the +silhouette of a canoe containing the lone figure of a man paddling +with the short, quick stroke of the Indian. + +"'Tis the ghost of Long John!" breathed Jamie. "'Tis sure he!" + + + + +CHAPTER IV + +SHOT FROM BEHIND + + +The canoe was coming directly toward them. In a moment it touched the +shore, and as its occupant stepped lightly out the boys with one +accord exclaimed: + +"Injun Jake! 'Tis Injun Jake!" + +And so it proved. The greeting he received was hearty enough to leave +no doubt in his mind that he was a welcome visitor. Perhaps it was the +heartier because of the relief the boys experienced in the discovery +that the lone canoeman was not, after all, the wraith of Long John, +but was their friend Indian Jake in flesh and blood. + +When his packs had been removed, Indian Jake lifted his canoe from the +water, turned it upon its side and followed the boys to the fire, +where Doctor Joe awaited him. + +"Just in time!" welcomed Doctor Joe, as he shook Indian Jake's hand. +"We've finished eating, but there's plenty of stew in the kettle. +Andy, pour Jake some tea." + +Indian Jake, grunting his thanks, silently picked up David's empty +plate and heaped it with stew and dumpling from the kettle without the +ceremony of waiting to be served. + +He was a tall, lithe, muscular half-breed, with small, restless, +hawk-like eyes and a beaked nose that was not unlike the beak of a +hawk. He had the copper-hued skin and straight black hair of the +Indian, but otherwise his features might have been those of a white +man. Indian Jake had been the trapping companion of David and Andy the +previous winter, and, as previously stated, was this year to be Thomas +Angus's trapping partner on the fur trails. + +The boys were vastly fond of Indian Jake, and Thomas and Doctor Joe +shared their confidence, but the Bay folk generally looked upon him +with distrust and suspicion. Several years before, he had come to the +Bay a penniless stranger. He soon earned the reputation of being one +of the best trappers in the region. Then, suddenly, he disappeared +owing the Hudson's Bay Company a considerable sum for equipment and +provisions sold him on credit. It was well known that in the winter +preceding his disappearance Indian Jake had had a most successful +hunting season and was in possession of ample means to pay his debts. +His failure to apply his means to this purpose was looked upon as +highly dishonest--akin, indeed, to theft. + +Two years later he reappeared, again penniless. The Company refused +him further credit, and he had no means of purchasing the supplies +necessary for his support during the trapping season in the interior. +It was at this time that Thomas Angus broke his leg, and it became +necessary for David and Andy to take his place on the trails. They +were too young to endure the long months of isolation without an older +and more experienced companion. There was none but Indian Jake to go +with them, and he was engaged to hunt on shares a trail adjacent to +theirs. + +With his share of the furs captured by the end of the trapping season, +Indian Jake discharged his old debt with the Company. This was not +sufficient, however, to re-establish confidence in him. There was a +lurking suspicion among them, fostered by Uncle Ben Rudder of Tuggle +Bight, the wiseacre and oracle of the Bay, that Indian Jake's payment +of the debt was not prompted by honesty but by some ulterior motive. + +Indian Jake emptied his plate. He refilled it with the last of the +stew and again emptied it, in the interim swallowing several cups of +hot tea. + +"Good stew," he remarked in appreciation and praise when his meal was +finished. "When were you gettin' back?" + +"I reached The Jug day before yesterday," said Doctor Joe. + +"Huh!" Indian Jake grunted approval, as he puffed industriously at his +pipe. "Where you goin' now? To see Lem Horn?" + +"No," Doctor Joe answered, "we're going to Fort Pelican to get some +things I brought in on the mail boat." + +"I been goose huntin'," Indian Jake explained. "Not much goose yet. +Too early. Got four. Goin' to The Jug now to give Thomas a hand. Want +to start for Seal Lake soon. Don't want to be late." + +"Pop's thinkin' to start in a fortnight," said David. + +"Good!" acknowledged Indian Jake. "Maybe we start sooner. Start when +we're ready. I want to go quick. Have plenty time get there before +freeze-up." + +Indian Jake had apparently finished talking. Doctor Joe and the boys +made several attempts to continue the conversation, but only receiving +responsive grunts, turned to a discussion of the flag and other scout +problems, while Indian Jake was absorbed in his own thoughts. +Presently he rose and proceeded to unroll his bed. + +"Plenty of room in the tent," Doctor Joe invited. "Better come in with +us, Jake." + +"Goin' early. Sleep here," he declined, as he spread a caribou skin +upon the ground to protect himself from the damp earth. Then he +produced a Hudson's Bay Company blanket, once white but now of +uncertain shade, and rolling himself in the blanket, with his feet +toward the fire, was soon snoring peacefully. + +"We won't trouble to douse the fire," Doctor Joe suggested presently. +"He wants to sleep by it, and he'll look after it. Let's turn in." + +And with the front of the tent open that they might enjoy the air and +profit by the firelight, they were soon snug in their sleeping-bags +and as sound asleep as Indian Jake. + +"High-o!" + +The three boys sat up. It was broad daylight, and Doctor Joe, on his +hands and knees, was looking out of the tent. + +"Our visitor has gone, and there's little wonder, for we've been +sleeping like bears and it's broad daylight. Hurry, lads, or the +sun'll be well up before we get away." + +The boys sprang up and were soon dressed. The fire had burned low, +indicating that Indian Jake had been gone for a considerable time. A +fat goose was hanging from the limb of a tree. Fastened to it was a +piece of birch bark, and scribbled upon the birch bark with a piece of +charcoal from the fire, these words: + +"cerprize fur the lads bekos they likes Goos." + +Another surprise awaited them. When they lifted the lid of the large +cooking kettle they found it nearly full of boiled goose. + +"That's the way o' Indian Jake!" Andy exclaimed. "He's always plannin' +fine surprises for folks." + +"It's surely a fine surprise," said Doctor Joe. "Breakfast all ready +but the tea, and a goose for to-night." + +Every one hurried, but the sun was well up when they put out the fire +and hoisted sail. There was little wind, however, and the light +breeze soon dropped to a dead calm. Doctor Joe unshipped the rudder +and began sculling, while the boys laboured at the long oars. At +length the tide began running in, and progress was so slow that it was +decided to go ashore and await a turn of the tide or a breeze. + +"Lem Horn lives just back o' that island," said David, indicating a +small wooded island. "We might stop and bide there till a breeze +comes, and see un." + +In accordance with the suggestion Doctor Joe turned the boat inside +the island, and there, on the mainland in the edge of a little +clearing and not a hundred yards distant, stood Lem Horn's cabin. It +was a secluded and peculiarly lonely spot, hidden by the island from +the few boats that plied the Bay. Here lived Lem Horn and his wife and +two sons, Eli, a young man of twenty-one years, and Mark, nineteen +years of age. + +"There's no smoke," observed Jamie. + +"Maybe they're all down to Fort Pelican getting their winter outfit," +suggested David. + +"There seems to be no one about but the dogs," said Doctor Joe, as he +stepped ashore with the painter and made it fast, while Lem's big +sledge dogs, lolling in the sun, watched them curiously. + +Visitors do not knock in Labrador. The cabins are always open to +travellers whether or not the host is at home. Andy was in advance, +and opening the door he stopped on the threshold with an exclamation +of horror. + +Stretched upon the floor lay Lem Horn, his face and hair smeared with +blood, and on the floor near him was a small pool of blood. A chair +was overturned, and Lem's legs were tangled in a fish-net. + +Doctor Joe leaned over the prostrate figure. + +"Shot," said he, "and from behind!" + +"Does you mean somebody shot he?" asked David, quite horrified. + +"Yes, and it must have happened yesterday," said Doctor Joe. + +[Illustration: STRETCHED UPON THE FLOOR LAY LEM HORN] + + + + +CHAPTER V + +LEM HORN'S SILVER FOX + + +"He's alive, and this doesn't look like a bad wound," said Doctor Joe +after a brief examination. "David, put a fire in the stove and heat +some water! Andy, find some clean cloths! Jamie, bring up my medicine +kit from the boat!" + +The boys hurried to carry out the directions, while Doctor Joe made a +more careful examination and discovered a second wound in Lem's back, +just below the right shoulder. + +"Both shots from the back," he mused. "This wound explains his +condition. The one in the head only scraped the skull, and couldn't +have more than stunned him for a short time. The other has caused a +good deal of bleeding and may be serious." + +With David's help Doctor Joe carried Lem to his bunk and removed his +outer clothing. + +The water in the kettle on the stove was now warm enough for Doctor +Joe's purpose. He poured some of it into a dish, and after dissolving +in it some antiseptic tablets, cleansed and temporarily dressed the +wounds. + +Restoratives were now applied. Lem responded promptly. His breathing +became perceptible, and at length he opened his eyes and stared at +Doctor Joe. There was no recognition in the stare and in a moment the +eyes closed. Presently they again opened, and this time Lem's lips +moved. + +"Where's Jane?" he asked feebly. + +"Your wife seems to be away and the boys, too," said Doctor Joe. "We +found you alone." + +"Gone to Fort Pelican," Lem murmured after a moment's thought. He +stared at Doctor Joe for several minutes, now with the look of one +trying to recall something, and at length asked: + +"What's--been--happenin' to me?" + +"You've been shot," said Doctor Joe. "We found you on the floor. Some +one has shot you." + +"The silver! The silver fox skin!" Lem displayed excitement. "Be it on +the table? I had un there!" + +"There was no fur on the table when we came," said Doctor Joe. + +Lem made a feeble attempt to rise, but Doctor Joe pressed him gently +back upon the pillow, saying as he did so: + +"You must lie quiet, Lem. Don't try to move. You're not strong +enough." + +Lem, like a weary child, closed his eyes in compliance. Several +minutes elapsed before he opened them again, and then he looked +steadfastly at Doctor Joe. + +"Do you know who I am?" Doctor Joe asked. + +"Yes," answered Lem in a feeble voice; "you're Doctor Joe. I knows +you. I'm--glad you--came--Doctor Joe." + +"Lem, you've been shot, but we'll pull you through. It isn't so bad, +but you've lost some blood, and that's left you weak for a little +while. Don't talk now. Rest, and you'll soon be on your feet again." + +While Lem lay with closed eyes, Doctor Joe turned to consideration of +the crime. If it were true that a silver fox skin had been taken, +robbery was undoubtedly the motive for the shooting. But who could +have known of the existence of the skin? And who could have come to +this out-of-the-way place unobserved by the old trapper and shot him +without warning? + +Instinctively Indian Jake rose before his eyes. The half-breed's +unsavoury reputation forced itself forward. And there was the +circumstance of Indian Jake's visit to Flat Point camp the previous +evening, his hurried departure in the morning, and his evident desire +to hurry into the interior wilderness where he would be swallowed up +for several months, and from which there would be innumerable +opportunities to escape. Suddenly Doctor Joe was startled by Lem's +voice, quite strong and natural now: + +"I'm thinkin' 'twere that thief Injun Jake that shoots me." + +"What makes you think so?" asked Doctor Joe. + +"He were huntin' geese just below here, and he comes in and sits for a +bit. I had a silver fox skin I were holdin' for a better price than +they offers at Fort Pelican. 'Twere worth five hundred dollars +whatever, and they only offers three hundred. I were busy mendin' my +fishin' gear before I stows un away when Injun Jake comes. We talks +about fur and I brings the silver out t' show he. Then I lays un on +the table and keeps on mendin' the gear after he goes, thinkin' to put +the fur up after I gets through mendin'." + +"What time did Indian Jake come?" asked Doctor Joe. + +"A bit after noon. Handy to one o'clock 'twere, for I were just +boilin' the kettle. He eats a snack with me." + +"How long did he stay? What time did he go?" + +"I'm not knowin' just the time. I were a bit late boilin' the kettle. +I boiled un around one o'clock. We sets down to the table about ten +after and 'twere handy to half-past when we clears the table. Then +Injun Jake has a smoke, and I shows he the silver, and I'm thinkin' +'twere a bit after two when he goes. He said he were goin' to stop on +Flat P'int last night and get to Tom Angus's to-night whatever." + +"A little after two o'clock when he left?" + +"Maybe 'twere half-past. He had a down wind to paddle agin', and he +were sayin' 'twould be slow travellin', and 'twould take three or four +hours whatever to make Flat P'int." + +"And then what happened?" + +"I were settin' mendin' the gear thinkin' to finish un and stow un +away, and I keeps at un till just sundown. I were just gettin' up to +put the kettle on for supper. That's all I remembers, exceptin' I +wakes up two or three times and tries to move, but when I tries +there's a wonderful hurt in my shoulder, and my head feels like she's +bustin', and everything goes black in front of my eyes. If the fur's +gone, Injun Jake took un." + +"It's strange," said Doctor Joe, "very strange. There's a bullet in +your shoulder. After you rest a while we'll probe for it and see if we +can get it out. Don't talk any more. Just lie quietly and sleep if you +can." + +The boys were out-of-doors. Doctor Joe was glad they had not heard +Lem's accusation against Indian Jake. The half-breed had been good to +them, and they held vast faith in his integrity. There was some hope +that Lem's suspicions were not well founded; nevertheless Doctor Joe +was forced to admit to himself that circumstances pointed to Indian +Jake as the culprit. It was highly improbable that any one else should +have been in the vicinity without Lem's knowledge. It was quite +possible that Lem's statement of the hour when he was shot was +incorrect, for his mind could hardly yet be clear enough to be +certain, without doubt, of details. + +Lem quickly dropped into a refreshing sleep, and Doctor Joe left him +for a little while to join the boys out-of-doors. He found them behind +the house picking the goose Indian Jake had left in the tree at the +Flat Point camp. + +"How's Lem, sir? Is he hurt bad?" David asked as Doctor Joe seated +himself upon a stump. + +"He's sleeping now. After he rests a little we'll see how badly he's +hurt," said Doctor Joe. "I fancy you chaps are thinking about dinner. +Hungry already, I'll be bound!" + +"Aye," grinned David, "wonderful hungry. 'Tis most noon, sir." + +Doctor Joe consulted his watch. + +"I declare it is. It must have been nearly eleven o'clock when we +reached here. I didn't realize it was so late." + +"'Twere ten minutes to eleven, sir," said Andy. "I were lookin' to see +how long it takes us to come from Flat P'int." + +"What time did we leave Flat Point?" asked Doctor Joe. + +"'Twere twenty minutes before seven, sir." Andy drew his new watch +proudly from his pocket to refer to it again, as he did upon every +possible occasion. + +"No," corrected David, "'twere only twenty-five minutes before eleven +when we leaves Flat P'int, and fifteen minutes before eleven when we +gets here. I looks to see." + +"Perhaps your watches aren't set alike," suggested Doctor Joe. +"Suppose we compare them." + +The comparison disclosed a difference, as Doctor Joe predicted, of +five minutes. Then each must needs set his watch with Doctor Joe's, +which was a little slower than Andy's and a little faster than +David's. + +Doctor Joe made some mental calculations. Both David and Andy had +observed their watches, and there could be no doubt of the length of +time it had required them to come from Flat Point to Lem's cabin. They +had consumed four hours, but their progress had been exceedingly slow. +Indian Jake had doubtless travelled much faster in his light canoe, +but, at best, with the wind against him, he could hardly have paddled +from Lem's cabin to Flat Point in less than two hours. He had arrived +one hour after sunset. If Lem were correct as to the time when the +shooting took place, Indian Jake could not be guilty. + +But still there was, with but one hour or possibly a little more in +excess of the time between sunset and Indian Jake's arrival at camp, +an uncertain alibi for Indian Jake. Lem may have been shot much +earlier in the afternoon than he supposed. When Lem grew stronger it +would be necessary to question him closely that the hour might be +fixed with certainty. Whoever had shot and robbed Lem must have known +of the existence of the silver fox skin, and been familiar with the +surroundings. The shots had doubtless been fired through a broken pane +in a window directly behind the chair in which Lem was sitting at the +time. + +"Why not cook dinner out here over an open fire?" Doctor Joe presently +suggested. "You chaps are pretty noisy, and if you come into the house +to cook it on the stove, I'm afraid you'll wake Lem up, and I want him +to sleep." + +"We'll cook un out here, sir," David agreed. + +"'Tis more fun to cook here," Jamie suggested. + +"Very well. When it's ready you may bring it in and we'll eat on the +table. Lem will probably be awake by that time and he'll want +something too. Stew the goose so that there'll be broth, and we'll +give some of it to Lem to drink. You'll have to go to Fort Pelican +without me. I'll have to stay here and take care of Lem. If the wind +comes up, and I think it will, you may get a start after dinner," and +Doctor Joe returned to the cabin to watch over his patient. + +The goose was plucked. David split a stick of wood, and with his +jack-knife whittled shavings for the fire. The knife had a keen edge, +for David was a born woodsman and every woodsman keeps his tools +always in good condition, and the shavings he cut were long and thin. +He did not cut each shaving separately, but stopped his knife just +short of the end of the stick, and when several shavings were cut, +with a twist of the blade he broke them from the main stick in a +bunch. Thus they were held together by the butt to which they were +attached. He whittled four or five of these bunches of shavings, and +then cut some fine splints with his axe. + +David was now ready to light his fire. He placed two sticks of wood +upon the ground, end to end, in the form of a right angle, with the +opening between the sticks in the direction from which the wind came. +Taking the butt of one of the bunches of shavings in his left hand, he +scratched a match with his right hand and lighted the thin end of the +shavings. When they were blazing freely he carefully placed the thick +end upon the two sticks where they came together, on the inside of the +angle, with the burning end resting upon the ground. Thus the thick +end of the shavings was elevated. Fire always climbs upward, and in an +instant the whole bunch of shavings was ablaze. Upon this he placed +the other shavings, the thin ends on the fire, the butts resting upon +the two sticks at the angle. With the splints which he had previously +prepared arranged upon this they quickly ignited, and upon them larger +sticks were laid, and in less than five minutes an excellent cooking +fire was ready for the pot. + +Before disjointing the goose, David held it over the blaze until it +was thoroughly singed and the surface of the skin clear. Then he +proceeded to draw and cut the goose into pieces of suitable size for +stewing, placed them in the kettle, and covered them with water from +Lem's spring. + +In the meantime Andy cut a stiff green pole about five feet in length. +The thick end he sharpened, and near the other end cut a small notch. +Using the thick, sharpened end like a crowbar, he drove it firmly into +the ground with the small end directly above the fire. Placing a stone +between the ground and sloping pole, that the pole might not sag too +low with the weight of the kettle, he slipped the handle of the kettle +into the notch at the small end of the pole, where it hung suspended +over the blaze. + +Preparing a similar pole, and placing it in like manner, Andy filled +the tea-kettle and put it over the fire to heat for tea. + +"I'm thinkin'," suggested David as he dropped four or five thick +slices of pork into the kettle of goose, "'twould be fine to have hot +bread with the goose." + +"Oh, make un! Make un!" exclaimed Jamie. + +"Aye," seconded Andy, "hot bread would go fine with the goose." + +Andy fetched the flour up from the boat and David dipped about a +quart of it into the mixing pan. To this he added four heaping +teaspoonfuls of baking-powder and two level teaspoonfuls of salt. +After stirring the baking-powder and salt well into the flour, he +added to it a heaping cooking-spoonful of lard--a quantity equal to +two heaping tablespoonfuls. This he rubbed into the flour with the +back of the large cooking spoon until it was thoroughly mixed. He now +added water while he mixed it with the flour, a little at a time, +until the dough was of the consistency of stiff biscuit dough. + +The bread was now ready to bake. There was no oven, and the frying-pan +must needs serve instead. The interior of the frying-pan he sprinkled +liberally with flour that the dough might not stick to it. Then +cutting a piece of dough from the mass he pulled it into a cake just +large enough to fit into the frying-pan and about half an inch in +thickness, and laid the cake carefully in the pan. + +With a stick he raked from the fire some hot coals. With the coals +directly behind the pan, and with the bread in the pan facing the +fire, and exposed to the direct heat, he placed it at an angle of +forty-five degrees, supporting it in that position with a sharpened +stick, one end forced into the earth and the tip of the handle resting +upon the other end. The bread thus derived heat at the bottom from the +coals and at the top from the main fire. + +"She's risin' fine!" Jamie presently announced. + +"She'll rise fast enough," David declared confidently. "There's no +fear of that." + +There was no fear indeed. In ten minutes the loaf had increased to +three times its original thickness and the side nearer the ground took +on a delicate brown, for the greater heat of a fire is always +reflected toward the ground. David removed the pan from its support, +and without lifting the loaf from the pan, moved it round until the +brown side was opposite the handle. Then he returned the pan to its +former position. Now the browned half was on the upper or handle side, +while the unbrowned half was on the side near the ground, and in a few +minutes the whole loaf was deliciously browned. + +While the bread was baking David drove a stick into the ground at one +side and a little farther from the fire than the pan. When the loaf +had browned on top to his satisfaction he removed it from the pan and +leaned it against the stick with the bottom exposed to the fire, and +proceeded to bake a second loaf. + +"Let me have the dough that's left," Jamie begged. + +"Aye, take un if you likes," David consented. "There'll be too little +for another loaf, whatever." + +Jamie secured a dry stick three or four feet long and about two inches +in diameter. This he scraped clean of bark, and pulling the dough into +a rope as thick as his finger wound it in a spiral upon the centre of +the stick. Then he flattened the dough until it was not above a +quarter of an inch in thickness. + +On the opposite side of the fire from David, that he might not +interfere with David's cooking, he arranged two stones near enough +together for an end of the stick to rest on each. Here he placed it +with the dough in the centre exposed to the heat. As the dough on the +side of the stick near the fire browned he turned the stick a little +to expose a new surface, until his twist was brown on all sides. + +"Have some of un," Jamie invited. "We'll eat un to stave off the +hunger before dinner. I'm fair starved." + +David and Andy were not slow to accept, and Jamie's crisp hot twist +was quickly devoured. + +The kettle of stewing goose was sending forth a most delicious +appetizing odour. David lifted the lid to season it, and stir it with +the cooking spoon. Jamie and Andy sniffed. + +"U-m-m!" from Jamie. + +"Oh, she smells fine!" Andy breathed. + +"Seems like I can't wait for un!" Jamie declared. + +"She's done!" David at length announced. + +"Make the tea, Andy." + +Using a stick as a lifter David removed the kettle of goose from the +fire, while Andy put tea in the other kettle, which was boiling, +removing it also from the fire. + +"You bring the bread along, Jamie, and you the tea, Andy," David +directed, turning into the cabin with the kettle of goose. + +Lem had just awakened from a most refreshing sleep, and when he +smelled the goose he declared: + +"I'm hungrier'n a whale." + +Doctor Joe laid claim also to no small appetite, an appetite, indeed, +quite superior to that described by Lem. + +"A whale!" he sniffed. "Why, I'm as hungry as seven whales! Seven, +now! Big whales, too! No small whales about _my_ appetite!" + +The three boys laughed heartily, and David warned: + +"We'll all have to be lookin' out or there won't be a bite o' goose +left for anybody if Doctor Joe gets at un first!" + +Doctor Joe arranged a plate for Lem, upon which he placed a choice +piece of breast and a section of one of David's loaves, which proved, +when broken, to be light and short and delicious. Then he poured Lem a +cup of rich broth from the kettle, and while Lem ate waited upon him +before himself joining the boys at the table. + +"How are you feeling, Lem?" asked Doctor Joe when everyone had +finished and the boys were washing dishes. + +"My head's a bit soggy and I'm a bit weak, and there's a wonderful +pain in my right shoulder when I moves un," said Lem. "If 'tweren't +for my head and the weakness and the pain I'd feel as well as ever I +did, and I'd be achin' to get after that thief Indian Jake. As 'tis +I'll bide my time till I feels nimbler." + +"Do you think you could let me fuss around that shoulder a little +while?" Doctor Joe asked. "Does it hurt too badly for you to bear it?" + +"Oh, I can stand un," said Lem. "Fuss around un all you wants to, +Doctor Joe. You knows how to mend un and patch un up, and I wants un +mended." + +Doctor Joe called Andy to his assistance with another basin of warm +water, in which, as previously, he dissolved antiseptic tablets, +explaining to the boys the reason, and adding: + +"If a wound is kept clean Nature will heal it. Nothing you can apply +to a wound will assist in the healing. All that is necessary is to +keep it clean and keep it properly bandaged to protect it from +infection." + +"Wouldn't a bit of wet t'baccer draw the soreness out?" Lem suggested. + +"No! No! No!" protested Doctor Joe, properly horrified. "Never put +tobacco or anything else on a wound. If you do you will run the risk +of infection which might result in blood poisoning, which might kill +you." + +"I puts t'baccer on cuts sometimes and she always helps un," insisted +Lem. + +"It's simply through the mercy of God, then, and your good clean +blood, that it hasn't killed you," declared Doctor Joe. + +From his kit Doctor Joe brought forth bandages and gauze and some +strange-looking instruments, and turned his attention to the shoulder. +Lem gritted his teeth and, though Doctor Joe knew he was suffering, +never uttered a whimper or complaint. + +An examination disclosed the fact that the bullet had coursed to the +right, and Doctor Joe located it just under the skin directly forward +of the arm pit. Though it was necessarily a painful wound, he was +relieved to find that no vital organ had been injured, and he was able +to assure Lem that he would soon be around again and be as well as +ever. + +When the bullet was extracted Doctor Joe examined it critically, +washed it and placed it carefully in his pocket. It proved to be a +thirty-eight calibre, black powder rifle bullet. Doctor Joe had no +doubt of that. He had made a study of firearms and had the eye of an +expert. + +"It's half-past two, boys. A westerly breeze is springing up, and I +think you'd better go on to Fort Pelican," Doctor Joe suggested. "I'll +give you a note to the factor instructing him to deliver all the +things to you. You'll be able to make a good run before camping time. +Stop in here on your way back." + +The boys made ready and said good-bye, spread the sails, and were soon +running before a good breeze. Doctor Joe watched them disappear round +the island, and returning to Lem's bedside asked: + +"Lem, do you know what kind of a rifle Indian Jake carried?" + +"I'm not knowin' rightly," said Lem. "'Twere either a forty-four or a +thirty-eight. 'Twere he did the shootin'. Nobody else has been comin' +about here the whole summer. I'm not doubtin' he's got my silver fox, +and I'm goin' to get un back _whatever_. He'd never stop at shootin' +to rob, but he'll have to be quicker'n I be at shootin', to keep the +fur!" + +"When are you expecting Mrs. Horn and the boys back?" asked Doctor +Joe. + +"This evenin' or to-morrow whatever," said Lem. "They've been away +these five days gettin' the winter outfit at Fort Pelican." + +If Indian Jake were guilty, it was highly probable that he would take +prompt steps to flee the country. He could not dispose of the silver +fox skin in the Bay, for all the local traders had already seen and +appraised it, and they would undoubtedly recognize it if it were +offered them. Indian Jake would probably plunge into the interior, +spend the winter hunting, and in the spring make his way to the St. +Lawrence, where he would be safe from detection. + +Doctor Joe made these calculations while he sat by the bedside, and +his patient dozed. He was sorry now that he had not sent the boys back +to The Jug with a letter to Thomas explaining what had occurred. All +the evidence pointed to Indian Jake's guilt, and there could be little +doubt of it if it should prove that the half-breed carried a +thirty-eight fifty-five rifle. Thomas would know, and he would take +prompt action to prevent Indian Jake's escape with the silver fox +skin. Should it prove, however, that Indian Jake's rifle was of +different calibre, he should be freed from suspicion. + +It was dusk that evening when the boat bearing Eli and Mark and Mrs. +Horn rounded the island. Doctor Joe met them. They had seen the boys +and had received from them a detailed account of what had happened, +and Mrs. Horn was greatly excited. Her first thought was for Lem, and +she was vastly relieved when she saw him, as he declared he did not +feel "so bad," and Doctor Joe assured her he would soon be around +again and as well as ever. + +Then there fell upon the family a full realization of their loss. The +silver fox skin that had been stolen was their whole fortune. The +proceeds of its sale was to have been their bulwark against need. It +was to have given them a degree of independence, and above all else +the little hoard that its sale would have brought them was to have +lightened Lem's burden of labour during his declining years. + +Eli Horn was a big, broad-shouldered, swarthy young man of few words. +For an hour after he heard his father's detailed story of Indian +Jake's visit to the cabin, he sat in sullen silence by the stove. +Suddenly he arose, lifted his rifle from the pegs upon which it rested +against the wall, dropped some ammunition into his cartridge bag, and +swinging it over his shoulder strode toward the door. + +"Where you goin', Eli?" asked Lem from his bunk. + +"To hunt Indian Jake," said Eli as he closed the door behind him and +passed out into the night. + + + + +CHAPTER VI + +THE TRACKS IN THE SAND + + +A smart south-west breeze had sprung up. White caps were dotting the +Bay, and with all sails set the boat bowled along at a good speed. + +David held the tiller, while Andy and Jamie busied themselves with +their handbooks. They were an hour out of Horn's Bight when David +sighted the Horn boat beating up against the wind. Drawing within +hailing distance he told them of the accident. + +Mrs. Horn, greatly excited, asked many questions. David assured her +that her husband's injuries were not serious, nevertheless she was +quite certain Lem lay at death's door. + +"'Tis the first time I leaves home in most a year," she lamented. "I +were feelin' inside me 'twere wrong to go and leave Lem alone. And +now he's gone and been shot and liker'n not most killed." + +"'Tis too bad to make Mrs. Horn worry so. I'm wonderfully sorry," +David sympathized, as the boats passed beyond speaking distance. +"She'll worry now till they gets home, and the way Lem ate goose I'm +thinkin' he ain't hurt bad enough to worry much about he." + +"They'll get there to-night whatever," said Andy. "'Tis the way of +Mrs. Horn to worry, even when we tells she Lem's doin' fine." + +"I'm wonderin' and wonderin' who 'twere shot Lem," said David. +"Whoever 'twere had un in his heart to do murder." + +"Whoever 'twere looked in through the window and saw Lem with the fine +silver fox on the table and sets out to get the fox," reasoned Andy. +"The shootin' were done through the window where there's a pane of +glass broke out." + +"I sees where there's a pane of glass out," said David. "'Twas not +fresh broke though." + +"No, 'twere an old break," Andy agreed. "I goes to look at un, and I +sees fresh tracks under the window where the man stands when he +shoots." + +"Tracks!" exclaimed David. "I never thought to look for tracks now! I +weren't thinkin' of that! You thinks of more things than I ever does, +Andy." + +"I weren't thinkin' of tracks either," said Andy, disclaiming credit +for their discovery. "Whilst you bakes the bread I just goes to look +where the window is broke, and when I'm there I sees the +strange-lookin' tracks." + +"Strange, now! How was they strange?" asked Jamie excitedly, scenting +a deepening mystery. + +"They was made with boots with _nails_ in the bottom of un," explained +Andy. "They was nails all over the bottom of them boots, and they was +big boots, them was. They made big tracks--wonderful big tracks." + +"'Tis strange, now! Did you trace un, Andy? Did you see what way the +tracks goes?" asked David. + +"'Twere only under the window where the ground were soft and bare of +moss that the tracks showed the nails. I tracks un down though to +where they comes in a boat and the boat goes again," Andy explained. +"The tracks were a day old, and down by the water the tide's been in +and washed un away. Whoever 'twere makes un were beyond findin' +whatever. They were goin' away, I'm thinkin', right after they shoots +Lem and takes his silver." + +"Did you tell Doctor Joe about the tracks?" asked David. + +"No, I weren't thinkin' to tell he when we goes in to eat, and he +weren't wantin' us in before that fearin' we'd wake Lem. The tracks +weren't of much account whatever. The folk that shot Lem were leavin' +in a boat and we couldn't track the boat to find out who 'twere." + +A drizzling rain began to fall before they made camp that night. It +was too wet and dreary under the dripping trees for an open camp fire. +The stove was therefore brought into service and set up in the tent, +and there they cooked and ate their supper by candle-light. + +On a cold and stormy night there is no article in the camp equipment +more useful than a little sheet-iron stove. With its magic touch it +transforms a wet and dismal tent into the snuggest and cosiest and +most comfortable retreat in the whole world. Outside the wind was now +dashing the rain in angry gusts against the canvas, and moaning +drearily through the tree tops. Within the fire crackled cheerily. The +tent was dry and snug and warm. The bed of fragrant balsam and spruce +boughs, the smell of the fire and the soft candle-light combined to +give it an indescribable atmosphere of luxury. + +In the morning the weather had not improved. The wind had risen during +the night, and was driving the rain in sheets over the Bay. David went +outside to make a survey, and when he returned he reported: + +"'Twill be a nasty day abroad." + +"Let's bide here till the rain stops," suggested Jamie. + +"The wind's fair, and if she keeps up and don't turn too strong we'll +make Fort Pelican by evenin' whatever, if we goes," David objected. + +"'Twon't be so bad, once we're out and gets used to un," said Andy. + +"No, 'twon't be so bad," urged David. "The wind may shift and fall +calm, when the rain's over, and if we bides here we'll lose time in +gettin' to Fort Pelican. I'm for goin' and makin' the best of un." + +"I won't mind un," agreed Jamie, stoutly. + +"I got grit to travel in the rain, and we wants to make a fast cruise +of un." + +It was "nasty" indeed when after breakfast they broke camp and set +sail. In a little while they were wet to the skin, and it was +miserably cold; but they were used enough to the beat of wind and rain +in their faces, and all declared that it was not "so bad" after all. +To these hardy lads of The Labrador rain and cold was no great +hardship. It was all in a day's work, and scudding along before a good +breeze, and looking forward to a good dinner in the kitchen at Fort +Pelican, and to a snug bed at night, they quite forgot the cold and +rain. + +During the morning the wind shifted to the westward, and before noon +it drew around to the north-west. With the shift of wind the rain +ceased, and the clouds broke. Then Andy lighted a fire in the stove, +boiled the kettle and fried a pan of salt pork. Hot tea, with bread +dipped in the warm pork grease, warmed them and put them in high +spirits. + +"'Tis fine we didn't bide in camp," remarked David as he swallowed a +third cup of tea. "With this fine breeze we'll make Fort Pelican +to-night, whatever." + +"I'm fine and warm now," declared Jamie, "but 'twas a bit hard to face +the rain when we starts this marnin'." + +"'Tis always the thinkin' about un that makes things hard to do," +observed David. + +"Things we has to do seems wonderful hard before we gets at un, but +mostly they're easy enough after we tackles un. The thinkin' +beforehand's the hardest part of any hard job." + +The sun broke out between black clouds scudding across the sky. The +wind was gradually increasing in force. By mid-afternoon half a gale +was blowing, a heavy sea; was running, and the old boat, heeling to +the gale, was in a smother of white water. + +"We're makin' fine time!" shouted David, shaking the spray from his +hair. + +"We'll sure make Fort Pelican this evenin' early," Andy shouted back. + +"We'll not make un!" Jamie protested. "The wind's gettin' too strong! +We'll have to go ashore and make camp!" + +"The boat'll stand un," laughed David. "She's a sturdy craft in a +breeze." + +"I'm afeared," said Jamie. + +"'A scout is brave,'" quoted Andy. + +"'Tisn't meant for a scout to be foolish," Jamie insisted. "I'm +afeared of bein' foolish." + +"You was braggin' of havin' grit," Andy taunted. + +"I has grit and a stout heart," Jamie proudly asserted, "but there's +no such need of haste as to tempt a gale. 'Tis time to lie to and +camp." + +David's answer was lost in the smother of a great roller that chased +them, and breaking astern nearly swept him from the tiller. When the +lads caught their breath there was a foot of sea in the bottom of the +boat. + +"Bail her out!" bellowed David, shaking the water from his eyes. + +"Jamie's right! 'Tis blowin' too high for comfort!" shouted Andy, as +he and Jamie, each with a kettle, bailed. "We'd better not risk goin' +on! Find a lee to make a landin', Davy." + +"'Tis against reason not to take shelter!" piped Jamie. + +"Fort Pelican's only ten miles away!" David shouted back in protest. +"We'll soon make un in this fine breeze!" + +The boat was riding on her beam ends. White horses breaking over her +bow sent showers of foam her whole length. A sudden squall that nearly +capsized her roused David suddenly to their danger. + +"Reef the mains'l!" he shouted. + +"Make for the lee of Comfort Island!" sputtered Andy through the +spray, as he and Jamie sprang for the mainsail to reef it. + +"Make for un!" echoed Jamie. "'Tis against reason to keep goin'." + +The wind shrieked through the rigging. Another great roller all but +swamped them. The sudden fury of the wind, the ever higher-piling +seas, and the rollers that had so nearly overwhelmed the boat brought +to David a full sense of their peril. He had been foolhardy and +headstrong in his determination to continue to Fort Pelican. He +realized this now even more fully than Andy and Jamie. + +David was a good seaman and fearless, with a full measure of faith in +his skill. Now that his eyes were open to the peril in which he had +placed them, he knew that all the skill he possessed and perhaps more +would be required to take them safely into shelter. + +Comfort Island with its offer of snug harbour lay a half mile to +leeward. David brought the boat before the wind, and headed directly +for the island. + +Great breakers, pounding the high, rockbound shores of Comfort Island, +and booming like cannon, threw their spray a hundred feet in the air, +enveloping the island in a cloud of mist. + +Stretching away from the island for a mile to the westward was a rocky +shoal known as the Devil's Arm. At high tide, in calm weather, it +might be crossed, but now it was a great white barrier of roaring +breakers rising in mighty geysers above the sea. + +To the eastward of the island was a mass of black reefs known as the +Devil's Tea Kettle. The Devil's Tea Kettle was always an evil place. +Now it was a great boiling cauldron whose waters rose and fell in a +seething white mass. + +It was quite out of the question to round the Devil's Arm and beat +back against the wind to the lee of the island. There was a narrow +passage between the Devil's Tea Kettle and the island. If they could +make this passage it would be a simple matter to fall in behind the +island to shelter and safety. + +All of these things David saw at a glance. It was a desperate +undertaking, but it was the only chance, and he held straight for the +passage. If he could keep the boat to her course, he would make it. If +a sudden squall of wind overtook them the leeway would throw them +upon the island breakers and they would be swallowed up in an instant +and pounded to pieces upon the rocks. + +Over and over again David breathed the prayer: "Lord, take us through +safe! Lord, take us through safe!" His face was set, but his nerves +were iron. Andy and Jamie, tense with the peril and excitement of the +adventure, crouched in the bottom of the boat. As they drew near the +island, Jamie shouted encouragingly: + +"Keep your grit, and a stout heart like a man, Davy!" but the roar of +breakers drowned his voice, and David did not hear. + +"Is you afraid, Jamie?" Andy yelled in Jamie's ear. + +"Aye," answered Jamie, "but I has plenty of grit." + +He who knows danger and meets it manfully though he fears it, is +brave, and Jamie and all of them were brave. + +The boat was in the passage at last. David, every nerve tense, held +her down to it. On the right seethed the Devil's Tea Kettle, sending +forth a continuous deafening roar. On the left was Comfort Island with +a boom! boom! of thundering breakers smashing against its high, sullen +bulwarks of black rocks. The boat was so near that spray from the +breakers fell over it in a shower. + +[Illustration: ON THE RIGHT SEETHED THE DEVIL'S TEA KETTLE] + +It was over in a moment. The Devil's Tea Kettle, with all its loud +threats, was behind them. The boat shot down along the shore, David +swung to port, and they were safe in the quiet waters to the lee of +the island. + +"Thank the Lord!" said David reverently, as he brought the little +craft to and the sail flapped idly. + +"'Twere a close shave," breathed Jamie. + +"A wonderful close shave," echoed Andy. + +"You had grit," said Jamie. "You has plenty o' grit, Davy--and a stout +heart, like a man. 'Twere wonderful how you cracked her through! +There's nary a man on the coast could have done better'n that!" + +"'Twere easy enough," David boasted with a laugh as he wiped the spray +from his face, and unshipping the rudder proceeded to scull the boat +into a natural berth between the rocks. + +Hardly a breath of the gale raging outside reached them in their snug +little harbour. The boat was made fast with the painter to a ledge, +and the boys climed to the high rocky shore. + +An excellent camping place was discovered a hundred yards back in a +grove of stunted spruce trees that had rooted themselves in the scant +soil that covered the rocks, and held fast, despite the Arctic blasts +that swept across the Bay to rake the island during the long winters. +Here the tent was pitched, and everything carried up from the boat and +stowed within to dry. Fifteen minutes later the tent stove was +crackling cheerily and sending forth comfort to the drenched young +mariners. "There'll be no hurry in the marnin'," said David when they +had eaten supper and lighted a candle. "We'll stay up to-night till we +gets the outfit all dried, and if we're late about un we'll sleep a +bit later in the marnin', to make up. We'll make Fort Pelican in an +hour, or two hours _what_ever, if we has a civil breeze in the +marnin'." + +"We'll not be gettin' away from Fort Pelican to-morrow, will we?" +asked Andy. + +"We'll take the day for visitin' the folk and hearin' the news, and +start back the marnin' after," suggested David. + +It was near midnight when they crawled into their beds to drop into a +ten-knot sleep, and they slept so soundly than none of them awoke +until they were aroused by the sun shining upon the tent the next +morning. + +Breakfast was prepared and eaten leisurely. There was no hurry. The +wind had fallen to a moderate stiff breeze, and Fort Pelican, through +the narrows connecting Eskimo Bay with the sea outside, was almost in +sight. + +When the dishes were washed Andy and Jamie took down the tent, while +David shouldered a pack and preceded them to the place where they had +moored the boat the previous evening. A few minutes later he came +running back, and in breathless excitement startled them with the +announcement: + +"The boat's gone!" + +"Gone where?" asked Andy incredulously. + +"Gone! I'm not knowin' _where_!" exclaimed David. + +"Has she been took?" asked Jamie, excitedly. + +"Took!" said David. "The painter were untied and she were took! +There's tracks about of big boots with nails in un!" + +Andy and Jamie ran down with David. No trace of the boat was to be +found. + +In the earth above the shore were plainly to be seen the tracks of +two men wearing hobnailed boots. + +"They's fresh tracks," declared David. + +"Made this marnin'," Andy agreed. "They's the same kind of tracks as +the ones I see under Lem's window. Whoever 'twere made these tracks +shot Lem and took his silver." + +"And now we're left here on the island with no way of gettin' off," +said David. + +"What'll we be doin'? How'll we ever get away?" asked Jamie in +consternation. + +But that was a question none of them could answer. + + + + +CHAPTER VII + +THE MYSTERY OF THE BOAT + + +The boys looked at each other in consternation. They were marooned on +a desolate, rocky, sparsely wooded island. Boats passed only at rare +intervals, and a fortnight, or even a month, might elapse before an +opportunity for rescue offered. Their provisions would scarcely last a +week, and the island was destitute of game. + +"Whoever 'twere took the boat," Andy suggested presently, "were on the +island when we comes." + +"Aye," David agreed, "and makin' for Fort Pelican. They been up as far +as Lem's and they's gettin' away with Lem's silver to sell un." + +"'Tis strange boots they wears," said Jamie. "Strange boots them is +with nails in un." + +"'Twere no man of The Labrador made them tracks," David declared. + +"I never sees boots with nails in un," said Andy, "except the boots +the lumber folks wears over at the new camp at Grampus River." + +"Aye," agreed David, "they wears un. When we goes over with Pop last +month when the big steamer comes I sees un. Plenty of un wears boots +with nails in." + +"That's who 'twere took our boat!" said Andy. "'Twere men from the +Grampus River lumber camp." + +"Let's track un and see where they were camped," suggested David. + +The trail was easily followed. Here and there a footprint appeared +where soil had drifted in among the rocks above the shore. The trail +led them three hundred yards to the eastward, and then down into a +sheltered hollow just above the water's edge, where a small boat was +drawn up upon the shore. + +"Here's a boat!" exclaimed Jamie, who had run ahead. + +"A boat!" shouted David. "They left un and took our boat." + +"And good reason!" said Jamie, who had reached the skiff. "The +bottom's half knocked out of un." + +It was evident that the boat had been driven upon the rocks in making +a landing, and a jagged hole a foot square appeared in the bottom, +rendering it in that condition quite useless. Near by a tent had been +pitched, and there was no doubt that the men who had abandoned the +boat had been in camp for a day at least in the sheltered hollow. + +The boys turned the boat over and examined the break. + +"'Tis a bad place to mend," observed David. + +"But we can mend un," declared Andy. "We can mend un by noon whatever, +and get to Fort Pelican this evenin'." + +"I'm doubtin'," David shook his head. "'Twill take a day to mend un +whatever, and she'll be none too safe. 'Twill be hard to make un +water-tight." + +"We can mend un," Andy insisted. + +A close examination of the tracks disclosed the fact that there had +undoubtedly been two men in the party. They had reached the island +before the rain of two days before. This was disclosed by the fact +that some of the tracks were partly washed away by the rain, and the +earth was caked where the wind and sun had dried it afterwards. + +Natives of the coast, as was the case with David and Jamie and Andy, +wore home-made sealskin boots in summer and buckskin moccasins in +winter. The sealskin boots had moccasin feet with one thickness of +skin, and were soft and pliable. None of them ever wore soled boots +that would admit of hobnails. It was plain to the boys, therefore, +that the men who made the tracks were not natives of the country. + +Early in the summer a lumber company had begun the erection of a camp +at Grampus River, which lay twenty miles to the southward from The +Jug, and on the opposite side of Eskimo Bay. A steamship had brought +in men and supplies, and all summer men had been building camps and +preparing for lumbering operations during the coming winter. + +It was the first steamer to enter the Bay, and its advent had been an +occasion of much curiosity on the part of the people. Many of them +made excursions to Grampus River to see the strangers at work. Thomas +had made such an excursion with David and Andy. Strange, rough, +blasphemous men they seemed to the God-fearing folk of the country. +These were the men wearing hobnailed boots of which David spoke, and +there was small doubt in the mind of the boys that the men who had +camped on the island and had stolen the boat were from the Grampus +River lumber camp. + +It proved a tedious undertaking to repair and make seaworthy the +damaged boat. The trees on the island were, for the most part, small +gnarled spruce, twisted and stunted by the northern blasts which swept +the Bay. After some search, however, they discovered a white spruce +tree suitable for their purpose, with a trunk ten inches in diameter. +David felled it and cut from its butt a two-foot length. This he +proceeded to split into as thin slabs as possible. Then with their +jack-knives the boys began the tedious task of whittling the surfaces +of the slabs into smooth boards, first trimming them down to an inch +and a half in thickness with the axes. + +"How'll we make un fast when we gets un done?" asked Jamie. "We has no +nails." + +"I'm thinkin' of that," said David. "I'm not knowin' yet, but we'll +find some way." + +"I've got a way," Andy announced. "I been thinkin' and thinkin' and I +found a way to make un fast." + +"How'll you make un fast now without nails?" David asked expectantly. + +"We'll tie un with spruce roots, like the Injuns puts their canoes +together," explained Andy. "We'll cut holes in each end of un in the +right place to tie un fast to the braces of the boat. We'll have to +make holes in the bottom of the boat each side of the braces for the +roots to come through so we can make un fast. That'll hold un. Then +when we've made un fast we'll caulk un up with spruce gum." + +"Why can't we cut strips of sealskin off our sleepin' bags for strings +to tie un with?" suggested David. "'Twould be easier than makin' +spruce root strings, and quicker too, and the sealskin would be strong +and hold un tight." + +"Yes, and soon's the sealskin gets wet she'll stretch," Andy objected. +"Then the boards would loosen up and let the water in." + +"I never thought of the sealskin stretchin', but she sure would. +You're fine at thinkin' things out, Andy!" said David admiringly. "The +spruce roots won't stretch though. 'Tis a fine way to fix un now, and +she'll work. There's no doubtin' she'll work." + +"'Twill take all day," Andy calculated, adding with pride, "but once +we gets un on they'll hold. I'll get the roots now and put un to +soak." + +Andy dug around the white spruce tree and in a little while gathered a +sufficient quantity of long string-like roots. He scraped them and +then split them carefully with his knife. When they were split he +filled the big kettle with water from a spring, placed the roots in it +and put them over the fire to boil. + +They all worked as hard as they could on the boards, and when dinner +time came David announced that the boards were smooth enough for their +purpose. + +"Now all we'll have to do," said he as he sliced pork for dinner, "is +to make the holes in un and fasten un on." + +"What were that now?" Jamie interrupted as a hoarse blast broke upon +the air. + +"'Tis the steamer whistle!" David dropped the knife with which he was +slicing pork, and with Jamie and Andy at his heels ran to the top of +the highest rock on the island, where a wide view of the Bay lay +before them. + +A mile away the lumber company's big steamer was feeling its way +cautiously toward the west, bound inward to the Grampus River camps. +The boys waved their caps and shouted at the top of their lungs, but +no one on the steamer appeared to see them. It was not until the great +strange vessel had become a mere speck in the distance that they +turned back to the preparation of dinner. + +"They didn't see us," said David in disappointment. + +"We're not wantin' to go to Grampus River, whatever," Andy cheered. +"We're goin' to Fort Pelican when we has the boat fixed up, and she's +'most done." + +After dinner they settled to the task. Two of the narrow boards which +they had prepared were required to cover the break, which occurred +between two braces. The edges of the boards where they were to join +were whittled straight, that the joint might be made as tight as +possible. Then David held them in place while Andy marked the position +for the holes through which the spruce root thongs were to pass. + +Four holes were to be cut in each end of both boards, and holes to +match in the bottom of the boat, and in an hour they were neatly +reamed out. When Andy removed his thongs from the water they were +quite soft and pliable, and proved to be strong and tough. + +Andy lashed the boards into place, threading the thongs through the +holes and drawing them round the brace several times at each place +where provision had been made for them. Thus a dozen thicknesses of +fibre bound the boards to the brace at each set of holes. + +It was now necessary to collect the spruce gum and prepare it. Gum was +plentiful enough, and in half an hour they had collected enough to +half fill the frying-pan. To this was added a little lard, and the gum +and grease melted over the fire and thoroughly mixed. + +"What you puttin' the grease in for?" asked Jamie curiously. + +"So when we pours un in the cracks and she hardens she won't be +brittle and crack," David explained. + +The hot mixture was now poured into the joints between the boards and +at all points where the new boards came into contact with the boat, +and into the holes where the lashings occurred. In a few minutes it +hardened, and the boys surveyed their work with pride and +satisfaction. + +"Now we'll try un," said David, "and see if she leaks." + +"She'll never leak where she's mended," asserted Andy. + +They slipped the boat into the water and Andy's prediction proved +true. Not a drop of water oozed through the joints, and the boat was +as snug and tight and seaworthy as any boat that ever floated. + +"'Tis too late to start to-night," said David, "but we'll be away at +crack o' dawn in the marnin', whatever. 'Tis fine they left the sail +and oars." + +And at crack of dawn in the morning the boys were away. The day was +misty and disagreeable, but David and Andy knew the way as well as you +and I know our city streets. They rounded the Devil's Arm, a friendly +tide helped them through the narrows, and in mid-forenoon the low +white buildings of Fort Pelican appeared in misty outline through the +fog. A few minutes later they swung alongside the Fort Pelican jetty, +and there, to their amazement, firmly tied to the jetty, lay their own +big boat. + +No one about the Post could explain whence the boat had come or how it +reached the jetty. The Post servants stated that they had not noticed +it until after the departure of the lumber steamer. They had +recognized it as Thomas Angus's boat, for in that country men know +each other's boats as our country folk know their neighbours' horses. + +The lumber ship had arrived on the morning of the gale, and had +anchored in the harbour awaiting the arrival of one of the company's +officers on the mail boat. The mail boat had arrived the previous +morning, and both the mail boat and lumber ship had steamed away +shortly after the mail boat's arrival. Many lumbermen had been ashore. +If any of them had come in the boat they had mingled among the others +and had departed either on the lumber ship, which had gone up the Bay +to Grampus River, or on the mail boat to Newfoundland. + +"I'm thinkin'," said David, "whoever 'twere took Lem's silver fox and +our boat went to Newfoundland to sell the fur." + +"There's no doubtin' _that_," agreed Andy. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII + +TRAILING THE HALF-BREED + + +Eli Horn paused in the enclosed porch to shoulder his provision pack, +left there upon his arrival home earlier in the evening. He was +passing from the porch when Doctor Joe opened the door. + +"Eli," said Doctor Joe, closing the door behind him, "may I have a +word with you?" + +"Aye, sir," and Eli stopped. + +"I just wished to speak a word of warning," said Doctor Joe quietly. +"Be cautious, Eli, and do nothing you'll regret. Don't be too hasty. +We suspect Indian Jake, but none of us knows certainly that he shot +your father or took the silver fox skin." + +"There's no doubtin' he took un! Pop says he took un, and he knows. +I'm goin' to get the silver if I has to kill Injun Jake." + +Eli spoke in even, quiet tones, but with the dogged determination of +the man trained to pit his powers of endurance against Nature and the +wilderness. He gave no suggestion of boastfulness, but rather of the +man who has an ordinary duty to perform, and is bent upon doing it to +the best of his ability. + +"Don't you think you had better wait and start in the morning? It's a +nasty night to be out," Doctor Joe suggested. "'Twill be hard to make +your way to-night with the wind against you as well as the dark. If +you wait until morning it will give us time to talk things over." + +"I'll not stop till I gets the silver," Eli stubbornly declared, "and +I'll get un or kill Injun Jake." + +"See here, Eli," Doctor Joe laid his hand on Eli's arm, "your father +says he was not shot until sundown. Indian Jake was at our camp at +Flat Point within the hour after sundown. He never could have paddled +that distance against a down wind in an hour. The boys and I were four +hours coming over here from Flat Point Camp, and I know Indian Jake +could not have covered the distance in anything like an hour." + +"'Twere some trick of his! He shot un and he took the silver!" Eli +insisted. "Good-bye, sir. I've got to be goin' or he'll slip away from +me." + +"Be careful, Eli," Doctor Joe pleaded. "Don't shoot unless you're +forced to do so to protect yourself." + +"'Twill be Injun Jake'll have to be careful," returned Eli as he +strode away in the darkness, and Doctor Joe knew that Eli had it in +his heart to do murder. + +The night was pitchy black and a drizzling rain was falling, but Eli +had often travelled on as dark nights, and he was determined. He chose +a light skiff rigged with a leg-o'-mutton sail. The wind was against +him and with the sail reefed and the mast unstepped and stowed in the +bottom of the boat, he slipped a pair of oars into the locks and with +strong, even strokes pulled away, hugging the shore, that he might +take advantage of the lee of the land. + +Presently the drizzle became a downpour, but Eli, indifferent to wind +and weather, rowed tirelessly on. There was a dangerous turn to be +made around Flat Point. Here for a time he lost the friendly shelter +of the land, and continuous and tremendous effort was called for in +the rough seas; but, guided by the roar of the breakers on the shore, +he compassed it and presently fell again under the protection of the +land. + +With all his effort Eli had not progressed a quarter of the distance +toward The Jug when dawn broke. With the first light he made a safe +landing, cut a stick of standing dead timber, chopped off the butt, +and splitting it that he might get at the dry core, whittled some +shavings and lighted a fire. His provision bag was well filled. No +Labradorman travels otherwise. A kettle of hot tea sweetened with +molasses, a pan of fried fat pork and some hard bread (hardtack) +satisfied his hunger. + +The wind was rising and the rain was flying in blinding sheets, but +the shore still protected him, and the moment his simple breakfast was +eaten Eli again set forward. Presently, however, another long point +projected out into the Bay to force him into the open. He turned about +in his boat and for several minutes studied the white-capped seas +beyond the point. + +"I'll try un," he muttered, and settled again to his oars. + +But try as he would Eli could not force his light craft against the +wind, and at length he reluctantly dropped back again under the lee +of the land and went ashore. + +"There'll be no goin' on to-day," he admitted. "I'll have to make camp +whatever." + +Under the shelter of the thick spruce forest where he was fended from +the gale and drive of the rain, he cut a score of poles. One of them, +thicker and stiffer than the others, he lashed between two trees at a +height of perhaps four feet. At intervals of three or four inches he +rested the remaining poles against the one lashed to the trees, +arranging them at an angle of fifty-five degrees and aligning the +butts of the poles evenly upon the ground. These he covered with a +mass of boughs and marsh grass as a thatching. The roof thatched to +his satisfaction, he broke a quantity of boughs and with some care +prepared a bed under the lean-to. + +His shelter and bed completed, he cut and piled a quantity of dry logs +at one end of the lean-to. Then he felled two green trees and cut the +trunks into four-foot lengths. Two of these he placed directly in +front of the shelter and two feet apart, at right angles to the +shelter. Across the ends of the logs farthest from his bed he piled +three of the green sticks to serve as a backlog, and in front of +these lighted his fire. When it was blazing freely he piled upon it, +and in front of the green backlogs, several of the logs of dry wood. + +Despite the rain, the fire burned freely, and presently the interior +of Eli's lean-to was warm and comfortable. He now removed his +rain-soaked jacket and moleskin trousers and suspended them from the +ridge-pole, where they would receive the benefit of the heat and +gradually dry. + +Stripped to his underclothing, Eli crouched before the fire beneath +the front of the shelter. At intervals he turned his back and sides +and chest toward the heat and in the course of an hour succeeded in +drying his underclothing to his satisfaction. His moleskin trousers +were still damp, but he donned them, and renewing the fire he +stretched himself luxuriously for a long and much needed rest. + + + + +CHAPTER IX + +ELI SURPRISES INDIAN JAKE + + +When Eli awoke late in the afternoon the rain had ceased, but the wind +was blowing a living gale. There was a roar and boom and thunder of +breakers down on the point and echoing far away along the coast. The +wind shrieked and moaned through the forest. + +Under his shelter beneath the thick spruce trees, however, Eli was +well enough protected. He renewed the fire, which had burned to +embers, and prepared dinner. The storm that prevented him from +travelling would also hold Indian Jake a prisoner. This thought +yielded him a degree of satisfaction. + +He took no advantage of the leisure to reconsider and weigh the +circumstantial evidence against Indian Jake. He had accepted it as +conclusive proof of the half-breed's guilt and he had already +convicted him of the crime. Once Eli had arrived at a conclusion his +mind was closed to any line of reasoning that might tend to +controvert that conclusion. He prided himself upon this characteristic +as strength of will, while in reality it was a weakness. But Eli was +like many another man who has enjoyed greater opportunities in the +world than ever fell to Eli's lot. + +Once Eli had set himself upon a trail he never turned his back upon +the object he sought or weakened in his determination to attain it. +His object now was to overtake Indian Jake and have the matter out +with the half-breed once and for all. Well directed, this trait of +unyielding determination is an excellent one. It is the foundation of +success in life if the object sought is a worthy one. But in this +instance Eli's objective was not alone the recovery of the silver fox +skin, though this was the chief incentive. Coupled with it was a +desire for vengeance, prompted by hate, and vengeance is the child of +the weakest and meanest of human passions. + +When Eli had eaten he shouldered his rifle and strolled back into the +forest. Presently he flushed a covey of spruce grouse, which rose from +the ground and settled in a tree. Flinging his rifle to his shoulder, +he fired and a grouse tumbled to the ground. He fired again, and +another fell. The living birds, with a great noise of wings, now +abandoned the tree and Eli picked up the two victims. He had clipped +their heads off neatly. This he observed with satisfaction. His rifle +shot true and his aim was steady. What chance could Indian Jake have +against such skill as that? + +Eli plucked the birds immediately, while they were warm, for delay +would set the feathers, and his game being sufficient for his present +needs, he returned to his bivouac on the point. + +It was mid-afternoon the following day before the wind and rain had so +far subsided as to permit Eli to turn the point and proceed upon his +journey. Even then, with all his effort, the progress he made against +the north-west breeze was so slow that it was not until the following +forenoon that he reached The Jug. Thomas saw him coming and was on the +jetty to welcome him. + +"How be you, Eli?" Thomas greeted. "I'm wonderful glad to see you. +Come right up and have a cup o' tea." + +"How be you, Thomas? Is Injun Jake here?" + +"He were here," said Thomas, "but he only stops one day to help me +get the outfit ready and then he goes on in his canoe to hunt bear up +the Nascaupee River whilst he waits there for me to go to the Seal +Lake trails. You want to see he?" + +"Aye, and I'm goin' to see whatever!" + +While Eli had a snack to eat and a cup of tea with Thomas and Margaret +he told Thomas of Indian Jake's call upon his father, of the shooting +and of the robbery which followed. + +"Injun Jake turns back after leavin' and shoots Pop and takes the +silver," he concluded, "and I'm goin' to get the silver whatever, even +if I has to shoot Injun Jake to get un!" + +"Is you sure, now, 'twere Injun Jake does un?" asked Thomas, unwilling +to believe his friend and partner capable of such treachery. By +disposition Thomas was naturally cautious of passing judgment or of +accusing anyone of misdeed without conclusive proof. + +"There's no doubtin' that!" insisted Eli. "There was nobody else to do +un. 'Twere Injun Jake." + +A shift of wind to the southward assisted Eli on his way. Early that +evening he reached the Hudson's Bay Company's post, twenty miles west +of The Jug. Here he stopped for supper and learned from Zeke Hodge, +the Post servant, that Indian Jake had passed up Grand Lake in his +canoe two days before. Zeke expressed doubt as to Eli's finding the +half-breed at the Nascaupee River. He stated it as his opinion that if +Indian Jake were guilty of the crime, as he had no doubt, he was +planning an escape and had in all probability immediately plunged into +the interior, in which case he was already hopelessly beyond pursuit +and had fled the Bay country for good and all. Like Eli, Zeke +convicted the half-breed at once. + +The Eskimo Bay Post of the Hudson's Bay Company is the last inhabited +dwelling as the traveller enters the wilderness; he might go on and on +for a thousand miles to Hudson Bay and in the whole vast expanse of +distance no other human habitation will he find. His camps will be +pitched in the depths of forests or on desolate, naked barrens; and +always, in forests or on barrens, he will hear the rush and roar of +mighty rivers or the lapping waves of wide, far-reaching lakes. The +timber wolf will startle him from sleep in the dead of night with its +long, weird howl, rising and falling in dismal cadence, or the silence +will be broken perchance by the wild, uncanny laugh of the loon +falling upon the darkness as a token of ill omen, but in all the vast +land he will hear no human voice and he will find no human +companionship. + +Indian Jake had told Thomas that he would camp above the mouth of the +Nascaupee River, a dozen miles beyond the point where the river enters +Grand Lake. It was a journey of sixty miles or more from the Post. + +Eli set out at once. Five miles up a short wide river brought him to +Grand Lake, which here reached away before him to meet the horizon in +the west, and at the foot of the lake he camped to await day, for the +lake and the country before him were unfamiliar. + +Early in the afternoon of the third day after leaving the Post, Eli's +boat turned into the wide mouth of the Nascaupee River, and keeping a +sharp look-out, he rowed silently up the river. It was an hour before +sundown when his eye caught the white of canvas among the trees a +little way from the river. + +With much caution Eli drew his boat among the willows that lined the +bank and made it fast. Slinging his cartridge bag over his shoulder, +and with his rifle resting in the hollow of his arm, ready for instant +action, he crept forward toward Indian Jake's camp. Taking advantage +of the cover of brush, he moved with extreme caution until he had the +tent and surroundings under observation. + +There was no movement about the camp and the fire was dead. It was +plain Indian Jake had not returned for the evening. Eli crouched and +waited, as a cat crouches and waits patiently for its prey. + +Presently there was the sound of a breaking twig and a moment later +Indian Jake, with his rifle on his arm, appeared out of the forest. + +Eli, his rifle levelled at Indian Jake, rose to his feet with the +command: + +"You stand where you is; drop your gun!" + +"Why, how do, Eli? What's up?" Indian Jake greeted. "What's bringin' +you to the Nascaupee?" + +"You!" Eli's face was hard with hate. "'Tis you brings me here, you +thief! I wants the silver you takes when you shoots father, and 'tis +well for you Doctor Joe comes and saves he from dyin' or I'd been +droppin' a bullet in your heart with nary a warnin'!" + +"What you meanin' by that?" + +"Be you givin' up the silver?" + +"No!" + +[Illustration: "YOU STAND WHERE YOU IS AND DROP YOUR GUN"] + +"I say again, give me that silver fox you stole from father!" + +Indian Jake's small hawk eyes were narrowing. He made no answer, but +slipped his right hand forward toward the trigger of his rifle, though +the barrel of the rifle still rested in the hollow of his left arm. + +"Drop un!" Eli commanded, observing the movement. "Drop that gun on +the ground!" + +Indian Jake stood like a statue, eyeing Eli, but he made no movement. + +"I said drop un!" Eli's voice was cold and hard as steel. He was in +deadly earnest. "If you tries to raise un or don't drop un before I +count ten I'll put a bullet in your heart!" + +Indian Jake might have been of chiselled stone. He did not move a +muscle or wink an eye-lash but his small eyes were centred on every +motion Eli made. He still held his rifle, the barrel resting in the +hollow of his left arm, his right hand clutching the stock behind the +hammer, his finger an inch from the trigger. + +For an instant there was a death-like silence. Then Eli began to +count: + +"One--two--three--four--" + +The words fell like strokes of a hammer upon an anvil. Eli intended +to shoot. He was a man of his word. He made no threat that he was not +prepared to execute, and Indian Jake knew that Eli would shoot on the +count of ten. + +"Five--six--seven--eight--" + +Still Indian Jake made no move save that the little hawk eyes had +narrowed to slits. He did not drop his gun. From all the indications, +he did not hear Eli's count. + +"Nine--ten!" + +True to his threat, Eli's rifle rang out with the last word of his +count. + + + + +CHAPTER X + +THE END OF ELI'S HUNT + + +Indian Jake, quick as a cat, had thrown himself upon the ground with +Eli's last count. Like the loon that dives at the flash of the +hunter's gun, he was a fraction of a second quicker than Eli. Now, +lying prone, his rifle at his shoulder, he had Eli covered, and the +chamber of Eli's rifle was empty. + +"Drop that gun!" he commanded. + +Eli, believing in the first instant that Indian Jake had fallen as the +result of the shot, was taken wholly by surprise. He stood dazed and +dumb with the smoking rifle in his hand. He did not at once realize +that the half-breed had him covered. His brain did not work as rapidly +as Indian Jake's. His immediate sensation as he heard Indian Jake's +voice was one of thankfulness that, after all, there was no stain of +murder on his soul. Even yet he had no doubt Indian Jake was wounded. +He had taken deadly aim, and he could not understand how any escape +could have been possible. + +"Drop that gun!" Indian Jake repeated. "I won't count. I'll shoot." + +Eli's brain at last grasped the situation. Indian Jake was grinning +broadly, and it seemed to Eli the most malicious grin he had ever +beheld. He did not question Indian Jake's determination to shoot. It +was too evident that the half-breed, grinning like a demon, was in a +desperate mood. Eli dropped his rifle as though it were red hot and +burned his hands. + +"Step out here!" Indian Jake, rising to his feet, indicated an open +space near the tent. + +Eli did as he was told. + +"Shake the ca'tridges out of your bag on the ground!" + +Eli turned his cartridge bag over, and the cartridges which it +contained rattled to the ground. + +"Turn your pockets out!" + +A turning of the pockets disclosed no further ammunition. + +Indian Jake took Eli's rifle from the ground, emptied the magazine, +and placed the rifle in the tent. + +"Where's your boat?" he asked. + +"Just down here." + +"You go ahead. Show me." + +Eli guided Indian Jake to the boat, and while he remained on the bank +under threat of the rifle, the half-breed went through his belongings +in the boat in a further search for ammunition. Satisfied that there +was none, he replaced the things as he had found them, and was +grinning amiably when he rejoined Eli upon the bank. + +"Come 'long up to camp," he invited, quite as though Eli were a most +welcome guest. + +"Give me that silver fox!" Eli's anger had mastered his surprise. + +"I won't give un to you, but don't be mad, Eli," Indian Jake grinned +in vast enjoyment. + +"You stole un!" Eli burst out. "And you were thinkin' to do murder!" + +"Did I now?" + +"You did!" + +Indian Jake did not deign to deny or confess. Eli, at his command, +returned to camp. Indian Jake handed him the tea-kettle. + +"Fill un at the river," he directed. + +While Eli obeyed silently and sullenly, Indian Jake lighted a fire, +and when Eli returned put the kettle on. Then he brought forth his +frying-pan, filled it with sliced venison, and as he placed it over +the fire, remarked: + +"Knocked a buck down this mornin'." + +Eli said nothing. The odour of frying venison was pleasant. Eli was +hungry, and when the venison was fried and tea made, he swallowed his +pride and silently accepted Indian Jake's invitation to eat. + +When they had finished, Indian Jake cut a large joint of venison, and +presented it to Eli with his empty rifle, remarking as he did so: + +"The deer's meat's a surprise. I like to surprise folks. Taste good +goin' home. I'll keep the ca'tridges. You might hurt somebody if you +had un. You'll get quite a piece down before you camp to-night." + +"Were you takin' that silver?" asked Eli, changing his accusation to a +question. + +"Maybe I were and maybe I weren't," Indian Jake grinned. "'Twouldn't +do me any good to tell you if I had un, and if I told you I didn't +have un you wouldn't believe me. Maybe I've got un. You better be +goin'. I'd ask you to stay, Eli, and I'd like to have you, but you +don't like me and you'd better go on." + +"I don't want the deer's meat," said Eli in sullen resentment. + +"You ain't got any ca'tridges, and you can't shoot any fresh meat," +insisted Indian Jake, adding with a grin: "She'll go good. Take un +along, I got plenty. It's just a little surprise present for you bein' +so kind as not to shoot me." + +Eli, doubtless deciding that he had better take what he could get, +though a bit of venison was small compensation for a silver fox, +accepted the meat. Indian Jake accompanied him to the boat, and as he +dropped down the river he could see Indian Jake still on the bank +watching him until he turned a bend. + +Without cartridges for his rifle, Eli felt himself as helpless as a +wolf without teeth or a cat without claws. He was subdued and humbled. +He had had Indian Jake completely in his power, and through delay in +taking prompt advantage of his position, had permitted the half-breed +to capture and disarm him. + +The thought increased his anger toward Indian Jake. He had no doubt +the man had the silver fox in his possession. If there had been any +doubt in the first instance that Indian Jake was guilty, and Eli had +never admitted that there was doubt, he was now entirely satisfied of +the half-breed's guilt. Indian Jake, indeed, had quite boldly stated +that he "might" have it, and Eli accepted this as an admission that he +_did_ have it. + +"There'll be no use getting more ca'tridges and goin' back," Eli +mused. "He's had a warnin' and he'll not bide in that camp another +day. He'll flee the country." + +Then Eli's thoughts turned to his old father and mother. + +"The silver's gone, and it leaves Pop and Mother in a bad way," he +mused. "They've been fondlin' that skin half the winter. Pop's had un +out a hundred times to see how fine and black 'twere, and shook un out +to see how thick and deep the fur is. And they been countin' and +countin' on the things they'd be gettin' and needs, and can't get now +she's gone. And they been countin' on the money they'd have to lay by +for their feeble days when they needs un. They'll never get over +mournin' the loss of un. 'Twere worth a fortune, and Pop'll never +cotch another. He were hopin' and hopin' every year as long as I +remembers to cotch a silver, and none ever comes to his traps till +this un comes. And now she's gone!" + +Perhaps had the silver fox skin been Eli's own, and perhaps had his +father and mother not built so many hopes and laid so many plans upon +the little fortune it was to have brought them, Eli would never have +ventured to the verge of murder to recover it. Even now, with all his +regrets, he thanked God from the bottom of his heart that he had not +killed Indian Jake and stained his hands with blood. + +"'Twere the mercy of God sent the bullet abroad," said he reverently. +"Indian Jake's a thief and he deserves to be killed, but if I'd killed +he I'd never rested an easy hour again while I lives. But I might o' +clipped his trigger hand, whatever," he thought with regret. "I can +clip off the head of a pa'tridge every time, and I might have clipped +his hand, and got the skin and took he back for Doctor Joe to fix up." + +Three days later Eli pulled his boat wearily into The Jug. The boys +had returned, and with Thomas they met him on the jetty. + +"Did you find Injun Jake?" Thomas asked anxiously. + +"Aye," said Eli, "he were there." + +Eli volunteered no further details for a moment. Then he added: + +"I didn't kill he, thank the Lord, but he's got the silver. He said he +had un, and he took my ca'tridges away from me." + +"Said he had un? Now, that's strange--wonderful strange. Come in, Eli, +supper's ready," Thomas invited, manifestly relieved that Eli had not +succeeded in accomplishing his rash purpose. "You'll bide the night +with us, and while you eats tell us about un, and the lads'll tell +what were happenin' to they." + +Margaret was setting the table. She greeted Eli cordially, and +arranged a plate for him while he washed at the basin behind the +stove. + +"Come," invited Thomas, "set in. We've got a wonderful treat." + +"What be that, now?" asked Eli as Margaret placed a dish of steaming, +mealy boiled potatoes upon the table. + +"Potaters," Thomas announced grandly. "Doctor Joe brings un on the +mail boat from where he's been, and onions too. Margaret, peel some +onions and set un on for Eli. They's fine just as they is without +cookin'." + +The onions came, and when thanks had been offered Eli tasted his +first potato. + +"They is fine, now! Wonderful fine eatin'," he declared. + +"Try an onion, now. They's fine, too," Thomas urged. + +Eli took an onion. + +"She has a strange smell," he observed before biting into it. + +Eli took a liberal mouthful of the onion. He began to chew it. A +strained look spread over his face. Tears filled his eyes. But Eli was +brave, and he never flinched. + +"'Tis fine, I like un wonderful fine," Eli volunteered presently, +adding, "if she didn't burn so bad." + +"Take just a bit at a time," advised Thomas, laughing heartily, "and +eat un with bread or potaters and you won't notice the burn of un." + +Presently Eli told of his experiences with Indian Jake, and Andy told +of the tracks he had seen under the window, and all of the boys told +of what had happened on the island, the theft of the boat, the tracks +of the nailed boots and the discovery of the boat at Fort Pelican. + +Then Eli made an announcement that again laid the burden of suspicion +more strongly than ever upon Indian Jake. + +"I were workin' at the lumber camps a week this summer helpin' they +out," said Eli. "Whilst I were there Indian Jake comes and trades a +pair of skin boots with one of the lumber men for a pair of their +boots, the kind with nails in un. He the same as says he has the fur, +and 'twere he took un." + +"Injun Jake wears skin boots when he come to our camp on Flat P'int," +said David. + +"Aye, 'tis likely," admitted Eli. "He'd be wearin' skin boots in the +canoe, whatever. The nailed boots would be hard on the canoe. He uses +the nailed boots trampin' about, but he'd change un when he travels in +his canoe." + +The whole question was canvassed pro and con, and due consideration +given to the length of time that Indian Jake must have consumed in +passing from Horn's Bight to Flat Point. This was alone sufficient in +the mind of Thomas and the boys to lift all suspicion from Indian +Jake, but Eli still held stubbornly to the opposite view. + +Two days later, and on the eve of Thomas's departure for the trails, +Doctor Joe returned. Lem had so far recovered that a further stay at +Horn's Bight was unnecessary. + +Thomas and Doctor Joe quietly discussed the shooting incident. Lem, it +appeared, had later decided that he may have been shot much earlier in +the afternoon than sundown. What had occurred had fallen into the hazy +uncertainty of a dream. + +"What kind of a rifle does Indian Jake use?" asked Doctor Joe. + +"A thirty-eight fifty-five," said Thomas. + +Doctor Joe drew from his pocket the bullet extracted from Lem's wound. +Thomas examined it critically. + +"There's no doubtin' 'tis a thirty-eight fifty-five," he admitted. +"'Tis true Injun Jake gets a pair of nailed boots like the lumber folk +wears. But Injun Jake'll tell me whether 'twere he shot Lem. Injun +Jake'll be fair about un with me whatever. 'Tis hard for me to believe +he did un. If he did, he'll be gone from the Nascaupee when I gets +there. If he didn't, I'll find he waitin'!" + +"Let us hope he'll be there, and let us hope he's innocent," said +Doctor Joe. + +Some day and in some way every sin is punished and every criminal is +discovered. It is an immutable law of God that he who does wrong must +atone for the wrong. We do not always know how the punishment is +brought about, but the guilty one knows. And so with the shooting and +robbery of Lem Horn. Many months were to pass before the mystery was +to be solved, and then the revelation was to come in a startling +manner in the course of an adventure amid the deep snows of winter. + +Thomas sailed away the following morning. They watched his boat pass +down through The Jug and out into the Bay, and then the silence of the +wilderness closed upon him, and no word came as to whether or no +Indian Jake met him at the Nascaupee River camp. + + + + +CHAPTER XI + +THE LETTER IN THE CAIRN + + +In Labrador September is the pleasantest month of the year. It is a +period of calm when fogs and mists and cold dreary rains, so frequent +during July and the early half of August, are past, and Nature holds +her breath before launching upon the world the bitter blasts and +blizzards and awful cold of a sub-arctic winter. There are days and +days together when the azure of the sky remains unmarred by clouds, +and the sun shines uninterruptedly. The air, brilliantly transparent, +carries a twang of frost. Evening is bathed in an effulgence of +colour. The sky flames in startling reds and yellows blending into +opals and turquoise, with the shadowy hills lying in a purple haze in +the west. + +Then comes night and the aurora. Wavering fingers of light steal up +from the northern horizon. Higher and higher they climb until they +have reached and crossed the zenith. From the north they spread to the +east and to the west until the whole sky is aflame with shimmering +fire of marvellous changing colours varying from darkest purple to +dazzling white. + +The dark green of the spruce and balsam forests is splotched with +golden yellow where the magic touch of the frost king has laid his +fingers and worked a miracle upon groves of tamaracks. The leaves of +the aspen and white birch have fallen, and the flowers have faded. + +Spruce grouse chickens, full grown now, rise in coveys with much noise +of wing, and perch in trees looking down unafraid upon any who intrude +upon their forest home. Ptarmigans, still in their coat of mottled +brown and white, gather in flocks upon the naked hills to feed, where +upland cranberries cover the ground in red masses; or on the edge of +marshes where bake apple berries have changed from brilliant red to +delicate salmon pink and offer a sweet and wholesome feast. + +The honk and quack of wild geese and ducks, southward bound in great +flocks, disturbs the silence of every inlet and cove and bight, where +the wild fowl pause for a time to rest and feed upon the grasses. + +After Thomas's departure Doctor Joe and the boys tidied and snugged +things up for the winter, and many a fine hunt they had, mornings and +evenings, in the edge of a near-by marsh through which a brook coursed +to join the sea. Hunting geese and ducks was indeed a duty, for they +must needs depend upon the hunt for no small share of their living. It +was a duty they enjoyed, however. Skill and a steady hand and a quick +eye are necessary to success, and they never failed to return with a +full bag. + +The weather was now cold enough to keep the birds sweet and fresh, and +before September closed a full two score of fine fat geese were +hanging in the enclosed lean-to shed with a promise of many good +dinners in the future. + +Between the hunting and the work about home there was no time to be +dawdled vainly away. When there was nothing more pressing the +wood-pile always stood suggestively near the door inviting attention, +and it was necessary to saw and split a vast deal of wood to keep the +big box stove supplied, for it had a great maw and would develop a +marvellous appetite when the weather grew cold. + +No extended travelling was possible for Doctor Joe on his errands of +mercy until the sea should freeze and dogs and sledge could be called +into service. But during the fine September weather he and the boys +made two short trips up the Bay, where there was ailing in some of the +families. + +In the course of these excursions they took occasion to visit +Let-in-Cove, which lay just outside Grampus River, where the new +lumber camps were situated, and also Snug Cove and Tuggle Bight, a +little farther on. At Let-in-Cove Peter and Lige Sparks, at Snug Cove +Obadiah Button and Micah Dunk, and at Tuggle Bight Seth Muggs were +enlisted in the scout troop, and a handbook left at each place. These, +indeed, with the three Anguses, were the only boys of scout age within +a radius of fifty miles of The Jug. + +There was great excitement among the lads, and Doctor Joe proudly +declared that there would be no finer or more efficient troop of +scouts in all the world than his little troop of eight when they had +become familiar with their duties. + +A new field and a broader vision of life was to open to these Labrador +lads, whose life was of necessity circumscribed. They had never been +given the opportunity to play as boys play in more favoured lands. +They had never known the joys of football or cricket or the hundred +other fine, health-giving games that are a part of the life of every +English or Canadian boy. They had never seen a circus or a moving +picture and they had never been in a schoolroom in their lives. + +This opportunity to play and study as other boys play and study in +other lands was the thing, perhaps, they longed for above all else. +Doctor Joe had inspired them with ambition. They hungered to learn and +here was the Handbook with many things in it to study, and through +Doctor Joe and the book they were to learn the joy of play. + +The new recruits to the troop, however, as well as the Angus boys, had +been close students of their native wilderness. Their eyes were sharp +and their ears were quick. They knew every tree and flower and plant +that grew about them. They knew the birds and their calls and songs. +They knew every animal, its cry and its habits of life. They knew the +fish of the sea and lake and stream. All this was a part of their +training for their future profession of hunters and fishermen. + +As hunters they had not learned to look upon the wild things of the +woods as friends and associates. To them the animals were only beasts +whose valuable pelts could be traded at the Post for necessaries of +life or whose flesh was good to eat. Success in life depended upon +man's ability to outwit and slay birds or animals, and the lads held +for them none of the human sympathy that would have added so much to +their own enjoyment. + +Now they were to have a new view of life. Doctor Joe was to open to +them a wider, happier vista. It was not in the least to breed in them +discontent with their circumscribed life, but rather to open to their +consciousness the opportunities that lay within their reach, and to +make their life richer and broader and vastly more worth while. + +Doctor Joe explained to the five recruits the Tenderfoot Scout +requirements, much as he had explained them to David and Andy and +Jamie. Wilderness dwellers who must take in and fix in the mind at a +glance every unusual tree or stump or stone if they would find their +trail, have a peculiar and remarkable gift of memory born of long +practice and the fact that they must perforce depend upon their +ability to retain the things they see and hear. The lads, therefore, +required no repetition, and learned their lessons with ease. + +Though they had never attended school they could all read, stumbling, +to be sure, over the big words, but nevertheless grasping the meaning. +Doctor Joe, during his years in the Bay, had taught not only the Angus +boys but many of the other young people to read. Doctor Joe now marked +the pages that they were to study, and before he and the Angus boys +turned back across the Bay to The Jug it was agreed that the new troop +should hold a week's camp to study and practise together. Hollow Cove, +some five miles from The Jug, was to be the camping ground, and the +first week in October was decided upon as the time. + +"We'll start to camp on Monday marnin' of that week," suggested David. +"Come over to The Jug on Sunday. 'Twill be fine to have us all go to +camp together." + +"Aye," agreed Micah, "'twill be now, and we'll come, and have a fine +time." + +"And we'll all study about the scout things whilst we're in camp," +piped up Jamie enthusiastically. + +"That we will now," David assured. + +"Lige, you and Peter bring a tent and stove, and all you need for +setting up camp," Doctor Joe directed. "Can you bring one, too, Seth?" + +"Aye," said Seth, "I'll bring un, but we have no tent stove. Pop took +un to the huntin'." + +"Obadiah or Micah may bring a stove. You have one, haven't you?" +Doctor Joe asked. + +"Aye," said Obadiah, "I has one. I'll bring un along." + +"You three fix up an outfit amongst you. There'll be three in a tent," +Doctor Joe explained. "Andy can go in with Peter and Lige, and I'll +tent with Davy and Jamie." + +There was little else than the proposed camping expedition talked +about on the return to The Jug, and in the days that followed David, +Andy and Jamie devoted every spare moment to the study of first aid +and signalling. Doctor Joe, with no end of patience, drilled them so +thoroughly in first aid that they were soon really expert in applying +bandages. He even instructed them in improvising splints and reducing +fractures. In this secluded land, where for three hundred miles up and +down the coast there was no other surgeon than Doctor Joe, it was not +unlikely that some day they would be called upon to set a leg or an +arm. + +Doctor Joe was as ignorant, however, of the art of signalling as were +the lads, and he must needs take it up from the very beginning and +study with them. It was decided that they should learn both the +semaphore and Morse codes, and Doctor Joe insisted that neither he nor +the lads should consider the Second Class test satisfactorily passed +until they had not only learned the codes but could send and receive +messages at the rate of speed designated in the handbook as required +for the First Class test. + +"It wouldn't be fair to the scouts in the big cities," he declared. +"They have to learn a great many things that we already know how to +do, like building fires, using the axe and knife, and tracking. Those +are things we've been doing all our lives and won't have to practise. +We must make it just as hard for ourselves to become Second Class +Scouts as it is for the city lads. So we'll make the signalling test +that much more difficult." + +"I'm thinkin' that's fine now," enthused David, "and when we learn un +we'll know that much more." + +"That's the idea!" said Doctor Joe. "And we'll not only learn the +sixteen principal points of the compass, but we'll learn to box the +compass to the quarter point as navigators do." + +"I can box un now," grinned David. + +"So can I box un!" Andy exclaimed. "Dad told me how, same as he told +Davy." + +"And I can learn to box un easy," promised Jamie. + +Margaret joined them one fine day in the forest behind the cabin when +they took their Second Class cooking test, and a jolly day they made +of it. It was easy enough to roast a spruce grouse on the end of a +stick. Even Jamie had done that many times. But Doctor Joe was called +upon to solve the problem of cooking potatoes without cooking +utensils, and he did it so satisfactorily that the lads practised it +every day afterward for a week. + +He resorted to a simple and ordinary method. He dug a narrow trench +about six inches deep. Upon this he built a fire, which he permitted +to burn until there was a good accumulation of ashes. Then he pushed +the fire back and raked the ashes out of the trench. The potatoes +were now placed in a row at the bottom of the trench and covered with +a good layer of hot ashes. The fire was now drawn back over the ashes +that covered the potatoes and permitted to burn briskly. + +At the end of an hour he brushed the fire back at one end sufficiently +to allow a long slender splinter to be pushed down through the ashes +and through a potato. The splinter did not penetrate the potato easily +and the fire was drawn in again to burn for another quarter of an +hour. Then it was raked out and the potatoes removed, to find that, +while the skins were not in the least burned or even scorched, the +potatoes were done to a turn. + +"You couldn't have baked them better in your oven, Margaret," laughed +Doctor Joe. + +"I never could have baked un half as well," admitted Margaret, adding, +"'tis a wonderful way of cookin'." + +"Doctor Joe's fine cookin' everything," declared Andy. "I always likes +his cookin' wonderful well." + +"Thank you, Andy. That's high praise," acknowledged Doctor Joe, "but I +could learn a great deal about cooking from Margaret." + +"I just does plain cookin'," Margaret deprecated, but flushed with +pleasure at the compliment. + +On the last day of September, which was a Friday, David and Doctor Joe +crossed over to the Hudson's Bay Post and took Margaret with them for +a visit to Kate Huddy, the Post servant's daughter, where she was to +remain while the Scouts were enjoying their camp at Hollow Cove. + +David and Doctor Joe returned to The Jug on Saturday, and when the +other members of the troop arrived in a boat on Sunday, had their own +tent equipment and food packed and ready for the little expedition on +Monday morning. + +It was a jolly meeting. The evening was cold, and when supper was +eaten they gathered around the big box stove which crackled +cheerfully, and Doctor Joe announced that as this was the first +meeting of the troop they must organize and elect leaders, just as +troops were organized everywhere else in the world. + +When he had thoroughly explained the necessary steps he read to them a +brief constitution and by-laws which he had previously prepared. These +he had them adopt in due form, and then asked some one to nominate a +patrol leader. + +Every one, with one accord, nominated David, and he was duly, +solemnly, and unanimously elected. + +"Now," suggested Doctor Joe, "we must have an assistant patrol leader. +Who shall it be?" + +"Andy," said Seth Muggs. "Andy's been to the trails and he knows more +about un than anybody exceptin' Davy." + +"'Twouldn't be fair," objected Andy. "Davy's patrol leader. 'Tis but +right we put in one of you that comes from across the Bay. I'm saying +Peter Sparks, now." + +Doctor Joe agreed with Andy, and Peter Sparks was declared elected. +Then Seth nominated Andy for scribe. + +"Because," Seth explained, "Andy'll be right handy to Doctor Joe all +the time and Doctor Joe can help he to do the writin', and he needs +help." + +When the election was completed Doctor Joe explained the duties of the +officers and the necessity of obedience to them in the performance of +scout duties. + +"Our troop is a team," said Doctor Joe. + +"We must pull together. We are like a team of dogs hauling a komatik. +If the dogs all follow the leader and pull together the best that ever +they can they get somewhere. If they don't follow the leader, and one +pulls in one direction and another pulls in a different direction and +some don't pull at all, they never get anywhere and aren't of much +use. Our troop is going to be the best we can make it, by all pulling +together and doing the very best we know how. + +"We must always be ready to help other people at all times, as we +promise to do in our oath. If we live up to that we'll do a great deal +of good, first and last, up and down the Bay. If some one's life is in +danger and we can help them even at the risk of our own we must help +them. Everybody wants to be happy. There's nothing that will make us +so happy as to do some fine thing every day that will make someone +else happy. + +"We must train our brains and our hands so that we shall always be +prepared to do the right thing and do it quickly. We must learn to +keep our temper and not get angry. Let us take the hard knocks that +come to us with a smile." + +The remainder of the evening was spent in playing some rollicking +games that the lads had never heard of before, and which Doctor Joe +taught them. There was the one-legged chicken fight, and one or two +others, as well as hand wrestling, though that they had seen the +Indians play and had practised themselves. They all declared that they +had never in their lives had so much fun. + +An early start the following morning brought them to Hollow Cove at +ten o'clock. Hollow Cove was a fine natural harbour. A brook poured +down through a gulch to empty into the Bay, and near its mouth was an +excellent landing-place. Not far from the brook, and a hundred feet +back from the shore, they pitched their tents in the shelter of the +spruce forest where the camp would be well protected from winds and +storms. + +While the others set up the sheet-iron stoves in the three tents and +broke spruce boughs and laid the bough beds, David, Micah, and Lige +volunteered to cut wood. + +"There's some fine dry wood just to the east'ard and close to shore," +suggested David, as they picked up their axes. "It's right handy." + +A dozen yards from the camp David suddenly stopped and exclaimed: + +"What's that now?" + +On a great sloping rock close to the shore, but hidden by a jutting +point from the place where they had landed, was a recently made cairn +of boulders capped by a large flat stone. + +"Somebody's been here!" said David as they hurried forward to examine +the cairn. + +"'Tis wonderful strange to pile stones that way," said Micah. "'Tis +new made, too." + +"Maybe it's a cache," suggested Lige, "but it's a rare small un. Look +and see. 'Tis a strange place for a cache!" + +David lifted the flat stone from the top and discovered beneath it a +small tin can. In the can was a folded paper. He removed the paper and +unfolding it discovered a message written in a cramped, scrawling +hand. + +"Read un, Davy! Read un out loud! You reads writin' good!" said Lige, +and David read: + + "i cum and stayed 2 hour, and wood not stay no longer for i + hed to go and did not see you comin any were. Then i gos to + the rock were We Was the day We was hunting Wen We come here + ferst time. Then i done this way. i Pases 20 Pases up To a + Hackmatack Tree. it was north. then i Pases 40 Pases west + To a round rock, Then i Pases 60 Pases south To a wite berch + i use cumpus. Then i climes a spruce Tree and hangs it and + it is out of site in the Branches. if You plays me Crookid + look out, i wont Stand for no Crooked work and You know what + i will do to anybody plays me Crooked. You no Were to put my + haf of the Swag. So i can get it Wen i go to get it." + +There was no signature. + +"That's a strange un--wonderful strange," said David. + +"Stranger'n anything I ever sees," declared Lige. + +"Whatever is un all about?" asked Micah. + +"That's the strangeness of un," said Lige. + +"Let's show un to Doctor Joe," suggested David. + +But Doctor Joe, when they broke in upon him a moment later, was as +mystified as they. + +"It looks," said he, "as though something had been cached and here are +the directions for finding the cache. There's a threat in the letter, +too, and that looks bad. It's a mystery, lads, we'll try to search +out. It doesn't look right. Perhaps it's the clue to some crime." + +"How can we search un out?" asked David excitedly. "We're not knowin' +the rock, and there's plenty of rocks hereabouts." + +"That's true," admitted Doctor Joe. "Go and put the paper back as you +found it, and we'll see what we can make out of it later." + +The whole camp was excited and every one followed David back to the +cairn when he returned to restore the letter to its place in the can. + +"'Tis something somebody's tryin' to hide," suggested Peter. + +"There's no doubtin' that," said David. "I'm thinkin' 'tis not right +whatever 'tis." + +"We'll get camp in shape and have our dinner and then try to solve the +mystery," said Doctor Joe. "It is a real mystery, for no one would +make an ordinary cache in this way, and if it was an honest matter +there would be no threat." + + + + +CHAPTER XII + +THE HIDDEN CACHE + + +When camp was made snug and dinner disposed of, Doctor Joe followed +the boys down to the cairn. A careful examination was made of the soil +surrounding the rock upon which the cairn was built, and in loose +gravel close to the shore were found the imprints of feet. It was +evident, however, that rain had fallen since the tracks were made, for +they were so nearly washed away that there could be no certainty +whether they were made by moccasins or nailed boots. + +"'Twere a week ago they were here whatever," observed David, rising +upon his feet after a close scrutiny upon hands and knees. "I'm +thinkin' we'll see no sign of un now to help us trail un to the rock +the writin' tells about." + +"The ground was hard froze a week ago just as 'tis now," said Lige. +"They'd be leavin' no tracks on froze ground." + +"They makes the tracks that shows here whether the ground were froze +or not," observed Seth. + +"The gravel were loose and dry so 'tweren't froze," explained Lige, +"but away from the dry gravel 'twere all froze, and they'd make no +tracks to show. Leastways that's how I thinks about un." + +"That's good logic," said Doctor Joe. "I'm afraid we'll have to find +the rock without the assistance of any tracks to guide us. There will +surely be other signs, however, and we'll look for them while we look +for the rock." + +"Suppose now we scatters and looks up along the brook and along the +ridge for the rock the pacin' were done from," suggested Andy. "'Tis +like to be a different lookin' rock from most of un around here or +they wouldn't have picked un." + +"And 'tis like to be a big un too," volunteered Micah. "They'd be +pickin' no little rock for that, whatever. I'm thinkin' 'twill be easy +to know un if we sees un." + +"Yes," agreed Doctor Joe, "the rock is probably larger or in some +other way noticeably different from the others. It may be along the +brook, or it may not. They were hunting. It may be a rock where they +camped, or where they agreed to meet after their hunt, and probably +where they boiled their kettle." + +"They weren't Bay folk, whatever," asserted David. "The writin' ain't +like any of the Bay folkses writin'. None of un here could write so +fine." + +"None of the Bay folk would be hidin' things that way either," said +Andy. "If 'twere anything small enough to hide in a tree they'd been +takin' un with un and not leavin' un behind. If 'twere too big to +carry, they'd just left un in a cache and come back for un when they +gets ready and not do any writin' about un." + +"I think you are right, Andy," agreed Doctor Joe. "For the reasons you +give and for still other reasons I feel very certain strangers to the +Bay left the cache." + +"What were they meanin' by 'swag,' Doctor Joe?" asked Andy. "I never +hears that word before. 'Tis a wonderful strange word." + +"It usually means," explained Doctor Joe, "something that has been +stolen. The use of that word is one of the reasons that leads me to +conclude that it was not written by any of our people of the Bay. I am +quite sure none of them knows what the word means, and like you I +doubt if any of them ever heard it. There seems no doubt, indeed, that +strangers to these parts wrote it, and as there are no other strangers +in the Bay than the lumbermen, we are safe in concluding that the +cairn was built and the note written by someone from the lumber camp +at Grampus River." + +"'Swag' is a wonderful strange soundin' word, now," said David. "I +never hears un before." + +"I'm thinkin' I knows what 'tis they hid now!" exclaimed Andy +suddenly. "'Tis _Lem Horn's silver_! 'Tis the men hid un that shot Lem +and stole the silver! 'Tweren't Indian Jake shot Lem at all! 'Twere +men from the lumber camp! What they calls 'swag' is Lem's silver!" + +"That's what 'tis, now! 'Tis sure Lem Horn's silver!" David exploded +excitedly. "I never would have thought of un bein' that! Andy's +wonderful spry thinkin' things out, and he's mostly always right, +too!" + +"And Indian Jake never stole un! He never stole un!" Jamie burst out +joyfully. "I were knowin' all the time he wouldn't steal un! Indian +Jake wouldn't go shootin' folk and stealin' from un!" + +"It may be," said Doctor Joe. "At any rate it seems extremely probable +the 'swag' as they call it is stolen property that has been hidden. +That word and the threat together with the other circumstances make it +quite certain, indeed, that whatever it is they refer to was stolen. +That's a safe conclusion to begin with. We have decided that we may be +quite sure, also, that the men that hid the cache so carefully were +none of our own Bay people, but men from the lumber camp. We have +heard of nothing else than Lem Horn's silver fox having been stolen in +the Bay. We have some ground, therefore, to suppose that the 'swag' is +Lem Horn's silver fox. It will be a fine piece of work to search out +the cache, and if it proves to contain Lem's silver fox, recover it +for him. We will be doing a good turn to Lem and at the same time will +lift suspicion from Indian Jake. If we find the cache and there is +nothing in it that should not be there, we will not interfere with it. +Now how shall we go about it to trace it? Let's hear what you chaps +think is the best plan." + +"We'll separate and look for the rock they tells about," suggested +David. "There's like to be some signs so we'll know un when we sees +un. If we finds the rock 'twill not be hard to pace off the way they +says in the paper." + +"And we'll be lookin' out for other signs," added Peter. "'Tis likely +they've been cuttin' wood or breakin' twigs or makin' a fire." + +"The brook ain't froze, and I'm thinkin' now they been walkin' there +and leavin' tracks, if they were going' for water, and 'tis likely +they were gettin' water to boil the kettle," reasoned Seth. + +"Suppose," suggested Doctor Joe, "two of you follow up the brook, one +on each side, and the rest of us will spread out on each side of the +two following the brook, and look for the rock and other signs that +will guide us." + +"We better make a writin' for each of us just like the writin' in the +can with what it says about how to find the cache if we finds the +rock," suggested Andy. "I for one'll never be rememberin' all of un +without a writin' to look at whatever." + +"That's true, Andy," agreed Doctor Joe, "and none of us would." + +"Andy always thinks of things like that!" exclaimed David admiringly. + +"Get the paper from the can and bring it up to camp," directed Doctor +Joe. "We'll make several copies of the directions. I have paper and +pencil there in the tent." + +David lifted the flat stone from the top of the cairn, and removing +the paper he and the others followed Doctor Joe to his tent, where +Doctor Joe made nine copies of the explicit directions, one for +himself and one for each of the lads. + +"You had better return this now to the can," said Doctor Joe, handing +the paper back to David, "for if it should prove after all that we +have been mistaken, and that the cache does not contain Lem's silver +fox or other stolen property, it would be wrong, and we would not +wish, to interfere with the man for whom this paper was left here +finding the cache." + +"'Twould be fair wicked to do that," agreed David. "I'll put un back." + +When the paper had again been returned to its hiding-place Doctor Joe +detailed the boys to their different positions. David and Peter were +to follow the brook, David on the left side and Peter on the right +side as they ascended. Seth Muggs, Obadiah Button, Andy and Jamie were +to spread out at intervals on the left from David, and Lige Sparks, +Micah Dunk and Doctor Joe on the right side of the brook from Peter. +All were to ascend through the woods at the same time, keeping a sharp +look-out to right and to left for any unusual rock or other possible +signs that might lead to a clue. + +"Now we had better keep close enough together to keep in sight the man +nearest us on the side toward the brook," directed Doctor Joe. "If we +spread farther apart than that we shall be too far apart to see any +rock that may be between us." + +"Aye, and we'll keep lookin' both ways," said Andy. "That way we can't +miss un." + +"It's now," Doctor Joe consulted his watch, "one-thirty o'clock. It's +cloudy and it will be dark by half-past four. I'll call to Micah at +half-past three and he will pass the word along to the next man and he +to the next and so on until all have been notified. Then we will +immediately come together and return to camp, that is, of course, if +we have not already found the cache. If before that time anyone finds +what he thinks may be the rock he will pass the word to his neighbour, +and we'll close in and make our search together. If it begins to snow, +and the snow is too thick for us to see our next neighbour, we'll +close in, for in that case we would miss the rock anyway. Do you all +understand?" + +Every one understood, as the chorus of "Yes, sir," testified. + +"Jamie," said Doctor Joe, "you're the youngest one, and you haven't +had much experience tramping through the woods. If you get tired, or +find it hard, just come over to the brook and follow it down to camp. +If you get there ahead of us you might start a fire in our tent stove +and put the kettle over." + +"I've got plenty o' grit, sir," Jamie boasted. "I can stand un." + +"I think you can," agreed Doctor Joe, "but your legs are short. If you +get tired don't keep going. Perhaps you had better take the outside +place, and if you do get tired and fall out it won't break the line." + +Full of eagerness and excitement, the boys took their positions. On +the left bank of the brook was David, next him to the left Obadiah +Button, then Andy, beyond him Seth Muggs, and finally Jamie. This +placed Jamie on the extreme left flank, in accordance with Doctor +Joe's suggestion, and the farthest from David and the brook. + +On the right bank of the brook were Peter Sparks, Doctor Joe, Lige +Sparks and Micah Dunk in the order named, with Micah on the extreme +right flank. + +It was a great and thrilling adventure for all the boys, but +particularly for Jamie. There was a mystery to be solved, and in the +attempt to solve it there was not merely curiosity but a worthy object +in view. If the cache proved to contain Lem Horn's silver fox skin Lem +and his whole family would be made happy. + +Jamie, in his unwavering loyalty, was anxious to lift from Indian Jake +all suspicion of the crime. At present every one in the Bay, save only +the Angus boys, believed Indian Jake guilty of it. Even Doctor Joe was +not satisfied of his innocence, and, indeed, everything pointed to +Indian Jake's guilt. Doctor Joe believed that the Angus boys were +prejudiced in their loyalty to Indian Jake because of the fact that he +had done them kindnesses. + +Jamie was sure that if they found this cache there would be proof that +he and David and Andy were right and everybody else wrong. Not only +did this feature of the adventure appeal to him, but also the fact +that he was for the first time in his life trailing in the wilderness +and taking part in an undertaking that seemed to him one of vast +importance. + +Jamie had never slept in a tent. His only acquaintance with the great +wilderness had been confined to the woods surrounding The Jug, and +always when in company with David or Andy or his father or Doctor Joe. +Now he was determined to do as well as any of them, and, no matter how +tired he became, to stick to the trail until Doctor Joe gave the +signal to return to camp. + +As they ascended the slope Jamie kept a sharp look-out to right and +left. Now and again Seth Muggs on his right was hidden by a clump of +thick spruce trees or would disappear behind a wooded rise, presently +to appear again through the trees. + +Jamie was happy. He was keeping pace with the others without the least +difficulty. Doctor Joe had hinted that his short legs might not permit +him to do this. He would prove that he was as able as Seth Muggs or +any of them! + +Nothing happened for nearly an hour, and Jamie was beginning to think +that the search was to end in disappointment, when suddenly his heart +gave a leap of joy. Far to the left and just visible through the trees +rose the outlines of a great grey rock. + +"That's the rock!" exclaimed Jamie. "That's sure he! I'll look at un +for signs, and then if there's any signs to be seen about un I'll call +Seth!" + +Jamie ran through the trees and brush to the rock, which proved, +indeed, to be a landmark. It stood alone, and was twice as high as +Jamie's head. + +Here he was treated to another thrill. On the west side of the rock +was the charred wood of a recent camp fire. A tent had been pitched +near at hand, as was evidenced by the still unwithered boughs that had +formed a bed, and discarded tent pegs, and there were many axe +cuttings. + +"'Twere white men and not Injuns that camped here," reasoned Jamie. +"All the Injun fires I ever heard tell about were made smaller than +this un. And these folk were pilin' up stones on the side. No Injuns +or Bay folk does that, whatever!" + +Jamie continued to investigate. + +"'Twere not Bay folk did the axe cuttin' either," he decided. "All the +Bay folk and Injuns uses small axes when they travels, and this +cuttin' were done with big uns!" + +Looking about the rock he found other evidences that the campers had +been strangers to the country. There was a piece of a Halifax +newspaper, an empty bottle, and a small tin can containing matches. +The box of matches he put into his pocket. They had been lost or +overlooked, and no hunter of the Bay or Indian would ever have been +guilty of such carelessness. Of this Jamie had no question. + +"'Tis sure the rock the writin' tells about," he commented. + +Jamie looked a little farther, and then suddenly realizing that he +should not wait too long before calling, shouted lustily: + +"Seth, I finds un! Seth! Seth! I finds the rock!" + +He waited a moment for Seth's answering call, but there was no +response. A much longer time had elapsed during Jamie's examination of +the rock and the surroundings than he realized, and in the meantime +Seth and the others had passed on, and Seth was now in a deeply +wooded gully where Jamie's shouts failed to reach him. + +"Seth! Seth! I finds un! I finds the place!" he shouted again, but +still there was no response from Seth. + +"I'm thinkin' now Seth has gone too far to hear," said Jamie to +himself. "'Twould be fine to find Lem's silver all alone and take un +back to camp. I'll just do what the writin' says. I'll pace up the +places. I can do un all by myself, and 'twill be a fine surprise to un +all to take the silver back to camp." + +Jamie had no doubt that the mysterious cache contained the stolen fox +pelt. No thought of disappointment in this or of danger to himself +entered his head. His whole mind was centred upon one point. He would +be the hero of the Bay if, quite alone, he succeeded in recovering +Lem's property and at the same time in clearing Indian Jake of +suspicion. + +Without further delay he drew from his pocket the carefully folded +copy of directions that Doctor Joe had given him and sat down to study +it. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII + +SURPRISED AND CAPTURED + + +"Twenty paces to a hackmatack tree, north," read Jamie. He drew from +his pocket the little compass Doctor Joe had given him, and took the +direction. + +"That's the way she goes, the way the needle points," he said to +himself. "I'll pace un off. North is the way she goes first." + +But an obstacle presented itself. The northern face of the rock was +irregular, and from end to end fully thirty feet in length. From what +point of the rock was the northerly line to begin? Where should he +begin to pace? Finally he selected a middle point as the most +probable. + +"'Twill be from here," he decided. "They'd never be startin' the line +from anywheres but the middle." + +Holding the compass in his hand that he might make no mistake, and +trembling with the excitement of one about to make a great discovery, +he paced to the northward, stretching his short legs to the longest +possible stride, until he counted twenty paces. It brought him not to +a hackmatack tree, but to the middle of several spruce trees. He +returned to the rock and tried again. This time he was led to a tangle +of brush to the left of the spruce trees into which his former effort +had taken him. He was vastly puzzled. + +"'Tis something I does wrong," he mused. "Doctor Joe were sayin' the +compass points right, and she is right. 'Tis wonderful strange +though." + +He experimented again and discovered that if he did not hold the +compass perfectly level the needle did not swing properly. In his +excitement he had doubtless tipped the compass, and with the needle +thus bound he had been led astray. + +He climbed to the top of the rock, and placing his compass in a level +position, permitted the needle to swing to a stationary position. He +extracted a match from the tin box in his pocket and laid it upon the +compass dial exactly parallel with the needle. Lying on his face, he +squinted his eye along the match to a distant tree. Rising, he +observed the tree that he might make no mistake, and returning to the +face of the rock strode twenty of his best paces in the direction of +the tree. Again he was disappointed. There was no hackmatack tree at +the end of his line. + +"Maybe he was a big man that does the pacin' and takes longer paces," +he said to himself. "I'll go a bit farther." + +He looked directly ahead, but saw no hackmatack within a reasonable +extension of his twenty paces to account for the longer strides the +original pacer may have taken. Much discouraged, he was about to +return again to the rock when suddenly his eye fell upon a small and +scarcely noticeable hackmatack six paces to the right of his north +line and a little beyond him. + +"That must be he, now!" he exclaimed. "'Tis the only hackmatack I sees +hereabouts. 'Tis _sure_ he! I'll pace un back to the rock! If the +tree's nuth'ard from the rock, the rock'll be south'ard from the tree. +I'll try pacin' that way." + +With his compass Jamie sighted from the tree to the rock, and to his +satisfaction the rock, lying due south, fell within his line of +sight, but at the extreme easterly end of its northerly face instead +of at the centre, the point from which he had run his original line. +He now paced the distance, which proved to be a little farther than +twenty of Jamie's longest strides, which he accounted for again by +reasoning that a man could take longer steps than he could stretch +with his short legs. + +Then for the first time Jamie observed two stones, one on top of the +other, at the foot of the rock and at the very place to which his +compass had directed him. He lifted the stones and an examination +proved that they had not long since been placed in the position in +which he found them. Both had marks of earth upon them on the lower +side, but the stone which was below rested upon the carpet of caribou +moss which covered the ground and prevented it from coming in contact +with the earth. It could not, therefore, have been stained with soil +in the place where Jamie now found it. + +"They was put there as a pilot mark! They shows the true mark of the +place to pace from," he soliloquized, replacing them in the position +in which he had found them. "I'll take un as a pilot, whatever, and +see how she comes out on the next track." + +He returned to the little hackmatack tree and again consulted the +paper. + +"Forty paces west to a round rock," he read, observing, "that won't be +so hard now as findin' the hackmatack tree. 'Twill be easier to see, +whatever." + +Methodically he gathered some stones and erected a small pedestal upon +which to rest his compass while he ran his westerly line. Loose stones +of proper size were hard to find. The smaller ones were frozen fast to +the ground, and the larger ones were too heavy for him to move. But +presently he collected a sufficient number of small stones to form a +pedestal a foot and a half high. + +Upon the top of this he levelled his compass, and turned it until the +needle, swinging freely, rested upon the north point on the dial. +Then, as before, he placed a match upon the face of the compass to +form a line from the "E" to the "W" on the dial. Crouching down upon +the ground Jamie sighted, as before, to a distant tree, but as he did +so be became suddenly aware that the light was fading. He had been +much longer than he had realized, consuming a great deal of time in +examining the signs around the big rock and in taking his distances +from the rock. + +"This line is sure right the first time," he said. "'Twill not take me +much longer, and I finds the round rock now. If I finds un I'll be +sure I'm goin' the right way, and I'll be right handy to the cache." + +Thirty-nine of Jamie's paces brought him to the tree upon which he had +taken sight, and looking a little way beyond he saw, to his great joy, +a round rock. + +Jamie was trembling with excitement as he ran eagerly to the rock. +This was the second direction laid down upon the paper! There could be +no doubt that he was right! Everything answered the description! He +would surely find the cache now! What a surprise it would be to Doctor +Joe and the boys if he came walking into camp triumphantly bearing Lem +Horn's silver fox skin. + +"Sixty paces south," he next read from his directions. + +He placed his compass upon the top of the round rock, which rose +perhaps three feet above the ground, and repeated his former method, +again sighting to a convenient tree. Twilight was perceptibly +thickening. At this season darkness falls early in Labrador, and now, +because of a heavily clouded sky, it was following twilight quickly. + +"I'll keep at un till I finds the cache. I'll find un before I goes +back to camp whatever," he determined. "'Twill be easy enough gettin' +to camp even if 'tis dark before I gets there. The brook's handy by, +and I'll just go to un and follow un down to camp. I hope they'll not +be worryin' about me, but if they does 'twill not be for long. I'll +soon be there now." + +The distance from the round rock to the tree upon which he had sighted +proved to be but thirty of his short paces. Here he was compelled to +pile stones again upon which to build a resting-place for his compass +before taking another sight. Small stones such as he could lift were +not easily found, and when at length he was prepared to take the sight +the gloom had grown so thick that he had difficulty in locating a tree +that he judged was sufficiently far away to cover the remaining +distance. Thirty more paces, however, brought him to the tree, and to +his unbounded joy a lone white birch stood just beyond. + +Within three paces of the birch the mysterious cache was hidden. +Here, however, the directions failed to be sufficiently explicit. +Either through oversight or purposely the bearings from the birch were +omitted. + +Jamie paced first to one tree and then to another; any of several +trees might be the correct one. They were all thickly branched spruce +trees capable of concealing the coveted cache. Jamie was puzzled, and +every moment it was growing darker. He looked up into the branches of +one and then another, hoping to see a bag suspended from a limb, but +if a bag were there it blended so completely with the foliage that +even its outlines were not revealed. + +"I'll have to climb un all," said Jamie finally, "and I'll have to be +spry about un too or 'twill be fair dark before I gets to climb the +last of un." + +For his first effort he chose a tree three paces beyond the birch and +in a line with the rock. He had no difficulty in shinning up the trunk +until he reached a lower limb, and then he quite easily drew himself +up. + +Climbing through the thick screen of branches he looked eagerly for +the coveted hidden mystery, not stopping until he was well into the +tree top and had made quite certain that no cache was hidden there. +Then, as he looked up toward the sky, he felt a snowflake on his face. + +"Snowin'!" he exclaimed. "I'll have to be hurryin' now. If it snows +hard Doctor Joe sure will be gettin' worried about me." + +At that moment Jamie heard the breaking of a twig. He paused and +listened. Presently he heard footsteps, and a moment later a man's +voice. Through the gathering darkness appeared the figures of two men, +and even at that distance Jamie knew they were not Bay folk. They +travelled less silently, and the tread of heavy boots is quite unlike +that of moccasined feet. + +Jamie crouched close to the tree trunk. He scarcely breathed. The +approaching figures came directly toward the white birch. + +"It's lucky we saw them fellers first," said a gruff voice. "They'd +sure suspicioned somethin' if they'd got a glim on us. They never seen +us comin' over, and they'll never find our boat where we hid her." + +"If they found that there writin' you went and left in the tin can you +were tellin' about, they've like as not follered the directions you +give and found the swag," growled the other. "That won't be very +lucky for us." + +"They'd never find her," assured the first speaker. "They'd have to +find the rock first, and she's a good two mile from shore. They'd +never find her in a dog's age. Here we be. Here's the white birch." + +"Well, where's the tree you went and hid the stuff in?" + +"Here she is." The man indicated a tree next to that in which Jamie +was perched. "Here, take my leg and gimme a boost. I'll go up and get +it." + +Jamie scarcely dared breathe. He could see one of the men make a +stirrup of his hands, and the other man step into it and swing into +the tree. Up he climbed to a point directly opposite Jamie, and so +near Jamie could hear him breathe. + +"Got her, Bill?" asked the man below. + +"You bet I got her! She's here all right, just like I said she'd be," +answered the man in the tree. + +Jamie's heart sank. After all his hopes and efforts he became suddenly +aware that he could not return to camp triumphantly bearing Lem Horn's +silver fox pelt as he had pictured himself doing. Lem would never get +the pelt again. Every one in the Bay would go on believing that Indian +Jake had shot Lem and stolen the pelt. And he had been so near setting +all this right! + +It never entered his head that the cache could contain anything else +than the pelt. Because he wished Indian Jake to be innocent of the +crime, he had come to believe that he _was_ innocent, even though +Indian Jake himself had not denied having the stolen property in his +possession, and everybody, save only himself and David and Andy, +believed Indian Jake had it. + +"Here she be safe and sound and as good as ever," said the man as he +dropped from the lower limb of the tree to the ground. "Let's open her +up and have a drink, Hank." + +"I'll go you, Bill. My throat feels as long as a camel's and as dry as +a snake's back." + +Jamie could see the man called Bill stooping over the small bag to +untie it, and presently draw forth a bottle. + +"Here she be, and the other three bottles too," said Bill. "You open +her up, Hank, while I see if the roll is there and the other stuff." + +Bill ran his arm in the bag. + +"Yes, it's all right," he assured. "I guess the Captain didn't miss +the money before the ship sailed, and there ain't any way of his +gettin' word in to the boss about it now before next spring. We're +safe enough to take it back and make our divvy. There won't be any +search made for it now." + +"Naw, we're safe enough now." Hank tipped the bottle to his lips, and +handed it to Bill. "The boss ain't missed his liquor neither, and +there won't be any to miss pretty soon the way you're pulin' at it." + +"I don't know's I took any more'n you did," said Bill petulantly, +corking the bottle and returning it to the bag. "It was a good move to +play safe anyhow and hide the swag until we made sure the boss +wouldn't go searching through our stuff for it. I don't know's he'd +suspicion us any more'n the rest of the crew, but he'd search +everybody's stuff if the Captain had give him a tip." + +"You bet he would!" agreed Hank. "We just played in luck right +through. They won't blame us for that other job, will they? They ain't +likely to go makin' a search for that, be they?" + +"Naw!" said Bill. "That other feller, whatever his name is, has got +'em on his trail for that. We ain't in it. They'll never suspicion us +for that. We made a slick job of that." + +"Well, let's beat it back," said Hank. "It's snowin' and it's goin' to +snow hard. The sooner we gets back to camp the better we'll be off." + +Bill swung the bag over his shoulder, when suddenly he stopped and +exclaimed: + +"What's that?" + +Jimmy had sneezed, and again he sneezed. + +"Some sneak in that there tree!" and Bill with an oath dropped his bag +and seized his rifle, which he had leaned against the tree in which +Jimmy was perched. "I'll put a bullet up there! That'll settle that +feller, whoever he is!" + + + + +CHAPTER XIV + +THE TWO DESPERADOS + + +"Don't shoot, sir! It's just me!" Jamie piped in terror from the tree. + +"It's only a kid!" Bill swore an oath of disgust and lowered his +rifle. "You git down out'n that tree! Git down quicker'n lightnin', +too!" + +"I'm comin', sir!" came Jamie's frightened voice from the tree-top. + +Jamie lost no time in descending from his perch and in a moment stood +trembling before his captors. It was quite dark now and snowing hard, +and to the frightened little lad the two big lumbermen loomed up like +giants. + +"What you doin' here?" demanded Bill with an oath as he seized Jamie's +arm with a grip that made the lad wince. + +"I were--I were huntin' for the cache," confessed Jamie. + +"Goin' to steal our cache, was ye? Well, we'll teach you to leave +other folkses things be!" The man gave Jamie a savage shake. "Tryin' +to steal our cache, eh? Who set you on to it? That's what I want to +know! Who set you on to stealin' it, now?" + +"I weren't goin' to steal un, sir," chattered Jamie, horrified at the +implication that he was a thief. + +"What were you huntin' the cache for, then? Don't lie, you little rat, +or I'll twist your neck off!" + +The fellow seemed quite capable of executing the threat literally, as +he again shook Jamie savagely. + +"I--aint'--lyin'--about--un, sir!" pleaded Jamie between the shakes. +"I were--just--goin'--to--look--at un, and--if--'tweren't--Lem Horn's +silver fox--I weren't--goin' to touch un!" + +"Well, 'tain't Lem Horn's silver fox. It's things of our'n! Do you +hear that? _'Tain't_ Lem Horn's silver, it's our'n what's in that +there bag! You leave our things be! Do you hear what I'm sayin'? You +and your gang keep away from our cache, and don't go foolin' with +anything you don't know anything about! Do you hear?" The man gave +Jamie another shake. + +"I--I didn't know! We--we just suspicioned 'twere Lem's silver, and I +were wantin' to take un back to he," explained Jamie. + +"You heard what I said? 'Tain't Lem Horn's silver! You hear that, +don't you?" + +"Aye, sir, I saw what you was takin' out of the bag, and 'tweren't Lem +Horn's silver. 'Twere something to drink out of a bottle. I sees you +drinkin' it." + +"Let the kid go, Bill," laughed Hank, who until now had kept silent. + +"We were all thinkin' 'twere Lem's silver. I'll tell un 'twere not the +silver but somethin' else that you takes from the Captain that you +were hidin' in the cache," said Jamie hopefully. + +"You goin' to tell that! You heard what we said, and you goin' to blab +it?" the man roared in a rage. + +"Aye, sir, I'll just tell the others so's they'll not be thinkin' 'tis +Lem's silver," said Jamie innocently. + +"The others? Who's 'the others'?" demanded Bill. + +"Doctor Joe and the other scouts," Jamie explained. + +"'Doctor Joe and the other scouts,'" quoted the big lumberman. "Who's +this here Doctor Joe? And who's the other scouts?" + +"He's Doctor Joe! Everybody knows Doctor Joe!" explained Jamie, quite +astonished that any one should ask who Doctor Joe might be. "The +scouts be the other lads of the Bay, sir." + +"Well, this here Doctor Joe, whoever he is, and these here other +scouts, whoever they be, better keep out'n our business and mind their +own," roared the man. "I suppose they're this here bunch what's +campin' down by the brook and been runnin' all over the country +to-day?" + +"Aye, sir, we're all campin' down handy to the brook, and we've all +been lookin' for the cache, but I'm the only one that finds the rock," +admitted Jamie. + +"You ain't camped down there now!" The man swore a mighty and strange +oath that made Jamie tremble. "You was camped there, but _now_ you +ain't! You're goin' with us, _you_ be! Hear that?" + +"Aw, let the kid go!" broke in Hank, impatiently. "We better be +gettin' a jog on us too. Leave the kid be, and come on. He's just a +kid and he can't kick up any trouble. Leave him be, and let's get out +of here." + +"Not me!" The man gave Jamie's arm a painful twist. "I ain't goin' to +leave this here kid to go back and blab to that there Doctor Joe and +the hull country. He heard our talk, and if it gets to the boss you +know what that means. I ain't takin' any chances on him, and I'm half +of this." + +"We'll be gettin' in bigger trouble if we takes him along. We'll have +the hull country huntin' us," Hank protested. + +"You heard me! I ain't goin' to take chances on his blabbin'! He goes +along, and I'll fix him so's he won't blab and nobody'll get our trail +if they do hunt us. The snow'll hide it," insisted Bill. + +"Well, let's get a move on then," said Hank. "The wind's risin' and +it's goin' to kick up a sea. I don't want to be caught out on the Bay +again in a sea like we had that other time. The snow's goin' to be +thick too, and we'll lose our bearings." + +"Go on, then. I'll foller with the kid," said Bill, still holding +Jamie's aching arm. + +"Better let the kid go," said Hank, swinging a rifle over his left +shoulder and with an axe in his right hand striding away through the +darkness and thickly falling snow. + +"Come along you!" and Jamie's captor, gripping Jamie's arm in one hand +and with a rifle in the other, followed in the trail of the man Hank, +dragging Jamie almost too fast for his legs to carry him. + +On and on they went through the darkness. Now and again Jamie fell +over stumps or other obstructions, and each time the man, with a +curse, jerked him to his feet. + +Snow was falling heavily and the wind was rising. Once they crossed a +frozen marsh where the snow swirled around them in clouds. Then they +were again among the forest trees, forging ahead in silence save for +an occasional curse by the man who held Jamie in his merciless and +relentless grip. + + + + +CHAPTER XV + +MISSING! + + +Seth Muggs, intent upon keeping pace with Andy on his right, and not +permitting him to get out of sight, quite neglected to be equally +cautious as to Jamie on his left. In this Seth was in no wise +neglectful. The responsibility in each case, in order to keep the line +from breaking, was to keep the neighbour nearer the brook in view. In +this Jamie alone had failed. + +Jamie had, indeed, been out of line for a considerable time before +Seth became aware of the fact. Even then he felt no concern. Doctor +Joe had instructed Jamie to return to camp if he became weary, and +when he was missed had no doubt he had taken advantage of the +suggestion. + +Nevertheless, when Doctor Joe passed the word along the line to +reassemble, Seth gave several lusty shouts for Jamie. When, after a +reasonable time, he received no reply, he was satisfied Jamie was snug +in camp with the kettle boiling for tea, and he turned down to join +the others at the brook. + +"It's a little later than I thought," said Doctor Joe as they came +together, "but we'll have plenty of time to reach camp before dark. +Now let's count noses." + +"Where's Jamie?" asked David. "We're all here but Jamie." + +"I'm thinkin' he gets tired and goes back to camp like Doctor Joe were +sayin' for he to do," suggested Seth. "I missed he a while back." + +"How long has it been since you saw him last, Seth?" asked Doctor Joe. + +"I'm not rightly knowin', but a half-hour whatever," said Seth, "and +I'm thinkin' 'twere a bit longer." + +"He has probably gone back to camp, then," agreed Doctor Joe. "It was +a pretty hard tramp for such a little fellow. It is quite natural that +he did not like to admit to you that he could not keep up with us, and +he just slipped quietly away and returned to camp and said nothing +about it. He couldn't well get lost with the brook so near to guide +him." + +"Jamie'd never be gettin' lost whatever," asserted Andy. "He's +wonderful good at findin' his way about." + +"'Tis goin' to snow, and 'twill be dark early," suggested David, as +the little party turned down the brook to retrace their steps to camp. +"There's a bend in the brook here; let's cut across un and save time. +If she sets in to snow to-night 'tis like to keep un up all day +to-morrow, and we'd better get back as quick as we can to cut plenty +of wood and have un on hand." + +"Very well," agreed Doctor Joe. "You go ahead and guide us, David." + +"'Twill be fine and cosy just bidin' in camp and studyin' up the +things in the book," said Obadiah as they followed David in a short +cut toward camp. "We'll be havin' a fine time even if it does snow too +hard to go about." + +"Yes," agreed Doctor Joe, "we can do that and learn a great many +things about scouting." + +Suddenly David held up his hand for silence, and stooping peered +through the trees ahead. The others followed his gaze, and there, not +above fifty yards away and looking curiously at them, stood a caribou. + +Only David and Doctor Joe had brought rifles. Almost instantly +David's rifle rang out, and the caribou turned and disappeared. + +"I'm sure I hit he!" exclaimed David running in the direction the +caribou had taken. "I couldn't miss he so close, and a fair shot!" + +"You hit he!" exclaimed Andy who had dashed ahead. "You hit he, Davy! +Here's the mark of blood!" + +A trail of blood left no doubt that the caribou had been hard hit, but +it was followed for nearly a mile before they came upon the prostrate +animal. + +"Now we'll have plenty of fresh deer's meat!" burst out Obadiah +enthusiastically. "We'll have meat for supper, and I'm wonderful +hungry for un!" + +"Yes," agreed Doctor Joe, "we had better dress it at once. There are +enough of us to carry all the meat back with us to camp, and that will +save making a return trip." + +"'Twill be a fine surprise for Jamie when we comes back with deer's +meat," said Andy enthusiastically. + +"'Twill make us a bit late and he'll be thinkin' we finds the cache," +suggested David. "I hopes he won't be comin' up the brook again to +look for us." + +"I hardly think he'll do that," said Doctor Joe, "but to be sure he +does not some of you had better go to the brook and leave a sign to +tell him which way we've gone. David and I will skin and dress the +caribou." + +"Come along, Seth," Andy volunteered. "We'll be goin' over to make the +sign." + +"Come back here as soon as you've done it," directed Doctor Joe. +"We'll need your help in carrying the meat to camp." + +"Aye, sir, we'll be comin' right back," agreed Andy as he and Seth +hurried away. + +Close to the brook, in a place where it could not fail to be seen, the +lads set a pole at an angle of forty-five degrees, pointing in the +direction in which the caribou had been killed. Against the pole and +about a third of the distance from its lower end an upright stick was +placed. This was an Indian sign familiar to all the hunters and +wilderness folk, indicating that the party had gone in the direction +in which the pole sloped, the upright stick a little way from the butt +further indicating that the distance was not far. + +"Jamie'll know what that means, and if he wearies of bidin' alone in +camp and comes to find us he'll not be missin' us now whatever," said +Andy with satisfaction, as he and Seth turned back. + +"I'm goin' to blaze the trail over, and he won't be like to miss un, +then," suggested Seth, taking the axe. + +When Andy and Seth rejoined the others Doctor Joe and David had nearly +finished skinning the caribou, and in due time they had it ready to +cut up. The head was severed with as little of the neck meat as +possible that there might be no unnecessary waste, for they could not +carry the head with them. Then the tongue was removed, for this was +considered a titbit. + +The question of how to carry the meat to camp was finally settled by +making two litters with poles. The carcass was now cut into two nearly +equal parts, one of which was placed on each litter. Doctor Joe took +the forward end of one of the litters, and David the forward end of +the other. With two boys carrying the rear end of each litter, and the +other lads the skin, heart, liver and tongue, and the two rifles and +the axe, they at length set out for camp. + +Night was falling and the first flakes of the coming snow-storm were +felt upon their faces when finally the little white tents came in +view. + +"There's no light," remarked David, who was in advance. "Jamie's +savin' candles. I'm hopin' now he has the kettle boilin'." + +"He'll have un boilin'," assured Andy, who was one of the two boys at +the rear of David's litter. "He'll be proud to have un boilin' and +supper started." + +"There's no smoke!" exclaimed David apprehensively as they came +closer. "Jamie, b'y!" he shouted. "Where is you? Come out and see what +we're gettin'!" + +But no Jamie came, and there was no answering call. The stretchers +were hastily placed on the ground, and every tent searched for Jamie. + +"Jamie's never been comin' back since we leaves!" David declared. +"Whatever has been happenin' to he?" + +"I can't understand it," said Doctor Joe. "He could not possibly have +been lost. Andy, you and Micah run down and look at the boats and see +if he has been there." + +Andy and Micah ran excitedly to the boats to report a few moments +later that there were no indications of Jamie's return. + +"David, you and I shall have to go and look for him," said Doctor Joe +quietly. "Andy, you and the other lads build a fire outside as a +guide. Get your supper, and don't worry until we return." + +"What do you think's been happenin' to Jamie?" asked Andy anxiously. + +"We took a short cut and did not follow the brook where it makes a +wide bend," suggested Doctor Joe. "He may be waiting for us along the +brook at that point." + +"Oh, I hopes you'll find he there!" said Andy fervently. + +"Get your rifle and plenty of cartridges, David," directed Doctor Joe. +"I'll carry mine also. When we get up the trail we'll shoot to let +Jamie know we're looking for him." + +Each with a rifle on his shoulder, Doctor Joe in the lead and David +following close behind, the two turned away into the now thickly +falling snow and darkness. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI + +BOUND AND HELPLESS + + +"See here," said the man in front, stopping and turning about after +what had seemed hours to the exhausted and bruised Jamie, "I for one +ain't goin' to try to cross the Bay to-night in this here snow. It's +thicker'n mud, and there's a sea runnin' I won't take chances with, +not while I'm sober. We may's well bunk." + +"Guess you're right, pardner, we better bunk. But pull farther away to +the west'ard before we put on a fire," agreed Jamie's captor with +evident relief. "That bunch'll be out huntin' this here kid, and they +may run on to us if we camp too close to 'em." + +"We're a good two mile from 'em now. They'll never run on to us," +argued the other. + +"Go on a piece farther," insisted the man called Bill, who was +gripping Jamie's arm so hard that it ached. + +"Let the kid go! What's the use of draggin' him along? He'll just be +in our way, and we've got troubles enough of our own," suggested the +other. + +"He ain't goin' back and have a chance to give us away to that bunch, +not if I knows it. I've about made up my mind to croak him. He knows +too much. Go on and find a place to bunk. I'm follerin'." + +"You won't croak anybody while I'm hangin' around! I'm tellin' you +I've got troubles enough on my hands already without chasin' a noose. +I'm goin' to save my neck anyhow, and I ain't goin' to be mixed up in +any croakin'," muttered the one called Hank, as he turned and plunged +forward again through the darkness. + +What "croaking" meant Jamie did not in the least know, but he +suspected that it referred to something not in the least pleasant for +himself. He was too tired, however, to think or care a great deal as +he was dragged on, stumbling in the darkness over fallen logs, and +bumping into trees. + +It seemed an interminable time to Jamie before the man ahead again +stopped, and said decisively: + +"We'll camp here. We've gone far enough, and I ain't goin' another +rod. We're a good five mile from them fellers you're afraid of." + +"All right, I'm satisfied. You've got the axe, go ahead and make a +cover," said Bill. "Kid, you come with me and help break branches for +the bed. Don't you loaf neither. Do you hear me?" + +"Yes, sir," answered Jamie timidly. + +It was a relief to stop walking and to feel the man relax the +relentless grip upon his arm, and Jamie, meekly enough, began breaking +boughs with the man always within striking distance, as though afraid +that he might run away and make his escape, though Jamie was quite too +tired for that. + +The man with the axe cut a stiff pole and trimmed it. Then he lopped +off the lower branches of two spruce trees that stood a convenient +distance apart, and laid the pole on a supporting limb of each tree, +about four feet from the ground. This was to form the ridge of a +lean-to shelter. Poles were now cut and formed into a sloping roof by +resting one end upon the ridge pole, the other upon the ground, and +the poles covered with a thick thatch of branches to exclude the snow. + +When this was completed a quantity of dry wood was cut, and in front +of the lean-to a fire was lighted. + +While the man with the axe was engaged in thatching the roof and +lighting the fire and gathering wood, the other turned his attention +to the preparation of the bed. + +"Don't you try to break away, now!" he growled at Jamie. "I'll shoot +you like I would a rat if you do. Just stand there and hand me them +branches, and shake the snow off'n 'em first, too." + +Running was the last thing that Jamie contemplated doing, even though +there had been no danger of the man executing his threat. He was so +tired he could scarcely stand upon his feet, and he had eaten nothing +since the hurried meal at midday. + +At length the bed was laid, and the men sat down within the shelter of +the lean-to, and Bill ordered: + +"Git down here, you kid, and set still too. Don't you try to leave +here. You know what's comin' to you if you do." + +As Jamie meekly and thankfully complied, Bill ran his arm into the bag +that had been cached in the tree, and which had been the cause of all +of Jamie's trouble, and drawing forth a bottle removed the cork and +took a long pull from its contents. Making a face as though it did not +taste good, he handed it over to Hank, remarking: + +"Have a nip, Hank. It'll warm you up and make you feel good. I don't +like this cruisin' in the dark." + +Hank accepted the bottle and after drinking from it returned it to the +bag. Then each drew a pipe and a plug of black tobacco from his +pocket, and cutting some of the tobacco with the knife rolled it +between the palms of his hands, stuffed it into his pipe and lighted +it with a brand from the fire. For several minutes they sat and smoked +in silence. + +In the meantime Jamie sat timidly upon the boughs next the man Bill. +As the fire blazed, the chill of the storm and night was driven out, +and a cozy, comfortable warmth filled the lean-to. Jamie's eyes became +heavy, and in spite of his unhappy position he dozed. + +"See here," said the man, "you may's well sleep, but I ain't goin' to +take any chances on you. I'm goin' to tie you so's you won't be givin' +us the slip." + +"Oh, leave the kid be, Bill! He's all right!" the other man objected. + +"I ain't takin' chances," growled Bill. "I'm goin' to have some say +about it, too." + +He fumbled in his pocket, and drawing forth some stout twine proceeded +to tie Jamie's hands securely behind his back. Then he tied Jamie's +feet, and gave him a push to the rear. + +"Now I guess you'll stay with us all right," he grinned. + +"Aw, leave the kid be! What you want to tie him for?" Hank protested. +"He can't get away. Better let him go anyhow." + +"You leave me be to do what I wants to do and I'll leave you be to do +what you wants to," growled Bill. "I'm goin' to keep this kid fast. +This is my business." + +"I don't know as it's all your business," snapped Hank. "I'm mixed up +in it too, seems to me." + +"Well, I caught the kid, and I'm goin' to have my say about what I do +with him," Bill retorted. "I ain't goin' to let him make trouble for +us, not if I knows what I'm about." + +Hank made no reply, but puffed silently at his pipe. + +Jamie was wide awake again. This man Bill meant some evil, and the +little lad wondered vaguely what it could be that was to be done to +himself, and what his fate was to be. He was vastly uncomfortable, +too, with his hands tied behind his back, though he was glad enough to +be permitted to lie down. He could scarcely keep the tears back, as he +thought of the happy time in camp that had been planned, of the snug +tent where he was to have slept with Doctor Joe, and of his own warm +bed at home, and he wondered whether he would ever see The Jug again. + +"The boss'll be sore at us, Hank, if we ain't back to camp to-morrow," +remarked Bill presently, breaking the silence. "He can be sore though +if he wants to. He can't fire us fellers for bein' away even if he +does get sore and cuss us out. He needs us bad, and he can't get any +more men now. I don't mind his cussin'. Cussin' don't hurt a feller." + +"If the wind don't get worse and the snow lets up some so we can make +out our way we better go back though as soon as it's light enough in +the mornin'," answered Hank. "I wish I was out'n this business +anyhow." + +"We can get across the Bay even if it does snow some in the mornin', +long's there ain't too much sea," said Bill. "I'm for gettin' away +from here too. We've got the swag all right and nobody'll know about +it, if we don't let this kid loose to blab. It was lucky we caught +this feller before he found it, but he heard too much." + +"What you goin' to do with him, Bill?" + +"Croak him. I ain't goin' to take chances with him. It ain't my way to +take chances I don't have to take." + +"You better not do any croakin', Bill. I won't stand for _that_. I'm +tough, and I've done plenty of tough things in my day, but I never +croaked a little kid like him, and I won't stand for it." + +"Don't you go and get soft now. 'Tain't any worse to croak a kid than +a man. You'd croak a man if you had to, and this is a time when we've +got to do it to save ourselves." + +"Well, I won't stand for it while I'm sober, and I'm sober now even if +I have had a drink or two." Hank reached for a firebrand with which to +relight his pipe. + +"Well, you've got to stand for this. I'm mixed up in it just as much +as you be, and I'm goin' to have some say. I ain't goin' to take +chances on him goin' back to his gang and givin' us away." + +"How you goin' to do it?" + +"Take him along in the boat and drop him overboard. That's the easiest +way. There ain't much chance of anybody findin' him, and if they do +they'll just think he got drowned some way hisself. Dead folks don't +talk." + +"That's somethin' I won't stand for! You can't go droppin' anybody +overboard while I'm in the boat! Not if I know it!" + +"What you goin' to do, play the sucker?" Bill turned angrily toward +his companion. "Maybe you'll go and peach!" + +"Don't you call me a sucker! Don't you say I'm a peacher!" Hank rose +to his feet and faced Bill menacingly. + +For a moment Jamie thought the men were going to fight, but Bill +remained seated and his manner suddenly changed. Jamie thought he +acted as though he were afraid. + +"See here, Hank," Bill's voice was modified and conciliatory. "I ain't +callin' you a sucker, and I ain't sayin' you'll peach. What's the use +of us fellers fightin' about it? We're in this together and we're +pardners. We've got to hang together. What's the use of us fallin' +out?" + +"I'm willin' to hang together but I won't be called a sucker or +peacher by anybody, and I ain't goin' to stand for any croakin' +neither while I've got a gun! Hear me?" + +"What we goin' to do about this here kid then? We can't let him go. +He'll up and run back and blab. He's heard too much about our +business. We don't want to go huntin' trouble, do we? Well, we'll be +huntin' trouble if we let him go. He knows too much and he knows all +about who we be too." + +"What does he know, now? He don't know anything except what you've +gone and blabbed yourself. We just caught him tryin' to swipe our +cache. The stuff is our'n. 'Tain't his'n. Our stuff is our'n, ain't +it? What can he blab about? That's what I want to know!" + +"He'll go and tell folks we've got this here swag from the ship, and +it'll go to the boss. That's what he knows, and that's what he'll +blab." + +"Well, what we've got is our'n. He can't prove we've got that there +swag, and we'll hide it where the boss can't find it. He hain't seen +any swag around, has he? He can't say he has neither, and he won't. He +just thought maybe we had that there fox skin. What's that got to do +with us? We don't care what he thinks, and what he thinks won't hurt +us as I knows of. What we've got and what we ain't got don't make any +difference to these fellers. What they don't know won't hurt 'em. It +ain't theirs, and nobody better go meddlin' in what I has and does. +Let that there kid go now, Bill, and get him off'n our hands." + +"You just leave him to me, Hank. I ain't goin' to let him go and blab, +I say, and get both of us in a hole. I've got _some_ say, hain't I, +Hank?" + +"Well, don't do any croakin' when I'm around to see, that's all I've +got to say. He's your'n to do the way you want to with. I won't have +any finger in it. It's your job, it ain't mine." + +"Well, I'll do the croakin' some other way. You needn't have anything +to do about it if you're afraid. I'll do it all by myself." + +"Afraid or no afraid I ain't goin' to be mixed up in any croakin', and +that ends it as far as I go." + +Hank knocked the ashes from his pipe, refilled it from the black +plug, and lifting a red hot coal from the fire placed it upon the +bowl, and puffed for a moment. When the tobacco was glowing to his +satisfaction, he flicked the coal back into the fire, and sat silently +smoking. + +Jamie, lying quiet, had listened to the conversation of the two men. +He was wide awake now. He did not understand the significance of +"croaking," but the word had an ominous sound. It referred to +something the man called Bill wished to do to him and something to +which the man called Hank objected. He understood, however, the threat +to throw him into the Bay. The fellow Bill wished to do this while +Hank was determined to prevent it. + +Instinctively Jamie felt that Hank was only defending him in order to +protect himself. He had no personal interest in him, but did not +propose to be involved in any trouble that might arise through some +action that Bill wished to take. He was glad when, finally, it +appeared settled that he was not to be thrown into the sea. + +Bill arose and replenished the fire, and following Hank's example +refilled and lighted his pipe, then reseated himself. + +Neither of the men spoke. Beyond their great hulking figures the fire +gleamed and sent a circle of radiance. Beyond the circle the forest +lay as black as a tomb. The snow fell steadily, and the wind sighed +and moaned ominously through the tree tops. + +What were Doctor Joe and the lads doing? Were they searching for him +through the blackness of the night and the storm? If he had only +followed Doctor Joe's instructions and returned to camp in season! +Would these men kill him? Would he ever see the dear old home at The +Jug again? + +With these thoughts flashing through his mind Jamie prayed a silent +little prayer: + +"Dear Lord, don't let un kill me! Take me back to The Jug again!" + +Many times he repeated this to himself. Then there came to him +something Thomas had once said when the mist was clouding his eyes: + +"Have plenty o' grit, lad, and a stout heart like a man." + +This comforted and strengthened him, and, like the prayer, he repeated +it over and over again to himself as he lay watching the silent men. +For a long time he watched them and the fire beyond, and the falling +snow and the black wall of the forest. Finally tired nature came to +his relief. His eyes closed and he fell into a troubled sleep. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII + +LOST IN A BLIZZARD + + +After a time Jamie awoke. The two men were still sitting by the fire +and were again drinking from the bottle. He was uncomfortable in his +cramped position, but dared not move, and he lay very still and +watched the men and the fire and the black wall of the mysterious, +trackless forest beyond. Shadows rose and fell and flitted in and out +of the circle of firelight. Weird and uncanny they seemed, taking +strange forms like dancing spirits. In the darkness outside the +firelight and moving shadows Jamie fancied that terrible ghoulish +forms were stalking stealthily and grinning maliciously at him. + +For a long while Jamie lay awake and watched. Again and again the men +drank from the bottle, and when they spoke at intervals their voices +sounded unnatural and thick. Once one of them arose to replenish the +fire, and he moved unsteadily upon his feet, at which the little lad +marvelled, for he was a large, strong man. Presently Jamie's eyes +drooped again, and once more he slept. + +When he again awoke dawn was breaking. Snow was falling heavily. The +two men were in a deep sleep. The fire had died down to a bed of +coals, and Jamie was shivering with the cold. + +His arms were numb, and his body and limbs ached from the cramped +position in which he lay because of his bound arms and feet. With some +effort he turned over, and this brought him some relief, but not for +long, and presently he rolled back to his original position that he +might see the red coals of the fire. + +Jamie tried to move his hands, but his wrists were too firmly tied, +and the effort brought only pain. Then he lay still and studied the +smouldering fire. Behind it lay the remnants of a back log that had +been burned through in the centre. The inner ends of the log, where it +was separated, were, like the coals before it, red and glowing, and he +thought that if he could push them together they would blaze and give +out warmth. + +Then, suddenly, an idea flashed into Jamie's brain. Those red ends of +the log would burn the string that bound him, and he could free +himself if he could only reach them and press the string against them. + +His movements in turning over had not disturbed his captors. They were +still sleeping profoundly. From the condition of the fire it was +evident they had been sitting by it the greater part of the night and +had replenished it at a late hour, else all the coals would have been +dead. + +Hank lay at the opposite end of the lean-to from Jamie, and Bill in +the centre, with their feet toward the fire. Jamie was lying at the +back, his head near Bill's head and his feet toward the end of the +lean-to farthest from Hank. + +For several minutes Jamie studied the position of each and the +possibilities of working his way out of the lean-to without awakening +the men. Finally he determined to make an attempt to gain his freedom. + +Cautiously and as noiselessly as possible he began to wriggle away, +inch by inch, from Bill, and toward the fire. Several times he fancied +the men moved restlessly in their sleep, but when he looked toward +them they appeared to be still sleeping heavily. On each occasion, +however, he lay still until he became wholly satisfied that he had +been mistaken and that they had not been disturbed. + +Little by little he edged away until at length he was well outside the +lean-to. His efforts were painful and slow, but in the course of half +an hour he was near enough to the end of the log to touch it with his +bound feet. His exertions had set his blood in motion and inspired him +with hope of success. + +With much care and patience he pushed the stick until he was able to +rest the string, where it crossed between his ankles, upon the glowing +end. Drawing his feet as far apart as possible, with all the strength +he possessed, he was quickly rewarded by feeling a relaxation, and in +a moment his heart leaped with joy. The string was severed. + +Squirming around upon his chest, Jamie arose to a kneeling position, +and then stood erect. So far as his legs were concerned he was free. + +Jamie's first impulse was to run wildly away, but he restrained +himself. Standing over the men he looked down upon them. Neither had +moved, and to all appearances they were sleeping as soundly as ever. + +"I'm thinkin' now I'll try to burn off the string on my hands too," he +decided. "'Twill be easier gettin' on with un free, and I'll travel a +rare lot faster with my arms loose." + +Burning the strings from his wrists, however, proved a much more +difficult problem than burning them from his ankles. He sat down with +his back to the hot end of the stick, but discovered that it was no +easy matter to find just the right position between the wrists. +Several efforts resulted only in painful burns on his hands, but he +was not discouraged, and finally was rewarded. The string where it +crossed between his wrists was brought into contact with the sharp +point of the glowing hot stick, and though the reflected heat burned +him cruelly he held the string pressed against the fire until at last +it crumbled away and his hands flew apart. + +"She took grit," said he, "but I made out to do un." + +With the joy of freedom and the anxiety to escape his tormentors, +Jamie was oblivious to the pain of his burned and blistered wrists. He +could use both hands and feet, and was confident that he would soon +find the camp and his friends. + +Jamie ran as fast as his short legs would carry him. The snow was +nearly knee deep, but it was soft and feathery and he scarcely gave it +thought at first. He had no doubt that he knew exactly in which +direction camp lay, and it never entered his head that he might go +wrong or lose his way as he dashed through the woods at the best speed +of which he was capable. + +Presently the impediment of the snow compelled him to reduce his gait +to a walk, and for nearly an hour he pushed on in what he supposed was +a straight line, when he came suddenly upon fresh axe cuttings and a +moment later saw through the thickly falling snow a familiar lean-to. +He stopped in consternation and fright, scarcely knowing which way to +turn. He was within fifty feet of the two desperate men from whom he +had so recently fled. In the storm he had made a complete circuit. + +The men were still soundly sleeping, and instinctively Jamie backed +away. He had lost a full hour of valuable time. The men might awake at +any moment, discover his absence and trail him and overtake him in the +snow. + +These thoughts flashed through Jamie's mind, and in wild panic he +turned and ran until at length exhaustion brought him to a halt. + +"They'll sure be cotchin' me," he panted, "and I'm not knowin' the way +in the snow! I'll be goin' right around and comin' back again to the +same place if I don't look out! I can't bide here," he continued in +desperation. "I'll have to go somewheres else or they'll sure cotch +me!" + +Bewildered and frightened Jamie looked wildly about him. Then he +bethought himself of the compass in his pocket. Eagerly drawing it +forth he held it in his hand and studied its face. + +"The Bay's to the suth'ard, whatever," he calculated. "If the Bay's to +the suth'ard the brook's to the east'ard. I'll be lettin' the compass +pilot me to the east'ard. 'Twill take me the right direction +whatever." + +Levelling the compass carefully in his hand so that the needle swung +freely he found the east, and as rapidly as his little legs would +carry him set out again in his effort to escape the two sleeping men +and to find camp and his friends. + +At intervals he stopped to consult his compass. Then he would hurry +forward again as fast as ever he could go through the snow, looking +behind him fearfully, half expecting each time to see the men in close +pursuit, and always with the dread that a gruff voice in the rear +would command him to halt, or that a rifle bullet would be sent after +him without warning. + +As time passed and there was no indication that he was followed, Jamie +began to feel some degree of security. Because of the storm it was +unlikely that the men would venture upon the Bay. They had kept late +hours drinking at the bottle, and unless they were awakened by the +cold they would in all probability sleep late and therefore not +discover his absence until the thickly falling snow had so far covered +his trail as to preclude the possibility of them following it with +certainty. + +With his mind more or less relieved on this point, Jamie suddenly +realized that he was hungry. It was nearing midday. He had eaten +nothing for twenty-four hours, and he had the normal appetite of a +healthy boy. The snow had perceptibly increased in depth since his +escape from the lean-to, and walking was correspondingly hard. He was +so hungry and so weary that at length he could scarcely force one +foot ahead of the other. + +The wind was rising, and in crossing an open frozen marsh the snow +drifted before the gale in clouds so dense as to be suffocating. The +storm was attaining the proportions of a blizzard, and when Jamie +again reached the shelter of the forest beyond the marsh he found it +necessary to stop to rest and regain his breath. + +"'Twill never do to try to cross another mesh," he decided. "I'm like +to be overcome with un and perish before I finds my way out of un to +the timber. I'll stick to the woods, and if I can't stick to un I'll +have to bide where I is till the snow stops. I wonders now if Doctor +Joe and David is out lookin' for me. I'm not thinkin' they'd bide in +the tent with me lost out here and they not knowin' where I is." + +When he was rested a little he arose, took his direction with the +compass, and floundered on through the snow. + +"They's sure out somewhere lookin' for me," he thought, "but 'tis +snowin' so hard they never will find me! I'll have to keep goin' till +I finds camp. 'Tis strange now I'm not comin' to the brook, 'tis +wonderful strange. I'm thinkin' though I were crossin' two meshes with +the men in the night, and I've only been crossin' one goin' back +to-day. I'm fearin' I'll never be able to cross un though, when I +comes to the next un." + +Presently, as Jamie had thought would be the case, he came to another +marsh. It satisfied him that he was going in the right direction, but +at the same time it lay out before him as a well-nigh impassable +barrier. The wind was driving the snow across it in swirling dense +clouds, and he stood for a little in the shelter of the trees and +viewed it with heavy heart. + +"'Tis a bigger mesh than the other," he commented to himself, "but +I'll have to try to cross un. I can't bide here. I'll freeze to death +with no shelter and I has no axe for makin' a shelter. I'm not knowin' +what to do." + +For a little while he hesitated, then he plunged out upon the edge of +the marsh. He was nearly swept from his feet, and to recover his +breath he was forced to retreat again to the woods. Three times he +tried to face the storm-swept marsh, but each time was sent staggering +back to shelter. It was a task beyond the strength and endurance of so +young a lad, and utterly exhausted and bitterly disappointed, he sat +down upon the trunk of a fallen tree to rest. + +"I never can make un whilst the nasty weather lasts," he acknowledged. +"I'm fair scrammed and I'll have to wait for the wind to ease before I +tries un again." + +He could scarce restrain the tears. It was a bitter disappointment. He +was so hungry, and so weary, and wished so hard to reach the safety of +camp and freedom from the still present danger of being recaptured. + +"I'll have plenty o' grit and a stout heart like a man," he presently +declared. "I don't mind bein' a bit hungry, and I'll never be givin' +up! I'll never give up whatever! Pop says plenty o' grit'll pull a man +out o' most any fix. I'm in a bad fix now, and I'll have grit and +won't be gettin' scared. 'Twill never do to be gettin' scared +whatever." + +Jamie sat quietly upon the log, and presently found himself dozing. He +sprang to his feet, for sleeping under these conditions was dangerous. +He tried to walk about, but was so tired that he again returned to the +log to rest. It was growing colder, and he shivered. The storm was +increasing in fury. + +"I'm not knowin' what to do!" he said despairingly. "If I goes on +I'll perish and if I keeps still I'll freeze to death and I'm too +wearied to move about to keep warm. 'Tis likely the storm'll last the +night through whatever, and I'll never be able to stick un out that +long." + +Jamie again found himself dozing, and again he got upon his feet. + +"I'll have to be doin' somethin'," said he. "I'll keep my grit and try +to think of somethin' to do or I'll perish." + +Jamie was right. He was in peril, and grave peril. Even though the +storm-swept marsh had not stood in his way he was quite too weary to +walk farther. He was thrown entirely upon his own resources. His life +depended upon his own initiative, for he was quite beyond help from +others. It was a great unpeopled wilderness in which Jamie was lost, +and he was but a wee lad, and even though Doctor Joe and David were +looking for him there was scarce a chance that they could find him in +the raging storm. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII + +A PLACE TO "BIDE" + + +Dazed and almost hopeless Jamie stood and gazed about him at the thick +falling snow. His body and brain were tired, but some immediate action +was imperative or he would be overcome by his weariness and the cold. + +"If I were only bringin' an axe, I could fix a place to bide in and +cut wood for a fire," he said. "If I were only bringin' an axe!" + +He thrust his hands deep into his pocket and felt the big, stout +jack-knife that Doctor Joe had given him, and he drew it out. + +"Maybe now I can fix un with just this," he said hopefully. "I've got +to have grit and I've got to try my best whatever." + +He looked up and there, within two feet of the log upon which he had +been sitting, were two spruce trees about six feet apart. + +"Maybe I can fix un right here," he commented, "and maybe I can lay a +fire against the log and if I can get un afire she'll burn a long +while and keep un warm." + +With much effort he cut and trimmed a stiff, strong pole. The lower +limbs of the trees were not above four feet from the ground, and upon +these he rested his pole, extending it from tree to tree. This was to +form the ridge pole to support the roof of his lean-to, for he was to +form a shelter similar to that improvised by the two men the evening +before. + +Then he cut other poles to form the roof, and resting them upon the +ridge pole and the ground at a convenient angle to make a commodious +space beneath, he covered them with a thick thatch of boughs, which +were easily broken from the overhanging limbs of surrounding trees. +This done he enclosed the ends of his shelter in like manner, and laid +beneath it a floor of boughs. + +Jamie surveyed his work with satisfaction and hope. No snow could +reach the cave-like interior; it was as well protected and as +comfortable as ever a lean-to could be made, and a very little fire +would warm it. Though much smaller, it was quite as good a shelter as +that made by the two men, and possessed the added advantage of closed +ends, which would render it much easier to heat. He had occupied more +than two hours in its construction, and it had called for ingenuity +and much hard work. + +The opening of the lean-to faced the fallen tree trunk, which lay +before it in such a position that it would serve excellently as a +backlog. + +Though he had no axe with which to cut firewood, he soon discovered +upon scouting about that scattered through the forest were many dried +and broken limbs that could be had for the gathering, and in a little +while he had accumulated a sufficient supply to serve for several +hours. + +This done he pushed away the snow from before the fallen tree trunk as +best he could. Using as tinder a handful of the long hairy moss that +hung from the inner limbs of the spruce trees, he lighted it with a +match from the tin box salvaged the previous day at the big rock. +Placing the burning moss upon the cleared spot next the log he applied +small sticks and, as they caught fire, larger ones, until presently a +fire was blazing and crackling cheerily in front of his lean-to with +the fallen tree as a backlog to reflect the heat. + +Utterly weary Jamie stretched himself upon his bed of boughs, and it +seemed to him that he had never been in a cosier place in all his +life. + +"Pop were sayin' right when he says grit will help a man over any +tight place," breathed Jamie contentedly. "If I were givin' up I'd +sure perished before to-morrow mornin', for 'tis growin' wonderful +cold; but I has grit and a stout heart like a man, and I gets a place +to bide and a fine warm fire to heat un." + +With the first moments of relaxation, Jamie became aware that his +wrists were exceedingly painful, and upon examination he discovered +that they had been burned much worse than he had realized in his +attempts to sever the string that bound them. Large blisters had been +raised, and one of the blisters had been broken, doubtless while he +was engaged in building his lean-to shelter. The loose skin had been +rubbed off, and the angry red wound left unprotected. + +"I'll have to fix un," he declared. "The sore places'll be gettin' +rubbed against things, and be a wonderful lot worse and I leaves un +bide as they is." + +In the course of the first aid instruction, Doctor Joe had taught +Jamie, as well as David and Andy, the art of applying bandages, but +now Jamie had no bandages to apply. For a little while he helplessly +contemplated his wrists. But for the fact that they were becoming +exceedingly painful he would have decided to ignore them, for in his +wearied condition it was an effort to do anything. + +"I knows how I'll fix un," he said at length. "I'll cut pieces from +the bottom o' my shirt to bind un up with. They'll keep un from +gettin' rubbed whatever, and when I gets back to camp Doctor Joe'll +fix un up right." + +This he proceeded to do at once with the aid of his jack-knife, and +presently had two serviceable bandages ready to apply. + +"Doctor Joe were sayin' how to keep the air away from burns by usin' +oil or molasses or flour or somethin'," he hesitated. "And he were +sayin' to keep sores from gettin' dirt into un whatever. He says the +sores'll be gettin' inflicted or infested or somethin'--I'm not +rememberin' just what 'twere, but somethin' bad whatever--if they gets +dirt into un. I've been wearin' the shirt three days, and I'm thinkin' +'tis not as clean as Doctor Joe wants the bindin' for sores to be, and +I'll cover the sore place where the blisters were rubbin' off with +fir sap. That'll keep un clean. Pop says 'tis fine for sores." + +Crawling out of his nest Jamie found a young balsam fir tree, and with +his sharp jack-knife cut from the bark several of the little sacs in +which sap is secreted. He had often seen Thomas cut them and daub the +contents upon cuts and bruises, and sometimes even have him and the +other boys take the sap as medicine. Returning to the lean-to he +pierced the ends of the sacs with the point of his knife, and +carefully smeared the contents over his burned wrist where the skin +was broken, taking care that all of the exposed flesh was well covered +with the sap. Jamie had, indeed, fallen upon the best antiseptic +dressing that the surrounding woods supplied. + +This done to his satisfaction, he bound his wrists with the improvised +bandages, applying them carefully, after the manner in which Doctor +Joe had taught him in his lessons in first aid. + +"'Tain't so bad," commented Jamie holding the wrists up and surveying +them with satisfaction. "They feels a wonderful lot easier, whatever. +But I'd never been knowin' how if 'tweren't for Doctor Joe showin' +me." + +Jamie stretched himself upon the bed of boughs, and for a time lay +watching the fire and thickly falling snow and listening to the wind +shrieking and howling through the tree tops. Several times he fancied +he heard the report of distant rifle shots, and at these times he +would start up and listen intently and look cautiously out, half +expecting and fearful that he would see the two lumbermen coming to +recapture him. + +But no one came to disturb him, and he assured himself at length that +he had heard only the cracking of dead branches in the storm, and that +there had been no rifle shots. Then, at last, his eyes drooped and he +slept. + +Hours afterward Jamie awoke. He was shivering with the cold. The fire +had burned out, save the backlog which still glowed. It was night. The +storm had passed and the wind dropped to fitful blasts. The stars were +shining brightly, and the sky was clear save for feathery, fast moving +cloud patches. + +Jamie rebuilt the fire, and lay down to await morning. He was so +hungry that he could scarce lie still, but again his eyes drooped and +again he slept. + +It was near daybreak when Jamie was startled by some unusual noise, +and sat up with a jerk. He listened intently, and satisfied that +someone was approaching sprang up and looked cautiously out, seized +with panic and ready for flight. In the dim starlight he could plainly +see two men coming toward him over the marsh. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX + +SEARCHING THE WHITE WILDERNESS + + +Nearly three hours passed before Doctor Joe and David returned to +camp, disheartened and thoroughly alarmed, to report that they had +found no trace of Jamie. In the thick-falling snow and darkness they +had been forced to relinquish the search until daylight should come to +their assistance. + +Andy and the boys were dazed. It could hardly be comprehended or +credited that Jamie was, indeed, lost. They ate their belated supper +in silence, half expecting that he would, after all, come walking in +upon them. Doctor Joe was grave and preoccupied. Several times, now +he, now David, went out into the night to stand and listen in the +storm, but all they heard was the wail of wind in the tree tops. + +At last, with heavy hearts, they went to bed, upon Doctor Joe's +advice. Andy asked that he might pass the night in the tent with +Doctor Joe and David, and so it was arranged. Neither Andy nor David, +more worried than they had ever been in all their lives before, felt +in the least like sleep. Doctor Joe did not lie down with them. For a +long while the two lads lay awake and watched him crouching before the +stove smoking his pipe, his face grave and thoughtful. He had spoken +no word of encouragement, and the lads knew that he was troubled +beyond expression. + +The wind was rising. In sudden gusts of anger it dashed the snow +against the tent in swirling blasts, and moaned dismally through the +tree tops. The crackling fire in the stove, usually so cheerful, only +served now to increase their sorrow. It offered warmth and comfort and +protection from the night and cold and drifting snow, which Jamie, if +he had not perished, was denied. They could only think of him as +wandering and suffering in the cold and darkness, hungry and +miserable, and they condemned themselves. + +When sleep finally carried the lads into unconsciousness, Doctor Joe's +tall figure was still crouching before the stove, and when they awoke +he was already up and had kindled a fresh fire in the stove, though it +was not yet day, and the tent was lighted by the flickering flame of +a candle. + +"'Twill be daylight by the time we've finished breakfast," said Doctor +Joe as the lads sat up. "It's snowing harder than ever, but I think we +had better go out as soon as we can see and have a look up the brook. +Jamie may not be so far away. We may find him bivouacked quite close +to camp. The snow is getting deep and we shall not find travelling +easy." + +"We'll be lookin' the best we can, whatever," agreed David. "I +couldn't bide in the tent with Jamie gone. I'm wakin' with a wonderful +heavy heart. I'm findin' it hard to believe he's not about camp, and I +were just dreamin' about he bein' lost." + +"That's the way I feels too," said Andy. "I wakes feelin' most like +I'd have to cry. Can't I be goin' with you and Davy? I never can bide +here whilst you're away, Doctor Joe." + +"Yes, we three will go and we'll take some of the other lads with us, +though we'll have to leave somebody in camp to keep the fire going," +agreed Doctor Joe. "We'll need warm tents when we come back, if we +bring Jamie with us, and I hope we'll find him none the worse for his +night out." + +"'Tisn't like 'twere winter," suggested David hopefully. "'Tisn't so +cold, if he were havin' matches to put on a fire, but I'm doubtin' he +has matches." + +"Let us hope he had. Andy, suppose you call the others," suggested +Doctor Joe. "Breakfast is nearly ready." + +Andy was already dressed, and hurrying out he presently returned with +the other lads. Breakfast of venison and bread with hot tea was +hurriedly eaten, while they put forth all sorts of theories as to the +cause of Jamie's disappearance and the possibilities of finding him. + +"I'm thinkin' now," said David with a more hopeful view as daylight +began to filter through the tent, "that Jamie'll be knowin' how to fix +a shelter, and that we'll be findin' he safe and that he'll be just +losin' his way a bit in the storm. If he has matches he'll sure be +puttin' a fire on." + +"I'm doubtin' he has the matches," suggested Andy discouragingly. "He +weren't thinkin' to be away from camp and he weren't takin' any. He +were never on the trails, and he'd sure be forgettin' to take un." + +"Let us hope he has them," Doctor Joe encouraged. "If he has matches +I'm sure he'll be safe enough." + +"'Twere my fault he were gettin' lost," said Seth. "He'd never been +gettin' lost if I'd only kept he in sight the way you said to do." + +"No," objected Doctor Joe, "we'll not say it was anybody's fault." + +Presently they were ready. Seth and Micah were detailed to remain in +camp, and the others set forth, David and Doctor Joe carrying their +rifles. + +In much the same manner as that adopted in the search for the rock the +previous day, Doctor Joe and the boys spread out on the left, or +westward, side of the brook. Now, however, they were much closer +together, because they could see so short a distance through the snow. +Walking was much harder, and their progress correspondingly slower. + +Thus they continued to the farthest point reached before turning back +the previous day, David or Doctor Joe now and again firing shots from +their rifles. Then they turned back, making the return just to the +westward of the trail made by Doctor Joe, who was on the left flank as +they passed up the brook. + +"There's a rock! There's a big rock!" shouted David, as the rock +where Jamie had begun his search for the cache loomed high through the +snow. + +Every one ran to the rock, and as they gathered by its side, Andy +exclaimed: + +"I knows now what Jamie does! He were near enough to see the rock! He +were the last one beyond Seth, and he finds un and he goes huntin' the +cache by himself, and it gets dark and he gets lost when the snow +comes!" + +"That sounds reasonable," admitted Doctor Joe. "I shouldn't be the +least surprised if you were right! It's more than probable that's just +what happened! The thing now is to find the direction Jamie probably +took from here, and the snow has covered all trace of him." + +"With his trail all covered, there'll be no trackin' he. What'll we do +about un?" asked David. "'Tis hard to think out what way Jamie'd be +like to go from here." + +"Let's try goin' the way the paper said the cache was," suggested +Andy. "Maybe Jamie finds un in the tree and climbs the tree and falls +and hurts himself." + +"Andy is right," agreed Doctor Joe. "It is quite likely he used his +copy of the directions to find the cache, and that he went in the +direction specified. We'll do the same." + +It did not take them long to find the hackmatack tree, and in doing so +they stumbled upon the pile of rocks Jamie had built up for a compass +rest. It was covered with snow, but was high enough to be discernible, +and a careful clearing of the snow discovered the fact that the stones +had been recently piled. + +"They may have been piled by the man who made the cache," suggested +Doctor Joe. + +"He'd never been doin' that!" objected David. "'Twould make the tree +too easy to find. I'm thinkin' 'twere Jamie piles un." + +"What would Jamie be pilin' the stones for now?" asked Lige +sceptically. "He'd not be takin' time to go pilin' up stones that +way." + +"He piles un to pilot us when we comes huntin' he," suggested David. + +They took the next direction, and in due time discovered the round +rock, the top of which they likewise cleared of snow that they might +make quite certain it was the rock for which they were searching. +Then, in due time, Jamie's second pile of rocks and finally the birch +tree were located. + +At the birch tree all clues were lost. Vainly they circled the +surrounding country, firing rifles occasionally until they came to the +edge of the marsh. + +"We'd never be findin' he on the mesh, if he gets out there," +suggested David. + +"No," agreed Doctor Joe, "and there's no reason to suppose that he +crossed it to the other side." + +"That's what I thinks," said David. "He's somewheres this side of the +mesh. He'd never cross un. He'd be knowin' there's no mesh between +here and camp." + +"He'd know 'twere not the way to camp," declared Andy. "Jamie'd never +be forgettin' that he crosses no mesh comin' from camp however turned +about he is. He'd never be so turned about as that." + +"We'll search all the country, then, between this marsh and the +brook," suggested Doctor Joe. + +They could not know that Jamie, on the opposite side of the marsh, was +at that moment in a snug shelter, and had been listening to their +rifle shots, and supposing them to be the breaking of dead branches in +the wind. Jamie was too small and too inexperienced to face and +weather the storm on the marsh, unassisted, but Doctor Joe or David or +even Andy might have crossed it. How often it happens that an obstacle +that might be surmounted turns us back at the very door of success! + +Wearily they trailed back through the woods, and up and down until +darkness finally forced them to return to camp unsuccessful and heavy +hearted. The younger lads were almost too weary to drag their feet +behind them. They had eaten nothing since their early breakfast, but +Seth and Micah, anxiously watching and hoping, had a hot supper of +fried venison and bread and tea ready, and as soon as they had +finished their meal, Doctor Joe directed that they go to bed and rest. + +Long before daybreak Doctor Joe was stirring. He lighted the fire, and +when the kettle boiled roused David. Breakfast was ready when Andy +awoke. + +"Is you startin' so early?" he asked, rubbing his eyes. "'Tis +wonderful early. We can't see to travel till light with snow fallin'." + +"Clear and fine outside!" said Doctor Joe, "I'm not satisfied that +Jamie didn't cross the marsh. It's likely to be a long hard tramp and +David and I are going alone this morning because we can travel faster. +If we don't find Jamie by noon we'll come back after you and the other +lads. You'll be fresh and rested then for the afternoon's search. We +can't give it up till we find Jamie." + +"I'd be keepin' up with you," protested Andy. + +"If you go we'll have to take some of the others," objected Doctor +Joe. "The snow is deep and they'll not be able to travel as fast as we +shall. Let us go alone and if we need you we'll come for you." + +And so it was arranged. + +Presently David and Doctor Joe set forth in the frosty starlit +morning. They turned their steps toward the marsh, and were near its +eastern border when David stopped and sniffed the air. + +"I smell smoke!" he exclaimed eagerly. + +"Are you sure?" asked Doctor Joe, also sniffing. "I don't smell it." + +"There's a smell o' smoke!" insisted David. "The wind's from the +west'ard, and the smoke comes from over the mesh. There's a fire +somewheres over there." + +"Your nose is keener than mine," said Doctor Joe hopefully. "Go +ahead, Davy. We'll see if you really smell smoke." + +David led the way out upon the marsh, and they had gone but a short +distance when Doctor Joe was quite sure that he, also, smelled smoke. +David hurried on with Doctor Joe at his heels. + +"There's somebody movin'!" exclaimed David presently. "See un? See un? +'Tis sure Jamie!" + +Then he ran and Doctor Joe ran, and thus they came upon the frightened +Jamie, standing uncertainly before his lean-to. + + + + +CHAPTER XX + +"WOLVES!" YELLED ANDY + + +"Jamie! Jamie! We've been lookin' and lookin' for you!" shouted David, +quite overcome with excitement and relief. + +"I'm so glad 'tis you!" exclaimed Jamie, tears springing to his eyes +as he recognized Doctor Joe and David. "I was scared!" + +"Safe and sound as ever you could be, and all of us thinking you were +lost under a snow-drift!" Doctor Joe in vast good humour slapped Jamie +on the shoulder. "You gritty little rascal! I'll never worry about you +again! Here you are as able to take care of yourself as any man on The +Labrador! Come on now back to camp and we'll hear all about your +adventures when you've eaten. Are you hungry?" + +"Wonderful hungry!" admitted Jamie. + +"Aye, we'll be makin' haste, for Andy and the lads are sore worried," +said David. + +In single file, Doctor Joe and David tramping the trail for Jamie, +they set out for camp. An hour later they crossed the brook, and with +the first glimpse of the tents heard a shout of joy, as Andy and the +other lads discovered them and came running to meet them. + +While Jamie satisfied an accumulated appetite he answered no end of +questions. Every one was vastly excited as he related the story of his +experience. + +"'Tweren't Lem Horn's silver they has after all," Jamie declared. +"There were nothin' in the cache but the bottles they drinks from, and +they were thinkin' a wonderful lot o' them bottles." + +David, in high indignation, was for setting out at once in search of +the two lumbermen, but it was decided that they had doubtless already +returned to the lumber camp. + +"They'd probably say that they were only having sport with you, Jamie, +and meant you no harm," said Doctor Joe. "The people over at their +camp would believe them rather than a little Labrador lad. We may as +well waste no time with them. We'll leave them alone, and be thankful +that Jamie is safe and well except for the burned wrists, and they'll +soon be cured." + +"And we'll be havin' a fine time campin' here," agreed Jamie. "I wants +to keep clear o' them men whatever." + +It was a week later when they broke camp to return to The Jug, and +when the visiting lads said good-bye and set sail to their homes +across the Bay every one declared he had never had so good a time in +all his life. + +With the coming of November the boats were hauled out of the water. +The shores were already crusted with ice and the temperature never +rose to the thawing point even in the midday sun. The mighty Frost +King had ascended his throne and was asserting his relentless power. +Presently all the world would be kneeling at his feet. + +Buckskin moccasins with heavy blanket duffle socks of wool took the +place of sealskin boots. The dry snow would not again soften to wet +them until spring. The adiky, with its fur-trimmed hood, took the +place of the jacket, soon to be augmented by sealskin netseks or +caribou skin kulutuks. + +"The Bay's smokin'," David announced one evening as he came in after +feeding the dogs. "She'll soon freeze now." + +In the days that followed the smoke haze hung over the water until, +one morning, the Bay was fast, and the lapping of the waves was not to +be heard again for many months. + +The nine sledge dogs were in fine fettle. Handsome, big fellows they +were, but fearsome and treacherous enough. They looked like sleek, fat +wolves, and they were, indeed, but domesticated wolves. Friendly they +seemed, but they were ever ready to take advantage of the helpless and +unwary, and their great white fangs were not above tearing their own +master into shreds should he ever be so careless as to stumble and +fall among them. + +The sledge was taken out and overhauled by David. It was fourteen feet +long and two and a half feet wide. Twenty cross-bars formed the top. +Not a nail was used in its construction, for nails would not hold an +hour on rough ice. Everything was bound with sealskin thongs. The +sledge shoes were of iron. These David polished bright with sand, and +then applied a coating of seal oil. Finally the harness and long +sealskin traces were examined, and all was ready. + +It was the end of November when the Bay froze, but there was no +certainty that travelling would be safe upon the sea ice beyond Fort +Pelican before the beginning of January. Therefore Doctor Joe confined +his visits to the Bay folk during December, and on his first tour Andy +served as driver with Jamie as passenger. + +The dogs were harnessed after the Eskimo fashion. That is to say, "fan +shape," and not, as is customary in Alaska and among white men of the +far northwest, in tandem. + +Leading from the komatik (sledge) in front was a single thong of +sealskin with a loop on its end. This was called the "bridle." Each +dog had an individual trace, its end passed through the loop in the +bridle and securely tied. Tinker, the leading dog, was fully +thirty-five feet from the komatik when his trace was stretched to its +full length. He had the longest trace of all. He was trained to +respond to shouted directions, turning to the right when "ouk" was +called, or left for "rudder," the word being repeated several times by +the driver in rapid succession. When it was desired that the dogs +should stop, "ah" was the order, and when they were to go forward +"ooisht," or "oksuit." The other dogs followed Tinker as a pack of +wolves follows the leader. The two dogs directly behind Tinker had +traces of equal length, but somewhat shorter, the pair behind them +still shorter, and so on to the last pair. + +A long whip was used to keep them in subjection. This was of braided +walrus hide an inch thick at its butt and tapering to a thin lash. To +the butt was attached a short wooden handle a foot in length, to which +was fastened a loop which was hooked over the protruding end of the +forward cross-bar and the whip permitted to trail upon the ice when +not in use, and at the same time it was always within the driver's +reach. + +The boys had practised the manipulation of the whip all their lives. +They could flick a square inch of ice at thirty feet with its tip. It +was capable of a gentle tap, or the force of a pistol shot, at its +wielder's discretion. The whip was the terror of the team, for even at +his distance Tinker, the leader, could be brought to account if he +failed to do his duty or obey commands. + +There was little sickness in the Bay, and after patching up a +lumberman at Grampus River, and providing some medicine for old Molly +Budd's rheumatics, Andy and Jamie turned homeward with Doctor Joe. + +Near the mouth of Grampus River there was a section of "bad ice" or +ice that was not always safe to be crossed, the result doubtless of +cross currents in the tide. To avoid this bad ice Andy followed the +shore for a considerable distance before turning northward for the +twelve-mile run directly across the Bay to The Jug. + +It was a dull, cold, dreary day. The snow ground and squeaked under +the sledge runners. Now and again a confusion of shore ridges rendered +the hauling bad and the dogs lagged. + +They were midway between Grampus River and the place where they were +to make the turn northward when Jamie warned: + +"Look out, Andy! There's some loose dogs comin' out of the woods! +They'll be fightin' the team!" + +Six big beasts, larger even than Thomas Angus's big dogs, were +trotting out of the woods and upon the ice a hundred yards in advance. +The team saw them, and with a howl rushed forward to the attack. + +"Wolves!" yelled Andy. "They's wolves!" + +The wolves were free. The dogs were bound by harness, and thus +fettered were no match for the big, wild creatures. Andy's rifle was +lashed upon the komatik. It was out of the question to free it in the +moment before the wolves were upon them, and it was to be a +hand-to-hand fight. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI + +THE ALARM IN THE NIGHT + + +The clash came instantly. The wolf pack was upon the dogs, and dogs +and wolves were at once a howling, snarling, fighting mass. Great +bared fangs gleamed and snapped. It was a fight to the death, a +primordial fight for the survival of the fittest. + +The attack was launched with such indescribable suddenness that Doctor +Joe and Jamie had scarcely time to drop from the komatik before it was +begun. Andy had instinctively seized his whip and began to ply it with +every opening that offered. The first stroke caught a big wolf across +the eyes, and with howls of pain it immediately endeavoured to +extricate itself from the fight. The lash had blinded it. + +With feverish haste Doctor Joe and Jamie undid the axe and rifle from +the komatik, and Doctor Joe with the axe and Jamie with the rifle +charged the fighting beasts. A lucky blow from the axe split a wolf's +head. Jamie quickly found that to shoot at a distance he must take the +risk of killing one of the dogs, but watching for an opening, with the +muzzle of the rifle within an inch of a big wolf's body, he fired and +another wolf was disposed of. + +In the meantime Andy had been plying the whip with such precision that +the foot of one of the wolves had been torn off and another wolf so +badly lacerated that as it broke temporarily away Jamie dropped it +with the rifle, and then shot the blind wolf which was now roaming +aimlessly about. A stroke from Doctor Joe's axe dispatched the fifth +animal, and the remaining wolf, now at the mercy of the dogs, was +literally torn into shreds. + +Hardly five minutes had elapsed from the moment Jamie discovered the +pack trotting out of the woods until the fight was ended. The attack +had been made with such suddenness and such savage fierceness that +Doctor Joe and the boys had scarcely uttered a word. + +Now there was the tangle of dogs to be straightened out, and Andy was +compelled to use his whip to drive them from the dead wolves and quiet +them. Hardly one of them had escaped injury from the wolf fangs, and +Dick, a faithful old fellow, was so badly mangled that Andy cut him +loose from the harness to follow the komatik home at his leisure. + +[Illustration: IT WAS A FIGHT TO THE DEATH] + +"Dick's too much hurt to do any hauling for a month whatever," said +Andy regretfully. + +"He won't die, will he?" asked Jamie sympathetically. + +"He'll get over un," Andy assured. + +"The dogs had grit, now!" Jamie boasted. "There's nary a team in the +Bay could have fought like that!" + +"And I noticed you had some grit too," said Doctor Joe. "A wolf's +fangs snapped within an inch of your leg, you young rascal, when you +held the rifle against that fellow you shot." + +"I weren't thinkin' of that," said Jamie. + +One of the pelts was so badly torn by the dogs as to be valueless. The +remaining carcasses were skinned, and the skins lashed upon the +sledge, and as they turned homeward Andy remarked: + +"There's five good skins and they'll bring four dollars apiece +whatever. 'Tweren't a bad hunt when we weren't huntin'." + +"You and Jamie can take the money you get for them and start a bank +account," suggested Doctor Joe. "I'll send it to St. John's and put it +in a bank for you, and then you'll have that test completed for both +the second and first class. There's no doubt you've earned it." + +"Will you, sir? That's fine now!" exclaimed Andy. "Davy wasn't with +us, and he'll have to set traps to earn his. But he'll get a marten or +two, whatever." + +"There's no doubt about David's catching the martens," said Doctor +Joe. "If there's a marten around he'll catch it." + +It was dark when they reached The Jug. Margaret and David were quite +excited when they heard the story of the adventure, and mighty pleased +with its ending. + +"'Twere a stray pack," said David, "and they were hungry. Pop had a +pack come at he that way once, but they just took one of the dogs and +ran off." + +A wonderful Christmas they had at The Jug that year. Doctor Joe had no +end of surprises stowed away in mysterious boxes that he had brought +from New York and deposited in his old cabin at Break Cove. He and +David brought them over with the dogs on Christmas eve, and on +Christmas morning they were opened. + +The one disappointment of the day was the failure of Thomas to be with +them. He had suggested at the time he departed for the Seal Lake +trails in the autumn that he might come out of the wilderness for +additional provisions at Christmas time, but it was a long and tedious +journey, and they knew it was one he would hardly undertake unless +pressed by need. + +Christmas holiday week was always one of celebration at the Hudson's +Bay Company's Post. At this time trappers and Indians emerged from the +silent wilderness to barter their early catch of furs and to purchase +fresh supplies; and on New Year's eve it was the custom of the men and +women of the Bay to gather at the Post for the final festivities. All +day long sledge load after sledge load of jolly folk appeared to take +part in the great New Year's eve dance, and to enter into the shooting +contests and snowshoe and other races on New Year's day. + +Eli and Mark Horn drove their team in at The Jug just at dinner time +on New Year's eve, and Eli invited Margaret to go on with them and +visit Kate Hodge, the daughter of the Post servant. + +"We'll be short of lasses at the dance, and we needs un all," said +Eli. + +"I'd like wonderful well to go," said Margaret wistfully. + +"Go on," urged Doctor Joe. "You'll have a good time and the boys and I +will make out famously here. You get away seldom enough and see too +few people. 'Twill do you good, lass." + +"Aye, come on now!" Eli urged. "We'll take you over snug and warm in +our komatik box. Kate'll be wonderful glad to see you, and we'll bring +you back the day after New Year." + +"I'll go," Margaret consented, her eyes dancing with pleasure. + +"And there'll be no prettier lass there," said Doctor Joe gallantly, +which brought a blush to Margaret's cheek and caused Eli to chuckle. + +Margaret hastened her toilet and was ready in a jiffy. She was all +a-flutter with excitement when Eli tucked her in a box rigged on the +rear of the komatik, and wrapped her snugly with caribou skins. + +"You must have had it in mind to capture Margaret when you left home, +Eli," Doctor Joe suggested with a twinkle in his eye. "Men don't take +travelling boxes when they go alone." + +Eli grinned sheepishly as he broke the komatik loose, and the dogs +dashed away. + +It was a dull cold day with a leaden sky, and snow was shifting +restlessly over the ice. The wind was in the south-east, and as they +entered the cabin David remarked: + +"There'll be snow before to-morrow mornin'." + +When they had eaten supper that evening and cleared the table David +stepped out for a look at the weather, and returning reported: + +"'Twill be a nasty night. The snow's started and the wind's risin'. +'Tis wonderful frosty, too, for a wind." + +"Let's see how cold it is," said Doctor Joe, stepping out to consult +his spirit thermometer. "Thirty-eight below zero. Frosty enough with a +gale, and a gale's rising," he reported. "I'm glad we're all snug +inside." + +"Tell us a story," Jamie suggested, as they settled themselves +comfortably by the fire. + +"There's dogs comin'!" Andy broke in. + +David ran to the door, and a moment later ushered Eli Horn into the +cabin. + +"What's the matter, Eli? Has anything happened?" asked Doctor Joe, +immediately concerned for Margaret's safety. + +"Margaret's safe," said Eli with suppressed excitement. "There's +murder at the Post!" + +Questions brought forth the fact that Eli and Margaret had reached the +Post at about half-past three and found the people in confusion. Three +lumbermen from Grampus River had come there. There had been a dispute +among them and one of them was stabbed. The other two had immediately +departed, presumably to return to the lumber camps. Eli did not know +how seriously the man was injured. He had not seen him. It had +occurred shortly before his arrival, and at Margaret's suggestion he +had turned directly about and returned to The Jug to fetch Doctor Joe +to attend the injured man. + +"My dogs is fagged," said Eli, "and 'twere slow comin' back." + +"David will take me over with his dogs. They're fresh, and will travel +faster," said Doctor Joe. + +In ten minutes David was ready with the dogs harnessed, and the two +teams drove away into the darkness and storm. + +Andy and Jamie were greatly excited. Tragedies enough happened up and +down the coast when men were drowned or lost in the ice or met with +fatal injuries. But never before in the Bay had one man been cut down +by the hand of another. It was a ghastly thought, and the awfulness of +it was perhaps accentuated by the snow dashing against the window +panes and the wind shrieking around the gables of the cabin. + +It was near ten o'clock, long past their usual bedtime, and they were +still talking, for there was matter enough in their brains to banish +sleep, when the door suddenly opened and accompanied by the howl of +the wind a snow-covered figure lurched in upon them. + + + + +CHAPTER XXII + +THE IMMUTABLE LAW OF GOD + + +"Peter! 'Tis Peter Sparks!" exclaimed Andy with vast relief to find it +was not a murderous lumberman. + +"I'm comin' after Doctor Joe!" gasped Peter, as half frozen he drew +off his snow-caked netsek. + +"Me rub your nose, Peter. She's froze, and your cheeks too," broke in +Andy, vigorously rubbing Peter's whitened nose and cheeks. + +Peter was silent perforce while Andy manipulated the frosted parts +until circulation and colour were restored. + +"Come to the fire now and warm up," directed Andy. "What you wantin' +of Doctor Joe?" + +"There's been murder done, or clost to un!" Peter, at last free to +articulate, continued. "Murder at the lumber camp!" + +"Murder!" repeated Jamie, awesomely. + +"Aye, nigh to murder whatever!" Peter reiterated. + +"Doctor Joe's gone to the Post," said Andy. "Eli Horn came for he. Two +of the lumber folk most killed another of un over there. Davy took +Doctor Joe over." + +"And two of un most killed the boss at the camp," explained Peter. +"They comes there from the Post about six o'clock and were packin' a +flatsled with things. The boss asks un where they's goin'. They +answers some way that makes he mad, and he hits one of un. Then they +jumps at he and pounds and kicks he till he's like dead, and he don't +come to again. The two men has rifles and they keeps all the lumbermen +back, and off they goes with the flatsled, and they gets away." + +"Will the boss die then?" asked Jamie in horror. + +"With Doctor Joe gone he'll sure be dyin'," declared Peter +desperately. "His arm is broke and he's broke somewhere inside, and +his face is awful to look at, all pounded and kicked and bleedin'. Me +and Lige goes up to sit a bit and hear un tell their stories, and we +gets there just after the two men gets away. With Doctor Joe's +teachin' we fixes the boss up the best we can, and whilst Lige stays +to help look after he, I comes for Doctor Joe. Pop's to the Post with +the dogs and I has to walk, and facin' the wind 'twere hard. And now +Doctor Joe's gone, the poor man'll sure die!" + +"You has wonderful grit to come!" said Jamie admiringly. "'Tis +wonderful frosty and nasty outside." + +"'Twere to save the boss's life! 'Tis the scout law," Peter asserted +stoutly. "I'll be goin' to the Post now for Doctor Joe." + +"You're nigh done up, Peter. You'll be stayin' here with Jamie. _I'm_ +goin' to the Post for Doctor Joe," declared Andy. + +"I am most done up," Peter confessed. "But the wind'll be in your back +goin' to the Post. She's just startin' though, and she'll be a +wonderful sight worse than she is now before you gets there. 'Twill be +terrible nasty." + +"I'm goin' too," said Jamie. + +"You're not goin'," said Andy. "I'm bigger and I can travel faster if +you're not comin'. 'Twould be wrong to leave Peter here alone." + +"I'm _goin_!" repeated Jamie stubbornly. + +"Won't you be stayin' with me?" pleaded Peter. "I--I'm afeared to stay +here alone with those two men like to come in on me." + +"I'll stay," Jamie consented. + +A blast of wind shook the cabin. + +"I'm fearin' you can't do it, Andy! 'Twill soon be too much for flesh +and blood out on the Bay!" said Peter. + +"'Tis in my scout oath to do my best," said Andy, adjusting the hood +of his sealskin netsek. "I'm goin', now." + +Andy closed the door behind him. It was pitchy dark. The snow was +driving in blinding clouds, and he stood for a moment to catch his +breath. Then he felt his way down across The Jug and out upon the Bay +ice. Here the full force of the north-east blizzard met him. He +staggered and choked with the first blast, then in a temporary lull +forged ahead. + +The storm, as Peter predicted, had not reached its height. Each +smothering blast of fury was stronger and fiercer than the one before +it. Andy took advantage of the lulls, and save when the heavier blasts +came and nearly swept him from his feet, maintained a steady trot. In +the swirl of snow-clouds he could see nothing a foot from his nose. +Once he found himself floundering through pressure ridges formed by +the tide near shore. This he calculated was the tip of a long point +jutting out into the Bay, half-way between The Jug and the Post. Ten +miles of the distance was behind him. He drew farther out upon the +ice. + +There were times when Andy had to throw himself prone upon the ice +with his face down and sheltered by his arms to escape suffocation. + +"'Tis gettin' wonderful nasty," he said, "but I'll have plenty o' +grit, like Jamie says, and with the Lord's help I'll pull through." + +Then he found himself repeating over and over again the prayer: + +"Dear Lord, help me through! 'Tis to save a life, and the scout oath! +Dear Lord, help me through!" + +The gale had now risen to such terrific proportions that often he was +compelled to crawl upon his hands and knees. With each momentary lull +he would rise and stagger forward. His legs worked at these times +without conscious effort. It was strange his legs should be like that. +They had never felt like that before. + +And so, crawling, staggering upright, crawling again, and lying for +minutes at a time with his face in his arms that he might breathe when +he was well-nigh overwhelmed and suffocated, Andy kept on. + +He could recall little of the last hours on the ice. It was a +confused sensation of rising and falling, staggering and crawling +until he collided with an obstruction, and recognizing it as the jetty +at the Post, his brain roused to a degree of consciousness, and his +heart leaped with joy. + +With much fumbling he succeeded in donning his snow-shoes, which were +slung upon his back, for the twenty yards that lay between the ice and +the buildings was covered with deep drift. Once he stepped upon a dog +that lay huddled and sleeping under the drift. It sprang out with a +snarl and snapped at his legs. A hundred of the savage creatures were +lying about in the snow. + +Day comes late in Labrador. It was still pitchy dark outside when +Andy, at eight o'clock in the morning, lurched into the kitchen at the +Post house, and fell sprawling upon the floor. He had been battling +the storm for ten hours. + +David and Margaret, Eli and Mark and several others were there. Doctor +Joe was at breakfast in the Factor's quarters, and they called him. +Andy's face was covered with a mass of caked snow and ice. His nose +and cheeks and chin were white and badly frosted, and upon removing +his mittens and moccasins, his hands and feet were found to be in the +same condition. + +Mr. MacCreary, the factor, placed a bed at Doctor Joe's disposal, and +when the frost had been removed and circulation had been restored, +Andy was tucked into warm blankets. + +"That chap had grit," remarked Mr. MacCreary as he and Doctor Joe left +David and Margaret by the bedside and Andy asleep. "The Angus boys are +all gritty fellows. They're the sort the Company needs." + +"Yes," Doctor Joe agreed heartily, "and they never shirk their duty. +Andy is a Boy Scout, and he did what he considered his duty. Now I +must go to the lumber camp and fix up that boss, if he isn't beyond +fixing up." + +With the coming of dawn the wind subsided and the snow ceased to fall. +Eli harnessed his dogs when it was light, and with the lumberman who +had been stabbed, but whose injuries were not after all serious, he +and Doctor Joe set out for Grampus River. + +At the lumber camp they found Lige Sparks, Obadiah Button and Micah +Dunk installed as volunteer nurses. The man had a broken arm, three +broken ribs, and had suffered internal injuries that demanded prompt +attention. + +"If Andy hadn't come for me, and if I'd been delayed much longer in +reaching the camp," said Doctor Joe later, "the man would have died. +Thanks to the boys, his life will be saved." + +That day and that night Doctor Joe remained with his patient. On the +following morning it became necessary for him to return to The Jug for +additional dressings and medicines. Eli drove him over. + +The sky was clear, and the morning was bitterly cold, with rime +hanging like a filmy veil in the air and glistening like flakes of +silver in the sunshine. Doctor Joe and Eli ran in turns by the side of +the komatik, while the dogs trotted briskly. + +"What's that, now?" asked Eli, pointing to a black object far out on +the white field of ice, as they approached The Jug. + +"I can't make out," said Doctor Joe after a long scrutiny. + +"We'll see," and Eli turned the dogs toward the object. + +"It looks like a flatsled," said Doctor Joe as they approached. + +"'Tis a flatsled," said Eli. "'Tis the men ran away from the lumber +camp." + +A gruesome sight met them as Eli brought the dogs to a stop. Huddled +close and lying by the side of the toboggan, partially covered by +drift, were the stiff-frozen bodies of two men. + +"They were lost in the storm," said Eli presently. "They must have +been wanderin' about till the frost got the best of un." + +Doctor Joe and Eli lifted the remains to the komatik, attaching the +toboggan to trail behind, and with their ghastly burden they turned in +at The Jug. + +Jamie and Peter, vastly concerned for Andy's safety, met them, and +were as vastly relieved when they learned that Andy would be not much +the worse for his experience, and that the lumber boss would live. + +The two bodies were carried into the wood-shed and laid side by side +upon the floor, to remain there until evening, when Doctor Joe and Eli +would return them to Grampus River for burial. It was then that Jamie +looked for the first time upon the upturned dead faces, and as he did +so he exclaimed, with horror: + +"They's the men! They's the men that had the cache and tied me up!" + +"They've been hard men in life and probably done much evil in their +day, but they're past it now and we'll treat their remains gently and +humanly," said Doctor Joe as he covered their faces with a cloth. + +Then they undid the flatsled and carried the contents into the cabin, +where the things would be safe from the dogs. There were provisions, a +bag of clothing, two thirty-eight calibre rifles, a quantity of +ammunition and a small bag, which Jamie declared was the bag which had +been cached in the tree. + +"I'm goin' to look at un," said Eli. "'Twill do no harm." + +Eli undid the bag and drew forth a package which proved to contain a +large roll of bills, amounting to several hundred dollars. Then +followed two marten pelts, a red fox pelt, and the pelt of a beautiful +silver fox. Eli shook the silver fox pelt, and holding it up examined +it critically. + +"'Tis Pop's silver!" he exclaimed. + +"Are you sure?" asked Doctor Joe. + +"'Tis Pop's silver! I'd know un anywheres!" declared Eli positively. + +"Then," said Doctor Joe, "it was not Indian Jake but these men who +shot your father and stole the fur." + +"And stole our boat!" Jamie broke in excitedly. + +"'Twere they stole the silver," Eli admitted, "and the Lord punished +un. I'm wonderful glad my bullet went abroad and didn't hurt Indian +Jake." + +"We all thought Indian Jake guilty," said Doctor Joe. "How easy it is +to pass judgment on people, and how often we misjudge them!" + +"And knowin' he didn't take un, and after I'd tried to kill he," went +on Eli contritely, "he were wonderful good to me, havin' me bide to +supper and givin' me deer's meat." + +"I'm rememberin'," broke in Jamie, "that the men were talkin' o' +somethin' they were takin' from the ship, and fearin' the lumber boss +would find out about un. 'Twere the money they means." + +There was a howl of arriving dogs outside, and Jamie rushed to the +door to meet David and Andy and Margaret, and, to his unbounded +delight, Thomas and Indian Jake. + +While Thomas was being overwhelmed by Jamie, Indian Jake with a broad +grin extended his hand to Eli. + +"How do, Eli?" + +"How do, Jake?" Eli took Indian Jake's hand. "I got the silver back, +Jake, and you never took un. I'm wonderful sorry the way I done." + +"I've got your ca'tridges here, Eli," grinned Indian Jake. "You can +have un back now." + +"But didn't Andy have grit, now!" Jamie's voice rose above the babel. +"Didn't he have grit to go out in the night when 'twas _that_ nasty! +And a stout heart, too, like a man! Andy's a wonderful fine scout, +whatever!" + +And so ended the mystery of the shooting and the robbery of Lem Horn, +and so the guilty were discovered and punished, as in some manner and +at some time all wrong-doers are discovered and punished. It is the +immutable law of God. + + + + + + + + + +End of Project Gutenberg's Troop One of the Labrador, by Dillon Wallace + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TROOP ONE OF THE LABRADOR *** + +***** This file should be named 16048.txt or 16048.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/6/0/4/16048/ + +Produced by Wallace McLean, Diane Monico, and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net. + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/16048.zip b/16048.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..717e807 --- /dev/null +++ b/16048.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..69fa900 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #16048 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/16048) |
